JP7608818B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some pachinko machines are equipped with rotating bodies to improve their decorativeness.

JP 2019-180573 A

However, conventional rotating bodies do not provide sufficient decorativeness, and further improvement is needed.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention and interest of players in the game and improve their motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
The present invention is characterized by having the following.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the state visible through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means can be diversified, improving the decorativeness.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a memory area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. A block diagram showing an example of a general map reservation storage area in the memory area of the main control device shown in Figure 8. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. A block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area in a memory area of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of display on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example on a setting value display unit of the performance information display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special chart hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 18. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a through gate process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 . 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for regular game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting regular map data executed in the regular map game control process of Figure 22. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular map fluctuation start processing executed in the regular map game control processing of Figure 22. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of a special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart change start processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 26. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game setting value change processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 21 . FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 21 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 21 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 21 . 22 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 21 . 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 . 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 43 . 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 43 . 11 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 . 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 . A figure showing an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (performance pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 47. A figure showing an example of a variation type table used to set the variation type (performance pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 47. Figure 51 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the color of the decorative pattern, and Figure 51 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the first stopping pattern selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 47. Figure 52 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first reserved image display section, a changing image display section, and a previously changed image display section that are set in the pattern display section in a normal game state, and Figure 52 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second reserved image display section and a changing image display section that are set in the pattern display section in a special game state and a time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of a change in the pending image in the first pending image display section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 42. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a conventional performance execution sequence for a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution order of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an allocation table used when allocating jackpot types by the main control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed by a voice lamp control device of an amusement machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a command determination process. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a command determination process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in a symbol display section of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the hold continuous presentation processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 59. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a continuous hold effect. A figure showing an example of a table used in the hold continuous presentation processing of Figure 62. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a stopping pattern combination of decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display section. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart special effect processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 59. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (performance pattern) executed in the command determination process of Figure 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern). A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (performance pattern) executed in the command determination process of Figure 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a stop pattern combination executed in the command determination process of Figure 60. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a stop symbol combination. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution order of a gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a difference between a command determination process according to a third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a difference between a command determination process according to a third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. 11 is a flowchart for explaining the differences between the second special chart special effect setting process of the third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. A flowchart for explaining the differences between the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of the third embodiment of the present invention and the second embodiment. A flowchart for explaining the differences from the second embodiment in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. A flowchart for explaining the differences from the second embodiment in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A cross-sectional view showing a main part of the feather device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. FIG. A diagram showing an example of a table etc. used in the main control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular map fluctuation start processing executed in the regular map game control processing in the main processing of Figure 88. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart change start processing executed in the special chart game control processing in the main processing of Figure 88. A time chart showing an example of game progress in a small win game executed on the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for small win game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 88. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a small win game control process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a small win game control process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a small win game control process. A diagram showing an example of a game flow (transition of game state) in the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 88. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a game state transition process. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Fig. 82. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (performance pattern) executed in the command determination process of Figure 104. A figure showing an example of a presentation pattern (a second time-shortened play state continuation presentation pattern and a third time-shortened play state transition presentation pattern) for a special chart game executed in the second time-shortened play state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section during special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section during special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section during special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section during special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a stop symbol combination executed in the command determination process of Figure 104. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the number of time-saving games and the stop display combination of decorative symbols. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for a time-saving counter process executed in the command determination process of Figure 104. A figure showing an example of a table used in a main control device of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting a variation type (presentation pattern) in a command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 82. A figure showing an example of a presentation pattern (first presentation pattern and second presentation pattern) in the second time-saving game state. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a stop symbol combination executed in the command determination process. A figure showing an example of setting the number of time-saving games when transitioning to the third time-saving game state in a gaming machine related to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing in main processing executed by a main control device of a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of a table used in a main control device of a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section during special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A figure showing an example of a table used in a voice lamp control device of an amusement machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of the screen of the pattern display section during special pattern play executed in the second time-saving play state. A diagram showing a game flow of a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. A timing chart showing an example of the end timing of a first special game started in a time-saving game state. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of a special chart reservation storage area provided in the RAM of the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. A flowchart showing the steps of the first special chart hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 18. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a through gate process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for regular game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting regular map data executed in the regular map game control process of Figure 132. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the regular map fluctuation start processing executed in the regular map game control processing of Figure 132. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the normal winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special chart game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first special chart game start processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first special chart game end processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of a second special chart data setting process executed in the special chart game control process of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart game start processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second special chart game end processing executed in the special chart game control processing of Figure 136. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for game state transition processing executed in the main processing of Figure 21. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 . 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time-saving game count counter processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 149. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 149. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on a pattern display unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on a pattern display unit. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of a second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of Figure 149. Figure 155 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first time attack performance end processing executed in the command judgment processing of Figure 149, and Figure 155 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the steps of the second time attack performance end processing executed in step S4432 in the command judgment processing of Figure 149. A figure showing an example of a table used in a main control device of a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a front view showing an example of operation of the first rotating accessory member provided on the game board. FIG. 2 is a side view showing the periphery of the first rotating accessory member with a portion cut away. A figure showing an example of how the first rotating part component performs a performance on its own. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an example of operation of the left second rotating role member and the right second rotating role member provided on the game board. A front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. A side view showing the vicinity of the first rotating part member and the left second rotating part member (right second rotating part member) with some parts cut away. A front view showing an example of operation of the first rotating part member, the left second rotating part member, and the right second rotating part member. A table showing the types of notification modes by the first rotating part member, the left second rotating part member, and the right second rotating part member. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the operation of a rotating accessory component in a special game. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for setting the operation of a rotating role component in the command determination process of Figure 171. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game presentation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 42. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for special game presentation control processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 42.

The following describes the first to tenth embodiments of the present invention with reference to the attached drawings to facilitate understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, each of the following embodiments is an example of the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figs. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and Figs. 4 to 6 are front views of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in Figs. 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in a gaming hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to an island facility (not shown) in the gaming hall. Note that in this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as reel-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrange ball gaming machines, and jan-ball gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. The back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection/determination section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination section 27.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described below depending on whether or not the button is pressed. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (operated or not operated). This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button performance that is executed in response to the player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a special game performance executed in a special game that clearly shows the player the lottery results in a jackpot lottery.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the button is operable by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. The operation button 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In this case, by operating the jog dial, a desired item can be provisionally selected from options (items) on various setting screens when making various game settings, such as the performance stage (background performance), characters, and music during jackpot play, as well as the frequency of selection of a specific performance and the expectation of a jackpot, and the provisionally selected option (item) can be selected by operating the operation button 20.

Furthermore, the operation means such as the operation button 20 that accepts operation by the player may be provided in one or more. In addition to the operation button 20, the operation means may be, for example, a rotatable handle, a rotatable lever, a push-in member that can move back and forth or up and down, a touch panel provided on the pattern display unit 341 or the sub-movable display unit 38 described below, or a combination of two or more of these operation means (for example, an operation means that can rotate and move back and forth), and the operation button 20 may be provided on these operation means (for example, an operation means in which the operation button 20 or a touch panel is provided on a handle or lever).

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that is used when the player presses a button in a standby state where no game is being played, for example, and the player sets various game settings. Examples of various game settings include settings for characters that appear in game effects, settings for the frequency of execution of various effects such as button effects, and settings for the likelihood of a jackpot for various effects. This selection determination unit 21 includes multiple selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various setting screens when performing various game settings, and include an up selection button 211, a down selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisionally selected content is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) by operating the decision button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is equipped with an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d that switch the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 as shown in FIG. 7. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a to 211d.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started, it is determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, it may also be determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also has a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described below. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the decision operation switch 21Ba based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, the symbol display unit 341 and the sub-movable display unit 38 described below may be equipped with a touch panel that accepts operation by the player, and the touch panel may be provided as the operation means. In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214), a rotating member such as a jog dial may be provided. The selection switches 211a-211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba (see FIG. 7) are contact switches, but may be, for example, piezoelectric elements, as long as they can be used to detect whether or not an operation has been performed by the player.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by the player to launch game balls. In the gaming machine 10, basic play is performed by launching game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32 (described below) with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 sec.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, and is used to store game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 described below, and to lead the stored game balls in a single row to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is disposed further below the upper tray 23, and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless, transparent or colored, transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs sound. Note that the installation position of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also has built-in light sources such as indicator lamps and LEDs, and performs lamp effects by lighting colors, and flashing modes such as on and off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that in FIG. 2, the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The control unit 33 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the game machine 10, commands (control signals) for instructing the control content are sent in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a sub-movable display section 38, and a movable gadget member 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launching rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may also be a mechanism that launches game balls using other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed therein that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-to-rear direction. The back side of the game board 31 is provided with ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 7) that can individually detect the entry of game balls, corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. The game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the outlet 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and are detected by the outlet ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 7) described below. The through gates 317L and 317R are vertically penetrating gates through which game balls can pass, and have ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 317L and 317R. In the game board 31, a game ball shot into the left area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317L, and a game ball shot into the right area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317R. Then, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7), a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open the second winning hole 315. Then, if the lottery result of the normal winning lottery is a winning lottery, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315 by opening the electric device 315b described later. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to cause a gaming ball to enter the second winning port 315 not only in the guaranteed bonus gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), but also in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) by shooting the gaming ball into the left area of the gaming board 31.

The high probability mode has a high probability of winning as a result of the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 9(B)), and is a mode that is easily transitioned to a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is played, whereas the low probability mode has a low probability of winning as a result of the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 9(A)), and is a mode that is difficult to transition to a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is played. Also, the high frequency support mode has a high probability of winning as a result of the normal lottery (see FIG. 12(B)), and is a mode that is easy to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 because the electric device 315b described below operates frequently, whereas the low frequency support mode has a low probability of winning as a result of the normal lottery (see FIG. 12(A)), and is a mode that is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 because the electric device 315b operates frequently.

The entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command to the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entrance of a game ball by the entrance ball sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. In addition, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection results of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here corresponds to the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls using other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric device (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. On the game board 31, the electric device 315b opens to allow game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric device 315b closes to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not the game balls can enter the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the opening/closing door 319 allows the game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening/closing door 319 restricts the game balls from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable winning opening 316 in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot game, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position that closes the variable winning opening 316. As a result, the game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 in a round game in a jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is held by the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 then controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is also transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a detect the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the general winning opening 313, the number of prize balls is 3 when the ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the variable winning opening 316. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 transitions to a jackpot game state, and the round game described below in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), so that a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

When a game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 5R jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R variable jackpot game state) and a 16R variable jackpot game state. The 5R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which the variable winning slot 316 is opened and a round game is played five times until a predetermined time has elapsed or until an upper limit number (e.g., nine balls) or more of game balls enter the variable winning slot 316. The 16R jackpot game state is a game state that includes an open/close execution mode in which 16 rounds of play are played, and is a game state in which a larger number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, making it a more advantageous game state for the player than the 5R jackpot game state.

4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. This pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the pattern display section 341 performs various image effects such as a display effect of changing decorative patterns according to the lottery results in a big win lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, and a special game effect performed in conjunction with the display effect. In addition, the pattern display section 341 may have a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display, and may further have a touch panel that accepts touch operations by the player.

For example, the decorative pattern changing display performance in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in sequence vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Note that secondary patterns such as other letters or designs may be displayed between the decorative patterns. Also, in this embodiment, there are no secondary patterns, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, in a special pattern game, the display of changes in the decorative patterns is executed so that the changes in all decorative patterns stop after a preset display time has elapsed from the start of the display of pattern changes in the pattern display unit 341. More specifically, in the display of changes in the decorative patterns, first, all the decorative patterns change along a preset direction of change (e.g., horizontally, vertically, etc.), and the changes in the multiple decorative patterns stop in sequence. Then, when the changes in the decorative patterns on all lines have stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of changes in the decorative patterns ends.

When the display of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is finished, the decorative patterns are displayed in one or more valid lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative patterns indicates or suggests the result of the lottery in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot", a "16R jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot", the decorative patterns of the same type are displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, and it is indicated that there is a jackpot. The type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of the decorative patterns on the valid lines, but this is not necessarily the case. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a pattern combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a pattern combination indicating a 16R jackpot, is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines, or a combination of the same decorative patterns other than "777" is displayed in a lined up on the valid lines. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", a state in which a combination of decorative symbols, such as "333", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line, or a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "777" or "333", other than the combination of symbols indicating a 16R special jackpot or a 5R special jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "222" or "444", which has been set as a combination of symbols indicating a normal jackpot, is lined up on the valid line. In addition, if the lottery result is a "miss", a state in which a combination of different decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") is lined up on the valid line is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the display of the changing decorative symbols in the special symbol game, a special symbol game presentation is displayed that suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. If the lottery result is a "16R special jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R special jackpot is displayed lined up on an active line, a suggestion presentation is executed as a special symbol game presentation that suggests a 5R special jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game presentation, a promotion presentation is executed that clearly shows that the lottery result for the special symbol game is a 16R special jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a special jackpot is displayed lined up on an active line, a suggestion presentation is executed as a special symbol game presentation that suggests a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, during the jackpot game presentation, an advancement presentation is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result for that special game is a 5R special jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the pattern display section 341 displays jackpot game effects including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

The sub-movable display unit 38 is equipped with a display device 381 such as a liquid crystal display, and is provided in the left area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. This sub-movable display unit 38 is connected to the MPU 61 via the input/output I/F 62 of the display control device 6 (see FIG. 7), and image presentation is executed on the display device 381 together with the pattern display unit 341 during special pattern play and jackpot play under the control of the MPU 61 based on the display variation pattern command sent from the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5.

The display device 381 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display with an organic EL display. In addition to the display device 381, the sub movable display unit 38 may further include a touch panel that accepts touch operations by the player.

The sub-movable display unit 38 can also be moved in the left-right direction D3 between a standby position (position shown in FIG. 4) shown by a phantom line in FIG. 5 and an operating position shown by a solid line in FIG. 5.

7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 38a that supplies driving force to the sub-movable display unit 38, and a return detection unit 38b that detects that the sub-movable display unit 38 has returned to the standby position. The motor 38a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 38b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The sub-movable display unit 38 and the motor 38a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the sub-movable display unit 38 is moved to the right (operation direction) from the standby position (see FIG. 4) toward the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5), or to the left (return direction) from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) toward the standby position (see FIG. 4) according to the rotation direction of the motor 38a. For example, the sub movable display unit 38 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) by rotating the motor 38a in the forward direction, and conversely, is moved from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) to the standby position (see FIG. 4) by rotating the motor 38a in the reverse direction.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 38c to which the motor 38a and the return detection unit 38b are connected. The motor driver 38c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c controls the motor 38a in accordance with control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver 38c can also obtain the detection result by the return detection unit 38b and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver 38c may be omitted, and the motor 38a and the return detection unit 38b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

Such a sub-movable display unit 38 is operated to execute an effect related to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the special chart game or the jackpot game. For example, in the special chart game, the sub-movable display unit 38 is operated as a jackpot confirmation effect that indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and is also operated as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation that the lottery result is a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game, the sub-movable display unit 38 is operated as a promotion effect (round number promotion effect executed in the jackpot game or promotion effect from a normal jackpot to a probability jackpot) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more favorable to the player than the lottery result suggested in the special chart game effect, and can also be operated as a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery includes a jackpot during the reservation of the right to play the special chart game executed after the end of the jackpot game.

The standby position or operating position of the sub-movable display unit 38 is not limited to the left area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and may be other positions. The number of sub-movable display units 38 is not limited to one, and may be multiple, and the multiple sub-movable display units 38 may cooperate, be linked, be driven, or follow. The sub-movable display unit 38 may be movable in other directions in addition to or instead of the left-right direction D3. For example, the sub-movable display unit 38 may be movable in the up-down direction D2, diagonal directions, etc., and may further be rotatable in a clockwise direction, counterclockwise direction, etc. The sub-movable display unit 38 may be omitted, and one or more non-movable display devices may be provided instead of the sub-movable display unit 38.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main display unit 36 includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first special symbol reserved number display unit 364, and a second special symbol reserved number display unit 365, which are located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs as normal symbols (normal symbols), and displays the results of the normal symbol lottery, which is triggered by winning through the through gates 317L and 317R and determines whether the electric device 315b will be opened, by a combination of turning on and off the LED pairs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pairs (displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner) when a winning through the through gates 317L and 317R occurs, and displays the results of the normal symbol lottery by turning on or off each LED (displaying the normal symbols in a stationary manner) after the variable display time has elapsed. Note that displaying the results of the normal symbol lottery by displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner and stationary manner is referred to as "normal symbol play" or "normal symbol play".

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a seven-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the result of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played when a ball wins at the first winning port 314, by combining the lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the first special symbol in a variable manner) when a ball wins at the first winning port 314, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment (displaying the first special symbol in a stationary manner) after the variable display time has elapsed. Note that displaying the result of the jackpot lottery by the variable and stationary display of the first special symbol (first special symbol) is referred to as the "first special symbol game" or "first special symbol game".

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a seven-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the result of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played when a ball wins at the second winning port 315, by combining the lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (display the second special symbol in a variable manner) when a ball wins at the second winning port 315, and displays the result of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment (displaying the second special symbol in a stationary manner) after the variable display time has elapsed. Note that displaying the result of the jackpot lottery by the variable and stationary display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is referred to as the "second special symbol game" or "second special symbol game".

In the following, the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the second special symbol (second special symbol) may be referred to as "special symbols" or "special symbols", and the first special symbol game (first special symbol game) and the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) may be referred to as "special symbol game" or "special symbol game".

The first special chart reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the first special chart reserved number N, which is the reserved number of rights to play the first special chart game that are generated by winning at the first winning port 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second special chart reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the second special chart reserved number M, which is the reserved number of rights to play the second special chart game generated by winning at the second winning port 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

The movable role member 39 can move vertically along the surface of the pattern display unit 341 between a predetermined standby position (position shown by virtual lines in FIG. 6) shown in FIG. 4 located above the pattern display unit 341 and an operating position (position shown by solid lines in FIG. 6) set below the standby position. The operating position (see solid lines in FIG. 6) is closer to the center of the pattern display unit 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). In addition, when the movable role member 39 is in the operating position (see solid lines in FIG. 6), the coverage of the surface of the pattern display unit 341 is higher than when it is in the standby position (see FIG. 4). In addition, the movable role member 39 has multiple lamps 391 arranged in a circular ring shape on the periphery. In this embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged on the movable role member 39, and each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually. In addition, each of the lamps 391 is, for example, an LED lamp, and can be lit in multiple colors including white, yellow, green, red, or a mixture of these colors. In this way, each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off, and can be lit in multiple colors, so that, for example, when the movable role member 39 is operated, the lighting pattern, lighting color, and lighting number of each lamp 391 can suggest the expectation (expectation of a jackpot) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the special game can be a jackpot, or the lottery result can be clearly indicated as a jackpot. For example, the lighting colors can be set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and lighting color, it is also possible to execute a confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot by executing a rainbow lamp effect. In this embodiment, the movable role member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A in the standby position (see FIG. 4), and it is also possible to use the lamps 391 exposed from the opening 31A to perform an effect that suggests the likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot. For example, in this embodiment, the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), so it is possible to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot depending on which of these lamps 391 is lit. It is also possible to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot using an image displayed on the pattern display section 341 in addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side.

The movable gadget member 39 may be entirely hidden in the standby position, without being exposed from the opening 31A. The gaming machine 10 may also have a plurality of movable gadget members 39. The movable gadget member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separate movable members, may be deformable into two or more forms, or may have a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable gadget member 39 is not limited to a member that covers a portion of the display screen of the pattern display unit 341, but may cover the entire display screen. The center of the movable gadget member 39 may be configured as an illumination unit that can be turned on and off. In this case, it is possible to perform a performance that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot by turning on or off the illumination unit, or that clearly indicates a jackpot.

Such a movable accessory member 39 is operated to execute an effect related to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the special chart game or the jackpot game. For example, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a jackpot confirmation effect in the special chart game that indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and is also operated as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation that the lottery result is a jackpot. In addition, the movable accessory member 39 can be operated as a promotion effect (round number promotion effect executed in the jackpot game or promotion effect from a normal jackpot to a probability jackpot) that indicates that the actual lottery result is more favorable to the player than the lottery result suggested in the special chart game effect, and can also be operated as a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery includes a jackpot during the reservation of the right to play the special chart game executed after the end of the jackpot game.

7, the gaming machine 10 has a motor 39a that supplies a driving force to the movable role member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting that the movable role member 39 has returned to the standby position. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, etc., and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. The movable role member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear not shown, and the movable role member 39 is moved downward (operation direction) from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (see solid line in FIG. 6), or upward (return direction) from the operating position (see solid line in FIG. 6) to the standby position (see FIG. 4) depending on the rotation direction of the motor 39a. For example, the movable part 39 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) by rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and conversely, is moved from the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) to the standby position (see FIG. 4) by rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver 39c can also obtain the detection result by the return detection unit 39b and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver 39c may be omitted, and the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

In addition, each lamp 391 of the movable part 39 is individually connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5, and each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off by the audio lamp control device 5, and can also be lit in multiple colors.

It is also possible to provide a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown) on the game board 31. The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when an action is taken to illegally guide a game ball to the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316 using a magnet. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when an action is taken to illegally input radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to falsely detect the entry of a game ball. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves, for example, from 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3 , the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140 .

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control device and drive means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
7, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 41 also has a built-in ROM 411 and RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control device 4 and outputs control signals from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a. The MPU 41 determines whether game balls have entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, and whether game balls have passed through the through gates 317L and 317R, based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a-316a, 317La, and 317Ra. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the shot control device 8, and the power supply control device 9.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands to the audio lamp control device 5, such as a normal chart change pattern command, an electric reel opening command, an electric reel closing command, a special chart change pattern command, a first special chart hold command, a second special chart hold command, a special chart shift command, a jackpot game start command, an opening start command, an opening end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an interval start command, an interval end command, an opening/closing execution mode end command, an ending start command, an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, and a game setting value change command.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in a normal symbol game (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) and the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern command is set in step S1709 in the normal symbol fluctuation start processing in FIG. 24 described later, based on the information stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c (see FIG. 11) described later, when starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36. Note that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in a normal symbol game (normal symbol fluctuation pattern). In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the normal symbol winning lottery is set as a command separate from the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command.

The electric reel opening command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric reel 315b is to be opened (activated). The electric reel opening command is set in step S1809 of the normal winning game control process in FIG. 25 described below when the electric reel 315b is to be opened (activated).

The electric reel closing command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric reel 315b is to be closed (restored). The electric reel closing command is set in step S1816 of the normal winning game control process in FIG. 25 described below when the electric reel 315b is to be closed (restored).

The special pattern change pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the change display time of the special pattern in the special pattern game and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The special pattern change pattern command is set in step S2105 in the special pattern change start process in FIG. 28 described later based on the information stored in the special pattern reserve storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) described later when the special pattern change display is started in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36. Note that the special pattern change pattern command includes information that can identify the type of special pattern when the change starts, but the special pattern change pattern command when the change of the first special pattern starts and the special pattern change pattern command when the change of the second special pattern starts may be set as separate special pattern change commands. The special pattern variation command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and only of the special pattern in the special pattern game. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command separate from the special pattern variation command.

The first special chart reserve command and the second special chart reserve command are commands that, when the first special chart reserve number N or the second special chart reserve number M stored in the special chart reserve storage area 412b (see Figure 8) described below increases due to a game ball entering the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reserve, the variable display time of the special pattern (special chart variable pattern), and the first special chart reserve number N or the second special chart reserve number M. When the first special chart reservation number N or the second special chart reservation number M increases, the first special chart reservation command and the second special chart reservation command are set in the first special chart reservation command setting process of step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 described later (step S1207 or S1209 of the first special chart reservation command setting process of FIG. 19 described later) or the second special chart reservation command setting process of step S1110 based on the information stored in the special chart reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) described later.

The special chart shift command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the special chart win/loss information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA, or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB (see FIG. 8), has shifted when the first special chart reserved number N or the second special chart reserved number M decreases due to the start of a special chart game (variable display of special charts). The special chart shift command is set in step S2008 in the special chart data setting process in FIG. 27 described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, i.e., that the game state is about to transition to a jackpot game state, and is set in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 described below when transitioning to the jackpot game state.

The opening start command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is about to start, and is set in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 described below when the opening of the jackpot game is about to start. Note that the opening start command can be omitted because it is possible to notify the sound and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is about to start by the jackpot game start command.

The opening end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is to end, and is set in step S2214 in the jackpot game control process in Figure 30 described below when the opening of the jackpot game is to end.

The open/close execution mode start command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game is to be started, and is set in step S2216 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 30 described below when the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game is to be started.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game to start each round game and the round number information indicating which round the round game is, and is set in step S2217 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 30 described later when each round game starts. Note that, in addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the round number of the round game that is about to start may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be sent to the sound and lamp control device 5.

The round play end command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the current round play is to end in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in step S2229 in the jackpot play control process in FIG. 31 described below when each round play ends.

The interval start command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 of the start of an interval between rounds of play in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in step S2233 in the jackpot play control process in Figure 31 described below when the interval is to start.

The interval end command is a command that notifies the sound and lamp control device 5 that the interval between rounds of play is to end in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in step S2239 in the jackpot play control process in FIG. 32 described below when the interval ends.

The open/close execution mode end command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in step S2241 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 31 described below when the open/close execution mode is to be ended.

The ending start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is about to begin, and is set in step S2242 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 31, which will be described later, when the ending is to begin.

The ending end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is to end, and is set in step S2248 in the jackpot game control process in Figure 32 described below when the ending is to end.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in step S2250 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 described below when the jackpot game ends.

The game setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S2408 in the game setting value change process in Figure 35 described below when the game setting value is changed.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 also includes an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution period of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 (described below) is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 starts and executes the main timer interrupt process described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Note that the oscillator circuit and divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for the processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the voice lamp control device 5, etc. The RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

Now, referring to FIG. 8, the storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and the regular pattern lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter memory area 412a, the special pattern reserve storage area 412b, and the regular pattern reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 to set the jackpot lottery result and the variable display time of the special pattern, and the regular pattern lottery result and the variable display time of the regular pattern.

In the lottery counter memory area 412a, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 are stored as lottery counters. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to play a jackpot game. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine the miss type when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. In addition, the lottery counter memory area 412a stores a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and a special pattern variation type counter CS1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The special pattern variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation display time of the special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36. Furthermore, the lottery counter memory area 412a stores a normal win random number counter C4, a normal win type random number counter C5, a normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, and a normal pattern change type counter CS2 as lottery counters. The normal win random number counter C4 is used in a normal pattern win lottery to determine whether the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an electric role open state. The normal win type random number counter C5 is used to allocate the normal pattern win type (short open or long open) when the result of the normal pattern win lottery is a normal pattern win. The normal win random number initial value counter CIN2 is used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. The normal pattern change type counter CS2 is used to determine the normal pattern change display time in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36.

The lottery counters C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS2 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the lottery counters C1-C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery result, the variable display time of the special pattern, the jackpot type, and the miss type, as well as the regular pattern lottery result, the variable display time of the regular pattern, and the regular pattern win type.

The special chart reserved storage area 412b includes a first special chart reserved storage area REA, a second special chart reserved storage area REB, and a special chart execution area AE. The first special chart reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a first special chart reserved number memory area NAA. The second special chart reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a second special chart reserved number memory area NAB.

When a game ball enters the first winning port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the special chart change type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as special chart win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning port 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the special chart change type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as special chart win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB. In addition, a lottery counter memory area 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, special chart change type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately for each of the first special chart reserved storage area REA and the second special chart reserved storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the special chart change type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA, and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB.

Therefore, in addition to the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, which is executed based on the special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special symbol reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special symbol reserve storage area REB, it is possible to determine in advance the variable display time (special symbol variable pattern) for the special symbol (decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 in the special symbol game.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the special chart win/loss information is stored in an available area in the first special chart reserve storage area REA in the order of priority of the first reserve area REA1, the second reserve area REA2, the third reserve area REA3, and the fourth reserve area REA4. The first special chart reserve number storage area NAA stores the number of the first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 in which special chart win/loss information is stored as the first special chart reserve number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315, the special chart win/loss information is stored in an empty area in the order of priority of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB. In the second special chart reserve number storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which special chart win/loss information is stored is stored as the second special chart reserve number M.

In other words, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved areas in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special chart reserved storage area REB can be used to reserve up to four pieces of special chart win/loss information as the winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight is provided in common to the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315, and in this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of special winning/losing information as winning history. The process of storing the special winning/losing information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

The special pattern execution area AE is a storage area used to move the special pattern hit/miss information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first special pattern reserve storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second special pattern reserve storage area REB when the variable display of the special pattern is started in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36. Specifically, the special pattern hit/miss information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second special pattern reserve storage area REB is moved to the special pattern execution area AE with priority, and when there is no special pattern hit/miss information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second special pattern reserve storage area REB and the second special pattern reserved number M stored in the second special pattern reserved number storage area NAB is 0, the special pattern hit/miss information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first special pattern reserve storage area REA is moved to the special pattern execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game, and in the high frequency support mode of the sure-change game state and the time-saving game state, the second special symbol game is mainly executed by executing a so-called right hit, which shoots the game ball into the right area of the game board 31.

In addition, in the case where the difference between the first special chart reserved number N stored in the first special chart reserved number memory area NAA of the first special chart reserved storage area REA and the second special chart reserved number M stored in the second special chart reserved number memory area NAB of the second special chart reserved storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the special chart execution area AE as another embodiment. Also, in the case where the special chart hit/miss information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second special chart reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the special chart execution area AE as another embodiment.

Then, when a special pattern game starts, the MPU41 performs a lottery for a big win based on the numerical information stored as the special pattern hit/miss information in the special pattern execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserved area REA1 of the first special pattern reserve storage area REA is moved to the special pattern execution area AE, the special pattern hit/miss information stored in the second reserved area REA2 is shifted to the first reserved area REA1, the special pattern hit/miss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 is shifted to the second reserved area REA2, and the special pattern hit/miss information stored in the fourth reserved area REA4 is shifted to the third reserved area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second special chart reserved storage area REB is moved to the special chart execution area AE, the special chart win/loss information stored in the second reserved area REB2 shifts to the first reserved area REB1, the special chart win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REB3 shifts to the second reserved area REB2, and the special chart win/loss information stored in the fourth reserved area REB4 shifts to the third reserved area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17, for example, by being incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same way as the jackpot random number counter C1. The first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA1 or the second special chart reserved storage area REA2 store the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot is set to two types according to the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area in ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode, which is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, and the high probability mode, which is the guaranteed bonus game state. Here, Figure 9 (A) shows an example of the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Figure 9 (B) shows an example of the high probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 9(A) and FIG. 9(B), a plurality of win/lose tables are provided as a low probability mode win/lose table and a high probability mode win/lose table, in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) varies according to the game setting value. The low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table each include six win/lose tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 have a higher jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, in that order, which is advantageous for the player.

At game setting value 1, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 2, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

In game setting value 3, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, in game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 4, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 5, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

At game setting value 6, out of 65,536 random numbers between 0 and 65,535, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of the low probability mode.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the ones that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table share the same random numbers that will result in a jackpot lottery result for a jackpot between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that will result in a jackpot are not the same. Also, the random numbers that will result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

In addition, six low probability mode win/lose tables and six high probability mode win/lose tables are provided corresponding to the six game setting values, but there needs to be at least one win/lose table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low probability mode win/lose tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special chart reserve storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, the special jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

9(C) is a diagram showing an example of the allocation table. In the example shown in FIG. 9(C), when the type of the special game is the first special game triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the special game is the second special game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 5 numbers from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a guaranteed jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to the same at 75%, but the probability of a 16R guaranteed jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the guaranteed jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric role 315b) and the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the expected value of winning game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher than in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode with a low probability of opening the electric role 315b).

In either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a high probability jackpot, the game will transition to a high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, there is no upper limit set on the number of special symbol games that can be executed in the high probability game state, and the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop high probability game machine.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (time-saving game count) that can be executed in the time-saving game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of the number of special symbol games, the game will transition to a normal game state, which is a low frequency support mode, after the upper limit of special symbol games has been executed. Note that the number of special symbol games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be another number.

The transition from the special chance game state to the normal game state is not limited to when the maximum number of special chance games are played, but may be performed, for example, when a state transition lottery (falling down lottery) is won. In this case, the special chance game state is prevented from transitioning (falling down) to the normal game state until a predetermined number of special chance games have been played, and it is also possible to guarantee the minimum number of special chance game plays played in the special chance game state to be the predetermined number. This prevents the number of special chance game plays played in the special chance game state from decreasing significantly.

In this embodiment, an individual allocation table is set for the first winning slot 314, which triggers the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which triggers the second special symbol game upon winning. The allocation probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but it is also possible that the allocation probability of the jackpot type is the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability machine, and it is also possible to configure it as an ST machine including a V-ST machine or a type 1/2 mixed machine.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special chart execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R special jackpot", a "16R special jackpot", a "5R normal jackpot", or a "miss".

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R certain jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round play in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in a predetermined manner is repeated five times during the jackpot game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R certain jackpot, an open/close execution mode in which the round play is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game is executed. Note that, as an opening mode of the variable winning opening 316 in each round play, for example, it is possible to open the variable winning opening 316 once. Of course, it is also possible to open the variable winning opening 316 multiple times during some or all of the round plays.

In the case of a 5R or 16R guaranteed jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a guaranteed jackpot game state, which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning the jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric roler 315b. In this embodiment, the guaranteed jackpot game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R guaranteed jackpot", a "16R guaranteed jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state in which the game is in a low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and in a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 100 times, or ends when the player is notified of the results of the jackpot lottery before the specified number of times has elapsed.

In addition, in a special game, a lottery may be held to determine whether the player will fall from the special game state to the time-limited game state or the normal game state. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss, the game state will not transition from the special game state to the jackpot game state or the time-limited game state. In this embodiment, an example is given in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R special game jackpot, a 16R special game jackpot, and a 5R normal jackpot. However, this is not limiting, and other types of jackpots, such as a 2-round special game jackpot, a 2-round normal jackpot, and a 16R normal jackpot, may also be considered.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 described later, for example, by being incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is stored in the first to fourth reserve areas REA1 to REA4 and REB1 to REB4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA1 or the second special chart reserve storage area REA2.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of miss types: a front-back miss reach in which the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, a non-front-back miss reach in which the final stopping symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a complete miss in which no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 9(D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9(D), the random number value for a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value for a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value for a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in special pattern games in which a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in special pattern games that transition to a jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, the term "reach" refers to a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating a big win is likely to occur between the start of the display of the changing symbols on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbols. In one example, the same symbol is displayed at two of the three stop positions of the decorative symbols on the pay line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. In addition, during the change state of the reach on the symbol display unit 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation type operation presentation process is executed in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the presentation. Note that, during the execution of these presentation processes, the changing display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1 determines the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time) indicating the variation display time of the special symbol (decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341) in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by determining the special symbol variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (performance pattern) in the general special symbol game, such as high-speed variation performance (basic performance, non-reach performance), normal reach performance, super reach performance, and special reach performance, according to the special symbol variation pattern type (special symbol variation display time). The special chart change type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main process of FIG. 21 described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated in step S1414 during the remaining time in the main process. The value of the special chart change type counter CS1 at the time when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is stored in the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA1 or the second special chart reserved storage area REA2.

Then, the MPU 41 determines the special pattern variation pattern indicating the variation display time of the special pattern based on the special pattern variation type counter CS1 and a variation table (see Figs. 10(A) to 10(C)) previously set according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the special pattern variation pattern type by referring to the normal jackpot variation table (see Fig. 10(A)), the special jackpot variation table (see Fig. 10(B)), or the miss variation table (see Fig. 10(C)) previously stored in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Also, the special jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

10(A), 10(B) and 10(C) are diagrams showing examples of the variation table. In the normal jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 10(A), the guaranteed jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 10(B) and the miss variation table shown in FIG. 10(C), the special jackpot variation pattern is previously associated with the value of the special jackpot variation type counter CS1. Then, the MPU 41 refers to the normal jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 10(A) when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot", the guaranteed jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 10(B) when the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed jackpot" or a "16R guaranteed jackpot", and the miss variation table shown in FIG. 10(C) when the lottery result is a "miss", respectively, to identify the type of special jackpot variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(A) and FIG. 10(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the special jackpot variation table, one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Here, when the special chart variation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach presentation pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the special game presentation is executed according to the normal reach presentation pattern in the pattern display unit 341, etc. The normal reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a normal reach presentation. Also, when the special chart variation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the super reach presentation pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the special game presentation is executed according to the super reach presentation pattern in the pattern display unit 341, etc. The super reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a super reach presentation. Furthermore, when the special chart change pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach presentation pattern, which has the longest change display time of 90 seconds, as the change type (presentation pattern), and the special game presentation is executed according to the special reach presentation pattern in the pattern display unit 341, etc. The special reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a special reach presentation.

As shown in FIG. 10(C), in the miss variation table, the correspondence between the special chart variation type counter CS1 and the special chart variation pattern is determined in accordance with the stop display type of the decorative pattern at the time of miss (reach of miss before and after, reach other than reach of miss before and after, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop display type at the time of miss is reach of miss before and after or reach other than reach of miss before and after, one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop display type at the time of miss is complete miss, one of the special chart variation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1. When the special chart variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the variation type (performance pattern type) as a non-reach performance pattern (7-second non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds, and the special chart game performance is executed according to the 7-second non-reach performance pattern in the pattern display unit 341, etc. In addition, when the special chart change pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a no-reach performance pattern (10-second non-reach performance pattern) with a change display time of 10 seconds as the change type (performance pattern type), and the special chart game performance is executed according to the 10-second non-reach performance pattern in the pattern display unit 341, etc.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display when a loss occurs corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern "04", a loss pattern variation display is executed in which the decorative pattern variation display stops at a combination of loss patterns without a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display when a loss occurs corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern "05", a loss pattern variation display is executed in which the decorative pattern variation display stops at a combination of loss patterns accompanied by a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. Also, when a loss occurs corresponding to the special pattern variation pattern "05", a player-participation type operation display in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a preview effect.

The types of special chart variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 10(A), 10(B), and 10(C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach performances executed in the normal reach performance pattern corresponding to the special chart variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach performances selected from them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the special chart variation pattern "02", and one of the super reach effects selected from them is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is lower than in the special reach effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the special chart variation pattern "03", and one of the special reach effects selected from among them is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than with the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

In addition, the presentation patterns corresponding to the special chart change patterns may include player participation type operation presentations, such as operation presentations in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, such as a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-fire operation presentation in which the rapid-fire operation of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long press operation presentation in which the operation of the player long-pressing the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies the variable display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 (the variable display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display section 341), it inputs the special symbol variable display time and a special symbol variable pattern command indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variable pattern commands "A01" to "A03" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added before the special symbol variable pattern "01" to "03". Also, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot", the MPU 41 outputs one of the special symbol variable pattern commands "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R special jackpot is added before the special symbol variable pattern "01" to "03". Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special pattern variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating a 16R guaranteed jackpot is added before the special pattern variation patterns "01" to "03." When the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the special pattern variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating a miss is added before the special pattern variation patterns "01" to "05." In other words, the special pattern variation pattern command includes not only the special pattern variation pattern (time of special pattern play) that is the time for which the special pattern is changed and displayed, but also information that specifies the result of the jackpot lottery. Based on the special pattern change pattern command, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine not only the special pattern change pattern (time of special pattern play), which is the change display time of the special pattern, but also the result of the jackpot lottery, and determines the change type (presentation pattern) displayed on the pattern display unit 341 and other details, such as the combination of stop display of the decorative patterns, based on the change display time of the special pattern (time of special pattern play) and the result of the jackpot lottery. Based on the details of the determined change type (presentation pattern), the voice lamp control device 5 causes the decorative patterns to change and stop display on the pattern display unit 341, and executes image presentation in accordance with the change display of the decorative patterns, and further executes voice presentation by the speaker 26 in accordance with the change display of the decorative patterns, and executes illumination presentation (lamp presentation) by the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process to determine the variable display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 based on the special symbol variable type counter CS1 and the variable table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big win lottery. In addition, since the details of the variable mode of the decorative symbols actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variable modes.

The variable tables shown in Figures 10(A) to 10(C) are commonly used in various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and probability variable game state), but a variable table may be set separately for each game state, and a variable table may be set separately for the high-frequency support mode (time-saving game state and probability variable game state) and the low-frequency support mode. When a variable table is set separately for each game state or support mode, the average value of the variable display time is set longer, for example, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) than in the time-saving game state and probability variable game state (high-frequency support mode). When different variable tables are set for the time-saving game state and probability variable game state, the average value of the variable display time may be set longer in the time-saving game state than in the probability variable game state, or may be set longer in the probability variable game state than in the time-saving game state.

Here, FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the regular map reserve storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 shown in FIG. 8. As shown in FIG. 11, the regular map reserve storage area 412c includes a regular map first reserve area SE1, a regular map second reserve area SE2, a regular map third reserve area SE3, a regular map fourth reserve area SE4, a regular map change reserve number storage area SNA, and a regular map execution area SAE.

The first regular map reserve area SE1 to the fourth regular map reserve area SE4 are memory areas that store the regular map win/lose random number counter C4, the regular map win type random number counter C5, and the regular map variation type counter CS2, which are obtained as regular map win/lose information used in the regular map win lottery when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R.

The regular map change reserved number storage area SNA stores the number of regular map first reserved areas SE1 to SE4 in which regular map win/loss information is stored. In other words, the regular map change reserved number storage area SNA is a storage area that stores the number of reserved rights to play regular map games.

The normal pattern execution area SAE is a memory area used to move the normal pattern win/loss information in the normal pattern first reserve area SE1 when the normal pattern change display is started in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36. Then, at the start of one normal pattern game, the MPU 41 performs a normal pattern win lottery using the normal pattern win/loss table (see Figures 12 (A) and 12 (B)) and the normal pattern win type allocation table (see Figures 12 (C) and 12 (D)) described below based on the numerical information (the values of the normal pattern win random number counter C4, the normal pattern win type random number counter C5, and the normal pattern change type counter CS2) stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE, and determines the normal pattern change display time for the normal pattern using the normal pattern change table (not shown). At this time, if the regular map correct/incorrect information stored in the regular map first holding area SE1 is moved to the regular map execution area SAE, the regular map correct/incorrect information stored in the regular map second holding area SE2 is shifted to the regular map first holding area SE1, the regular map correct/incorrect information stored in the regular map third holding area SE3 is shifted to the regular map second holding area SE2, and the regular map correct/incorrect information stored in the regular map fourth holding area SE4 is shifted to the regular map third holding area SE3.

The normal win random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 described below, for example by being incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The value of the normal win random number counter C4 at the time when the game ball enters the through gates 317L, 317R is stored in the normal win random number counter C4 first to fourth reserve areas SE1 to SE4 of the normal win reserve storage area 412c. In addition, at a specified timing, a normal win lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role 315b will be opened for a specified period of time based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the normal win reserve storage area 412c.

Here, Fig. 12(A) and Fig. 12(B) are diagrams showing an example of a normal winning/losing table. In this embodiment, two types of normal winning/losing tables are set: a low-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Fig. 12(A) and a high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in Fig. 12(B). That is, in this embodiment, as described below, the probability of winning a normal winning is different between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the probability of winning a normal winning is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table shown in FIG. 12(A) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game mode, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12(A), in the low-frequency support mode normal winning probability table, a normal winning probability is set when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss probability is set when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is between 1 and 299. In other words, in the normal game mode (low-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal winning probability is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric role 315b is reduced.

The high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table shown in FIG. 12(B) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning is set to 299/300, which is higher than the probability of winning in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and the frequency of operation of the electric device 315b is increased. As shown in FIG. 12(B), the high-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table is the opposite of the low-frequency support mode normal winning/losing table, in which a loss occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a win occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 1 to 299. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-time support mode, the probability of winning is set to 299/300, which is higher than the probability of winning in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), and the frequency of operation of the electric device 315b is increased.

Note that the probability of winning the low-frequency support mode normal map and the probability of winning the high-frequency support mode normal map are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 12(A) and 12(B) and can be changed as appropriate.

The normal win type random number counter C5 is periodically updated by being incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199 in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 described later, and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The value of the normal win type random number counter C5 at the time when the game ball enters the through gate 317L, 317R is stored in the normal first reserve area to the normal fourth reserve area SE1 to SE4 of the normal reserve storage area 412c. In addition, when the value of the normal win type random number counter C4 stored in the normal first reserve area to the normal fourth reserve area SE1 to SE4 is a normal win, the type of normal win (short open normal win and long open normal win), that is, the opening time of the electric role 315b, is set by the value of the normal win type random number counter C5 stored in the normal first reserve area to the normal fourth reserve area SE1 to SE4.

Here, Fig. 12(C) and Fig. 12(D) are diagrams showing an example of a regular map type allocation table. In this embodiment, two types of regular map type allocation tables are set: a low-frequency support mode regular map type allocation table shown in Fig. 12(C) and a high-frequency support mode regular map type allocation table shown in Fig. 12(D). That is, in this embodiment, as described later, the allocation probability of regular map types (short-open regular map and long-open regular map) differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

Here, in the case of a short-opening normal winning game, the electric device 315b opens for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and a short-opening normal winning game is executed in which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315 for a short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In this short-opening normal winning game, the short opening time of the electric device 315b makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning hole 315.

On the other hand, in the case of a long-opening regular winning game, the electric device 315b is opened for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening regular winning game, and a long-opening regular winning game is executed in which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315 for a longer period of time (e.g., six seconds) than in a short-opening regular winning game. In this long-opening regular winning game, the electric device 315b is opened for a longer period of time, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, and it is possible to reserve the right to execute the second special winning game up to the upper limit (e.g., four balls).

The low-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table shown in Figure 12 (C) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 12 (C), in the low-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table, when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 0 to 99, it is set to a short opening normal winning, and when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 100 to 199, it is set to a long opening normal winning. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the allocation ratio between the short opening normal winning and the long opening normal winning is set to 1:1. Of course, the distribution ratio between short opening regular winnings and long opening regular winnings in the normal game state (low frequency support mode) does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the distribution ratio for long opening regular winnings to zero (zero value of regular winning type random number counter C5 for long opening regular winnings) or approximately zero (one or two values of regular winning type random number counter C5 for long opening regular winnings).

The high-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table shown in FIG. 12(D) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, the probability game state and the time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 12(D), in the high-frequency support mode normal winning type allocation table, when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 0, it is set to a short opening normal winning, and when the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 is 1 to 199, it is set to a long opening normal winning. In other words, in the probability game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), it is set to be more likely to be allocated to a long opening normal winning than a short opening normal winning. Of course, the allocation rate between the short opening normal winning and the long opening normal winning in the probability game state and the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12(D) and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is also possible to set the allocation rate of the short opening normal winning to zero (the value of the normal winning type random number counter C5 for the short opening normal winning is zero).

The opening of the electric role device 315b is not limited to once per game per normal figure, but may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and the opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric role device 315b per game per normal figure may be one type or multiple types.

The normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing of FIG. 21 described below is executed, for example by being incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and is also repeatedly updated in step S1414 during the remaining time in the main processing. The value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 at the time when the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R is stored in the normal map first reserve area to the normal map fourth reserve area SE1 to SE4 of the normal map reserve storage area 412c. In addition, at a predetermined timing, the normal map fluctuation display time is determined by referring to a normal map fluctuation display table (not shown) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the normal map reserve storage area 412c.

The normal map change display table (not shown) includes, for example, a high-frequency support mode normal map change table that is referenced when the high-frequency support mode is selected, and a low-frequency support mode normal map change display table that is referenced when the low-frequency support mode is selected. In the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table and the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table, multiple normal map change display times are set, for example, in correspondence with the value of the normal map change type counter CS2. Also, the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table is usually set so that the average normal map change display time is shorter than that of the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table. For example, some of the change display times set in the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be set to be longer than some of the change display times set in the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table, and all of the change display times set in the high-frequency support mode normal map change display table may be set to be longer than all of the change display times set in the low-frequency support mode normal map change display table.

In addition, a common map change display table may be set for the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, and the map change display time set for at least one of the high frequency support mode map change display table and the low frequency support mode map change display table may be one type. Also, the map change display time may be set according to the reserved map change number X, for example, the more reserved map change number X is, the shorter the map change display time may be set, and the less reserved map change number X is, the longer the map change display time may be set.

Here, FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball output performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the game information such as "number of out balls", "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", "number of balls paid out from the second winning port", "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port", "setting value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries", "number of unit jackpot lotteries", "number of jackpots", and "number of consecutive misses". Of this game information, "game setting value", "base information", "sequential role ratio information", "role ratio information", and "number of unit jackpot lotteries" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball output performance.

The "number of out balls" is the cumulative number of game balls that have been released onto the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a count of the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the general winning port 313 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the general winning port 313 is detected by the ball entry sensor 313a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the general winning port 313 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the first winning port 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a winning into the first winning port 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the first winning port 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving play state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). When a winning into the second winning port 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving play state, this "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below.

The "variable winning port payout number" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the variable winning port 316 during a jackpot game state. When a winning into the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entry sensor 316a during a jackpot game state, this "variable winning port payout number" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out for the current winning when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the variable winning port 316 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of Figure 21 described below.

The "game setting value" is used to select the low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 9(A)) and high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 9(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/lose determination). In other words, the "game setting value" specifies the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and high probability mode. In this embodiment, six setting values (six types of low probability mode win/lose tables (see FIG. 9(A)) and high probability mode win/lose tables (see FIG. 9(B)) with different jackpot probabilities) are prepared as described below. The "game setting value" is updated during the game setting value change process in FIG. 35 described below.

"Base information" is information about the "base", which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the ratio of the combined number of paid balls of the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" to the "number of balls out" in the normal game mode. The "base" can be expressed mathematically as "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning port") / "number of balls out". "Base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the 60,000 ball base B2 before last are updated each time the number of balls out reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of Figure 36 described below (steps S2505 and S2506). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is stored as the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the number of out balls two balls before that reaches 60,000 balls is stored as the "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. In addition, the counter value of the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until it reaches 60,000 balls (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as the "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. In addition, when the counter value of the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until it reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" for base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" described above.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "second-previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are kept as history, but it is also possible to keep three or more past 60,000 ball bases as history. In addition, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "continuous feature ratio information" is information on the "continuous feature ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable feature port to the total number of balls paid out from all the feature ports (general feature port 313, first feature port 314, second feature port 315, and variable feature port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "continuous feature ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "continuous feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable feature port" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous feature ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 described below. In this embodiment, the "continuous feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "sequential feature ratio information" may be the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are performed in normal game mode (e.g., 1,000 times), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "sequential feature ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period.

The "functionality ratio information" is information about the "functionality ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second winning port and the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "functionality ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "functionality ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning port" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port") / "total number of balls paid out." The "functionality ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 described below. In this embodiment, the "functionality ratio information" is stored as the cumulative functionality ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "function ratio information" may be the function ratio for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are performed in normal game mode (e.g., 1,000 times), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "successive function ratio information" may include both the cumulative function ratio and the function ratio for a certain period of time.

The "cumulative jackpot draw count" is the number of jackpot draws in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the gaming hall to the present. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot draw count" is also the cumulative number of times that the first special symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 in the normal game mode. The "cumulative jackpot draw count" is incremented by one each time the first special symbol or second special symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display section 362 or second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in step S2106 of the special symbol display start process in FIG. 28 described later. In addition, the "cumulative jackpot draw count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times a jackpot draw is received (the number of times the pattern change display of the first special pattern display unit of the main display unit 36 is executed) triggered by winning the first winning port 314 per a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls", and the difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out to the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out to the first winning port" from the "number of out balls". In other words, the "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times the first special pattern change display is performed (the number of times a jackpot draw is received) on average for 1000 yen in the first special pattern display unit 362 when 250 balls are lent for 1000 yen at a game hall. The "unit number of jackpot draws" may be the number of times a jackpot draw is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The "number of unit jackpot draws" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36 described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot draws" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "number of unit jackpot draws" may be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, or a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws and the number of unit jackpot draws in a certain period may be stored as gaming information as the "number of unit jackpot draws".

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the result of the jackpot lottery conducted from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the amusement hall to the present has been a jackpot. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time a jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described below. In addition, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of consecutive misses in the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. When the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 starts displaying the first or second special symbol in step S2106 of the special symbol change start process in FIG. 28 described later, the "number of consecutive misses" is incremented by one if the result of the win/loss judgment based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S2103 is a miss, and is cleared to 0 if the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive misses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 14, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display section 45, a setting value change operation section 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 15, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided in a position that is visible when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) seven-segment displays 431-434, and is referred to as a four-digit seven-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to display the "base information" by using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The seven-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F." When displaying the letter "B" on the seven-segment displays 431-434, a dot is lit up to display "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8," and when displaying the letter "D," a dot is lit up to display "0." in order to distinguish it from the number "0." Additionally, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," it is also conceivable to light up a dot to clearly indicate that it is a letter.

The performance display monitor 43 has four seven-segment displays 431-434, of which the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 are identification segments that display the "base type" as an abbreviation, and the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the two leftmost seven-segment displays 431, 432 display the abbreviation for the current base BL, "BL", as "8." and "L", while the two rightmost seven-segment displays 433, 434 display the base value "31" as "3" and "1". In other words, the four seven-segment displays 431-434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" from the left, respectively.

The performance display switch 44 is operated to switch the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four seven-segment displays 431 to 434) on and off collectively by pressing it, and is provided in a position that allows easy operation when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power on, electricity is applied to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, enabling the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power off, electricity is cut off to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. The performance display switch 44 may be provided somewhere other than the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 15(A) is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 15(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 15(B) to FIG. 15(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the "base information" is displayed repeatedly at regular intervals in the following order: current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → previous 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 15(B), the current base BL is 28%, in the example shown in FIG. 15(C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and in the example shown in FIG. 15(D), the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15(A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program to calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and a program to display the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main control device 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store the programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may also be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

In addition, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information," instead of or in addition to the "base information."

In addition, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a seven-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display, such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 14, the setting value display unit 45 displays the above-mentioned game setting values for selecting the low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 9(A)) and the high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 9(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured with a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and the game setting values may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off when pressed, and when the power of the 7-segment display is on, it allows the set value to be changed by rotating the unit. The set value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off when pressed, for example, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contacts by rotating (rotating a specified angle). Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the display on the set value display unit 45 of the main control unit 4.

As shown in FIG. 16(A), when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on and the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the power to the seven-segment display is cut off and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned on, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is increased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right, and the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is decreased by rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left. When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and the power supply of the 7-segment display is turned off, the number displayed immediately before the power supply was turned off is determined as the setting value. This allows the MPU 41 to perform a jackpot lottery based on a low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 9(A)) or a high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 9(B)) that is selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method of changing the set value is not limited to turning the set value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, the method may involve rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to determine the set value, repeatedly or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45, or inserting a key into a keyhole provided on the main control unit 4 or the like and turning the key to change the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A equipped with the setting value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is also provided on the rear side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is provided on the rear side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select a state in which it is visible from the outside of the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state in which it is not visible. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, while by opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the set value display unit 45 cannot be seen unless the game board 31 is opened, and the set value is prevented from being known by the player from the numbers displayed on the set value display unit 45. When the set value display unit 45 is lit, it is turned off by pressing the set value change operation unit 46. Therefore, by keeping the set value display unit 45 turned off during the business hours of the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the set value from the set value display unit 45, even if the game board 31 is opened due to ball jamming on the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the set value display unit 45 is made visible.

On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is turned off, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 turns it on, and the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the gaming hall, by opening the game board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 turns on, allowing the game setting value to be confirmed based on the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and further, the game setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours, while allowing the setting value to be changed outside business hours with a simple operation.

In this embodiment, the performance information display device 4A is provided in the main control device 4, but the performance information display device 4A may be provided separately from the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided separately from the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 7, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The voice and lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output I/F 52. The MPU 51 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 also includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in special game presentations and big win game presentations. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 inputs commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by executing processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 using the MPU 51, and controls the display of the symbol display unit 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the special symbol game presentation and the jackpot game presentation described below, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback audio output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a special chart change pattern command, a first special chart hold command, a second special chart hold command, and a special chart shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display change pattern command and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may also be a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Another embodiment may also be a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the audio and lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking pattern of the illumination unit 27 based on commands input from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the operation switch 20a. This allows the MPU 51 to detect that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, it is also possible to control the image game presentation executed by the pattern display unit 341, the audio output presentation in which audio is output from the speaker 26, and the lamp presentation based on the blinking pattern of the illumination unit 27.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined calculation processing based on commands input from the main control device 4, such as a normal game pattern command, an electric reel opening command, an electric reel closing command, a special game pattern command, a first special game hold command, a second special game hold command, a special game shift command, a jackpot game start command, an opening start command, an opening end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an interval start command, an interval end command, an opening/closing execution mode end command, an ending start command, an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, and a game setting value change command.

Specifically, when a special chart variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a special chart variation pattern based on the special chart variation pattern command, transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the special chart variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S3107 in the command determination process of FIG. 47), and starts the pattern variation display in the pattern display unit 341. At this time, in the case where the special chart variation pattern command indicates a miss, the pattern display unit 341 displays a combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a display change pattern command input from the voice lamp control device 5, thereby executing the pattern change display and the performance display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the pattern display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that two-way communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is a calculation device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits, such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 and the like. Some or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by electronic circuits.

The ROM 611 stores a control program and a number of types of images, including changing patterns such as decorative patterns used in the changing pattern display of the pattern display unit 341, preview effect images, reach effect images, big win effect images, and miss effect images. The images displayed on the pattern display unit 341 include still images and videos. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each changing display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing, and the changing display time of the changing pattern. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays images on the pattern display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the changing display pattern command, thereby realizing the changing pattern display and effect display.

RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processes executed by MPU 61. Note that RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output I/F 72. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches between paying out and not paying out game balls, and a payout sensor 132b that detects the game balls being paid out individually. The payout control device 7 pays out any number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is also provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to clear the ball jam (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming occurs in the payout device 132.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island equipment together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 can pay out a number of game balls equivalent to a preset amount within the range of the amount stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10, and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the payout device 132 to pay out the predetermined number of game balls. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium with an IC chip built in. The ball lending device 100 may also be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash inserted by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 to supply the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The launch handle 22 is also provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation performed by the player, and a voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 so that the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game ball at will. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to stop the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is detected to be operated by the player. This prevents the launch handle 22 from being fixed in a rotating state, for example, and prevents the player from playing in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. In addition, the player can stop the launch of the ball game by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his or her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, a +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power supply switch 90 for turning the power supply of the gaming machine 10 ON/OFF, and a RAM erase switch 91 that is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power supply switch 90 is operated to turn on the power with the RAM erase switch 91 ON.

The power supply control device 9 is also provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that are charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Also, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it determines that a power outage has occurred when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22 V. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control they are currently performing and execute a specified NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figures 17 to 41. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the start-up process and the NMI interrupt process will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In addition, in the start-up process, it is confirmed whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
17 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt process will be explained below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection state of the sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, the out ball sensor 318a, etc. is determined. At this time, when the MPU 41 detects the entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412. Also, when the out ball sensor 318a detects an out ball, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal hit random number counter C4, and the normal hit type random number counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal hit random number counter C4, and the normal hit type random number counter C5, respectively, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with a win in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The launch control process is a process that enables the launch of game balls on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch has not been operated. The launch control process also disables the launch of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b has been operated. When the launch of game balls is enabled, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game balls.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process for updating the information stored in the general game reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412, and ends the main timer interrupt process. The details of the through gate process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process in Fig. 17. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to Fig. 18.

<Step S1101>
18, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the first winning port 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the MPU 41 determines that a win has not been made at the first winning port 314 (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 judges whether the first special drawing reservation number N stored in the first special drawing reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the first special drawing reservation number N is the maximum reservation number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special drawing reservation number N is not the maximum reservation number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the first special drawing reservation number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 17, and the special chart change type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA of the special chart reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special chart hit/miss information for the first special chart reservation acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the target of the jackpot hit/miss judgment in step S2102 or S2103 in the special chart change start processing in Fig. 28 described later, and executes a first special chart reservation command setting process to set the first special chart reservation command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first special chart reservation command setting process will be described later with reference to Fig. 19.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning port 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has not been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 judges whether the second special chart reserved number M stored in the second special chart reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the second special chart reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special chart reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the second special chart reserved number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 17, and the special chart change type counter CS1, which is updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main processing of Figure 21 described below, and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB of the special chart reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the special chart hit/miss information for the second special chart reservation acquired in step S1109 before the special chart hit/miss information becomes the target of the jackpot hit/miss judgment in step S2102 or S2103 in the special chart change start processing in FIG. 28 described later, and executes a second special chart reservation command setting process to set the second special chart reservation command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second special chart reservation command setting process is the same as the first special chart reservation command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 19, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second special chart reservation command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first special chart reservation command" with the "second special chart reservation command" and the "first special chart reservation number N" with the "second special chart reservation number M" in the first special chart reservation command setting process in FIG. 19.

[First special chart hold command setting process]
Here, Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special chart reservation command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process in Fig. 18. The first special chart reservation command includes information indicating that the command is the first special chart reservation command, the result of the big win lottery (big win type or miss), the special chart variable display time, the first special chart reservation number N, and other information. Hereinafter, the first special chart reservation command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 19.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 41 reads out the first special chart reservation number N from the first special chart reservation number memory area NAA of the first special chart reservation storage area REA, and reads out the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special chart reservation from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. On the other hand, if the game is not in the high probability mode (step S1202: No), that is, if it is in the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game is in the high probability mode based on the probability change game state flag. The probability change game state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game is in the probability change game state, that is, whether or not it is in the high probability mode. In the game state transition process described later, when the game state is transitioned from the probability change jackpot game state to the probability change game state, the probability change game state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. 34, and when the game state is transitioned from the probability change game state to the probability change jackpot game state or the normal jackpot game state, the probability change game state flag is set to OFF in step S2309 of FIG. 33.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out a high probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9B) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process in FIG. 35 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the high probability mode hit/miss table. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out a low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9A) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process in FIG. 35 described later, and executes a hit/miss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the low probability mode hit/miss table.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the win/lose determination is performed based on the high probability mode win/lose table or the low probability mode win/lose table saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35 described later. However, in steps S1203 or S1204, the game setting value saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35 described later may be read out, and the high probability mode win/lose table or the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to that game setting value may be selected one by one to perform the win/lose determination.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 judges whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), i.e., if the win is a miss, the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the special chart change type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the special chart win/loss information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18, the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the special chart change type counter CS1 included in the special chart win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 are read out. In addition, the reserved area in which the special chart win/loss information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the first special chart reserved number storage area NAA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the big win type counter C2, the special chart change type counter CS1, and the first special chart reserved number N in the first special chart reserved command. In this way, since the first special chart reserved command includes the first special chart reserved number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 receiving the first special chart reserved command can recognize which of the first reserved area REA1 to fourth reserved area REA4 the first special chart reserved command corresponds to by referring to the reserved number N included in the first special chart reserved command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special chart change type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a miss, the special chart change type counter CS1, and the first special chart reservation number N in the first special chart reservation command (step S1209).

The first special drawing hold command set to ON in step S1207 or S1209 of the first special drawing hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1401 of the main process in FIG. 21, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the contents of the first special drawing hold command described here are merely an example, and are not limited to those described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp contents similar to the first special drawing hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special drawing hold command is included in another command.

[Through gate processing]
Here, Fig. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. In the through gate process, when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular game reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The through gate process will be described below with reference to Fig. 20.

<Step S1301>
As shown in Fig. 20, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first judges whether the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301). Whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L is judged based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. If the MPU 41 judges that the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), it shifts the process to step S1303, and if it judges that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: No), it shifts the process to step S1302.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: No), it determines whether the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302). Whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 317R is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), it shifts the process to step S1303, and when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: No), it ends the through gate process.

<Step S1303>
When the MPU 41 judges that the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), or when the MPU 41 judges that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), it judges whether the normal map change reserve number X stored in the normal map change reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal map reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment) (step S1303). When the normal map change reserve number X is the maximum reserved number (step S1303: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate processing, and when the normal map change reserve number X is not the maximum reserved number (step S1303: No), the processing proceeds to step S1304.

<Steps S1304 and S1305>
If the regular map fluctuation reserve number X is not the maximum reserve number (step S1303: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the regular map fluctuation reserve number X (step S1304), obtains the counter values of the regular hit random number counter C4 and the regular hit type random number counter C5 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in Figure 17, and the value of the regular map fluctuation type counter CS2 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in Figure 21 described below, stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the regular map first reserve area SE1 to the regular map fourth reserve area SE4 of the regular map reserve storage area 412c in RAM 412 (step S1305), and terminates the through gate processing.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 21. In the main processing, the main control processing for the progress of the normal game, the special game, and the big win game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1401 to S1411 is executed as a regular processing at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S1413 and S1414 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1401 to S1411 to the next cycle.

<Step S1401>
As shown in Fig. 21, in step S1401, the MPU 41 executes an external output process to transmit output data such as the main timer interrupt process in Fig. 17 or the command set in the previous main process to a control device such as the sub-control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, when commands such as a normal pattern command, an electric role open command, an electric role close command, a special pattern command, a first special pattern hold command, a second special pattern hold command, a special pattern shift command, a big win game start command, an opening start command, an opening end command, an opening/closing execution mode start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an interval start command, an interval end command, an opening/closing execution mode end command, an ending start command, an ending end command, a big win game end command, and a game setting value change command are set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Also, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1403 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 updates the values of the special chart change type counter CS1 and the ordinary chart change type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the special chart change type counter CS1 and the ordinary chart change type counter CS2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313, the first prize winning opening 314, the second prize winning opening 315, the variable prize winning opening 316, etc., based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the winning. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a prize has been won in the general prize winning opening 313 or the first prize winning opening 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the general prize winning opening or the number of balls paid out from the first prize winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning. In addition, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the sure-win game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the second winning port 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning. Furthermore, in the big win game state, if a win occurs in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a normal game control process for controlling the progress of the normal game. Details of the normal game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a normal winning game control process for controlling the progress of the normal winning game executed when the result of the normal winning lottery is a win. The details of the normal winning game control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol game control process that controls the progress of the special symbol game. Details of the special symbol game control process will be described later with reference to Figures 26 to 28, but in the special symbol game control process, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, a special symbol variation pattern command required for the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time in the RAM 412 based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in Figure 17, and the special symbol variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of this process.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of a jackpot game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to Figs. 29 to 32.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for controlling transitions between various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable big win game state, and normal big win game state). Details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process is executed to control display or non-display of the setting value or change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d in response to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. The details of the game setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it is also conceivable that it may be executed only in the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or in the period from the start-up process until the launch of game balls begins. This prevents the game setting values from being changed after the player starts playing until the next time the power is turned on, thereby preventing the game setting values from being changed during the opening hours of the game hall.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes a process of updating specific performance information included in the game information. In this embodiment, the base information and the like are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. 37.

<Step S1411>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 executes a display control process for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process for the performance display monitor 43, a process is executed for displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update process in step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control process for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to Figs. 38 to 41.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 judges whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1401 and executes each process from S1401 onwards. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1413 and S1414 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, until it judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes).

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal win random number initial value counter CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, the MPU 41 updates the special chart change type counter CS1 and the ordinary chart change type counter CS2. Specifically, the counter values of the special chart change type counter CS1 and the ordinary chart change type counter CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values, the counter values are cleared to 0. After updating the special chart change type counter CS1 and the ordinary chart change type counter CS2, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1412.

[General game control processing]
Here, Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the normal game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the normal game control process, a process for controlling the variable display and stop display of the normal game in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 22.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Fig. 22, in the normal game control process, first, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the normal game change display flag indicating that the normal symbol is being changed (normal game is being executed) is on (step S1501). The normal game change display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the change display of the normal symbol (normal game) starts in the normal game change start process in Fig. 24 described later, and is set to off in step S1510 in the normal game control process when the normal symbol is stopped (normal game ends).

If the normal map change display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S1507. On the other hand, if the normal map change display flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
When the normal map variation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the electric role open flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open (the normal map winning game is being played) is on (step S1502). The electric role open flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric role 315b is opened in the normal map winning game control process of FIG. 25 described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric role 315b is closed.

If the electric role open flag is on (step S1502: Yes), i.e., if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. On the other hand, if the electric role open flag is off (step S1502: No), i.e., if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
When the electric role open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is being played, is on (step S1503). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when the jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1503: Yes), and if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, normal game play is not started while a jackpot game is being played.

Of course, a normal game may be started during the execution of a jackpot game. In this case, a win/loss determination for the normal lottery is performed based on the win/loss information (the values of the normal random number counter C4, the normal random number counter C5, and the normal variable type counter CS2) moved from the normal first reserve area SE1 of the normal reserve storage area 412c to the normal execution area SAE according to the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) before the jackpot game is started, that is, according to the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state. In other words, when the game state before the big win game is executed is a high-frequency support mode, which is a sure-win game state or a time-limited game state, the lottery for the regular win (regular win or miss), the regular win type (long-open regular win or short-open regular win), and the regular win display time are set based on the regular win hit/miss table (see FIG. 12(B)), the regular win type table (see FIG. 12(D)), and the regular win change table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the game state before the big win game is executed is a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, the lottery for the regular win (regular win or miss), the regular win type (long-open regular win or short-open regular win), and the regular win display time are set based on the regular win hit/miss table (see FIG. 12(A)), the regular win type table (see FIG. 12(C)), and the regular win change table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the electric role open flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal variable reserve number X stored in the normal variable reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the normal variable reserve number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process, and if the normal variable reserve number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process proceeds to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved ordinary map changes X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes the ordinary map data setting process for the ordinary map correctness information stored in the ordinary map reserved storage area 412c (step S1505), and the process proceeds to step S1506. Details of the ordinary map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol variation start process to cause the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a normal symbol variation display based on the information stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 412c, and ends the normal symbol game control process. Details of the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1507>
When the normal map variation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is being played, is on (step S1507). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when the jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal pattern variable display time has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern variable display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern displayed in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end the normal pattern game).

If the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 transitions to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol play), the MPU 41 ends the normal symbol play control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
When the normal pattern variation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game starts during the normal pattern game, or when the normal pattern variation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop displaying the normal pattern that is displayed (end the normal pattern game), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal pattern on the pattern corresponding to the result of the normal pattern winning lottery corresponding to the normal pattern game (step S1509), and sets the normal pattern variation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed (the normal pattern game is being executed) to off (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended, to on (step S1511), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal map winning game control process in FIG. 25 described below to determine whether it is time to start the normal map winning game (open the electric role 315b).

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal pattern is not only stopped (normal game is ended) when the normal pattern change display time of the normal pattern has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game is started during normal game, the normal pattern is stopped (normal game is ended). In other words, when a jackpot game is started, the normal game is forcibly ended before the normal pattern change display time of the normal pattern has elapsed. Of course, the normal game may be continued until the normal pattern change display time of the normal pattern has elapsed even when a jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 in Fig. 22. In the general map data setting process, the contents stored in the general map reservation storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 in Fig. 11 are updated. Hereinafter, the general map data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 23.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal map data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal map change reservation number X stored in the normal map change reservation number storage area SNA (step S1601), and moves the normal map correct/incorrect information from the normal map first reservation area SE1 to the normal map execution area SAE (step S1602). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the normal map correct/incorrect information stored in the normal map second reservation area SE2 to the normal map fourth reservation area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map second reservation area SE2 is moved to the normal map first reservation area SE1, the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map third reservation area SE3 is moved to the normal map second reservation area SE2, and the normal map correct/incorrect information in the normal map fourth reservation area SE4 is moved to the normal map third reservation area SE3.

[Regular map change start processing]
Here, Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 in Fig. 22. In the normal pattern variation start process, the normal pattern variation display in the normal pattern display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery. Hereinafter, the normal pattern variation start process will be described with reference to Fig. 24.

<Step S1701>
As shown in Fig. 24, in the normal game variation start process, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-limited game state) is on (step S1701). The high frequency support mode flag is set to on in step S2313 in Fig. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the game state transition process described later, and is set to off in step S2307 in Fig. 33 when the game state transitions from the probability variable game state or time-limited game state to the probability variable jackpot game state or normal jackpot game state, or in step S2326 in Fig. 34 when the game state transitions from the time-limited game state to the normal game state.

If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S1701: Yes), i.e., the game is in a high-frequency support mode, which is a guaranteed bonus game state or a time-limited game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1702, and if the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S1701: No), i.e., the game is in a low-frequency support mode, which is a normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
When the high-frequency support mode is in a sure-change game state or a time-saving game state (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12 (D)), whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c correspond to a normal win or not.

On the other hand, if the game is in the normal game mode, which is the low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the low-frequency support mode win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode win/loss type allocation table (see FIG. 12(C)) to determine whether the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c are values corresponding to a win/loss of a normal win.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 judges whether or not the winning/losing decision is a normal winning (step S1702 or S1703), it judges whether or not the result of the winning/losing decision is a long-opening normal winning in which the second winning port 315 is long-opened (step S1704). When the result of the winning/losing decision is a long-opening normal winning (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a long-opening normal winning flag indicating that the result of the winning/losing decision is a long-opening normal winning (step S1705) to on, and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, when the result of the winning/losing decision is not a long-opening normal winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the winning/losing judgment is not a long opening regular winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning in which the second winning port 315 is short opening (step S1706). If the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a short opening regular winning flag indicating that the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning (step S1707) to on, and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is not a short opening regular winning (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
When the long open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1705), when the short open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1707), or when the result of the win/loss judgment is NO (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal winning pattern setting process to set a normal winning pattern, which is the normal winning pattern display time in the normal winning pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal winning pattern game, by referring to a normal winning pattern display table (not shown). As described above, the normal winning pattern display table (not shown) includes a high frequency support mode normal winning pattern table that is referred to when in the high frequency support mode, and a low frequency support mode normal winning pattern display table that is referred to when in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal winning pattern setting process, a normal winning pattern is set based on a normal winning pattern display table according to the support mode type. In addition, since the high-frequency support mode normal pattern change display table is set so that the average time for displaying the normal pattern changes is shorter than that of the low-frequency support mode normal pattern change display table, the time for which normal pattern play is performed is shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a regular map fluctuation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/lose judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the regular map winning lottery) and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) in addition to the regular map fluctuation pattern set in step S1708 (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The normal map fluctuation pattern command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. In response to this, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 and the like to execute an effect corresponding to the normal map game, such as an effect indicating that a normal map game is being played or an effect indicating the result of a normal map winning lottery, based on the normal map fluctuation pattern command.

The normal map fluctuation pattern command may be a command that at least notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the result of the normal map winning lottery or the type of support mode does not necessarily have to be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 as a normal map fluctuation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal map winning lottery may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a normal map winning lottery result command when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after the transition to the high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being variably displayed, that is, that the normal symbol game is being executed, to ON (step S1711), and ends the normal symbol variable start process.

The regular symbol variation display flag is referenced in step S1501 of the regular symbol game control process in FIG. 22 to determine whether regular symbol game is being played (regular symbol variation display).

[Regular winning game control processing]
Here, Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the normal winning game control process, when the result of the normal winning lottery is a winning, a process is executed to switch between an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 and a restricted state that restricts it by controlling the opening and closing of the electric role 315b. Hereinafter, the normal winning game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 25.

<Step S1801>
As shown in Fig. 25, in the normal winning game control process, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the normal winning game stop display flag, which indicates that the normal winning pattern has been stopped and displayed (the normal winning game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is the timing to start the normal winning game. The normal winning game stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal winning game control process of Fig. 22.

If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start playing on a normal map, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), i.e., if it is not time to start playing on a normal map, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1812.

<Step S1802>
When the normal figure variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the normal figure winning game, the MPU 41 judges whether the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is being executed, is on (step S1802). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when the jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., when a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if the game is forcibly terminated due to the start of a jackpot game, the normal jackpot game will not start even if the result of the normal jackpot lottery for that normal game is a normal jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot game will not start while a jackpot game is being played. Of course, a new normal jackpot game may be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 judges whether the long open regular winning flag is set to on (step S1803). The long open regular winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery is a long open regular winning, and when the result of the regular winning lottery is a long open regular winning, it is set to on in step S1705 of the regular winning start processing of FIG. 24. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the regular winning lottery for the finished regular game is a long open regular winning. When the long open regular winning flag is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1804, and when the long open regular winning flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric role 315b in the long open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315) (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the normal winning game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric role 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
When the long open regular winning flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, when the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is not a long open regular winning, the MPU 41 judges whether the short open regular winning flag is set to ON (step S1806). The short open regular winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery is a short open regular winning, and when the result of the regular winning lottery is a short open regular winning, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the regular variation start processing in FIG. 24. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a short open regular winning. If the short-open regular winning flag is set on (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S1807, and if the short-open regular winning flag is set off (step S1806: No), i.e., if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a miss, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric role 315b in the short open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315) (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1808), and the process proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
When the result of the regular winning lottery is a win, if the flag indicating the type of regular winning (long open regular winning flag or short open regular winning flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric role 315b (step S1809). This opens the second winning hole 315, and the second winning hole 315 is set to an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role open command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role 315b is open (step S1810), and sets an electric role open flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open to ON (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric reel opening command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a performance indicating that the electric reel 315b is open, for example, to the pattern display unit 341, based on the electric reel opening command.

<Step S1812>
When the result of the regular winning lottery is a win and a process such as opening the electric device 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or when the long opening regular winning flag and the short opening regular winning flag are both set to off (when the result of the regular winning lottery is a miss) (both steps S1803 and S1806 are No), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular pattern change stop display flag, which indicates that the regular pattern has been stopped and displayed (the regular pattern game has ended) (step S1812), and terminates the regular pattern winning game control process.

<Step S1813>
When the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the electric role open flag, which is set to on when the electric role 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal map winning game is being executed. When the electric role open flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the normal map winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1814. On the other hand, when the electric role open flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, when the normal map winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric role open flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the normal winning game control process (step S1814), and judges whether the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to return the electric role 315b. When the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1816. On the other hand, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 ends the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric role 315b (step S1816). This closes the second winning hole 315, and limits the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role closing command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric role open flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open to OFF (step S1818), and ends the game control process for the normal winning.

The electric reel closing command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to end the presentation indicating that the electric reel is open, which is executed, for example, in the pattern display unit 341, based on the electric reel closing command.

[Special game control processing]
Here, Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the special symbol game control process, the memory contents of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated, and the progress of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, for example, the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 are controlled. Hereinafter, the special symbol game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 26.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Fig. 26, in step S1901, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is ON. In the jackpot game control process in Fig. 29 described later, the jackpot game in progress flag is set ON in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1901: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the special game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is being played, the special game does not start. Of course, the special game may be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the special jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed (the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is being executed) is on (step S1902). The special symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S2107 when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special symbol variable start processing of FIG. 28 described later, and is set to off in step S1909 when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the special symbol game control processing.

If the special symbol change display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), i.e., the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1906. On the other hand, if the special symbol change display flag is off (step S1902: No), i.e., when the jackpot game is not being played and the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing manner (special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the special pattern change display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special pattern is not being displayed changeably when the jackpot game is not in progress (special pattern game is in progress), the MPU 41 determines whether or not both the first special pattern reserved number N stored in the first special pattern reserved number memory area NAA of the special pattern reserved storage area 412b and the second special pattern reserved number M stored in the second special pattern reserved number memory area NAB are 0 (step S1903).

If both the first special chart reserved number N and the second special chart reserved number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), i.e., if neither the right to play the first special chart game nor the right to play the second special chart game is reserved, the MPU 41 ends the special chart game control process. On the other hand, if either the first special chart reserved number N or the second special chart reserved number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), i.e., if at least one of the right to play the first special chart game and the right to play the second special chart game is reserved, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either the first special chart reserved number N or the second special chart reserved number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, if there is at least one of the reserved right to play the first special chart game and the reserved right to play the second special chart game, the MPU 41 executes a special chart data setting process for the data (special chart data) of the special chart hit/miss information stored in the special chart reserved storage area 412b (step S1904), and the process proceeds to step S1905. Details of the special chart data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 executes a special symbol change start process for starting the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game), and ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

<Step S1906>
When the special symbol variation display flag is on (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed (the special symbol game is being played), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in step S2104 in the special symbol variation start process in Fig. 28 described later has elapsed since the start of the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is the timing to stop the display of the special symbol being displayed and end the special symbol game.

If the special pattern variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special pattern (step S1906: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the display of the special pattern being changed and end the special pattern game, the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special pattern (step S1906: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the display of the special pattern being changed and end the special pattern game, the MPU 41 ends the special pattern game control process.

<Steps S1907 to S1909>
When the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first or second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop the variable display of the special symbol and end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops the special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in a manner according to the result of the big win lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1907). Then, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variable stop flag indicating that the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed on (step S1908), and sets a special symbol variable display in progress flag indicating that the first or second special symbol is being displayed variable (the special symbol game is being executed) off (step S1909), and ends the special symbol game control process.

[Special data setting process]
Here, Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special drawing data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 in Fig. 26. In the special drawing data setting process, the memory contents of the special drawing reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special drawing data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 27.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2001, the MPU 41 judges whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0 or not. If the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, there is no second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game and there is a first special symbol reservation for the first special symbol game (see step S1903 in the special symbol game control process in FIG. 26), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2002. On the other hand, if the second special symbol reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, there is a second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2005. In other words, the MPU 41 judges whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0 or not, thereby starting the second special symbol game in priority to the first special symbol game.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol game is started before the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game may be started before the second special symbol game, or the special symbol game may be started in the order of ball entry (reservation order) into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, and either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game may be executed. Also, without setting a priority order for the start of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game may be executed independently of each other, and the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game may be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous fluctuation of special symbols).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the second special chart reserved number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special chart reserved number N stored in the first special chart reserved number memory area NAA of the first special chart reserved storage area REA (step S2002), and moves the special chart hit/miss information from the first reserved area REA1 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA to the special chart execution area AE (step S2003). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the special chart hit/miss information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special chart hit/miss information of the second reserved area REA2 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the special chart hit/miss information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the special chart hit/miss information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the process of step S2004 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2008.

<Steps S2005 to S2007>
If the second special chart reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the second special chart reservation number M stored in the second special chart reservation number memory area NAB of the second special chart reservation storage area REB (step S2005), and moves the special chart hit/miss information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special chart reservation storage area REB to the special chart execution area AE (step S2006). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the special chart hit/miss information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special chart reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special drawing hit/miss information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the special drawing hit/miss information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the special drawing hit/miss information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the process of step S2007 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2008.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, the MPU 41 sets a special pattern shift command indicating that the special pattern hit/miss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special pattern reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special pattern reserved storage area REB has shifted in the RAM 412, and ends the special pattern data setting process. This special pattern shift command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the display number of reserved displays corresponding to the first special pattern reserved or the second special pattern reserved displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special pattern shift command.

[Special chart change start processing]
Here, Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of Fig. 26. In the special symbol variation start processing, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363, and various processes associated with the start of the special symbol game are executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation start processing will be described with reference to Fig. 28.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is a high probability mode, i.e., a high probability mode. Whether the game state is a high probability mode or not is judged by whether a high probability mode game state flag indicating that the game state is a high probability mode, i.e., a high probability mode game state is set to ON. In the game state transition process described later, the high probability mode game state flag is set to ON when the game state is transitioned from a high probability mode jackpot game state to a high probability mode game state in step S2317 of FIG. 34, and is set to OFF when the game state is transitioned from a high probability mode game state to a high probability mode jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state in step S2309 of FIG. 33.

If the game state is a high probability mode, that is, a guaranteed variable game state (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2102, and if the game state is not a high probability mode, that is, a guaranteed variable game state (step S2101: No), that is, if the game state is a low probability mode, that is, a time-limited game state or a normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2103.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
If the game state is a high probability mode, which is a special game state (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out a high probability mode win/lose table (see Figure 9 (B)) saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change processing of Figure 35 described below, and performs a win/lose judgment based on the high probability mode win/lose table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the game state is not a high probability mode, which is a guaranteed bonus game state (step S2101: No), i.e., if the game state is a low probability mode, which is a time-limited game state or a normal game state, the MPU 41 reads out a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 9(A)) saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 of the game setting value change process in FIG. 35 described below, and performs a win/lose judgment based on the low probability mode win/lose table (step S2103).

In steps S2102 and S2103, the win/lose determination is performed based on the high probability mode win/lose table or the low probability mode win/lose table saved according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35 described later. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, the game setting value saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 35 described later may be read, and the high probability mode win/lose table or the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to that game setting value may be selected one by one to perform the win/lose determination.

<Step S2104>
When a win/loss determination is made in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 sets the varying display time of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 363 of the main display section 36 during that special pattern game as the special pattern variation pattern (step S2104).

The display time for the first or second special symbol (special symbol change pattern) is set based on the special symbol change type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot change table (see FIG. 10(A)) if the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot, and is set based on the special symbol change type counter CS1 and the special jackpot change table (see FIG. 10(B)) if the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a sure jackpot, and is set based on the special symbol change type counter CS1 and the sure jackpot change table (see FIG. 10(C)) if the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S2102 or S2103 is a miss.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a special pattern variation command including the lottery result in the big win lottery for the special pattern game, which is the result of the win/loss judgment in step S2102 or S2103, and the special pattern variation pattern set in step S2104, and proceeds to step S2106. The special pattern variation command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special pattern game presentation on the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the special pattern variation command.

As described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command any one of "A01" to "A03" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03". When the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R variable jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command any one of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R variable jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03". When the result of the jackpot lottery is a "16R variable jackpot", the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command any one of "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating that it is a 16R variable jackpot is added to the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03". Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 as a special chart variation pattern command one of "D01" to "D08," which is a special chart variation pattern "01" to "08" with a "D" added to indicate a miss. Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of miss (reach for a miss before or after, reach for a miss other than before or after, complete miss) in the special chart variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts a special pattern game by starting the varying display of the special pattern in the first special pattern display area 362 or the second special pattern display area 363 of the main display unit 36, and then transitions to step S2107.

When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the special symbol, it adds 1 to the "cumulative number of jackpot lottery draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S2103 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive misses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and if the win/loss determination is a jackpot, it clears the "number of consecutive misses" to 0.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being played) to ON, and proceeds to step S2108. The special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S1902 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26 to determine whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the special symbol game is being played) in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 41 sets a special symbol change stop flag indicating that the special symbol change has stopped (the special symbol game has ended) to OFF, and proceeds to step S2109. The special symbol change stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process in Fig. 26, and is referenced to determine whether or not it is the timing to start a jackpot game in step S2202 of the jackpot game control process in Fig. 29 described later.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a time-saving game state flag indicating a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is ON. The time-saving game state flag is set ON when a normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of Fig. 34 in a game state transition process described later, and is set OFF when the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to a jackpot game state or a normal game state in step S2310 of Fig. 33 or step S2325 of Fig. 34.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2110. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2109: Yes), i.e., if the game is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 ends the special chart variation start process.

<Step S2110>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2109: Yes), that is, when the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special game plays that can be executed in the time-saving game state (step S2110), and ends the special game change start process. The time-saving number counter is set when the game state is transitioned from the big win game state to the time-saving game state in step S2320 in the game state transition process in FIG. 34 described later.

In this embodiment, the time-saving counter is set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a time-saving game state, but the time-saving counter may also be set when the game state transitions from a jackpot game state to a probability variable game state. In other words, by setting the maximum number of special patterns executed in the probability variable game state to a finite number of times, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine.

The gaming machine 10 can also be set to transition from the jackpot game state to the normal game state without transitioning to the time-saving game state when the normal jackpot game ends, which is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a normal jackpot. In this case, the time-saving counter is not set after the normal jackpot game ends.

[Jackpot Game Control Processing]
29 to 32 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the jackpot game control process, a process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game, such as the opening and closing control of the opening and closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316, is executed. The jackpot game control process will be described below with reference to Figs. 29 to 32.

<Step S2201>
29, in step S2201, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is ON. The jackpot game in progress flag is set ON in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process when a jackpot game is started, and is set OFF in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S2201: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2211. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S2201: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the special symbol variation stop flag indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed is on. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol variation stop flag is set to on in step S1908 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26, and when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol variation stop flag is set to off in step S2108 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the special symbol game that was started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended, thereby judging whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game.

If the special symbol change stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game can be started because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2203. On the other hand, if the special symbol change stop flag is off (step S2202: No), i.e., if the jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed and changed, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started (executed) when the special pattern is being displayed (the special pattern game is being executed), but the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the special pattern is being displayed (the special pattern game is being executed). For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the first special pattern is being displayed, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) while the second special pattern is being displayed. Specifically, by making it possible to change to simultaneous changes of the first special pattern and the second special pattern as described above, the second special pattern game may be executed while the jackpot game for the first special pattern game is being executed, and the first special pattern game may be executed while the jackpot game for the second special pattern game is being executed. Furthermore, the jackpot game for the first special game and the jackpot game for the second special game may be executed simultaneously, or if the start condition for one of the jackpot games for the first special game and the jackpot game for the second special game is met during the execution of the other jackpot game, the other jackpot game may be started after the end of one jackpot game.

<Step S2203>
When the special symbol variation stop flag is on (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot or not. Whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot or not is judged based on the special symbol hit/miss information for the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions to step S2204. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2204>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the start of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot game (probable jackpot game or normal jackpot game) (step S2204), and proceeds to step S2205. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a jackpot game presentation according to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started to ON, and proceeds to step S2206. The jackpot game start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to transition the game state to a high probability jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state in step S2301 of the game state transition process in FIG. 33 described later.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed to ON, and proceeds to step S2207. The jackpot game in progress flag is referenced in step S2201 of the jackpot game control process, step S1503 of the normal game control process in FIG. 22, and step S1901 of the special game control process in FIG. 26, in order to determine whether a jackpot game is being executed or not.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds in the open/close execution mode, and proceeds to step S2208. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable probability jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "16" when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R variable probability jackpot.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the big win game is to start, and the process proceeds to step S2209. The opening start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start an opening performance in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the opening start command.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening, and moves the process to step S2210. The opening time counter is referred to in step S2213 of the big win game control process in FIG. 30 to determine whether it is time to end the opening.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets an opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to ON, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2211 in the jackpot game control process to determine whether the opening is being executed or not.

<Step S2211>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S2201: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening in progress flag, which indicates that the opening is being played, is on (step S2211).

If the opening flag is on (step S2211: Yes), i.e., if the opening is in progress, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2212 in FIG. 30. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), i.e., if the opening is not in progress, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2222.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the opening in progress flag is on (step S2211: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, as shown in Fig. 30, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S2212), and judges whether the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2213). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to end the opening.

If the opening time counter value after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2214. On the other hand, if the opening time counter value after subtraction is not 0 (step S2213: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the opening, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 sets an opening end command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the opening of the big win game is ending (step S2214). The opening end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the opening performance executed in the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening in progress flag to OFF, which indicates that the opening is in progress (step S2215), and transitions to step S2216.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets an opening and closing execution mode start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that an opening and closing execution mode in which multiple (5 or 16) rounds of play are to be started, and proceeds to step S2117. The opening and closing execution mode start command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start the opening and closing execution mode presentation executed in the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the opening and closing execution mode start command.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that a round game is about to start, and proceeds to step S2218. The round game start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start a round game presentation corresponding to each round game, including a round number display, on the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the round game start command.

In this embodiment, the round game performance is executed individually for each round game, but the round game performance may be executed as a series of performances in the open/close execution mode, and the number of rounds in each round game may be displayed. In this case, the interval performance does not need to be executed between round games, and a performance that displays the number of rounds in the next round game to be executed may be executed as the interval performance.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 41 subtracts one from the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds to be played in the open/close execution mode, and further opens the variable winning opening 316 by operating the open/close door 319 (step S2219), and transitions to step S2220.

<Steps S2220 and S2221>
In step S2220, the MPU 41 sets a round game in progress flag indicating that a round game is being played to ON, and further sets a round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game, and ends the jackpot game control process. The round game time counter is referenced in step S2224 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 31 in order to determine whether it is time to end the round game (return the opening and closing door 319 and close the variable winning opening 316) due to the passage of a specified time.

<Step S2222>
29, when the opening flag is OFF (step S2211: No), that is, when the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed is set ON (step S2222).

If the round play in progress flag is on (step S2222: Yes), i.e., if a round play is being played, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2223 in FIG. 31. On the other hand, if the round play in progress flag is off (step S2222: No), i.e., if a round play is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2226.

<Steps S2223 and S2224>
When the round game in progress flag is on (step S2222: Yes), that is, when a round game is being played, as shown in Fig. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game. Then, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2224). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to end the round game due to the passage of a specified time (to close the variable winning port by returning the opening and closing door 319).

If the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the round play due to the passage of the specified time (closing the variable winning opening due to the return of the opening and closing door 319), the MPU 41 transitions to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the round play due to the passage of the specified time (closing the variable winning opening due to the return of the opening and closing door 319), the MPU 41 transitions to step S2225.

<Step S2225>
If the value of the round play time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not time to end the round play due to the passage of the specified time (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening and closing door 319), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 is judged based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 when a game ball has entered the ball entry sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17.

If a game ball has entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2226, and if a game ball has not entered the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: No), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
When a game ball enters the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ball number counter indicating the number of game balls that entered the variable winning opening 316 in the round game (step S2226). Then, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the ball number counter after the increment has reached 10 (step S2227), that is, whether it is time to end the round game due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (closing the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319).

If the value of the ball entry counter after the addition reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 transitions to step S2228. On the other hand, if the value of the ball entry counter after the addition does not reach 10 (step S2227: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the round of play due to the upper limit number of game balls entering the variable winning opening 316 (the variable winning opening is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2228>
If the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), or if the value of the ball number counter reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319 (step S2228), and proceeds to step S2229. That is, when it is time to end the round game due to the passage of a specified time or the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 and ends the round game.

<Steps S2229 to S2231>
In step S2229, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the round game is to end. The round game end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice and lamp control device 5 can end the round game presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341 and the like based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the ball number counter indicating the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning port 316 during that round of play (step S2230), sets the round play in progress flag to OFF, indicating that a round of play is being played (step S2230), and transitions to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
In step S2232, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds of play in the opening and closing execution mode is 0 (step S2232), that is, whether it is the timing to end the opening and closing execution mode (whether there are any unexecuted rounds of play).

If the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2241. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), i.e., if there is an unexecuted round of play, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2233.

<Step S2233>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), i.e., if there is an unexecuted round of play, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 of the start of an interval between rounds of play (step S2233), and proceeds to step S2234. The interval start command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start an interval presentation in the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the interval start command.

In this embodiment, an interval presentation is executed during the interval between rounds of play, but the interval presentation may be omitted and the round presentation for the previously executed round of play may be continued during the interval, or a round presentation for the next round of play may be executed.

<Steps S2234 and S2235>
In step S2234, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag to ON, which indicates that an interval between rounds of play is being executed.Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S2235), and ends the jackpot game control process.The interval time counter is referred to in step S2238 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start a round of play).

<Step S2236>
29, when the round game in progress flag is OFF (step S2222: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the interval in progress flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed is ON (step S2236). The interval in progress flag is set ON in step S2234 in FIG. 31 in the jackpot game control process when the interval is to be started, and is set OFF in step S2240 in FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process when the interval is to be ended.

If the interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), i.e., if an interval between rounds is in progress, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2237 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the interval flag is off (step S2236: No), i.e., if an interval between rounds is not in progress, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2245.

<Steps S2237 and S2238>
If the interval flag is on (step S2236: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the interval time counter indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S2237), as shown in Fig. 32. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238), that is, whether it is time to end the interval (start a round game).

If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the interval and start a round of play, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2239. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2238: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the interval (start a round of play), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2239 and S2240>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the interval and start a round of play, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the interval is ending. The interval end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the interval presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341 and the like based on the interval end command.
Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between rounds of play is being executed to OFF (step S2240), and shifts the process to the above-mentioned step S2217. By shifting the process to the above-mentioned step S2217 in Fig. 30, the process of steps S2217 to S2221 related to the start of the round of play is executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2241>
Returning to Fig. 31, when the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 41 sets an opening and closing execution mode end command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game is to be ended (step S2241), and the process proceeds to step S2242. The opening and closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see Fig. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to end the interval presentation executed in the pattern display unit 341 and the like based on the opening and closing execution mode end command.

<Step S2242>
In step S2242, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the ending of the big win game is to start, and the process proceeds to step S2243. The ending start command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to start an ending presentation in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2243 and S2244>
In step S2243, the MPU 41 sets an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets an ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S2244), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referred to in step S2247 in FIG. 32 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S2245>
Returning to FIG. 29, if the interval in progress flag is off (step S2236: No), i.e., if the interval between rounds is not being executed, it is determined whether the ending in progress flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, is on (step S2245).

If the ending in progress flag is on (step S2245: Yes), i.e., if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2246 in FIG. 32. On the other hand, if the ending in progress flag is off (step S2245: No), i.e., if the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2250.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
If the ending flag is on (step S2245: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S2246), as shown in Fig. 32. Then, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2247). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game).

If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 transitions to step S2248. On the other hand, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2247: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2248 and S2249>
If the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets an ending end command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending of the jackpot game is to end. The ending end command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to end the ending presentation executed in the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending in progress flag, which indicates that the ending is being executed, to OFF (step S2249), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2250>
Returning to Fig. 29, if the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), i.e., if it is not during the opening, the round play, the interval, or the ending, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command to notify the voice and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending (step S2250), and proceeds to step S2251. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see Fig. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to end the jackpot game presentation executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S2251 and S2252>
In step S2251, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is ended is set to ON. The jackpot game end flag is referred to in step S2312 of the game state transition process in FIG. 34 described later in order to determine whether or not to transition from the jackpot game state to the high frequency support mode (probability game state or time-saving game state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is being played, to OFF (step S2252), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition process]
Here, Fig. 33 and Fig. 34 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Fig. 21. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state, and normal jackpot game state) is executed. Hereinafter, the game state transition process will be described with reference to Fig. 33 and Fig. 34.

<Step S2301>
As shown in Fig. 33, in step S2301, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game start flag indicating the start of a jackpot game is ON. In the jackpot game control process of Fig. 29, the jackpot game start flag is set ON in step S2205 when a jackpot game is started, and is set OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game is ended.

If the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2302. On the other hand, if the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2312 in FIG. 34.

<Steps S2302 and S2303>
When the jackpot game start flag is on (step S2301: Yes), that is, when starting a jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to off (step S2302) and judges whether the jackpot game to be started is a jackpot game with a probability of winning or losing (step S2303). Whether the jackpot game to be started is a jackpot game with a probability of winning or losing is judged based on the special symbol winning or losing information stored in the special symbol execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412.

If the MPU 41 determines that a special jackpot game is to be started (step S2303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2304. On the other hand, if the special jackpot game is not to be started (step S2303: No), i.e., if a normal jackpot game is to be started, the process proceeds to step S2305.

<Step S2304>
When starting a high probability jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a high probability jackpot game state flag indicating that the high probability jackpot game is in a high probability jackpot game state in which the high probability jackpot game is executed to ON (step S2304), and proceeds to step S2305. The high probability jackpot game state flag is referenced in step S2315 of the game state transition process in FIG. 34 in order to determine whether the game state is to be transitioned to a high probability game state or a normal game state when the jackpot game is ended.

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is ON. The normal game state flag is set to ON in step S2324 of FIG. 34 of the game state transition process when a time-saving game state is transitioned to a normal game state, and is set to OFF in step S2306 of the game state transition process when a normal game state is transitioned to a jackpot game state (high probability jackpot game state or normal jackpot game state).

If the normal game state flag is on (step S2305: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to off (step S2306) and ends the game state transition process. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), i.e., if the game is not in a normal game state but in a high frequency support mode (high probability game state or time-saving game state), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, if the game is not in the normal game state but in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency game state or time-saving game state), the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the game is in the high-frequency support mode, to off (step S2307), and transitions to processing in step S2308.

<Steps S2308 and S2309>
In step S2308, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a probability variable game state flag indicating a probability variable game state is ON. In the game state transition process, the probability variable game state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. 34 when a probability variable big win game state is transitioned to a probability variable game state, and is set to OFF in step S2309 when a probability variable game state is transitioned to a big win game state (probability variable big win game state or normal big win game state).

If the high probability game state flag is on (step S2308: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a high probability game state, the MPU 41 sets the high probability game state flag to off (step S2309) and ends the game state transition process. On the other hand, if the high probability game state flag is off (step S2308: No), i.e., if the game is not in a normal game state or a high probability game state but in a time-limited game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2310.

<Steps S2310 and S2311>
If the probability variable game state flag is OFF (step S2308: No), that is, if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state to OFF (step S2310).Then, the MPU 41 clears the time-saving game number counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state (step S2311), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2312>
When the jackpot game start flag is OFF (step S2301: No), that is, when it is not time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game end flag indicating the end of the jackpot game is ON (step S2312), as shown in Fig. 34. When the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game end flag is set ON in step S2251 in the jackpot game control process in Fig. 29.

If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot game is to end, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2313. On the other hand, if the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2322.

<Steps S2313 and S2314>
If the jackpot game end flag is on (step S2312: Yes), i.e., when the jackpot game is to be ended, the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag, indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in effect, on (step S2313), and sets the jackpot game end flag, indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, off (step S2314), and transitions to step S2315.

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a probability variable jackpot game state flag indicating that the probability variable jackpot game is in a probability variable jackpot game state in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed is on. In the game state transition process, the probability variable jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S2304 of Fig. 33 when the probability variable jackpot game state, normal game state, or time-limited game state is transitioned to the probability variable jackpot game state, and is set to off in step S2318 when the probability variable jackpot game state is transitioned to the probability variable jackpot game state.

If the high probability jackpot gaming state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a high probability jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2316. On the other hand, if the high probability jackpot gaming state flag is off (step S2315: No), i.e., if the game is in a normal jackpot gaming state rather than a high probability jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2319.

<Step S2316>
If the probability variable jackpot game state flag is on (step S2315: Yes), that is, if the probability variable jackpot game state is in progress, the MPU 41 sets a probability variable game state command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the probability variable game state is in progress (step S2316), and the process proceeds to step S2317. The probability variable game state command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special pattern performance corresponding to the probability variable game state in the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the probability variable game state command.

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 41 sets a probability variable game state flag indicating that the game is in a probability variable game state to ON, and proceeds to step S2318. The probability variable game state flag is referred to in step S2308 of FIG. 33 in the game state transition process in order to specify the game state when the big win game is started.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag, which indicates that the game is in a probability variable jackpot gaming state, to OFF, and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2319>
If the probability variable jackpot game state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, if the game is in a normal jackpot game state rather than a probability variable jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving game state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is in a time-saving game state (step S2319), and the process proceeds to step S2320. The time-saving game state command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a special pattern performance corresponding to the time-saving game state in the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the time-saving game state command.

<Steps S2320 and S2321>
In step S2320, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving counter indicating the remaining number of times that special symbols can be played in the time-saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit of the number of times that special symbols can be played in the time-saving game state (100 times in this embodiment) to the time-saving counter. The time-saving counter is decremented by one in step S2110 of the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. 28 every time a special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state, and is referred to in step S2323 of the game state transition processing in order to determine whether or not to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by executing a specified number of special symbol games.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag to ON, indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state (step S2321), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2322>
If the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), i.e., if it is not the time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, is on (step S2322).

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2323. On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S2322: No), i.e., if the game is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S2323>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S2322: Yes), that is, when the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the number of remaining special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving game state is 0 (step S2323). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is to be changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by executing the specified number of special symbols.

If the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), i.e., if the time-saving game state is to transition to the normal game state by playing the special game a specified number of times, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2324. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S2323: No), i.e., if the time-saving game state is not to transition to the normal game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S2324 to S2326>
If the value of the time-saving counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, if the time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state by executing the specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S2324). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state to OFF (step S2325), sets the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the high-frequency support mode to OFF (step S2326), and ends the game state shift process.

[Game setting value change process]
Here, Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in step S1409 of the main process in Fig. 21. In the game setting value change process, a process is executed to control display or non-display of the setting value, or change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, according to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. The setting value change process will be described below with reference to Fig. 35.

<Step S2401>
35, in step S2401, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a game setting value display flag is ON, which indicates that a game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The game setting value display flag is set ON in step S2405 (to be described later) in the game setting value change process when the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by switching the power of the setting value display unit 45 from OFF to ON, and is set OFF in step S2412 (to be described later) in the game setting value change process when the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by switching the power of the setting value display unit 45 from ON to OFF.

If the game setting value display flag is on (step S2401: Yes), i.e., if the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2406. On the other hand, if the game setting value display flag is off (step S2401: No), i.e., if the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2402.

<Step S2402>
If the game setting value display flag is off (step S2401: No), i.e., if the game setting value is not displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S2402), i.e., whether an operation has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46 to turn on the power of the setting value display unit 45.

If the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), i.e., if an operation to turn on the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2403. On the other hand, if the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S2402: No), i.e., if an operation to turn on the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is not performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, the MPU 41 ends the game setting value change process.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2403) and displays the number indicating the read game set value on the set value display unit 45 (step S2404). This allows the current game set value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag, which indicates that the game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, to on (step S2405), and ends the set value change process.

<Step S2406>
When the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S2406). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether a rotation operation for changing a game setting value has been performed. When the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2407, and when the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2409.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process (step S2407) to change the display on the set value display unit 45. For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 causes a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed, and conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 causes a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation to be displayed.

When the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "6", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed to "6". Also, when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "6", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the right, and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "1", it may be set so that it does not rotate further to the left.

Then, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value (step S2408), and ends the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a valid game setting value. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, the game setting value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45.

In step S2408, the MPU 41 sets a game setting value change command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value.

<Step S2409>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409), i.e., whether or not an operation to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45 has been performed on the set value change operation unit 46. If the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2410, and if the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S2409: No), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process.

<Steps S2410 to S2412>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (A)) and a high probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 9 (B)) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S2410).

Here, in step S2410, a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 9(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 9(B)) are selected according to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. In other words, since a win/lose table with the same game setting values is selected for the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table, changing the game setting values is easy. However, it is also possible to change the setting values in the low probability mode and the high probability mode individually. In this case, it becomes possible to set different levels (numbers) of setting values for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, setting the setting value for the low probability mode to "1" and the setting value for the high probability mode to "6".

Then, the MPU 41 hides the number corresponding to the game setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2411), sets the setting value display flag to OFF (step S2412), and ends the setting value change process.

[Specific performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1410 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the specific performance information update process, specific performance information such as base information is updated. Also, Fig. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of Fig. 36. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to Figs. 36 and 37.

<Steps S2501 to S2503>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 41 reads various payout ball numbers for current status base calculations from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, such as the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and further reads the "number of out balls" in the normal game state for current status base calculations from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2502). Then, the MPU 41 calculates the "current status base BL", which is the ratio of the combined number of paid balls of the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" to the "number of out balls" in the normal game state based on the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port", "number of balls paid out from the first winning port", and "number of out balls" in the normal game state for the current status base calculation, updates the "current status base BL" stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S2503), and transitions to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 judges whether the number of out balls in the normal game state for the current status base calculation read in step S2502 from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 has reached 60,000 balls. If the number of out balls in the normal game state for the current status base calculation has reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2505, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2509.

<Steps S2505 to S2508>
If the number of out balls in the normal game state for calculating the current base has reached 60,000 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 updates various base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S2505 to S2507). Specifically, as shown in Figures 37(A) and 37(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S2505), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S2506), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S2507).

Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of balls paid out from the general winning slot, the number of balls paid out from the first winning slot, and the number of out balls in the normal game state for base calculation, which are stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 balls (step S2508), and proceeds to step S2509.

<Step S2509>
When the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 is updated (steps S2505 to S2508), or when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 reads information necessary for calculating other specific performance information other than the base information (e.g., the number of unit jackpot draws, consecutive feature ratio, feature ratio) from the game information storage area 412d, calculates the other specific performance information based on the read information, updates the values of the other specific performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S2509), and terminates the specific performance information update process.

[Display control process of performance display monitor]
38 to 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1411 of the main process of Fig. 21. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to Figs. 38 to 41.

<Step S2601>
38, in step S2601, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a BL display flag indicating that the current status base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 is set to ON. Here, when the display of the current status base BL is started on the performance display monitor 43, the BL display flag is set to ON in step S2606 described later in the display control process or in step S2630 in FIG.

If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), i.e., if the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2608 in FIG. 39. On the other hand, if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), i.e., if the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2602.

<Step S2602>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), that is, when the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the B1 display flag, which indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, is set to ON (step S2602). Here, when the display of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 starts on the performance display monitor 43, the B1 display flag is set to ON in step S2612 in FIG. 39 described later in the display control process.

If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), i.e., if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2617 in FIG. 40. On the other hand, if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), i.e., if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S2603.

<Step S2603>
When the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), that is, when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 judges whether the B2 display flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 is set to ON (step S2603). Here, the B2 display flag is set to ON in step S2621 in FIG. 40 described later in the display control process when the display of the previous 60,000 ball base B2 starts on the performance display monitor 43.

If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), i.e., if the performance display monitor 43 is displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2626 in FIG. 41. On the other hand, if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2603: No), i.e., if the performance display monitor 43 is not displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2604.

<Step S2604>
If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2603: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S2604). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2605, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from OFF to ON (step S2604: No), the MPU 41 ends the display control process.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2605). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to on (step S2606). Furthermore, in order to display the current status base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets a BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current status base BL on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2607), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), that is, when the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2607 of Fig. 38 (step S2608), as shown in Fig. 39, and judges whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2609). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), i.e., if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2610. On the other hand, if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), i.e., if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2614.

<Steps S2610 to S2613>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag, indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2610), and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2611). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 37(A), "8.", "1", "3", "3" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B), "8.", "1", "2", "9" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to ON (step S2612). Furthermore, in order to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2613), and ends the display control process.

<Step S2614>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2615, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2614: No), the display control process is terminated.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the letters and numbers indicating the current base BL are turned off.

<Steps S2615 and S2616>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets to off the BL display flag indicating that the current status base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2615). Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears to 0 the value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current status base BL on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2616), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S2617 and S2618>
Returning to Fig. 38, when the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2613 of Fig. 39 (step S2617), as shown in Fig. 40, and judges whether the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S2618). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base B2 before last.

If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), i.e., if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2619. On the other hand, if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), i.e., if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2623.

<Steps S2619 to S2622>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous-previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag, indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2619), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the previous-previous 60,000 ball base B2, which is included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2620). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 37(A), "8.", "2", "3", "2" indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous round is 32% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 37(B), "8.", "2", "3", "3" indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous round is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, which indicates that the 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous round is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to ON (step S2621). Furthermore, in order to display the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time for a certain period of time on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 sets a B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2622), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S2623>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2, the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2624, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2623: No), the display control process is terminated.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 on the performance display monitor 43 are cut off, and the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are turned off.

<Steps S2624 and S2625>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag, which indicates that the 60,000 ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2624), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S2625), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S2626 and S2627>
Returning to Fig. 38, when the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 from the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2622 of Fig. 40 (step S2626), and judges whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2627). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time to the current base BL.

If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), i.e., if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the time before last to the current base BL, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2628. On the other hand, if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), i.e., if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the time before last to the current base BL, the MPU 41 transitions to step S2632.

<Steps S2628 to S2631>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time to the current base BL, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, to off (step S2628), and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2629). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 37(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 37(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets a BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to ON (step S2630), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2631), and ends the display control process.

<Step S2632>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time to the current base BL, the MPU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2633, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2632: No), the display control process is terminated.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 on the performance display monitor 43 are de-energized, and the letters and numbers indicating the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous round are turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the base information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, but the base information may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 at all times while the power of the gaming machine 10 is on, or may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the front frame 11 is open.

<Steps S2633 and S2634>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag, which indicates that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous round is displayed, to off (step S2633). Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the value of the B2 display time counter, which indicates the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous round, to 0 (step S2634), and ends the display control process.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 42 to 54.

In addition, in another embodiment, some or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing when the voice lamp control device 5 is started, and NMI interrupt processing during a power outage, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
42 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 executes a counter update process (step S2701), an operation detection process (step S2702), a command determination process (step S2703), a special game presentation control process (step S2704), and a big win game presentation control process (step S2705).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 executes updates of the performance pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the change display counter, etc. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the performance type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. The performance pattern type counter is used to determine the change type (performance pattern) based on the special symbol change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Also, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol that is stopped first based on the special symbol change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the change display counter. This change display counter is for measuring the change display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the change display counter is set to 0 when the remaining change display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the change display counter, it is possible to know the remaining change display time, whether a change is occurring, whether the change display of the pattern display section 341 has ended, and so on.

[Operation detection process]
Next, a description will be given of an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 42. Here, Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), a selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), a decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and a decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2801 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interruption period of the sub timer interruption process. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 44.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
44, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S2901). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S2902). After that, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag (step S2903), and ends the operation detection process.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the first detection flag to the third detection flag as the operation history of the operation button 20. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two states before that is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag is composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 46(A)). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 46(A)). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 46(A)). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 46(A)). Here, Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Also, Fig. 46(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to Figs. 45 and 46(A).

<Step S3001>
60, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON (step S3001). If the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to on (step S3002). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on (step S3003). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
When the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S3004), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 46 (A)). Then, the first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to on, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and can grasp the time during which the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of times that the operation button operation continuation command is transmitted in succession. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time that the operation button 20 has been continuously operated, making it possible to execute an operation button presentation based on a long press operation.

<Step S3005>
If the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is on (step S3005). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3006). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
When the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S3007). That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 46(A)), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, by using the second operation pattern flag to determine whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, three operation states of the operation button 20 are reflected, thereby preventing erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and preventing the start of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off (step S3009), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off (see FIG. 46 (A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), or if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off (step S3010), and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to off (see FIG. 46 (A)). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 43, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an up selection button operation process, a down selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation process>
In the up selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the up selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the up selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "up selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44.

[Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 43, in the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes up selection operation detection pattern determination process, down selection operation detection pattern determination process, left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

As shown in FIG. 46(B), in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first up selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first up selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the up selection button 211 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the second up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third up selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the up selection button 211 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the up selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the lower selection button 212 from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "lower selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

As shown in FIG. 46(C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third lower selection operation detection flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "left selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45 .

As shown in FIG. 46(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Decision button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 43, in the decision button operation detection process (step S2805), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 44, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57.

[Decision Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the deciding operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the deciding button 21B from the operation history of the deciding button 21B determined based on the first deciding operation detection flag, the second deciding operation detection flag, and the third deciding operation detection flag. Here, the deciding operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the deciding operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "deciding operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 45.

As shown in FIG. 46(F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

When the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the decision button 21B has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first decision operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the decision button 21B has ended).

In addition, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that, if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Command Judgment Process]
Next, a description will be given of an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 42. Here, Fig. 47 and Fig. 48 are a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process.

<Step S3101>
47, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3101: No), the command determination process ends.

The command received from the main control unit 4 is stored in an unprocessed command storage area in the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Furthermore, if a command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in this step S3101 and is to be processed, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area and stored, for example, in a processing work storage area.

<Step S3102>
When a command is received (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3102). The special symbol variation pattern command is a command that indicates the variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game (special symbol variation pattern) and the lottery result in the big win lottery.

If the received command is a special chart variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3103. If the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3107.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (presentation pattern) setting process (step S3103) and a stop symbol combination setting process (step S3104) based on the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. The following describes the details of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process and the stop symbol combination setting process.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process, the special game presentation to be executed by various presentation means (the pattern display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, the movable role member 39, the sub movable display unit 38) in the special game is set. Specifically, the MPU 51 refers to the variation type table (see FIG. 49) based on the special game variation pattern command, sets the variation type (presentation pattern) and the variation display time, and further sets the presentation pattern type based on the presentation pattern type selection table (see FIG. 50) corresponding to the variation type (presentation pattern).

Here, Figure 49 shows an example of a variation type table referenced by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (presentation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 49, the variation type table specifies the variation display time and the variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the special chart variation pattern command. For example, the special chart variation pattern command "A01" for which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30 s" and the variation type "normal reach presentation pattern." In addition, the special chart variation pattern command "B02" for which the lottery result is "5R certain jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach presentation pattern," and the special chart variation pattern command "C03" for which the lottery result is "16R certain jackpot" and the special chart variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90 s" and the variation type "special reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the special chart fluctuation pattern command "D04" where the lottery result is "miss" and the special chart fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with a fluctuation display time of "7 s" and a fluctuation type of "non-reach performance pattern," and the special chart fluctuation pattern command "D05" where the lottery result is "miss" and the special chart fluctuation pattern is "05" is associated with a fluctuation display time of "10 s" and a fluctuation type of "non-reach performance pattern."

FIG. 50(A) to FIG. 50(C) are diagrams showing an example of a presentation pattern type selection table. The presentation pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (presentation pattern). Specifically, FIG. 50(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a normal reach presentation, FIG. 50(B) is a super reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a super reach presentation, and FIG. 50(C) is a special reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the special chart game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of performance types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of performance types. Also, in Figure 50, the performance type table for when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50(A), "presentation pattern X1" to "presentation pattern X5" are determined as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot, and miss). Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, presentation pattern X1 to presentation pattern X3 included in the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation is executed in which the decorative symbols are in a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation presentation in which the decorative symbols are rapidly varying, and the final individual presentation type is a normal reach presentation.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, performances in which a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develops into a super reach performance as the final individual performance type, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reach performance and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. Note that the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without going through a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance and a super reach performance are executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further, as the final individual performance type, it develops into a special reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance or the super reach performance and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern type selection table may include a special reach performance pattern that develops into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without going through at least one of the normal reach performance and the super reach performance.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) displayed variably on the symbol display unit 341 in a special symbol game are stopped and displayed on an active line. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the stop symbol combination by referring to the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 51(B)) based on the special symbol variable pattern command.

Here, FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of decorative symbol and the color of the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 51(A), in this embodiment, the numbers "1" to "9" are set as the decorative symbols, and among these numbers, "3" and "7" are red, "1", "5" and "9" are green, and "2", "4", "6" and "8" are red. In this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is notified by the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed on one or more effective lines set in the symbol display unit 341. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, decorative symbols of the same number are stopped and displayed on the effective line in a double number, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, decorative symbols other than double numbers are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

It is also possible to provide different types of decorative symbols (numbers, colors) that are more advantageous to players. For example, odd numbers are more advantageous to players than even numbers, and among odd numbers, red "3" and "7" are more advantageous to players than green "1", "5" and "9". In this case, for example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated or suggested by the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. For example, if the stopping pattern combination is "777", it may be clearly indicated that it is a 16R jackpot, if the stopping pattern combination is "333", it may be clearly indicated that it is a jackpot, and if the stopping pattern combination is an even number, it may be suggested that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed may be clearly indicated or suggested that the result of the jackpot lottery for a specific reserved special game that is executed after the special game is a jackpot (jackpot expectation). For example, in the special game until the special game for a specific reserved is executed, the same colored scattered eyes may be displayed as so-called chance eyes, and the color of the scattered eyes (chance eyes) may be used to clearly indicate or suggest the probability of winning as a so-called pre-reading effect. Specifically, the probability of winning in the special game for a specific reserved may be set to be highest for red scattered eyes (chance eyes), next highest for green scattered eyes (chance eyes), and lowest for blue scattered eyes, and scattered eyes (chance eyes) of a color according to the fluctuation pattern of the special game for a specific reserved or the hit/miss information may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the decorative pattern stop pattern combination consists of a first stop pattern, a second stop pattern, and a final stop pattern. The first stop pattern is the decorative pattern that is stopped first on the pattern display unit 341, the second stop pattern is the decorative pattern that is stopped second, and the final stop pattern is the pattern that is stopped last.

Here, FIG. 51(B) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 51(B), the first stop symbol selection table prescribes the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341. Note that FIG. 51(B) is based on the premise that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9", "333" is a symbol combination indicating a sure chance jackpot (either a 5R sure chance jackpot or a 16R sure chance jackpot), "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R sure chance jackpot, and any other repeat number besides "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R sure chance jackpot, or a 16R sure chance jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", there is no allocation of "3" and "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combinations "333" or "777", which indicate a 5R special jackpot or a 16R special jackpot (special jackpot), will not be displayed.

In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "7." In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the symbol combination "777," which indicates a 16R special jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "333," which indicates a 5R special jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," a symbol combination with a repeat number other than the symbol combination "333," which indicates a 5R normal jackpot, may be displayed as a decorative symbol. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot," if a decorative symbol other than "3" and not "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 5R probability jackpot promotion effect in the jackpot game, indicating that the jackpot is a 5R probability jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R special jackpot", all the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R special jackpot", a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R special jackpot may be displayed as a stop symbol. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R special jackpot", a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 5R special jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot may be displayed as a stop symbol. And when the lottery result is a "16R special jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R special jackpot promotion effect indicating that the jackpot game is a 16R special jackpot.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop pattern in the case where the lottery result is a jackpot, it determines the second and final stop patterns to be the same as the first stop pattern previously determined. This determines the combination of stop patterns that will be displayed on the pay line of the pattern display unit 341 in the special game.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is a "miss", all of the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a "miss", it determines the second stop symbol based on the miss type selected based on the miss type table (Figure 9 (D)) and the first stop symbol previously determined. For example, when the miss type is a front-back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Also, when the miss type is a reach other than a front-back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol and the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Also, if the loss type is a complete loss, the second stop pattern is determined to be a pattern different from the first stop pattern, and the final stop pattern is determined regardless of the first stop pattern and the second stop pattern. The stop pattern combination of the decorative patterns may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop pattern may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop pattern and the final stop pattern may be determined by the display control device 6.

<Step S3105>
Returning to the explanation of the command determination process in Fig. 47, in step S3105, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the received special pattern variable command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the special pattern variable command. The variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process in step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3106>
In step S3106, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for identifying the effect pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process and the content of the stopped pattern combination of the decorative patterns determined in step S3104, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped pattern combination of the decorative patterns. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and the performance image of the decorative pattern corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the performance display in the pattern display unit 341 according to the stopped pattern combination, variation type, and performance type of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to stop varying in sequence. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

When the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets, for example, a special game performance flag to on. This special game performance flag is a flag that indicates that a special game performance is being executed.

<Step S3107>
If the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special chart shift command (step S3107). The special chart shift command is a command indicating that the special chart win/lose information indicating the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first special chart reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special chart reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special chart reserve storage area REB (see FIG. 8) has shifted when the first special chart reserved number N or the second special chart reserved number M decreases due to the start of the special chart game (variable display of the special chart).

If the received command is a special chart shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3108; if the received command is not a special chart shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3110.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
If the received command is a special chart shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a special chart data setting process (step S3108) and a special chart data image display process (step S3109), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the special chart data setting process executed in step S3108 is a process of shifting (updating) the data (special chart data) of the special chart win/loss information stored in the special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. The special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special chart pending storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, and stores special chart data equivalent to the special chart pending storage area 412b. The special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes a first special chart pending storage area corresponding area, a second special chart pending storage area corresponding area, and a special chart execution area corresponding area, which correspond to the first special chart pending storage area REA, the second special chart pending storage area REB, and the special chart execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special chart pending storage area 412b, respectively. In addition, the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area includes the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding area (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special chart reserved storage area REA in the special chart reserved storage area 412b. Furthermore, the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area includes the second special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding area corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special chart reserved storage area REB in the special chart reserved storage area 412b.

On the other hand, the special chart data image display process executed in step S3109 is a process of shifting an image relating to the special chart data (special chart data image) (see Figures 52 and 53) displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 that was shifted (updated) in step S3108.

Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing examples of special chart data images displayed on the pattern display unit 341 before and after receiving a special chart shift command. Specifically, FIG. 52 (A1) and FIG. 52 (A2) are diagrams showing examples of special chart data images before receiving a special chart shift command, FIG. 52 (B1) is an example of a special chart data image after receiving a special chart shift command for a first special chart game in the display state of the special chart data image shown in FIG. 52 (A1), and FIG. 52 (B2) is an example of a special chart data image after receiving a special chart shift command for a second special chart game in the display state of the special chart data image shown in FIG. 52 (A2).

As shown in Fig. 52 (A1) and Fig. 52 (A2), the special chart data image is displayed in the special chart data image display areas 75, 76, and 77 set in the pattern display unit 341. The special chart data image display areas 75, 76, and 77 include the special chart variable image display area 75, the first special chart reserved image display area 76, and the second special chart reserved image display area 77, which correspond to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area, the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area, and the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512.

The special pattern variable image display area 75 is an area that displays the special pattern game image for the special pattern game based on the special pattern data stored in the special pattern execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special pattern reserve storage area corresponding area described above, which corresponds to the special pattern execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special pattern reserve storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. When special pattern data is stored in the special pattern execution area corresponding area, the special pattern game image is displayed in the special pattern variable image display area 75, while when special pattern data is not stored in the special pattern execution area corresponding area, the special pattern game image is not displayed. That is, the special pattern game image is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and is hidden by the stop display of the special pattern. In other words, the display of the special pattern game image clearly indicates that the special pattern game is being executed, and the non-display of the special pattern game image clearly indicates the end of the special pattern game.

In the examples shown in Figures 52 (A1) and 52 (A2), special chart data is stored in the area corresponding to the special chart execution area, and the special chart game image (the cross-hatched circular portion) is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75.

The first special chart reserved image display area 76 is an area that displays the first special chart reserved image for the first special chart game based on the special chart data stored in the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area described above that corresponds to the first special chart reserved storage area REA (see FIG. 8) of the special chart reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This first special chart reserved image display area 76 includes a first special chart first reserved image display area 761, a first special chart second reserved image display area 762, a first special chart third reserved image display area 763, and a first special chart fourth reserved image display area 764, which correspond to the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) of the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area in the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area described above. In addition, the first special chart reserved image display area 76 displays the first special chart reserved image when special chart data is stored in any of the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), while the first special chart reserved image is not displayed when special chart data is not stored in any of the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). That is, when there is a reservation for the first special chart game, the first special chart reserved image is displayed in a number corresponding to the first special chart reserved number N, and is not displayed when there is no reservation for the first special chart game. In other words, the first special chart reserved number N for the first special chart game is clearly indicated based on the number of first special chart reserved images displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart first to third reserved image display areas 761 to 763, and the first special chart reserved image is not displayed in the first special chart fourth reserved image display area 764. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), special chart data is stored in the first special chart first to third reserved area corresponding area among the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), and special chart data is not stored in the first special chart fourth reserved area corresponding area, indicating that the first special chart reserved number N for the first special chart game is 3.

The second special chart reserved image display area 77 is an area that displays the second special chart reserved image for the second special chart game based on the special chart data stored in the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area described above that corresponds to the second special chart reserved storage area REB (see FIG. 8) of the special chart reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. This second special chart reserved image display area 77 includes a second special chart first reserved image display area 771, a second special chart second reserved image display area 772, a second special chart third reserved image display area 773, and a second special chart fourth reserved image display area 774, which correspond to the second special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown) of the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area in the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area described above. In addition, the second special chart reserved image display area 77 displays the second special chart reserved image when special chart data is stored in any of the second special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), while the second special chart reserved image is not displayed when special chart data is not stored in any of the second special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown). That is, when there is a reservation for the second special chart game, the second special chart reserved image is displayed in a number corresponding to the second special chart reserved number M, and is not displayed when there is no reservation for the second special chart game. In other words, the second special chart reserved number M for the second special chart game is clearly indicated based on the number of second special chart reserved images displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), the second special chart reserved images are displayed in the second special chart 1-2 reserved image display areas 771-772, and the second special chart reserved images are not displayed in the second special chart 3-4 reserved image display areas 773-774. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), special chart data is stored in the second special chart 1-2 reserved area corresponding area of the second special chart 1-4 reserved area corresponding area (not shown), and special chart data is not stored in the second special chart 3-4 reserved area corresponding area, indicating that the second special chart reserved number M for the second special chart game is 2.

In the special chart data image display process, if the received special chart shift command is for the first special chart, i.e., when the first special chart game is started, the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area, and further, the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart reserved image display area 76 based on the special chart data stored in the first special chart reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area. For example, in a state where the number N of first special charts reserved for the first special chart shown in Figure 52 (A1) is 3 and the number M of second special charts reserved for the second special chart is 0, when a new first special chart game starts upon the end of a special chart game, as shown in Figure 52 (B1), the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75, and the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart first to second reserved image display areas 761 to 762 of the first special chart reserved image display area 76. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (A1) and FIG. 52 (B1), when a new first special symbol game is started, the first special symbol reserved image displayed in the first special symbol reserved image display area 761 of the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 before the start of the first special symbol game is shifted to the special symbol variable image display area 75 as the special symbol game image, and each of the first special symbol reserved images displayed in the first special symbol second to third reserved image display areas 762-763 of the first special symbol reserved image display area 76 before the start of the first special symbol game is shifted to the first special symbol first to second reserved image display areas 761-762 of the first special symbol reserved image display area 76.

On the other hand, in the special chart data image display process, if the received special chart shift command is for the second special chart, i.e., when the second special chart game is started, the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 based on the special chart data stored in the special chart execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area, and further, the second special chart reserved image is displayed in the second special chart reserved image display area 77 based on the special chart data stored in the second special chart reserve storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserve storage area corresponding area. For example, in a state where the number N of first special charts reserved for the second special chart shown in Figure 52 (A2) is 1 and the number M of second special charts reserved for the second special chart is 2, when a special chart game ends and a new second special chart game begins, as shown in Figure 52 (B2), the special chart game image is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75, and the second special chart reserved image is displayed in the second special chart first reserved image display area 771 of the second special chart reserved image display area 77. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (A2) and FIG. 52 (B2), when a new second special chart game is started, the second special chart reserved image that was displayed in the second special chart first reserved image display area 771 of the second special chart reserved image display area 77 before the start of the second special chart game is shifted to the special chart variable image display area 75 as the special chart game image, and the second special chart reserved image that was displayed in the second special chart second reserved image display area 772 of the second special chart reserved image display area 77 before the start of the second special chart game is shifted to the second special chart first reserved image display area 771 of the second special chart reserved image display area 77.

The special data image in the special data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may be continuously displayed from the start of the special data game to the end of the special data game, or may be hidden for a part of the period during which the special data game is being played. For example, when a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed in the special data game, the special data image may be hidden so as not to impede the visibility of the super reach effect or the special reach effect while it is being executed. In this case, the special data image may be redisplayed before or after the end of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, or may remain hidden. In addition, when the special data image is hidden, it is also possible to display an image such as a number indicating the first special data reserved number N for the first special data game or the second special data reserved number M for the second special data game while the special data image is hidden.

The special data image in the special data image display unit 75, 76, 77 may indicate or suggest the expectation (jackpot expectation) that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special data game or the reserved special data game will be a jackpot, depending on the display mode. For example, a plurality of display modes (color, shape, pattern, effect, combination of two or more of these, etc.) corresponding to the jackpot expectation may be set as the special data image, and a predetermined display mode for the special data image may be set from the plurality of display modes based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When the jackpot expectation is indicated or suggested based on the display mode of the special data image, the display mode of the special data image may be changed (so-called reserved change) until the special data game for the special data image is completed. In this case, the change in the display mode of the special data image is executed so that, for example, the jackpot expectation becomes the same or higher (promotion), and the change to lower the jackpot expectation (demotion) is not executed. Of course, when a change (demotion change) in the display mode of the special data image that lowers the probability of winning a jackpot is executed, it is also possible to increase the probability of winning a jackpot. In addition, there are no particular restrictions on the timing of changing the display mode of the special data image, and possible times include the start of the special data game (the time when the special data image shifts), after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the special data game (for example, from the start of the special data game until the reach performance starts, during the reach performance, before and after the development into a reach performance with a higher probability of winning a jackpot), etc.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, three types of special chart data image display areas 75, 76, and 77 are set: the special chart variable image display area 75, the first special chart reserved image display area 76, and the second special chart reserved image display area 77. However, it is also possible to change the display contents of the special chart data image display areas 75, 76, and 77 depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the second special chart reserved image display area 77 is not displayed, and the special chart variable image display area 75 and the first special chart reserved image display area 76 are displayed, and in the probability bonus game state and the time-saving game state, the first special chart reserved image display area 76 is not displayed, and the special chart variable image display area 75 and the second special chart reserved image display area 77 are displayed.

<Step S3110>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, if the received command is not a special chart shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a first special chart reservation command (step S3110). The first special chart reservation command includes information indicating that the first special chart reservation number N for the first special chart game increases, information on the first special chart reservation number N after the increase, and information on the special chart change pattern (special chart change display time) for the increased first reservation and the result of the big win lottery.

If the received command is the first special drawing hold command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3111; if the received command is not the first special drawing hold command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3113.

<Steps S3111 and S3112>
If the received command is a first special drawing reservation command (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a first special drawing reservation information update process (step S3111) and a first special drawing reservation image display process (step S3112), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special chart reserved information update process executed in step S3111 is a process of adding (updating) data (special chart data) of the special chart hit/miss information to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area described above. Specifically, in the first special chart reserved information update process, the special chart data corresponding to the special chart hit/miss information stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special chart reserved storage area REA of the special chart reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the first special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding area (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 in which the special chart hit/miss information is stored. For example, when special chart win/loss information is stored in the second reserved area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special chart reserved storage area REA in the special chart reserved storage area 412b, the special chart data is stored in the first special chart second reserved area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the second reserved area REA2.

On the other hand, the first special chart reserved image display process executed in step S3112 is a process of adding the first special chart reserved image to the first special chart reserved image display area 76 based on the special chart data added (updated) to the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3112.

Here, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a special chart data image displayed on the pattern display unit 341 before and after receiving the first special chart hold command or the second special chart hold command. Specifically, FIG. 53(A) is a diagram showing an example of a special chart data image before receiving the first special chart hold command or the second special chart hold command, and FIG. 53(B) is an example of a special chart data image after receiving the first special chart hold command for the first special chart game in the display state of the special chart data image shown in FIG. 53(A).

In Fig. 53(A), the special chart variable image is displayed, and one first special chart reserved image and two second special chart reserved images are displayed. In other words, the example shown in Fig. 53(A) indicates that the special chart game is being played, the number of first special chart reserved N for the first special chart game is one, and the number of second special chart reserved M for the second special chart game is two.

Then, in the first special chart reserved image display process executed when a first special chart reserved command is received in the display state of the special chart data shown in FIG. 53(A), i.e. when the reserved number for the first special chart game increases to two, the first special chart reserved image is displayed in the first special chart second reserved image display area 762 of the first special chart reserved image display area 76, as shown in FIG. 53(B), based on the special chart data stored in the first special chart second reserved area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special chart reserved storage area corresponding area in the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3113>
If the received command is not the first special symbol reservation command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the second special symbol reservation command (step S3113). The second special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game increases, information on the second special symbol reservation number M after the increase, and information on the special symbol change pattern (special symbol change display time) for the increased second reservation and the result of the big win lottery.

If the received command is a second special drawing hold command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3114; if the received command is not a second special drawing hold command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3116.

<Steps S3114 and S3115>
If the received command is a second special drawing reservation command (step S3113: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a second special drawing reservation information update process (step S3114) and a second special drawing reservation image display process (step S3115), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the second special chart reserved information update process executed in step S3114 is a process of adding (updating) data (special chart data) of the special chart hit/miss information to the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area described above. Specifically, in the second special chart reserved information update process, the special chart data corresponding to the special chart hit/miss information stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special chart reserved storage area REB of the special chart reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is stored in the second special chart first to fourth reserved area corresponding area (not shown) set corresponding to the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 in which the special chart hit/miss information is stored. For example, when special chart win/loss information is stored in the third reserved area REB3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special chart reserved storage area REB in the special chart reserved storage area 412b, the special chart data is stored in the first special chart third reserved area corresponding area (not shown) set in correspondence with the third reserved area REB3.

On the other hand, the second special chart reserved image display process executed in step S3115 is a process of adding a second special chart reserved image to the second special chart reserved image display area 77 based on the special chart data added (updated) to the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3114.

Here, FIG. 53(C) is an example of a special chart data image after a second special chart hold command for a second special chart game is received in the display state of the special chart data image shown in FIG. 53(A).

In the second special chart reserved image display process executed when a second special chart reserved command is received in the display state of the special chart data shown in FIG. 53 (A), that is, when the reserved number for the second special chart game increases to three, the second special chart reserved image is displayed in the second special chart third reserved image display area 773 of the second special chart reserved image display area 77, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), based on the special chart data stored in the second special chart third reserved area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special chart reserved storage area corresponding area in the special chart reserved storage area corresponding area.

<Step S3116>
If the received command is not the second special symbol reservation command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is started in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3117. If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3119.

<Steps S3117 and S3118>
When a jackpot game start command is received (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation setting process (step S3117), sets the jackpot game in progress flag to ON (step S3118), and terminates the command determination process.

The jackpot game performance setting process executes a process to set the jackpot performance, including the opening performance, the open/close execution mode performance (round game performance and interval performance), and the ending performance, which are executed during the jackpot game.

The jackpot game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, and is referenced in step S3201 of the jackpot game presentation control process in FIG. 54 described below to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, i.e., whether or not to control the progress of the jackpot game presentation.

<Step S3119>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3119). The opening start command is a command indicating the start of the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when the opening is started in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening start command (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3120; if the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3121.

<Step S3120>
When an opening start command is received (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 52 sets an opening performance start flag to ON (step S3120) and ends the command determination process. The opening performance start flag is a flag for starting an opening performance of a big win game, and is referred to in step S3202 in the big win game performance control process in FIG. 54 described later to determine whether or not to start an opening performance.

<Step S3121>
If the received command is not an opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an opening end command (step S3121). The opening end command is a command indicating that the opening of the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the opening is to be ended in step S2214 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 30 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an opening end command (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3122. If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3123 in FIG. 48.

<Step S3122>
When the opening end command is received (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening effect end flag to ON (step S3122) and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag for ending the opening effect of the big win game, and is referred to in step S3205 in the big win game effect control process in FIG. 54 described later to determine whether or not to end the opening effect.

<Step S3123>
If the received command is not an opening end command (step S3121: No), as shown in Fig. 48, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game start command (step S3123). The round game start command indicates the start of a round game in the opening and closing execution mode, and indicates the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is set when a round game in the opening and closing execution mode is to be started in step S2217 in the big win game control process in Fig. 30 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round play start command (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3124, and if the received command is not a round play start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3126.

<Steps S3124 and S3125>
When a round game start command is received (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a round game presentation start flag to ON (step S3124), sets round number information indicating which round the round game is in the RAM 512 (step S3125), and ends the command determination process. The round game presentation start flag is referenced in step S3208 of the big win game presentation control process in FIG. 54 described later to determine whether or not to start each round game presentation of the open/close execution mode presentation.

<Step S3126>
If the received command is not a round game start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game end command (step S3126). The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is to be ended in step S2229 in the big win game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a round play end command (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3127; if the received command is not a round play end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3128.

<Step S3127>
When the round game end command is received (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3127) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not the round game effect ends in step S3211 in the big win game effect control process in FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3128>
If the received command is not a round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an interval start command (step S3128). The interval start command is a command indicating the start of an interval between round games in the open/close execution mode, and is set when starting an interval in step S2233 in the big win game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3129; if the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3130.

<Step S3129>
If the received command is an interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval performance start flag to ON (step S3129) and ends the command determination process. The interval performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the interval performance in step S3214 in the big win game performance control process in FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3130>
If the received command is not an interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an interval end command (step S3130). The interval end command is a command indicating the end of an interval between rounds of play in the open/close execution mode, and is set when the interval is to be ended in step S2239 in the big win game control process of FIG. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3131; if the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3132.

<Step S3131>
If the received command is an interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3131) and ends the command determination process. The interval effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the interval effect in step S3217 in the big win game effect control process in FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3132>
If the received command is not an interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an ending start command (step S3132). The ending start command is a command indicating the start of an ending in a big win game, and is set when starting an ending in step S2242 in the big win game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3133; if the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3134.

<Step S3133>
If the received command is an ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending performance start flag to ON (step S3133) and ends the command determination process. The ending performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending performance in step S3220 of the big win game performance control process in FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3134>
If the received command is not an ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an ending end command (step S3134). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the big win game is to end, and is set when the ending is to be ended in step S2248 in the big win game control process of FIG. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is an ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3135; if the received command is not an ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3136.

<Step S3135>
If the received command is an ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3135) and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S3223 of the big win game effect control process in FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3136>
If the received command is not an ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a big win game end command (step S3136). The big win game end command is a command indicating that the big win game is to be ended, and is set when the big win game is to be ended in step S2250 in the big win game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

If the received command is a jackpot play end command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3137. If the received command is not a jackpot play end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3139.

<Step S3137>
If the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, to off (step S3137), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3138>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S3138) and terminates the command determination processing.

[Big Win Game Presentation Control Processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the big win game presentation control process executed in step S2705 of the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 42 will be described. In the big win game presentation control process, a process is executed to control the big win game presentation according to the progress of the big win game based on the big win game presentation set in the big win game presentation setting process in step S3117 of the command determination process in Fig. 47. Here, Fig. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big win game presentation control process. The big win game presentation control process will be described below with reference to Fig. 54.

<Step S3201>
As shown in Fig. 54, in the big win game presentation control process, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not the big win game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201). The big win game in progress flag is a flag indicating that the big win game is being executed, and is set to ON when the big win game start command is received in step S3118 in the command judgment process of Fig. 47. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the big win game is being executed.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3202. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game presentation control process.

<Step S3202>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the opening performance start flag is set to ON (step S3202). The opening performance start flag is a flag for starting the opening performance of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an opening start command is received in step S3120 of the command judgment process of Fig. 47. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to start the opening performance.

If the opening performance start flag is set to on (step S3202: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3203. On the other hand, if the opening performance start flag is set to off (step S3202: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the opening performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3205.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
If the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the opening effect set in the big win game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3203).Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect start flag to OFF (step S3204), and ends the big win game effect control process.

<Step S3205>
If the opening effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S3205). The opening effect end flag is a flag that ends the opening effect of the big win game, and is set to ON when an opening end command is received in step S3122 in the command judgment process of Fig. 47. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to end the opening effect.

If the opening performance end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3206. On the other hand, if the opening performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the opening performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3208.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the opening effect (step S3206).Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect end flag to OFF (step S3207), and ends the big win game effect control process.

<Step S3208>
When the opening effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), that is, when it is not time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S3208). The round game effect start flag is a flag that starts the round game effect of the big win game, and is set to ON when a round game start command is received in step S3124 in the command judgment process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is time to start the round game effect.

If the round game presentation start flag is set to on (step S3208: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the round game presentation, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3209. On the other hand, if the round game presentation start flag is set to off (step S3208: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the round game presentation, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3211.

<Steps S3209 and S3210>
When the round game presentation start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the round game presentation, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the round game presentation of the jackpot game presentation set in the jackpot game presentation setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3209). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation start flag to OFF (step S3210), and ends the jackpot game presentation control process.

<Step S3211>
When the round game presentation start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game presentation, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the round game presentation end flag is set to ON (step S3211). The round game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the round game presentation of the big win game, and is set to ON when a round game end command is received in step S3127 in the command judgment process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to end the round game presentation.

If the round game presentation end flag is set to on (step S3211: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the round game presentation, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3212. On the other hand, if the round game presentation end flag is set to off (step S3211: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the round game presentation, the MPU 51 transitions processing to step S3214.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the round game effect (step S3212).Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to OFF (step S3213), and ends the big win game effect control process.

<Step S3214>
When the round game presentation end flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the round game presentation, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the interval presentation start flag is set to ON (step S3214). The interval presentation start flag is a flag for starting the interval presentation of the big win game, and is set to ON when an interval start command is received in step S3129 in the command judgment process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the time to start the round game presentation.

If the interval performance start flag is set to on (step S3214: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3215. On the other hand, if the interval performance start flag is set to off (step S3214: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3217.

<Steps S3215 and S3216>
If the interval presentation start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the interval presentation, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the interval presentation of the jackpot game presentation set in the jackpot game presentation setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3215). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval presentation start flag to OFF (step S3216), and ends the jackpot game presentation control process.

<Step S3217>
If the interval performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3214: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the interval performance, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S3217). The interval performance end flag is a flag that ends the interval performance of the big win game, and is set to ON when an interval end command is received in step S3131 of the command judgment process in Fig. 48. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to end the interval performance.

If the interval performance end flag is set to on (step S3217: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3218. On the other hand, if the interval performance end flag is set to off (step S3217: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3220.

<Steps S3218 and S3219>
When the interval performance end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the interval performance (step S3218).Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval performance end flag to OFF (step S3219), and ends the big win game performance control process.

<Step S3220>
If the interval performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3217: No), that is, if it is not time to end the interval performance, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance start flag is set to ON (step S3220). The ending performance start flag is a flag that starts the ending performance of the big win game, and is set to ON when an ending start command is received in step S3133 in the command judgment process of FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is time to start the ending performance.

If the ending performance start flag is set to on (step S3220: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3221. On the other hand, if the ending performance start flag is set to off (step S3220: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3223.

<Steps S3221 and S3222>
When the ending presentation start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the ending presentation, the MPU 51 executes a process to start the ending presentation of the jackpot game presentation set in the jackpot game presentation setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of Fig. 47 (step S3221). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending presentation start flag to OFF (step S3222), and ends the jackpot game presentation control process.

<Step S3223>
If the ending performance start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the ending performance, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the ending performance end flag is set to ON (step S3223). The ending performance end flag is a flag that ends the ending performance of the big win game, and is set to ON when an ending end command is received in step S3135 of the command judgment process in FIG. 48. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not it is the timing to end the ending performance.

If the ending performance end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the ending performance, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3224. On the other hand, if the ending performance end flag is set to OFF (step S3223: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the ending performance, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game performance control process.

<Steps S3224 and S3225>
If the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes a process to end the ending effect (step S3224).Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to OFF (step S3225), and ends the big win game effect control process.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as those in the processing procedure will not be described. It is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the following other embodiments in any combination.

Second Embodiment
As described above, some gaming machines reserve the right to play a game with a first special symbol (first special symbol game) triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a first winning slot. In such gaming machines, when a predetermined reservation (for example, a reservation in which the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a reservation with a long variable display time) occurs, the same, similar, or similar performance (reservation successive performance) that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation (expectation of a jackpot) that the result of the jackpot lottery for the predetermined reservation is a jackpot is performed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games for a predetermined number of reservations at the time the predetermined reservation occurs.

As mentioned above, some gaming machines are equipped with a second winning port into which a game ball can enter by opening an electric device such as an electric tulip, and a game with a second special symbol (second special symbol game) triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port is executed in priority over a first special symbol game for a game ball entering the first winning port. Here, the reason why the second special symbol game is executed in priority over the first special symbol game is that the second special symbol game can give the player a greater advantage (e.g., a higher probability of a special bonus, a larger average number of rounds played) than the first special symbol game, while the first special symbol game can cause disadvantages not present in the second special symbol game (e.g., a fall to a normal game state).

Some of these gaming machines execute a special effect (second special effect) that clearly indicates or suggests that a special bonus (for example, the execution of a guaranteed jackpot game after the end of the second special game) will be awarded when a jackpot symbol stops or a reach occurs during the second special game.

However, in a gaming machine in which the second special chart game is executed with priority over the first special chart game and the second special chart special effect is executed in the second special chart game, when the reserved continuous effect is scheduled to be executed in succession for multiple first special chart games (Special 1 relevant change + Special 1 reserve 1 + Special 1 reserve 2) as shown in FIG. 55(A), if a game ball enters the second winning slot during the execution of Special 1 relevant change as shown in FIG. 55(B), the second special chart game is executed after the end of the change (Special 1 relevant change) during which the reserved continuous effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 55(C), and the second special chart special effect is executed in the second special chart game, causing the reserved continuous effect to be interrupted midway.

As shown in FIG. 55(D), if the first special symbol game is played after the second special symbol game is finished, and the reserved continuous performance for the planned first special symbol game is not performed (Pattern 1), if the player remembers that the reserved continuous performance was performed before the second special symbol special performance was performed, the player will feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance was not performed, and there is a concern that interest in the game will decrease. In particular, if the number of times the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is played is small, the player is more likely to remember that the reserved continuous performance was performed before the second special symbol special performance was performed, and therefore the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance is not performed after the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is finished.

As shown in FIG. 55(E), when the first special symbol game is played after the second special symbol game is finished, if the reserved continuous performance is resumed (Pattern 2), if the player forgets that the reserved continuous performance was played before the second special symbol special performance was played, the player may feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being played, and interest in the game may decrease. In particular, if the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is played many times, the time until the reserved continuous performance is resumed is long, so the player is more likely to have forgotten that the reserved continuous performance was played before the second special symbol special performance was played, and the player is more likely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the second special symbol game (second special symbol special performance) is finished.

In contrast, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric device is set to a first opening which is a first time (a short opening in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening) and a second opening which is a second time in which the opening time of the second winning opening by the electric device is longer than the first time (a long opening in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second winning opening).

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the continuous hold performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if it is scheduled to be executed consecutively in the next first special symbol game that is on hold (for example, Special 1 of the variation + Special 1 hold 1 + Special 1 hold 2 (see Figure 55 (A))), when a game ball enters the second winning port due to a short opening of the second winning port, as shown in Figure 56 (A), the continuous hold performance that was executed in the first special symbol game will continue to be executed in the second special symbol game that is executed after the end of the first special symbol game as the variation. That is, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if a game ball enters the second winning port due to the short opening of the second winning port, the reserved continuous performance is not executed in the second special symbol game by the game ball entering the second winning port when the second winning port is short opened, and the reserved continuous performance is continued. Therefore, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player does not feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance not being executed after the end of the second special symbol game that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second winning port at the time of the short opening of the second winning port. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second winning opening is short-opened, it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second winning opening (the number of balls entering is smaller) than when the second winning opening is long-opened, and it is more likely that the player will remember that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the second special symbol game was executed. Therefore, when the second winning opening is short-opened, the effect of the reserved continuous performance continuing to be executed without the second special symbol special performance being executed in the second special symbol game due to the game ball entering the second winning opening is high.

In addition, in a short opening where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning port, it is expected that the number of game balls entering the second winning port will be small. Therefore, even if the continuous reserved performance is continuously executed in the second special chart game due to a game ball entering the second winning port when the second winning port is short-opened, the number of continuous executions of the continuous reserved performance will not increase significantly, so it is unlikely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the continuous execution of the continuous reserved performance in the second special chart game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the continuous reserved performance in the second special chart game, the continuous reserved performance can be effectively utilized in the second special chart game.

In this embodiment, if the second special symbol special effect is not executed in the second special symbol game due to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole when the second winning hole is partially open, and the reserved continuous effect continues to be executed, the reserved continuous effect is resumed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game, but it is not necessary to resume the reserved continuous effect in the first special symbol game.

By the way, the reserved continuous performance may be executed as a performance that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. For example, when a predetermined reserved continuous performance is executed in a predetermined number of special game (for example, four times), the result of the jackpot lottery for the predetermined number of special game may be clearly indicated as a jackpot. On the other hand, when the second winning port is short-opened and the reserved continuous performance is executed continuously without the second special special performance being executed in the second special game by the entry of a game ball into the second winning port, the reserved continuous performance may be executed in the special game more than the predetermined number of times. Therefore, when the reserved continuous performance is executed continuously without the second special special performance being executed in the second special game by the entry of a game ball into the second winning port when the second winning port is short-opened, if the reserved continuous performance corresponds to a predetermined reserved continuous performance, the predetermined reserved continuous performance will be executed more than the predetermined number of times. In other words, if a predetermined continuous hold effect is scheduled to be executed consecutively in multiple first special game plays, and the predetermined continuous hold effect is executed continuously in the second special game play, there is a possibility that a contradiction will occur between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined continuous hold effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, if a situation arises in which there is a contradiction between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined continuous pending performance (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, a process is executed in which the number of consecutive plays in which the predetermined continuous pending performance is executed does not reach a predetermined number. For example, in a special game before the number of consecutive plays in which the predetermined continuous pending performance is executed reaches a predetermined number, or in a special game in which the predetermined continuous pending performance has been executed, the predetermined continuous pending performance is not executed, and is changed to a continuous pending performance other than the predetermined continuous pending performance and executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, if a situation arises in which a contradiction occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the specified continuous pending performance (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery, the type of continuous pending performance is changed and executed so that the number of consecutive special chart plays in which the specified continuous pending performance is executed does not reach the specified number, thereby preventing a contradiction from occurring between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the specified continuous pending performance (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in a plurality of first special chart games in succession (for example, special 1 corresponding change + special 1 reserved 1 + special 1 reserved 2 (see FIG. 55 (A))), when the game ball enters the second winning port by the long opening of the second winning port, the second special chart special performance is executed in the second special chart game executed after the end of the first special chart game (special 1 corresponding change), as shown in FIG. 56 (B), but when this second special chart special performance is executed, it is clearly indicated or suggested that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance. For example, in the image display means in which the second special chart special performance is displayed as an image, the type of reserved continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance is displayed as a capture image or the like. Of course, the clear indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance at the time of execution of the second special chart special performance is not limited to the display of a capture image of the reserved continuous performance on the image display means, and may be another method as described later.

In this way, in this embodiment, by explicitly or implying that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the execution of the second special performance when the second special performance is executed, the player is prevented from forgetting that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the execution of the second special performance, and the player can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be resumed after the end of the second special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed after the end of the second special performance, the player is significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being executed after the end of the second special performance. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the end of the second special performance.

In particular, when the second winning port is long-opened in a long-opening regular game, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball will enter the second winning port, compared to when the second winning port is short-opened in a short-opening regular game. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special game was played. Also, when the second winning port is long-opened in a long-opening regular game, the game ball is more likely to enter the second winning port (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port is short-opened in a short-opening regular game, so the number of second special games in which the second special performance is performed is greater (the performance time of the second special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 57 to 81.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Sort table]
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability machine, but the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as an ST machine. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a different allocation table used by the main control device 4 to allocate the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table used by the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.

57, when the type of special game is a first special game triggered by winning the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of special game is a second special game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 10 to 19, and there is no random number that will result in a 5R normal jackpot. In other words, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a special jackpot in the first special game is 75%, while the probability of a special jackpot in the second special game is 100%. Therefore, in the case where the second winning hole 315 is long-opened due to a long-open normal winning, if the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the second special winning game for the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315 will result in a 100% guaranteed jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is announced during the reserved charge release described below (see Figures 61(B) and 61(C)), when the reserved charge for the second special winning game for the long-open normal winning is released, it will result in a guaranteed jackpot.

In either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a guaranteed jackpot, the game will transition to a guaranteed jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special symbol games (ST number) that can be played in the guaranteed jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of the number of special symbol games, the game will transition to a normal game state after the upper limit of the number of special symbol games is played. Note that the number of special symbol games in the guaranteed jackpot game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be another number.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, an upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set for the number of special chart games (time-saving times) that can be played in the time-saving game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot within this upper limit of the number of special chart games, the game will transition to a normal game state after the upper limit of special chart games has been played. Note that the number of special chart games in the time-saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be another number.

The transition from the special game state to the normal game state is not limited to when the maximum value of the special game is played, but may be performed, for example, when a state transition lottery (fall lottery) is won.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 5 executes the sub timer interrupt process and the like in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, but the command determination process of this embodiment differs in part from that of the first embodiment described above. In the following, the command determination process of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 58 to 60, focusing on the differences from the command determination process in the first embodiment described above.

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the performance to be performed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like depending on the type of the received command.

Here, Figures 58 to 60 are flowcharts showing an example of the command determination process procedure of this embodiment.

<Step S3301>
58, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3301). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302. If the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3301: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3302>
When a command is received (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3302). When a normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3303, and when the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3307.

The normal pattern variation pattern command includes information regarding the normal pattern variation display time in the normal pattern display section 361, the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery, and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode, low frequency support mode).

<Step S3303>
When a normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode based on information regarding the type of support mode (high-frequency support mode or low-frequency support mode) contained in the received normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3303).

If the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. Note that if the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 may set a high frequency support mode flag, which indicates that the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode, to on and then end the command determination process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S3303: No), i.e., if the MPU 41 is in the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3304. Note that if the MPU 51 is in the low-frequency support mode (step S3303: No) and the high-frequency support mode flag is set to on, the MPU 51 may set the high-frequency support mode flag to off and then terminate the command determination process.

<Step S3304>
If the high frequency support mode is not selected (step S3303: No), that is, if the low frequency support mode is selected, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set to ON (step S3304). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON in step S2206 when a jackpot game starts, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3304: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3304: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3305.

<Step S3305>
If the jackpot play in progress flag is set to off (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game being started this time is a long opening win or not based on information regarding the result of the regular winning lottery contained in the received regular game change pattern command (step S3305).

If the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game being started this time is a long opening win (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3306. On the other hand, if the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game being started this time is not a long opening win (step S3305: No), that is, if the result of the regular winning lottery is a short opening win or a miss, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S3306>
If the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game to be started this time is a long opening win (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long opening flag to ON (S3306) and ends the command judgment process. That is, the long opening flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery for the regular game in the regular game state (low frequency support mode) that is not a jackpot game or a high frequency support mode (probability game state, time-saving game state) is a long opening win in which a long opening regular game is executed by allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the electric role 315b. This long opening flag is referenced in step S3308 described later when determining whether the opening mode of the second winning hole 315 in the regular winning game in the regular game state is a long opening.

<Step S3307>
If the received command is not a normal map variation pattern command (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an electric device opening command indicating that the opening of the electric device 315b will allow the game ball 99 to enter the second winning port 315 (starting a normal map winning game) (step S3307).

If the received command is a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3308. If the received command is not a normal map fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3312 in FIG. 59.

<Step S3308>
If the received command is a normal map variation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the long opening flag, which indicates that the result of the normal map winning lottery is a long opening winning, is set on (step S3308).

If the long opening flag is set to on (step S3308: Yes), i.e., if the result of the regular winning lottery is a long opening win, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3309. On the other hand, if the long opening flag is set to off (step S3308: No), i.e., if the result of the regular winning lottery is a short opening win, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the long opening flag is set on (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long opening flag off (step S3309), executes processing to start the long opening performance of the electric role device (step S3310), and transitions to step S3311.

The long electric role performance is a performance that clearly indicates to the player on the pattern display unit 341 that the electric role 315b is long open. Here, FIG. 61 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the pattern display unit 341 during the long electric role performance. In the example of FIG. 61 (A), during the performance of the long electric role performance, the pattern display unit 341 displays a text image of "Reserved charge chance in progress" indicating that the second winning hole 315 is long open, and a text image of "Put the ball in the tulip below" encouraging the player to shoot the game ball 99 toward the second winning hole 315. Of course, the long electric role performance is not limited to the example of FIG. 61 (A) and may be in other forms. For example, the performance during the long opening of the electric role object may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, and may execute audio performance using the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the performance on the pattern display unit 341.

The electric device long opening performance start process is executed when the long opening flag is set to on, but as described above, the long opening flag is not set to on in the jackpot game state, the high probability game state, or the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode). In other words, the electric device long opening performance is executed when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is not executed in the jackpot game state, the high frequency support mode, or the high probability game state, or the time-saving game state, when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Of course, the electric device long opening performance may be executed in the high probability game state or the time-saving game state, in addition to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

<Step S3311>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 58, in step S3311, the MPU 51 sets the electric device long opening flag, which indicates that the electric device 315b is long open, to ON, and ends the command judgment process. Note that, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, the electric device long opening flag is referred to in step S3319 of Fig. 59 described later in order to determine whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

<Step S3312>
If the received command is not a normal pattern change command (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special pattern shift command as shown in Fig. 59 (step S3312). As described above, the special pattern shift command is a command indicating that the special pattern win/loss information indicating the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first special pattern reserve storage area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first special pattern reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second special pattern reserve storage area REB (see Fig. 8) has shifted when the first special pattern reserve number N or the second special pattern reserve number M decreases due to the start of the special pattern game (variable display of the special pattern).

If the received command is a special chart shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3313. If the received command is not a special chart shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3317.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the received command is a special drawing shift command (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a special drawing data setting process (step S3313) and a special drawing data image display process (step S3314), and moves the process to step S3315. Note that the special drawing data setting process (step S3313) and the special drawing data image display process (step S3314) of this embodiment are executed in the same manner as the special drawing data setting process (step S3108) and the special drawing data image display process (step S3109) in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

<Steps S3315 and S3316>
In step S3315, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the long opening winning counter is 0. The value of the long opening winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 while the second winning hole 315 is long opening (during the execution of the long opening normal symbol winning game).

If the value of the long opening winning counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, if there is no unexecuted second special game among the second special game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (during the execution of the long opening normal game), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3317. On the other hand, if the value of the long opening winning counter is not 0 (step S3315: No), that is, if there is an unexecuted second special game among the second special game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (during the execution of the long opening normal game), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long opening winning counter (step S3316) and ends the command determination process.

<Steps S3317 and S3318>
If the value of the long opening winning counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, if there is no unexecuted second special game among the second special games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (during the execution of the long opening normal game), the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the short opening winning counter is 0 or not (step S3317). The value of the short opening winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special games among the second special games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is short open (during the execution of the short opening normal game).

If the value of the short opening winning counter is 0 (step S3317: Yes), that is, if there is no unexecuted second special game among the second special game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is short-open (during the execution of the short opening normal game), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. On the other hand, if the value of the short opening winning counter is not 0 (step S3317: No), that is, if there is an unexecuted second special game among the second special game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is short-open (during the execution of the short opening normal game), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3318) and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3319>
If the received command is not a special chart shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a first special chart reservation command (step S3319). As described above, the first special chart reservation command includes information indicating that the first special chart reservation number N for the first special chart increases, information on the reservation number N after the increase, and information on the fluctuation pattern (variation display time and the result of the big win lottery) for the increased reservation.

If the received command is the first special drawing hold command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3320. If the received command is not the first special drawing hold command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3323.

<Steps S3320 to S3322>
If the received command is the first special drawing reserved command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special drawing reserved information update process (step S3320) and the first special drawing reserved image display process (step S3321). Note that the first special drawing reserved information update process (step S3320) and the first special drawing reserved image display process (step S3321) in this embodiment are executed in the same manner as the first special drawing reserved information update process (step S3111) and the first special drawing reserved image display process (step S3112) in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes the pending continuous performance setting process (step S3322) and ends the command determination process.

The hold continuous performance setting process is a process for setting hold continuous performances that are executed consecutively for a predetermined hold in the first special pattern hold, in a predetermined number of first special pattern games up to the first special pattern game in which the predetermined hold changes, or in a second special pattern game for a predetermined number of holds executed prior to the predetermined hold, with the same, similar, or similar performances clearly indicating or suggesting the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, for the predetermined hold in the first special pattern hold. Details of the hold continuous performance setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 62 to 65.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a reserved continuous performance is executed in succession for a predetermined number of first special pattern games, the performance executed in each first special pattern game in a case where the performance is executed in a single first special pattern game for a reserved game executed prior to the predetermined reserved game does not technically fall under "continuous performance," but for convenience, it will be included in the reserved continuous performance.

<Step S3323>
If the received command is not the first special symbol reservation command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the second special symbol reservation command (step S3323). As described above, the second special symbol reservation command includes information indicating that the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game increases, information on the reservation number M after the increase, and information on the fluctuation pattern (variation display time and the result of the big win lottery) for the increased reservation.

If the received command is a second special drawing hold command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3324. If the received command is not a second special drawing hold command (step S3323: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3330 in FIG. 60.

<Steps S3324 and S3325>
If the received command is a second special drawing reservation command (step S3323: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a second special drawing reservation information update process (step S3324) and a second special drawing reservation image display process (step S3325), and moves the process to S3326. Note that the second special drawing reservation information update process (step S3324) and the second special drawing reservation image display process (step S3325) in this embodiment are executed in the same manner as the second special drawing reservation information update process (step S3114) and the second special drawing reservation image display process (step S3115) in the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3326>
In step S3326, the MPU 51 judges whether the electric role long open flag is set to ON. The electric role long open flag is a flag indicating that the second winning port 315 is long open (a long open normal game is being played). Therefore, when the electric role long open flag is set to ON when the MPU 51 receives the second special game reserve command, it can judge that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is triggered by the long opening of the second winning port 315 (the execution of a long open normal game). On the other hand, if the electric device long opening flag is set to off when the MPU 51 receives the second special chart hold command, it can determine that the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 was not triggered by the long opening of the second winning port 315 (execution of a game that wins a long opening regular chart), but rather by the short opening of the second winning port 315 (execution of a game that wins a short opening regular chart).

If the electric reel length open flag is set to on (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3327. If the electric reel length open flag is set to off (step S3326: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3329.

<Step S3327>
When the long open flag of the electric role is set to ON (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the long open winning counter (step S3327) and moves the process to step S3328. In this way, the value of the long open winning counter is added by 1 when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 in a state where the reserved number M for the second special game has not reached the upper limit number when the second winning port 315 is long open (a game with a long open normal game is being played), while the second winning port 315 is long open. On the other hand, the value of the long open winning counter is subtracted by 1 when the second special game is played triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is long open, as described above (step S3316). In other words, the value of the long open winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special game plays among the second special game plays triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 while the second winning port 315 is long open (while a long open normal winning game is being executed).

<Step S3328>
In step S3328, the MPU 51 executes a second special chart special effect setting process for executing a second special chart special effect in a second special chart game.

Here, the second special chart special effect is executed on the condition that the electric role long opening flag is set to ON. On the other hand, as described above, the electric role long opening flag is not set to ON in the jackpot game state, the probability game state, or the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), but is set to ON when the result of the regular chart winning lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is a long opening win. In other words, the second special chart special effect is executed when the game ball 99 is placed in the second winning port 315 in the long opening regular chart winning game, which is executed based on the result of the regular chart winning lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) being a long opening win.

Of course, the performance during the long opening of the electric device may be executed based on the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 during the short opening of the second winning opening 315 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), during the opening of the second winning opening 315 in the probability game state or the time-limited game state.

Here, Fig. 61 (B) and Fig. 61 (C) are diagrams showing example screens in the pattern display unit 341 during execution of the second special chart special performance. Specifically, Fig. 61 (B) is an example screen in the pattern display unit 341 during execution of the second special chart special performance when the reserved continuous performance is not executed after execution of the second special chart special performance, and Fig. 61 (C) is an example screen in the pattern display unit 341 during execution of the second special chart special performance when the reserved continuous performance is executed before execution of the second special chart special performance and the reserved continuous performance is executed after execution of the second special chart special performance (see Fig. 56 (B)).

In the examples of Figures 61 (B) and 61 (C), during the execution of the second special chart special performance, the symbol display section 341 displays a text image saying "Reserved charge being released" and a text image saying "If you hit the jackpot while the reserved charge is being released, you will enter a special bonus!".

The text image "Reserved charge open" clearly indicates to the player that the variable display is being executed as a result of the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal winning game in a normal game state. This text image "Reserved charge open" is displayed in an area adjacent to the top of the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 in the symbol display unit 341, which does not obstruct the variable display of the decorative symbol. This makes it possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player that the second special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol data image (the special symbol game image and the second special symbol reserved image) displayed in the special symbol variable image display area 75 and the second special symbol reserved image display area 77 is the second special symbol game for the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 during long opening, without obstructing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The text image "If you hit a jackpot while the reserved charge is open, you will enter a special bonus!" is displayed on the condition that the decorative pattern in the special game stops and displays as a jackpot pattern (for example, a repeating number), and indicates to the player that the type of jackpot that will result when this condition is met is a special bonus jackpot. This text image "If you hit a jackpot while the reserved charge is open, you will enter a special bonus!" is displayed in an area adjacent to the top of the pattern display section 341 that does not obstruct the changing display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the jackpot lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315, if the lottery result is a jackpot, there is no allocation of a normal jackpot, and it will always be a special jackpot (see FIG. 57). Therefore, in this embodiment, as the second special chart special effect that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in a long-open normal chart win game in a normal game state, if the lottery result in a jackpot game is a jackpot, it is possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot type is a special jackpot without interfering with the display of the changing decorative patterns.

In the example shown in Figures 61 (B) and 61 (C), when the second special chart special performance is executed, the special chart data image (the special chart game image and the second special chart reserved image) is displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 and the second special chart reserved image display area 77 in the pattern display unit 341. The special chart game image displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 of the special chart data image indicates that it is a variable display for the second special chart game, and the second special chart reserved image displayed in the second special chart reserved image display area 77 of the special chart data image indicates that the right to execute the second special chart game is reserved. It is considered that the special chart data images displayed in the special chart variable image display area 75 and the second special chart reserved image display area 77 are displayed in a manner different from the special chart data image when the second special chart special performance is not executed. That is, the special data image when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 during a long opening can be displayed in a different manner from the special data image when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 during a short opening. In this case, not only is the second special performance executed, but the display manner of the special data image also makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the variable display and reservation for the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 during a long opening are displayed, making it easy to distinguish from the variable display and reservation for the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 during a short opening.

In addition, the second special chart special effect shown in FIG. 61(C) differs from the second special chart special effect shown in FIG. 61(B) in that a capture image 78 is displayed in the lower left area (area adjacent to the decorative pattern changing display area) that does not obstruct the changing display of the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341.

The capture image 78 is a display screen of the reserved continuous performance that was executed in the pattern display unit 341 in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the display screen is displayed as an image in which the display screen is reduced (an image with a changed size) while maintaining the appearance of the display screen. This capture image 78 is displayed when the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and the reserved continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance (see FIG. 56 (B)). In other words, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests during the execution of the second special symbol special performance that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

In this embodiment, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player will forget that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and the player can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, the player will be significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance.

In particular, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball 99 will enter the second winning port 315, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special pattern game was played. Also, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning port 315 (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won, so the number of second special pattern games in which the second special pattern special performance is executed is greater (the execution time of the second special pattern special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

In addition, since the screen of the reserved continuous performance executed in the pattern display unit 341 in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance is a reduced image, the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game after the end of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, although details will be described later, four types of reserved continuous performances are set, namely, same color pattern performance, chance eye performance, mini character performance, and zone performance (mode performance) (see Figures 64 and 65), but in the capture image 78 shown in Figure 61 (C), it is clearly indicated or suggested that a chance eye performance in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the chance eye "113" (see Figure 65) was executed as a reserved continuous performance in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance. This allows the player to not only understand that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, but also to understand the type of reserved continuous performance. Therefore, the player's sense of discomfort about the reserved continuous performance being resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance is further reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being performed before the execution of the second special chart special performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance is further prevented.

In this embodiment, the capture image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341, but it is preferable to display the capture image on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special effect and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special effect. For example, the capture image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special effect game is changed in the current special effect game. In this way, by displaying the capture image on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special effect game and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special effect game, the reserved continuous effect in the first special effect game can be executed smoothly and without discomfort.

In this embodiment, the capture image 78 is displayed as a reduced image in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341, but it may be displayed in other areas, for example outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner other than the lower left area. In this way, by displaying the capture image 78 as a reduced image outside the area where the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to prevent the display of the capture image 78 from impeding the visibility of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, the capture image 78 may be displayed as it is, without being displayed as a reduced image, so long as the visibility of the changing display of the decorative pattern is not hindered. For example, as described below, when the reserved continuous performance is executed by the stop display of a specific complete miss (same color pattern) or a predetermined complete miss (chance eye), the specific complete miss (same color pattern) or the predetermined complete miss (chance eye) is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern, so that the visibility of the changing display of the decorative pattern is prevented from being hindered even if the capture image 78 is displayed as it is, without being reduced. And, when the capture image 78 is displayed as it is, without being reduced, the size of the capture image 78 is set large, so that the player can easily understand that the capture image 78 is being displayed.

The capture image 78 may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special pattern game as an image with a lower density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) than the image of the first special pattern continuous performance, for example, as an image with a lower density than the decorative pattern, preferably with a density that allows the image of a lower layer than the capture image 78 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible. That is, the capture image 78 may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a modified image of the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game, similar to when it is displayed as a reduced image. In this way, by displaying the capture image 78 as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special pattern continuous performance, that is, by displaying it as a modified image of the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game, it becomes possible to display the capture image 78 without being restricted by the variable display area of the decorative pattern on the pattern display unit 341. This makes it possible to display the decorative pattern variably displayed on the pattern display unit 341 and the capture image 78 superimposed on it during the second special symbol game, not just outside the variable area of the decorative pattern variably displayed on the pattern display unit 341. By displaying the decorative pattern variably displayed on the pattern display unit 341 and the capture image 78 superimposed on it, it becomes possible for the player to easily view the capture image 78 even when the player is focusing on the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, by displaying the capture image 78 on the pattern display section 341 in the second special pattern game with a density that allows images in layers below the capture image 78 to be visible, or with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible, it becomes possible to view the changing display of the decorative pattern even if the capture image 78 is displayed on the front or back side of the decorative pattern. This makes it possible for the player to easily view the capture image 78 even when the player is focusing on the changing display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, since the captured image 78 can be displayed without being restricted by the decorative pattern changing display area in the pattern display section 341, it becomes possible to visually recognize the changing display of the decorative pattern even if the reduction ratio of the captured image 78 is set high, and it also becomes possible to visually recognize the changing display of the decorative pattern even when the captured image 78 is displayed as is without being reduced. As a result, even when the captured image 78 is displayed as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special pattern continuous performance, the size of the captured image 78 can be set large, making it possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the captured image 78.

When the capture image 78 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special pattern game with a density that allows images in layers below the capture image 78 to be seen, or with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be seen, it is also possible to display only the outline of the capture image 78. For example, when the first special pattern continuous performance is displayed by a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed, such as a chance eye performance or a same color pattern performance (see FIG. 65), the capture image 78 may be displayed with only the outline that allows the type of decorative pattern to be recognized (only the outline of the number). In this way, when the capture image 78 is displayed as an outline that allows the type of decorative pattern to be recognized, even if the capture image 78 is displayed on the front side or back side of the decorative pattern, the changing display of the decorative pattern can be seen. This makes it possible for the player to easily see the capture image 78, even if the player is focusing on the changing display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the capture image 78 need only clearly indicate or suggest that a reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the second special symbol special performance was performed, and that a reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the second special symbol special performance is performed, and there are no particular restrictions on the capture timing in the reserved continuous performance. For example, the capture timing in the reserved continuous performance may be at the start of the reserved continuous performance (when the decorative symbols start to change), during the performance (while the decorative symbols are changing and being displayed), or at the end (when the decorative symbols stop changing).

In addition, the indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance, is not limited to the display of the capture image 78, and may be any other method as long as the display of the change in the decorative pattern is visible. For example, the indication or suggestion may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 78, such as a text image, an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these, indicating that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. In other words, the indication or suggestion may be displayed as an image that has been changed to an image different from the performance image of the reserved continuous performance performed in the first special symbol game. In this way, the explicit or suggested information is displayed as an image that is changed to a different image from the presentation image of the pending continuous presentation that was being executed in the first special symbol game, making it possible to display the information in various positions on the symbol display unit 341 without impeding the visibility of the changing display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341.

The type of the specific image may also be associated with the type of the reserved continuous performance. In this way, by associating the type of specific image with the type of reserved continuous performance, not only is it possible to know that a reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, but it is also possible to know the type of reserved continuous performance that was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance from the type of the displayed specific image.

Even when a specific image is displayed to clearly indicate or suggest that a reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special pattern game before the second special pattern special performance is performed, and that a reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special pattern game after the second special pattern special performance is performed, the specific image may be displayed as an image with a lower density than the decorative pattern, preferably an image with a density that allows the image in a layer lower than the capture image 78 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible, or an image with only the outline, and further, even when the specific image is displayed in these display modes, the specific image may be displayed on the front or back of the decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner in the second special pattern game, superimposed thereon, or may be displayed outside the variable area of the decorative pattern.

The capture image 78 or the specific image may be displayed during the entire period during which the second special symbol game is being played, or may be displayed during a portion of the period during which the second special symbol game is being played, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or both for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, and there is no particular limitation on the display period of the capture image 78 or the specific image. In addition, the capture image 78 or the specific image does not need to be displayed during all second special symbol games when the second special symbol game is played multiple times in succession, and may be displayed, for example, only in the first second special symbol game, only in the last second special symbol game, or both in the first and last second special symbol games, and the number of second special symbol games in which the capture image 78 or the specific image is displayed may be different from the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special performance is played.

The second special effect is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 61(B) and 61(C) and may take other forms. For example, the second special effect may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, and may execute a specified audio effect through the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

The second special effect may be any effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a special privilege will be given to the player when a certain condition is met, and does not necessarily have to be an effect in which the type of the jackpot when the condition is met is that the decorative pattern stops and displays a jackpot pattern (e.g., a repeating number). Examples of the certain condition include the decorative pattern being a reach, or a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those in which the type of the jackpot when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port 315 is a jackpot is always a jackpot. For example, the present invention can be applied to ST machines such as V-ST machines and type 1/2 mixed machines, in which the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball 99 into the second winning port 315 includes a win other than a jackpot.

<Step S3329>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 59, if the electric role long opening flag is set to OFF (step S3326: No), that is, if the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is triggered by a short opening (execution of a game with a short opening normal figure), the value of the short opening winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S3329), and the command determination process is terminated. In this way, the value of the short opening winning counter is incremented by 1 when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 in a state where the reserved number M for the second special figure game has not reached the upper limit number when the second winning port 315 is short opening (execution of a game with a short opening normal figure). On the other hand, the value of the short-open winning counter, as will be described in detail later, is used in the variation type (presentation pattern) for setting the variation type (presentation pattern) to be executed in the special chart game when the number of special chart games in which the continuous pending performance is executed is increased by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 during the short opening, in order to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the chance eye performance being executed consecutively as a continuous pending performance in four or more special chart games (wherein a confirmed jackpot performance is executed if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss) (see step S3655 in Figure 71 and step S3664 in Figure 72).

<Step S3330>
If the received command is not the second special symbol reservation command (step S3323: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an electric role closing command as shown in Fig. 60. The electric role closing command is a command indicating that the electric role 315b is closed, and is set in step S1817 of the normal symbol winning game control process in Fig. 25 executed by the main control device 4 when the electric role 315b is closed.

If the received command is an electric reel close command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3331. If the received command is not an electric reel close command (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3335.

<Step S3331>
If the received command is an electric role closing command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the electric role long opening flag is set to ON (step S3331). The electric role long opening flag indicates that the electric role 315b is long opened by the execution of a long opening normal game, and is set to ON in step S3311 of the command judgment process when the electric role opening command is received.

If the electric reel length open flag is set to on (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3332, and if the electric reel length open flag is set to off (step S3331: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3334.

<Steps S3332 and S3333>
If the electric reel long opening flag is set on (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to end the electric reel long opening presentation (see Figure 61 (A)) which clearly indicates or suggests to the player that the electric reel 315b has been long opened due to the execution of a long opening normal game (step S3332), and sets the electric reel long opening flag to off (step S3333), and ends the command judgment process.

<Step S3334>
If the long electric role open flag is set to OFF (step S3331: No), the MPU 51 sets the short open close flag to ON (step S3334) and ends the command determination process. The short open close flag is a flag indicating that the electric role 315b that was short open in the short open normal game has been closed. This short open close flag is used to determine whether or not the chance eye performance is executed consecutively for four or more special game plays in step S3652 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. 71 by the short opening of the electric role 315b and the ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is not a command to close the electric role object (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special pattern variation command. If the received command is a special pattern variation command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3336. On the other hand, if the received command is not a special pattern variation command (step S3335: No), the MPU 51 executes a process based on other commands (step S3340) and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is a special pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a variation type (presentation pattern) setting process for setting the variation type (presentation pattern) to be executed in the special game (step S3336), and proceeds to step S3337. Details of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 67 to 72.

<Step S3337>
In step S3337, the MPU 51 executes a stop symbol combination setting process for setting a stop display combination of decorative symbols in the special symbol game, and shifts the process to step S3338. Details of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74.

<Step S3338>
In step S3338, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter, and proceeds to step S3339. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process in step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like, based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S3339>
In step S3339, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for identifying the variation type (performance pattern type) in the symbol display section 341 and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (performance pattern type) set in step S3336 and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol set in step S3337. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the performance image and the variation image of the decorative symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the performance display and the variation display in the symbol display section 341 according to the variation type (performance pattern) and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and sequentially stops and displays the variable display of the multiple decorative symbols. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variable type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variable pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc.

[Hold continuous performance setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the hold continuous performance setting process executed in step S3322 of the command determination process of Fig. 59 will be described with reference to Figs. 62 to 65. The hold continuous performance setting process is a process for setting the type of hold continuous performance in a situation where it is possible to start the hold continuous performance. Here, Figs. 62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the hold continuous performance setting process.

<Step S3401>
In the pending continuous performance setting process, in step S3401, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, that is, whether or not the first special symbol game is in a state in which it is possible to execute. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON when it is judged in the command judgment process that a jackpot game start command has been received (step S3118 in FIG. 47), and is set to OFF when it is judged that a jackpot game end command has been received (step S3137 in FIG. 48).

If the jackpot play flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the jackpot play flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
If the jackpot game is not being played (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a high-frequency support mode flag indicating that the mode is the high-frequency support mode is set to ON (step S3402). That is, in this step S3402, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the mode is the high-frequency support mode.

The high frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends during the game state transition process, and is set to OFF in step S2307 of FIG. 33 when the game state transitions from a sure-variant game state or a time-limited game state to a sure-variant jackpot game state or a normal jackpot game state, or in step S2326 of FIG. 34 when the game state transitions from a time-limited game state to a normal game state.

The reason for determining whether or not the high-frequency support mode is selected in step S3402 is to set the reserved continuous performance to be executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and not executed in the high-frequency support mode, which is the special probability game state or the time-limited game state. Of course, the reserved continuous performance may be executed in either or both of the high-frequency support mode, which is the special probability game state or the time-limited game state.

If the high-frequency support mode flag is set to on (step S3402: Yes), i.e., if the game is in high-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, if the high-frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S3402: No), i.e., if the game is in low-frequency support mode rather than high-frequency support mode, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
When the frequency support mode flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), that is, when the mode is the low frequency support mode rather than the high frequency support mode, the MPU 51 judges whether the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3403). The pending continuous performance execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending continuous performance has started, and is set to ON in step S3611 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. 68 described later when the pending continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game executed consecutively after the first special symbol game in which the pending continuous performance is started.

When the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous performance setting process since there is no need to set a pending continuous performance since a pending continuous performance is being executed. On the other hand, when the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3404.

<Step S3404>
When the reserved continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the second special performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3404). The second special performance execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special performance has started, and is set to ON in step S3636 of the variation type (performance pattern) setting process in FIG. 68 of FIG. 70 described later when the second special performance is scheduled to be executed in the second special performance game executed consecutively after the second special performance game in which the second special performance starts.

When the second special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous effect setting process since there is no need to set the pending continuous effect since the second special effect is being executed. On the other hand, when the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3405.

<Step S3405>
When the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the number of reserved first special symbols N after the increase is 2 or more when the reserved number of rights to play the first special symbol game is increased by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314. That is, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous effect with one of the conditions being that there is at least one reserved right for the first special symbol game when the game ball 99 enters the first winning port 314.

If the increased number N of reserved first special symbols is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3406. In other words, the continuous reserved effect can be triggered by the entry of a game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 when the number N of reserved first special symbols is 1 to 3.

On the other hand, if the first special reserved number N after the increase due to the game ball 99 entering the first winning opening 314 is not 2 or more (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 ends the reserved continuous performance setting process. In other words, the reserved continuous performance is not started as a result of the game ball 99 entering the first winning opening 314 when the reserved number N is 0.

<Step S3406>
If the number of reserved first special symbols N after the increase is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the variable display time of the reserved first special symbol game is 30 seconds or more based on the information on the variable pattern (variable display time and the result of the big win lottery) for the increased reserved number included in the first special symbol reservation command. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the reservation that may be the opportunity to start the reserved continuous performance is a first special symbol game in which a performance with a reach should be executed.

If the variable display time of the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, if the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a performance involving a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3407.

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, if the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is one that should result in a complete miss without a reach, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3410.

<Steps S3407 to S3409>
If the variable display time of the first special chart game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, if the first special chart game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a performance involving a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game corresponding to the increased hold is a jackpot or not based on information regarding the variable pattern for the increased hold (variable display time and result of the jackpot lottery) contained in the first special chart hold command (step S3407).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased reserved number is a jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a reserved continuous performance setting process based on the reserved continuous performance pattern type setting table for the jackpot performance described below (see FIG. 64) according to the number N of reserved first special symbols (step S3408), and transitions the process to step S3411 in FIG. 63.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased reserved number is not a jackpot (step S3407: No), i.e., if a miss reach performance should be executed, the MPU 51 executes a reserve continuous performance setting process based on the reserve continuous performance pattern type setting table for miss reach (see FIG. 64) described below according to the number N of reserved first special symbols (step S3409), and transitions the process to step S3411 in FIG. 63.

<Step S3410>
If the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, if the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased hold is one in which a complete miss performance without a reach should be executed, the MPU 51 executes a hold continuous performance setting process based on the hold continuous performance pattern type setting table for a complete miss reach described below (see Figure 64) according to the number N of first special symbol holds (step S3410), and transitions the process to step S3411 of Figure 63.

Here, Fig. 64(A) to Fig. 64(C) are diagrams showing an example of a reserved continuous performance pattern type setting table. Specifically, Fig. 64(A) is a reserved continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the increased number of reserved first special charts N is 4, Fig. 64(B) is a reserved continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the increased number of reserved first special charts N is 3, and Fig. 64(C) is a reserved continuous performance pattern type setting table used when the increased number of reserved first special charts N is 2.

As shown in Fig. 64(A) to Fig. 64(C), there are four types of reserved continuous performance patterns: same-color pattern performance, chance eye performance, mini character performance, and zone performance (mode performance). In Fig. 64(A) to Fig. 64(C), "same-color pattern three times" means that the same-color pattern performance is executed in three consecutive first special pattern games, "same-color pattern two times" means that the same-color pattern performance is executed in two consecutive first special pattern games, and "same-color pattern one time" means that the same-color pattern performance is executed only in one first special pattern game. Similarly, "chance eye X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 4), "mini character performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3), and "zone performance X times" (X is an integer from 1 to 3) mean that the chance eye performance, mini character performance, or zone performance is executed in X first special pattern games. In other words, "XX times" means that a single type of reserved continuous performance is executed in succession in a predetermined number of first special pattern games. Of course, the reserved continuous performance is not limited to a single type of reserved continuous performance being executed in succession in a predetermined number of first special pattern games, and multiple types of reserved continuous performances (for example, a mini character performance and a zone performance) may be executed simultaneously in one first special pattern game, as long as the combination is executable as a performance.

Regarding the number N of reserved first special symbols, the chance effect is set to be the most likely to be set as a reserved continuous effect, compared to other reserved continuous effects such as the same color pattern effect. On the other hand, the zone effect (mode effect) is set to be the least likely to be set among the reserved continuous effects.

In addition, in Figures 64 (A) to 64 (C), "-" means that the reserved continuous performance is not set. The reserved continuous performance is not set in "-", and it accounts for the majority of the random number allocation, regardless of the reserved number N of the first special chart. Therefore, the frequency (probability) of the reserved continuous performance being executed is lower than the frequency (probability) of the reserved continuous performance not being executed. Furthermore, the reserved continuous performance is not set in "-", and the smaller the reserved number N of the first special chart, the more the random number allocation is set. In other words, the smaller the reserved number N of the first special chart, the lower the frequency (probability) of the reserved continuous performance being executed, and the larger the reserved number N of the first special chart, the higher the frequency (probability) of the reserved continuous performance being executed.

Here, the same color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) are effects that clearly indicate or suggest the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special chart game for the reserved item that triggered the start of the reserved consecutive effect will be a jackpot. For example, the "Chance Eye 4 Times" effect, in which the chance eye effect is executed in four consecutive first special chart games, can be set only when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot when the number of reserved first special charts N is 4 (see FIG. 64 (A)), and is not set when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (miss reach or complete miss), so "Chance Eye 4 Times" is a jackpot confirmation effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. On the other hand, all reserved consecutive effects other than "Chance Eye 4 Times" are effects that suggest the expectation of a jackpot. In other words, if the same-color pattern effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect), which are consecutive pending effects other than "4 chances", are executed four or more times, they will not become a confirmed jackpot effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In this way, the effect clearly indicates or suggests the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special game for the hold that triggered the start of the continuous hold effect will be a jackpot, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the continuous hold effect will be displayed, and when the continuous hold effect is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the jackpot lottery will transition to a special game state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, except for the "4 chances" that indicate a big win, when the number of first special pattern games in which the consecutive reserved effects are executed is the same, the chance of a big win for the consecutive reserved effects is set to, for example, the lowest for the mini character effect, the same color pattern effect and the chance effect are set to the same level (the same or nearly the same), and the highest for the zone effect (mode effect).

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be performed consecutively in multiple first special symbol games, in the second special symbol game that is performed based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 by the execution of a short-open normal symbol winning game, the reserved continuous performance continues to be performed without the second special symbol special performance being performed. In this case, if the number of first special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance is performed and the number of second special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance is performed are added together, the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance is performed may be four or more.

Here, if a chance eye effect is being executed as the reserved continuous effect, when the number of times the special chart game in which the reserved continuous effect is executed reaches four or more times, as described above, the reserved continuous effect becomes a jackpot confirmed effect that indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Therefore, if the results of the jackpot lottery for the special chart game executed from the fourth time onwards after the chance eye effect as a specified reserved continuous effect has started do not include a jackpot, if the chance eye effect is executed four or more times in succession, an inconsistency will occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous effect.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a chance eye effect is being executed as the reserved continuous effect, if the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed is four or more, before the chance eye effect is executed in four consecutive special symbol games, the reserved continuous effect is changed to an effect other than a chance eye effect, for example, a same-color pattern effect that does not become a jackpot confirmation effect indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, even if it is executed four or more times. This prevents inconsistencies from occurring between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous effect.

As mentioned above, if a reserved continuous performance other than the chance eye performance is executed in four or more consecutive first special pattern games, it will not result in a guaranteed big win performance, but will be executed as a performance that suggests the likelihood of a big win. Therefore, even if the number of special pattern games in which a reserved continuous performance is executed is four or more, if a performance other than the chance eye performance is executed as a reserved continuous performance, the same type of reserved continuous performance will continue to be executed without changing the type of reserved continuous performance. Of course, even if the type of reserved continuous performance is one that will not cause any inconvenience if executed in succession in a predetermined number of special pattern games (for example, four times) or more, the type of reserved continuous performance may be changed before the scheduled number of special pattern games are executed.

Here, the jackpot expectation rate of the chance eye effect, which is the predetermined reserved continuous effect before the change, and the same-color pattern effect, which is the specific reserved continuous effect after the change, is set to be the same or approximately the same. For example, the difference in jackpot expectation rate between the chance eye effect and the same-color pattern effect is set to be -5% or more and +5% or less, and the difference in jackpot expectation rate between the chance eye effect and the same-color pattern effect is set to be -2.5% or more and +2.5% or less. In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot expectation rate of the predetermined reserved continuous effect before the change and the specific reserved continuous effect after the change is set to be the same or approximately the same.

In this way, the jackpot expectation rate of the specified reserved continuous performance before the change and the specific reserved continuous performance after the change are set to be the same or nearly the same. Therefore, when the type of reserved continuous performance is changed, for example when it is changed from a chance eye performance to a same color pattern performance, the jackpot expectation rate of the reserved continuous performance after the change does not decrease significantly. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest due to a decrease in the jackpot expectation rate caused by the change in the reserved continuous performance, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

As described above, the selection rate of the chance eye effect, which is a predetermined consecutive hold effect, is set higher than the selection rate of the same color pattern effect, which is a specific consecutive hold effect. That is, in this embodiment, the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change is set higher than the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effect after the change. In this way, by setting the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold effect before the change higher than the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effect after the change, inconveniences caused by the consecutive display of predetermined consecutive hold effects (e.g., chance eye effects) which have a high probability of causing inconveniences are appropriately avoided.

In addition, when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, not only to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance, but also when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, if the variable display time for the reserved first special game that triggered the start of the reserved continuous performance is long, that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the reserved is a jackpot or a reach performance with a high jackpot expectation is executed, the type of the reserved continuous performance may be changed so that the specific reserved continuous performance type after the change has a higher jackpot expectation than the type of the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change. For example, if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a mini character performance with the lowest jackpot expectation, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a chance eye performance, same color pattern performance, or zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character performance, and if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a chance eye performance or same color pattern performance, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the chance eye performance and same color pattern performance. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning between the specific consecutive reserved performance after the change and the specific consecutive reserved performance before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, and preferably 25% or more.

In this way, by changing the type of the continuous hold performance so that the specific continuous hold performance after the change has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the predetermined continuous hold performance before the change, the expectation of a jackpot suggested to the player by changing the type of the continuous hold performance is improved. As a result, when a predetermined continuous hold performance is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the type of the specific continuous hold performance will be changed, and when the type of the continuous hold performance is changed from the predetermined continuous hold performance to a specific continuous hold performance, in the special game in which the changed specific continuous hold performance is executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the special game while having high hopes that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the zone effect (mode effect) with the highest jackpot expectation has the lowest selection rate among the consecutive hold effects. In other words, in this embodiment, when the type of consecutive hold effects is changed to a specific consecutive hold effect with a high jackpot expectation, such as when the type of consecutive hold effects is changed from a chance eye effect or same color pattern effect, which is a specific consecutive hold effect, to a zone effect (mode effect), which is a specific consecutive hold effect, the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effects with a low jackpot expectation before the change is high, and the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold effects with a high jackpot expectation after the change is set high.

By setting the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold performance with a low expectation of a jackpot before the change high and the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot after the change high, the selection rate of the predetermined consecutive hold performance before the change is set high, so the frequency with which the predetermined consecutive hold performance before the change is executed increases, and the player has more opportunities to expect that the consecutive hold performance will be changed to the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, further improving the interest of the game, and by setting the selection rate of the specific consecutive hold performance after the change low, the frequency with which the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed decreases, and the player's joy when the consecutive hold performance is changed to the specific consecutive hold performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is further increased, further improving the interest of the game.

The timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be any timing that does not cause an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the predetermined reserved continuous performance, for example, between the special game that is executed next to the special game that is executed at the stage when it is found that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance, and the special game where an inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance (for example, the special game executed for the fourth time from the start of the predetermined reserved continuous performance). In other words, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be either the first special game or the second special game, as long as an inconsistency does not occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance.

Here, if the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance is the first special symbol game, by continuously executing the reserved continuous performance, the occurrence of any inconvenience that may occur in the first special symbol game that is resumed after the second special symbol game ends can be avoided.

In addition, by changing the type of the reserved continuous performance in the first special symbol game that is resumed after the end of the second special symbol game, in the event that continuing to execute the reserved continuous performance before the change would cause inconvenience, the number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance before the change is displayed consecutively is ensured to be as large as possible. In this way, by ensuring the maximum number of special symbol games in which the reserved continuous performance before the change is displayed consecutively, even in the event that continuing to execute the reserved continuous performance before the change would cause inconvenience, the player can enjoy the reserved continuous performance before the change to the maximum.

On the other hand, if the timing for changing the type of reserved continuous performance is the second special chart game, and if an inconvenience occurs due to the consecutive execution of the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change, the inconvenience is avoided when the inconvenience occurs in the second special chart game, and even if an inconvenience occurs in the first special chart game that is resumed after the second special chart game ends, the inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first special chart game is resumed.

In addition, if the timing for changing the type of reserved continuous performance is a special game that is executed after the special game that is executed at the stage where it is determined that an inconsistency may occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified reserved continuous performance, the occurrence of the inconvenience is immediately avoided after it is recognized that an inconvenience will occur by executing the specified reserved continuous performance in succession.

On the other hand, in the case of a special game in which the timing of the change in the type of the consecutive reserved performance causes a mismatch between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the specified consecutive reserved performance, the player's expectations can be maintained to the maximum extent by the consecutive display of the specified consecutive reserved performance. Therefore, the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the change of the specified consecutive reserved performance to a specific consecutive reserved performance is reduced, and a decrease in the interest in the game is prevented.

Of course, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if the number of special game plays in which the continuous reserved performance is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four times) when a continuous reserved performance other than a chance eye performance is being executed. In other words, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times. In this way, by changing the type of the continuous reserved performance when no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession in many special game plays, and therefore to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by a single type of continuous reserved performance being executed in succession in many special game plays.

In addition, there are no restrictions on the combination of the type of reserved continuous performance before the change and the type of reserved continuous performance after the change, but it should be determined within a range that does not cause inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the reserved continuous performance. For example, if a same-color pattern performance is set as the reserved continuous performance, and the number of special game plays in which the reserved continuous performance is executed reaches a predetermined number of four or more times, the reserved continuous performance may be changed to a performance other than a same-color pattern performance, such as a chance eye performance.

In addition, the change in the continuous hold effect is not limited to one time, but may be made multiple times.

In this case, the same-color pattern effect is an effect in which all decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed are the same color, and the decorative pattern combinations displayed are specific complete misses other than jackpot pattern combinations (for example, double numbers where all decorative patterns are the same) and miss reach patterns (for example, pattern combinations where the left and right patterns are the same and only the center pattern is different).

For example, as shown in FIG. 51(A) above, when the decorative symbols "3" and "7" are set to red, the decorative symbols "1", "5" and "9" that are odd numbers other than "3" and "7" are set to green, and the decorative symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" that are even numbers are set to blue, there are many combinations of same-color symbols that are completely out of alignment, but it is preferable that the combination of same-color symbols as a specific completely out of alignment that is stopped and displayed in the same-color symbol performance is a distinctive combination of symbols. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, a combination of same-color symbols as a specific completely out of alignment that is stopped and displayed in the same-color symbol performance is a combination of symbols in which the left and center symbols are the same number, and the right symbol is different from the left and center symbols. In this way, the specific completely out of alignment as a combination of same-color symbols that is stopped and displayed in the same-color symbol performance is a distinctive combination, so that the player can easily understand that the same-color symbol performance has been executed. In addition, in the same-color pattern presentation, when a specific combination of same-color patterns is displayed as a complete miss, a specific special sound unique to the execution of the same-color pattern presentation may be output from the speaker 26. This also allows the player to easily understand that the same-color pattern presentation has been executed.

The chance eye effect is an effect in which a chance eye is displayed as a decorative pattern that is a predetermined complete miss that is not the same color. The predetermined complete miss (chance eye) displayed in the chance eye effect is preferably a distinctive pattern combination for the same reason as in the same color pattern effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, a predetermined complete miss (chance eye) displayed in the chance eye effect may be a pattern combination in which all decorative patterns are odd numbers, the left pattern and the center pattern are the same number, and the right pattern is different from the left pattern and the center pattern. Also, in the chance eye effect, when a predetermined complete miss (chance eye) is displayed, a specific special sound may be output from the speaker 26 when the chance eye effect is executed so that the player can easily understand that the chance eye effect has been executed.

The mini character performance is a performance in which a mini character (mini character) is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. The mini character is, for example, a miniature representation of a character that appears in the performance of the gaming machine 10, or a representation in which the character has a large head, such as by making the character two-headed. In the mini character performance, there are no particular restrictions on the display mode of the mini character, but when the mini character performance is executed in a performance other than the continuous hold performance, it is preferable that the mini character is displayed in a manner that can be distinguished from other mini character performances. Examples of mini character performances in the continuous hold performance include a performance in which a mini character crosses the pattern display unit 341 to the left and right, up and down, or diagonally. In addition, when a hold display image is displayed for the first hold of the first special chart game, a mini character may be displayed near the hold display image to suggest that the mini character performance is a performance related to the first hold for the first special chart game.

A zone effect (mode effect) is an effect that indicates that a reach effect or an effect with a high probability of winning will be executed by executing a special background effect (for example, a background effect including a text image such as "XX Zone" ("XX Mode")) executed in the zone effect (mode effect) as a background effect of a decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the reserved continuous performance includes a same-color pattern performance and a chance eye performance. The same-color pattern performance and the chance eye performance are performances in which decorative patterns (e.g. numbers) are stopped and displayed at specific completely different numbers as same-color patterns or at specific different numbers as chance eyes, and since the player can easily understand that the reserved continuous performance is being performed by the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed, when a reserved continuous performance is performed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the reserved continuous performance will be performed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when the reserved continuous performance is executed by stopping and displaying a specific complete miss or a predetermined complete miss, as described above, if the display of the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, it becomes possible to display the capture image 78 in various forms without impeding the visibility of the change in the decorative pattern in the second special symbol game. For example, as the capture image 78, the image of the reserved continuous performance in the first special symbol game can be displayed in its original form, and the image of the reserved continuous performance in the first special symbol game can be displayed as a reduced image, an image with reduced density, an image with outlines, etc. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance by various effects, which can increase the player's interest in the game and improve the excitement of the game.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure of the hold continuous performance setting process, when any of the setting processes of steps S3408 to S3410 is completed, as shown in Fig. 63, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a setting for executing the hold continuous performance is made in the setting process (step S3411). If a setting for executing the hold continuous performance is made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3412, and if a setting for executing the hold continuous performance is not made (step S3411: No), the MPU 51 ends the hold continuous performance setting process.

<Step S3412>
When the setting for executing the reserved continuous performance is made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance setting flag indicating that the setting for executing the reserved continuous performance is made to ON (step S3412), and proceeds to step S3413. The reserved continuous performance setting flag is referenced in step S3602 of the variable type (performance pattern) setting process of FIG. 67 to determine whether or not it is the first special game that starts the reserved continuous performance.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 sets a reserved continuous performance execution count counter that indicates the remaining number of first special symbol games for executing the reserved continuous performance. For example, when "X chances" (X is a positive integer from 1 to 4) is set as the reserved continuous performance, the MPU 51 sets "X" as the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
When the reserved continuous performance execution counter is set, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance (step S3414). When the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance (step S3414: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance to ON (step S3415), and ends the reserved continuous performance setting process. On the other hand, when the chance eye performance is not set as the reserved continuous performance (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3416.

<Steps S3416 and S3417>
If the chance eye effect is not set as the reserved continuous effect (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect (step S3416). If the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect (step S3416: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect on (step S3417), and ends the reserved continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, if the same color pattern effect is not set as the reserved continuous effect (step S3416: No), that is, if the mini character effect or zone effect (mode effect) is set as the reserved continuous effect, the MPU 51 ends the reserved continuous effect setting process.

[Second special effect setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the second special effect setting process executed in step S3228 of the command determination process in Fig. 59 will be described with reference to Fig. 66. The second special effect setting process is a process for enabling the second special effect to be started in the second special effect game executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the electric role object 315b in the long opening normal game in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode. Here, Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special effect setting process.

<Step S4201>
As shown in Fig. 66, in the second special chart special effect setting process, in step S3501, the MPU 51 first judges whether the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to ON. The second special chart special effect setting flag is a flag for enabling the second special chart special effect to be started in the second special chart game, and is set to ON in step S3503 described later. In addition, the second special chart special effect setting flag is referred to in step S3635 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in Fig. 70 described later to judge whether the second special chart special effect is to be started in the second special chart game.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special effect setting process, and if the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3502.

<Steps S3502 and S3503>
When the second special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the second special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3502). The second special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special effect is started, and when the second special effect is executed in the next second special effect game, it is set to ON in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 70 described later.

When the second special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special effect setting process. On the other hand, when the second special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 sets the second special effect setting flag to on (step S3503) and ends the second special effect setting process. In this way, by setting the second special effect setting flag to on, in step S3642 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 70 described later, it becomes possible to set the second special effect for the second special effect game that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 by the electric role 315b being long-opened in the long-open normal game in the normal game state.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S3336 of the command determination process in Fig. 60 will be described with reference to Figs. 67 to 72. The variation type (presentation pattern) setting process is a process for setting the variation type (presentation pattern) for the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game executed when a variation pattern command is received. Here, Figs. 67 to 72 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (presentation pattern).

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in the variable type (effect pattern) setting process, in step S3601, the MPU 51 first judges whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0 or not. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when there is a reservation for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol game is executed in priority to the first special symbol game. That is, by judging whether the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0 or not, it is judged whether to execute the second special symbol game or the first special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602 and executes the process of setting the effect for the first special symbol game. On the other hand, if the second special chart reserved number M for the second special chart game is not 0 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3635 in FIG. 70 and executes processing to set the presentation for the second special chart game.

<Step S3602>
When the second special symbol reserved number M for the second special symbol game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S3602). The reserved continuous performance setting flag is a flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance is set to be executed, and is set to ON in step S3412 when the reserved continuous performance is set to be executed in the reserved continuous performance setting process of FIG. 63 executed when the first special symbol reserved command is received.

Then, if the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if the first reserved continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3605 in FIG. 68. On the other hand, if the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to off (step S3602: No), i.e., if the first reserved continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
When the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, when the first reserved continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 judges whether the reserved continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3603). The reserved continuous performance execution flag is a flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started, and is set to ON in step S3611 described later in the variation (performance pattern) type setting process in FIG. 68 when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game executed next to the first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is started.

Then, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S3603: Yes), i.e., if a pending continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game executed as the change, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3620 in FIG. 69. On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3603: No), i.e., if a pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special symbol game, the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3603: No), i.e., if pending continuous performance is executed in the first special chart game, the normal performance is set, i.e., the variation type (performance pattern type) is set in the same way as in the first embodiment described above, and the variation type (performance pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Steps S3605 to S3608>
When the reserved continuous performance setting flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the first reserved continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game, as shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance setting flag to OFF (step S3605), and sets the reserved continuous performance set in any of steps S3408 to S3410 in FIG. 62 as the reserved continuous performance for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game (step S3606). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining execution count of the reserved continuous performance (step S3607), and judges whether the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3608). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed.

Then, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3608: Yes), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3614. On the other hand, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is not the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3609.

<Steps S3609 and S3610>
If the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, if the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot or not (step S3609). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether a jackpot game will be executed after the special symbol game ends, or whether the reserved first special symbol game will be executed.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3609: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 clears the reserved continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the reserved continuous performance is executed (step S3610) to make the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, and transitions to step S3614. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3609: No), i.e., if the reserved first special symbol game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3611.

<Step S3611>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is not a jackpot (step S3609: No), that is, if the first special chart game that was reserved is executed after the special chart game ends, the MPU 51 sets the reserved continuous performance execution flag to on (step S3611), indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started, and transitions to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 and S3613>
When the reserved continuous performance execution flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started is set to ON, the MPU 51 judges whether the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3612). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance, and is set to ON when the chance eye performance is set as the reserved continuous performance in step S3415 of the reserved continuous performance setting process in FIG. 63 which is executed when the first special chart reserved command is received.

Then, if the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3612: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter, which indicates the number of times the first special pattern play of the chance eye effect was executed as the pending continuous effect (step S3613), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively is four times if the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous effect is a jackpot, and three times if it is a miss (see FIG. 64). Therefore, by referencing the value of the chance eye count counter, inconsistencies are prevented between the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous effect and the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect.

On the other hand, if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3612: No), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
If the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is the last first special chart game in which the pending continuous performance is executed (step S3608 or step S3610), that is, if the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed is 0, it is determined whether or not the chance eye flag, which indicates that a chance eye performance is set as the pending continuous performance, is set on (step S3614).

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S3615), and sets the final chance eye flag to on (step S3616), indicating that the chance eye effect executed as a reserved continuous effect in the special symbol game is the last chance eye effect, and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. The final chance eye flag is referenced to determine whether or not to set a chance eye as a stopping symbol combination in step S3702 in the stopping symbol combination setting process in Figure 73 described below.

On the other hand, if the chance flag is set to off (step S3614: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3617.

<Steps S3617 to S3619>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3614: No), it is determined whether or not the same color pattern flag, which indicates that the same color pattern effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, is set to ON (step S3617). If the same color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern flag to OFF (step S3618), and sets the final same color pattern flag, which indicates that the same color pattern effect executed as the reserved continuous effect in the special pattern game is the last same color pattern effect, to ON (step S3619), and ends the variable type (effect pattern) setting process. The final same color pattern flag is referenced to determine whether or not to set the same color pattern as the stop pattern combination in step S3706 in the stop pattern combination setting process of FIG. 73 described later.

On the other hand, if the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S3617: No), i.e., if the last pending continuous presentation executed in the special pattern game is not a chance eye presentation or a same-color pattern presentation, the MPU 51 ends the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Step S3620>
If the hold continuous performance execution flag, indicating that the hold continuous performance has started, is set to on (step S3603: Yes), that is, if the hold continuous performance is to be executed in the first special chart game executed as the special chart game, as shown in FIG. 69, the MPU 51 sets the hold continuous performance for the special chart game (step S3620) and transitions to step S3621.

The reserved continuous performance set in any of steps S3408 to S3410 of the reserved continuous performance setting process in FIG. 62 is set as the reserved continuous performance for the special symbol game. However, as described below, if a fourth chance eye performance executed as a jackpot confirmation performance can be set even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a miss, a process is executed to change the reserved continuous performance executed for the special symbol game from a chance eye performance to a same-color pattern performance in order to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the reserved continuous performance (step S3662 in FIG. 72).

<Step S3621>
When a pending continuous performance is set for the special game (step S3620), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance eye flag, indicating that a chance eye performance is set as the pending continuous performance, is set on (step S3621), and if the chance eye flag is set on (step S3621: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S3622, and if the chance eye flag is set off (step S3621: No), the processing proceeds to step S3625.

<Steps S3622 to S3624>
When the chance eye flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the chance eye count counter indicating the number of times the first special symbol game in which the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect (step S3622), and judges whether the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is 4 or not (step S3623). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the special symbol game is the first special symbol game in which the fourth chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect.

If the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is 4 (step S3623: Yes), the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3624), and the process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is not 4 (step S3623: No), the process proceeds to step S3625.

Here, as described above, the upper limit of the value of the chance eye count counter (the number of first special pattern games in which the chance eye effect is executed continuously as the reserved continuous effect) is four times when the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special pattern game that triggered the execution of the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect is a jackpot. On the other hand, the upper limit of the reservation for the first special pattern game is four, and the number of first special pattern games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed continuously is also four. And, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed as a double number, which is the same, and the chance eye cannot be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the chance eye in four consecutive first special pattern games, for example, in the fourth first special pattern game that notifies the user that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed in the high-speed variable game before the reach effect is executed, and then the double number is stopped and displayed via the reach effect. Thus, in this embodiment, if the result of the reserved jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution of the reserved continuous performance is a jackpot, and the chance eye performance as the reserved continuous performance is executed in four consecutive first special symbol games, the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a double number in the fourth first special symbol game. Therefore, in this step S3624, the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON in order to temporarily stop and display the chance eye before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a double number. This chance eye temporary stop flag is referenced in step S3709 of FIG. 74 when setting the stop display combination of the decorative symbol for the fourth first special symbol game when the chance eye performance as the reserved continuous performance is executed in four consecutive first special symbol games.

<Step S3625>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3621: No), or if the value of the chance eye count counter after the increment is not 4 (step S3623: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game, which is the special symbol game, is a jackpot (step S3625). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether a jackpot game is executed after the special symbol game ends or whether the reserved first special symbol game is executed, similar to step S3609 in FIG. 68 described above.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3625: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game will be executed after the special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3628. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3625: No), i.e., if the reserved first special symbol game will be executed after the special symbol game ends, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3626.

<Steps S3626 and S3627>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3625: No), that is, if the reserved first special symbol game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining execution count of the reserved continuous performance (step S3626). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the reserved continuous performance execution count counter after subtraction is 0 or not, that is, whether the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed (step S3627).

Then, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3629. On the other hand, if the value of the reserved continuous performance execution counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3627: No), i.e., if the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is not the last first special chart game in which the reserved continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 ends the variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

<Step S3628>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is a jackpot (step S3625: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is executed after the end of the special chart game, the MPU 51 clears the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed (step S3628) so that the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is the last first special chart game in which the pending continuous performance is executed, and transitions to step S3629.

<Step S3629>
If the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), or if the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of times the pending continuous performance is executed is cleared (step S3628), that is, if the first special chart game executed as the special chart game is the last first special chart game in which the pending continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 sets off the pending continuous performance execution flag indicating that the pending continuous performance has started (step S3629), and transitions to processing at step S3630.

<Step S3630>
In step S3630, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance eye flag indicating that a chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON. If the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3631, and if the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3633.

<Steps S3631 and S3632>
If the chance eye flag is set on (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S3631), clears the chance eye count counter (step S3632), and terminates the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3633 and S3634>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern presentation is set as the reserved continuous presentation is set to ON (step S3633). If the same color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern flag to OFF (step S3634) and ends the variable type (presentation pattern) setting process.

On the other hand, if the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S3633: No), i.e., if the pending continuous presentation is not a chance eye presentation or a same-color pattern presentation, but a mini-character presentation or a zone presentation (mode presentation), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Step S3635>
In step S3601 of FIG. 67, if it is determined that the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3601: No), that is, if there is a reservation for the second special symbol game, as shown in FIG. 70, the MPU 51 determines whether the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635). The second special symbol special effect setting flag is a flag for starting the second special symbol special effect (see FIG. 61 (B) and FIG. 61 (C)) in the second special symbol executed as the special symbol game. This second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to ON in step S3503 of the second special symbol special effect setting process in FIG. 66 when a second special symbol reservation command transmitted in response to the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the second winning hole 315 in the long opening normal symbol game is received.

If the second special effect setting flag is set to on (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3636; if the second special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3635: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3641.

<Steps S3636 and S3637>
If the second special chart special effect setting flag is set on (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect execution flag to on (step S3636), indicating that the second special chart special effect has started, and sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to off (step S3637), and transitions to step S3638.

<Step S3638>
In step S3638, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the electric device long opening flag indicating that the second winning port 315 is long opening (long opening normal winning game is being executed) is set to ON. If the electric device long opening flag is set to ON (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3639, and if the electric device long opening flag is set to OFF (step S3638: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3642.

<Steps S3639 and S3640>
If the electric reel length opening flag is set to ON (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to end the electric reel length opening performance (see FIG. 87 (A)) (step S3639), sets the electric reel length opening flag to OFF (step S3640), and moves the process to step S3642. That is, the electric reel length opening performance (see FIG. 87 (A)) is ended when either the start of the second special chart special performance (see FIG. 61 (A)) or the chain of the electric reel 315b is satisfied. That is, the second special chart special performance is executed with priority over the electric reel length opening performance.

<Step S3641>
If it is determined in step S3635 that the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3635: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second special chart special effect execution flag, which is set to on in step S3636 when the second special chart special effect is started, is set to on (step S3641).

If the second special chart special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3642, and if the second special chart special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3652 in FIG. 71.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
In step S3642, the MPU 51 sets the second special symbol game performance for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game. Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the reserved continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3643). The reserved continuous performance execution flag is a flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started, and is set to ON in step S3611 of FIG. 68 when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the first special symbol game executed next to the first special symbol game in which the reserved continuous performance was executed. That is, in this step S3643, it is judged whether the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of all the second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special performance is executed.

If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3644, and if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3643: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3645.

<Step S3644>
When the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the capture image display information in the display change pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 5 to the display control device 6 in order to display a capture image 78 (see FIG. 61(C)) indicating or suggesting that the pending continuous performance will be resumed in the first special game executed after the end of all second special games in which the second special performance is executed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special game performance (step S3644), and the process proceeds to step S3645. As a result, the capture image 78 is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special game performance (see FIG. 61(C)).

When the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), that is, when the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special chart game executed after the end of all second special chart games in which the second special chart special performance is executed, the processing of step S3644 is skipped. Therefore, when the pending continuous performance is not executed in the first special chart game executed after the end of all second special chart games in which the second special chart special performance is executed, the capture image 78 is not displayed on the pattern display unit 341 in the second special chart game performance (see FIG. 61 (B)).

Here, the capture image is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the reserved continuous performance that was being executed on the pattern display unit 341 in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance. This capture image 78 is displayed when the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and the reserved continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance (see FIG. 61 (B)). In other words, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests during the execution of the second special symbol special performance that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

In this embodiment, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player will forget that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and the player can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, the player will be significantly less likely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance.

In particular, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball 99 will enter the second winning port 315, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special pattern game was played. Also, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning port 315 (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won, so the number of second special pattern games in which the second special pattern special performance is executed is greater (the execution time of the second special pattern special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

In addition, the capture image 78 is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the reserved continuous performance executed in the pattern display unit 341 in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance, so that the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested, and the type of reserved continuous performance executed in the first special pattern game after the end of the second special pattern special performance is clearly indicated or suggested. For example, in this embodiment, four types of reserved continuous performances are set (see FIG. 64), namely, same color pattern performance, chance eye performance, mini character performance, and zone performance (mode performance), but the capture image 78 shown in FIG. 61 (C) clearly indicates or suggests that a chance eye performance in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the chance eye "113" (see FIG. 65) was executed as a reserved continuous performance in the first special pattern game before the execution of the second special pattern special performance. This allows the player to not only understand that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special chart game before the execution of the second special chart special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, but also to understand the type of reserved continuous performance. Therefore, the player's sense of discomfort about the reserved continuous performance being resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance is further reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being performed before the execution of the second special chart special performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance is further prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the capture image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341, but the capture image may be displayed on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special pattern special effect and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special pattern special effect. For example, the capture image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special pattern game is changed in the current special pattern game. In this way, by displaying the capture image on the entire pattern display section 341 for a certain period of time at either or both the end of the second special pattern special effect and the start of the reserved continuous effect executed after the end of the second special pattern special effect, the reserved continuous effect in the first special pattern game can be executed smoothly and without discomfort.

<Step S3645>
When the reserved continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), or when the reserved continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the capture image display information in the display variation pattern command (step S3644), and the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot or not (step S3645). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether a jackpot game is executed after the execution of the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game will be executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3646. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), i.e., if a jackpot game will not be executed after the end of the second special symbol game, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3649.

<Step S3646>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the long opening winning counter (step S3646) and moves the process to step S3647. Here, the value of the long opening winning counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special symbol games among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 while the second winning hole 315 is long open (during the execution of the long opening normal symbol winning game). That is, when a jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, the MPU 51 sets the number of unexecuted second special symbol games to 0.

<Steps S3647 and S3648>
In step S3647, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a pending continuous performance execution flag indicating that pending continuous performance has started is set to ON (step S3647). If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance execution flag to OFF (step S3648) and shifts the process to step S3651, and if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to OFF (step S3648: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3651.

<Steps S3649 and S3650>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game executed as the special game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long opening winning counter (step S3649) and determines whether the value of the long opening winning counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3650). If the value of the long opening winning counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3651, and if the value of the long opening winning counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3650: No), the MPU 51 ends the performance setting process.

Here, if the value of the long opening winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), that is, if the second special chart game as the special chart game is the last second special chart game in which the second special chart special effect is executed, the processing of steps S3647 and S3648 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to step S3651, so that if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set on, the pending continuous effect execution flag is not set to off. As a result, the pending continuous effect is resumed in the first special chart game executed following the last second special chart game in which the second special chart special effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special game that is executed after the last second special game in which the second special performance is executed. However, if the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), the process may be shifted to step S3647 so that the reserved continuous performance is not resumed in the first special game that is executed after the last second special game in which the second special performance is executed.

<Step S3651>
In step S3651, the MPU 51 sets the special effect execution flag indicating that the second special effect has started to OFF, and ends the variable type (effect pattern) setting process. As a result, the second special effect executed in the second special effect executed as the special effect game is executed as the last second special effect.

<Steps S3652 and S3653>
When it is determined in step S3641 that the second special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the short opening closing flag, which indicates that the electric role 315b that was short-opened in the short opening normal winning game has been closed, is set to ON (step S3652), as shown in Fig. 71. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is restricted by the end of the short opening normal winning game, and the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315 does not increase.

If the short open-close flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the short open-close flag to off (step S3653) and proceeds to step S3654. On the other hand, if the short open-close flag is set to off (step S3652: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Step S3654>
When the short open closing flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), when the short open closing flag is set to OFF (step S3653), the MPU 51 judges whether the chance eye flag is set to ON (step S3654). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect at the time when the electric role object 315b that was short open in the short open normal winning game is closed, thereby judging whether the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect in the second special game that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the short open normal winning game.

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3655, and if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3654: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Steps S3655 and S3656>
If the chance eye flag is set on (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 adds up the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the pending continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3655), and determines whether the added value is 4 or greater (step S3656).

Here, the value of the chance eye count counter is the number of first special symbol games in which the chance eye effect was executed as the reserved continuous effect, and the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter is the number of remaining first special symbol games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed. Therefore, the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter and the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter is the number of first special symbol games in which the initially set reserved continuous effect is executed. Also, the value of the short opening winning counter is the number of second special symbol games executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in a short opening normal symbol winning game, and is the number of second special symbol games in which the reserved continuous effect is executed. Therefore, the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is the maximum number of special symbol games (first special symbol games, second special symbol games) in which the chance eye effect is executed consecutively as the reserved continuous effect.

On the other hand, as mentioned above, if the chance eye effect is executed as the reserved continuous effect in four or more consecutive special pattern games, it becomes a jackpot confirmation effect that clearly indicates a jackpot. Therefore, when the chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, if the second special pattern game is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the short-opening normal pattern winning game, if the result of the jackpot lottery for each special pattern game in which the chance eye effect is executed is a miss, an inconsistency may occur between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

When a chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect, by determining whether the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the reserved continuous effect count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is 4 or more, it becomes possible to determine in advance whether an inconsistency may occur between the result indicated by the consecutive execution of the chance eye effect as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the sum of the chance eye count counter value, the pending continuous performance count counter value, and the short opening winning counter value is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3657, and if the sum is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Step S3657>
If the sum of the chance eye count counter value, the reserved continuous performance count counter value, and the short opening winning counter value is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the results of the jackpot lottery for all the special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, are misses (step S3657). In other words, the MPU 51 judges whether the results of the jackpot lottery for the special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, include a jackpot.

Then, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, is a miss (step S3657: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3660 in FIG. 72. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, is not a miss (step S3657: No), and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, includes a jackpot, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3658 in FIG. 72.

<Steps S3658 and S3659>
When the short opening and closing flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), when the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3654: No), when the sum of the value of the chance eye count counter, the value of the reserved continuous performance count counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), or when the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, includes a jackpot (step S3657: No), as shown in FIG. 72, the MPU 51 executes the process of step S3658. That is, when there is no inconvenience that the chance eye performance is executed as the reserved continuous performance in four or more consecutive special chart games, in step S3658, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the reserved continuous performance execution flag indicating that the reserved continuous performance has started is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not to set the reserved continuous performance as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the variation.

If the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to on (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous performance as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the special chart game (step S3659), and executes the processing of steps S3625 to S3634 in FIG. 69 described above.

On the other hand, if the pending continuous performance execution flag is set to off (step S3658: No), i.e., if the pending continuous performance is not set as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3604 in FIG. 67 described above, sets a normal performance (sets the performance in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above) as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the special chart game, and ends the setting of the variation type (performance pattern).

In this way, when the pending continuous performance execution flag is set on (step S3658: Yes), by setting the pending continuous performance as the performance for the second special chart game executed as the special chart game (step S3659), when the pending continuous performance is being executed in the first special chart game as the special chart game, if it is scheduled that the pending continuous performance will be executed consecutively in the next first special chart game that has been put on hold, even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 due to a short opening of the second winning port 315, in the second special chart game in which the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short opened, the second special chart special performance will not be executed and the pending continuous performance will continue to be executed. For this reason, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed continuously in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 when the second winning hole 315 is short-opened. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game due to the reserved continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, it is more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (the number of balls entering is smaller) than when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened, and it is more likely that the player will remember that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the second special chart game was executed. Therefore, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the effect of the reserved continuous performance being executed without the second special chart special performance being executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is high.

In addition, in a short opening where it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance continues to be executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the number of consecutive executions of the reserved continuous performance does not increase significantly, so the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being executed continuously in the second special chart game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the reserved continuous performance in the second special chart game, the reserved continuous performance can be effectively utilized in the second special chart game.

<Steps S3660 and S3661>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for all special chart games executed thereafter, including the second special chart game executed as the special chart game in question, is a miss (step S3657: Yes in Figure 71), in other words, if there is a possibility of an inconsistency occurring between the result indicated by the successive execution of chance eye effects as a pending continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery, the MPU 51 sets the chance eye flag to off (step S3660) and clears the value of the chance eye count counter (step S3661), thereby restricting the chance eye effects from being executed continuously.

<Steps S3662 and S3663>
When the process for restricting the chance eye effect from being continuously executed is executed (steps S3660 and S3661), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern effect as the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game (step S3662), sets the same color pattern indicating that the same color pattern is set as the reserved continuous effect to ON (step S3663), and proceeds to step S3664. That is, the MPU 51 changes the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect.

Here, the chance eye effect becomes a big win confirmation effect when it is executed in four or more special symbol games in succession, as described above. Therefore, if the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is changed from a chance eye effect to a same color pattern effect, the chance eye effect is prevented from being executed in four or more special symbol games in succession. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistency between the result indicated by the chance eye effect being executed in succession as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the big win lottery. On the other hand, as described above, the same color pattern effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of a big win, and even if it is executed in four or more special symbol games in succession, it does not become a big win confirmation effect. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is changed from a chance eye effect to a same color pattern effect and the same color pattern effect is executed in four or more special symbol games in succession, the reserved continuous effect does not indicate that the result of the big win lottery is a big win, so there is no inconsistency between the reserved continuous effect and the result of the big win lottery.

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is changed from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance, the reserved continuous performance is executed continuously for multiple special pattern games, but the reserved continuous performance may be interrupted by executing a special pattern game in which an image of a completely out-of-match eye other than the chance eye and the same color pattern is displayed before the chance eye performance is changed to the same color pattern performance. In this case, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being executed continuously in four or more special pattern games. In addition, by interrupting the reserved continuous performance, the player can be given the illusion that a same color pattern performance has started as a new reserved continuous performance after the chance eye performance as the reserved continuous performance ends. This allows the change from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance to be executed smoothly without any discomfort, and also allows the chance eye performance to be disguised as if the change to the same color pattern performance had not been performed. And by disguising the change from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance as if the change had not been performed, the inconvenience caused by the chance eye performance being executed continuously can be avoided without the player realizing it. However, if a change is made from the chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect to avoid inconvenience when the chance eye effect is executed consecutively in four or more special symbol games, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-color pattern effect is executed is a miss. Therefore, when a change is made from the chance eye effect to the same-color pattern effect, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-color pattern effect is executed is a miss. Therefore, by disguising it as if the change from the chance eye effect to the same-color pattern effect had not been made, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the changed same-color pattern effect is executed is a miss.

<Step S3664>
If the pending continuous performance for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is changed from a chance eye performance to a same color pattern performance, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short opening winning counter to the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter (step S3664).

Here, the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicates the number of remaining special game plays in which the pending continuous performance will be executed. The value of the short opening winning counter is the number of game balls 99 that enter the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short-open (a game with a short opening regular game is being executed) and the number of reserved balls M for the second special game has not reached the upper limit. Therefore, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short opening winning counter to the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter, thereby resetting the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter, which indicates the number of remaining special game plays in which the pending continuous performance will be executed, to a value that includes the number of pending continuous performances executed in the second special game.

<Steps S3665 and S3666>
If the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter is reset (step S3664), the MPU 51 clears the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3665), sets the short opening closed flag to off (step S3666), executes the processing of steps S3625 to S3634 in Figure 69 described above, and terminates the performance type setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3337 of the command determination process in Fig. 60 will be described with reference to Fig. 73 and Fig. 74. The stop symbol combination setting process is a process for setting a symbol combination when the decorative symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game are displayed in a stopped state. Here, Fig. 73 and Fig. 74 are a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Step S3701>
As shown in Fig. 73, in the stop symbol combination setting process, in step S3701, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not a chance eye flag indicating that a chance eye effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a chance eye (see Fig. 65) is set as the stop symbol combination.

If the chance eye flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3704, and if the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3702.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
If the chance eye flag is set to off (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final chance eye flag, which indicates that the chance eye effect executed as a pending continuous effect in the special chart game is the last chance eye effect, is set to on (step S3702).

If the final chance eye flag is set to on (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final chance eye flag to off (step S3703) and proceeds to step S3704. On the other hand, if the final chance eye flag is set to off (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
If the chance eye flag is set on (step S3701: Yes), or if the final chance eye flag that was set on is set to off (step S3703), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye (see Figure 65) as the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed as stopped, and terminates the stopping pattern combination setting process.

The type of chance eye to be displayed when the special symbol game is played can be determined by, for example, setting a chance eye type selection table that associates a chance eye type counter with an individual chance eye, and setting the chance eye from the chance eye type selection table based on the value of the chance eye type counter when the stop symbol combination is set.

<Step S3705>
When the chance symbol flag and the final chance symbol flag are set to OFF (step S3702: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the same color symbol flag indicating that the same color symbol effect is set as the reserved continuous effect is set to ON (step S3705). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not to set the same color symbol (see FIG. 65) as the stop symbol combination.

If the same-color pattern flag is set to on (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3708; if the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S3705: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3706.

<Steps S3706 and S3707>
If the same-color pattern flag is set to off (step S3705: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the final same-color pattern flag, which indicates that the same-color pattern performance executed as a pending continuous performance in the special game, is the last same-color pattern performance, is set to on (step S3706).

If the final same-color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final same-color pattern flag to OFF (step S3707) and proceeds to step S3708. On the other hand, if the final same-color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3709 in FIG. 74.

<Step S3708>
If the same-color pattern flag is set on (step S3705: Yes), or if the final same-color pattern flag that was set on is set to off (step S3707), the MPU 51 sets the same-color pattern (see Figure 65) as the combination of decorative patterns to be displayed in a stopped state (step S3708), and terminates the stopped pattern combination setting process.

The type of same-color pattern to be stopped during the variation may be determined by, for example, setting a same-color pattern type selection table that associates same-color pattern type counters with individual same-color patterns, and setting the same-color pattern from the same-color pattern type selection table based on the value of the same-color pattern type counter when the stopped pattern combination is set.

<Step S3709>
When the chance symbol and the same color symbol are not set as the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped, the MPU 51 judges whether the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709), as shown in Fig. 74. The chance symbol temporary stop flag is a flag for temporarily displaying the chance symbol before the decorative symbols are stopped (for example, when the decorative symbols are rapidly changing before a reach) when the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game is a big win and the fourth chance symbol performance is executed as a reserved continuous performance in the special symbol game.

If the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to on (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3710, and if the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to off (step S3709: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3713.

<Steps S3710 to S3712>
If the chance symbol temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S3710), and sets the double number as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped (step S3711).Then, the MPU 51 sets the chance symbol temporary stop flag to OFF (step S3712), and ends the stop symbol combination setting process.

The chance numbers to be displayed as temporary stops can be set in the same manner as in step S3704 described above. The repeat numbers to be displayed as stop stops can be set in the same manner as in step S3104 of the command determination process in FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S3713>
If chance symbols and same-color symbols are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped, and chance symbols are not set as the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped, the MPU 51 sets the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped normally (setting the combination of decorative symbols in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above), and terminates the stopping symbol combination setting process.

As described above, in this embodiment, the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric role device 315b is set to a short opening in which it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, and a long opening in which the opening time of the second winning opening 315 by the electric role device 315b is longer than the short opening and it is easy for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315. Also, in this embodiment, the second special chart for the second reservation is executed with priority over the first special chart game for the first reservation.

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, if the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 by the short opening of the second winning port 315, the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special symbol game will be continued in the second special symbol game executed after the end of the first special symbol game as the variation. That is, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 by the short opening of the second winning port 315, in the second special symbol game by the game ball 99 entering the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short opened, the reserved continuous performance will be continued without executing the second special symbol special performance. For this reason, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed continuously in the next reserved first special symbol game, the player will not feel uncomfortable that the reserved continuous performance is not executed after the end of the second special symbol game, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 when the second winning hole 315 is short-opened. This prevents a decrease in the interest of the game due to the reserved continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, it is more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (the number of balls entering is smaller) than when the second winning opening 315 is long-opened, and it is more likely that the player will remember that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the second special chart game was executed. Therefore, when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the effect of the reserved continuous performance being executed without the second special chart special performance being executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is high.

In addition, in a short opening where it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, it is expected that the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 will be small. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance continues to be executed in the second special chart game due to the game ball 99 entering the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is short-opened, the number of consecutive executions of the reserved continuous performance does not increase significantly, so the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable about the reserved continuous performance being executed continuously in the second special chart game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the reserved continuous performance in the second special chart game, the reserved continuous performance can be effectively utilized in the second special chart game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the chance eye effect, which becomes a jackpot confirmation effect when executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, is executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, if the results of the jackpot lottery for all special symbol games from the first special symbol game in which the chance eye effect was started are all misses, before the number of special symbol games in which the chance eye effect is executed reaches four, the reserved continuous effect is changed from the chance eye effect to a same-color pattern effect that does not become a jackpot confirmation effect even if executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games. This prevents the chance eye effect from being executed in four or more consecutive special symbol games, and prevents inconsistencies from occurring between the result indicated by the chance eye effect being executed in succession as the reserved continuous effect and the result of the jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, if the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be executed in the next reserved first special symbol game, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 by the long opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special symbol special performance is executed in the second special symbol game executed after the end of the first special symbol game as the variation, and the capture image 78 of the reserved continuous performance executed in the first special symbol game is displayed. In other words, the capture image 78 clearly indicates or suggests that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. This significantly reduces the possibility that the player will forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and can understand that the reserved continuous performance will be executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. Therefore, even if the reserved continuous performance is resumed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance, the player's sense of discomfort about the reserved continuous performance being executed in the first special chart game after the execution of the second special chart special performance is significantly reduced. As a result, a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the reserved continuous performance being executed before the execution of the second special chart special performance being resumed after the end of the second special chart special performance is prevented.

In particular, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the player is preoccupied for a long time with whether or not the game ball 99 will enter the second winning port 315, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won. Therefore, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was being performed before the second special pattern game was played. Also, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a game where a long-opening regular pattern is won, the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning port 315 (the number of balls entering is large) compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a game where a short-opening regular pattern is won, so the number of second special pattern games in which the second special pattern special performance is executed is greater (the execution time of the second special pattern special performance is longer). Therefore, the time from the end of the reserved continuous performance before the execution of the second special performance (the start of the second special performance) to the restart of the reserved continuous performance due to the end of the second special performance is longer, and the player pays more attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special performance in which the second special performance is executed is a jackpot, compared to when the first special performance is executed. In this way, when the second winning port 315 is long-opened in a long-open normal performance, the player is more likely to forget that the reserved continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special performance, compared to when the second winning port 315 is short-opened in a short-open normal performance, so the effect of clearly indicating or suggesting that the reserved continuous performance was executed in the first special performance before the execution of the second special performance during the execution of the second special performance is high.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Third embodiment]
In the second embodiment described above, in a gaming machine in which the opening mode of the second winning port by the electric device is set to a first opening (short opening) which is a first time, and a second opening (long opening) which is a second time longer than the first time, when a game ball enters the second winning port when it is scheduled to continuously execute a predetermined number of first special symbol games, the hold continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special symbol game caused by the game ball entering the second winning port in the case of the short opening, while the second special symbol special performance is executed in the second special symbol game caused by the game ball entering the second winning port in the case of the long opening, and at the time of execution of the second special symbol special performance, it is clearly indicated or suggested that the hold continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

However, the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric device in the gaming machine can be set to a short opening and a long opening, and there are various other opening modes. For example, the opening mode of the second winning opening can be set to a single opening time, a mode in which the second winning opening is opened multiple times for one normal winning win, or a mode in which the opening time of the second winning opening differs between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and the like. It is not necessarily the case that the opening mode of the second winning opening can be set to a short opening and a long opening.

In addition, in gaming machines, the opening mode of the second winning port generally includes a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter the second winning port, such as the long opening of the second embodiment described above. On the other hand, even during play, the game ball may not flow down the game area of the game board. For example, when a reach performance is being performed or when the reserve for the first special chart has reached the upper limit, the game ball may not flow down the game area of the game board when the game ball does not reach the game area of the game board due to a poor shooting of the game ball. Therefore, even if the second winning port is opened in a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter, the number of game balls entering the second winning port may be reduced due to a delay in the player's shooting of the game ball or due to a poor shooting of the game ball. For example, even if the second winning port is opened so that the reserved number for the second special game can reach the upper limit, the reserved number for the second special game may not reach the upper limit, and the number of game balls entering the second winning port may be a small number of two or less, which is similar to the number of balls entering the second winning port when it is short-opened.

Here, in the second embodiment described above, when the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, regardless of the number of balls entering the second winning opening, the second special chart special performance is executed in the second special chart game by the game ball entering the second winning opening in response to the opening mode of the second winning opening being long opening. On the other hand, as described above, even if the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, the number of game balls entering the second winning opening may not reach the upper limit number in the second special chart game, and the number of game balls entering the second winning opening may be a small number of two or less, which is about the same as the number of balls entering the second winning opening when it is short opening. Therefore, even though the opening mode of the second winning opening is short opening, the situation is similar to that in which the performance is executed when the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening. In other words, a mismatch occurs between the opening mode of the second winning opening and the performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special game as the special game, if it is scheduled to be executed continuously in the next reserved first special game (for example, Special 1 relevant change + Special 1 reserved 1 + Special 1 reserved 2 (see FIG. 55 (A))), regardless of the opening mode of the electric role, when a game ball enters the second winning port by opening the second winning port, the performance in the second special game executed in response to the game ball entering the second winning port is different between the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port is a predetermined number or less that exceeds 0 (for example, 1 or 2) and the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), when the number of balls entering the second winning port is a predetermined number or less that exceeds 0 (for example, 1 or 2), the reserved continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special game, as in the case of the short opening of the second winning port in the above-mentioned second embodiment. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75(B), if the number of balls entering the second winning hole exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, just as in the case of the long opening of the second winning hole in the second embodiment described above, and it is clearly indicated or suggested that the reserved continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special effect when the second special symbol special effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is scheduled to be performed consecutively for a predetermined number of first special symbol games, if the game ball enters the second winning port by opening the second winning port, the performance performed in the second special symbol game is different when the number of balls entering the second winning port is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0, and when the number of balls entering the second winning port exceeds the predetermined number. Therefore, even in gaming machines other than those in which the opening mode of the second winning port by the electric device is set to a short opening in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port and a long opening in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second winning port, that is, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the second winning port, a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserved continuous performance not being performed in the first special symbol game performed after the end of the second special symbol game is prevented, and a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserved continuous performance being performed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance is prevented after the end of the second special symbol special performance is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved continuous performance is being executed in the first special pattern game as the variation, and it is planned that the reserved continuous performance will be executed continuously in the next reserved first special pattern game, if the game ball enters the second winning opening by opening the second winning opening, the performance executed in the second special pattern game is different when the number of balls entering the second winning opening is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0 and when the number of balls entering the second winning opening exceeds the predetermined number, so that it is possible to also deal with the case where the number of game balls entering the second winning opening is small when the second winning opening is opened in an opening/closing mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the second embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 76 to 81.

This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that, when a reserved continuous performance is being performed in the first special game as the special game, and it is planned to perform a reserved continuous performance in the next reserved first special game, regardless of the opening mode, when a game ball enters the second winning port by opening the second winning port, the performance in the second special game that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second winning port is set to be different between the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port is a predetermined number or less that exceeds 0 (for example, 1 or 2) and the case where the number of balls entering the second winning port exceeds the predetermined number (3 or more). Therefore, this embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that some of the processing procedures in the command determination process, the second special performance setting process, and the performance type setting process are different.

[Command Judgment Process]
The command determination process of this embodiment differs from that of the second embodiment described above in the process when a second special chart hold command and an electric reel close command are received.

Here, Figures 76 and 77 are flowcharts to explain the differences in the command determination process from the second embodiment described above.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 76, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, when the second special chart reservation command is received (step S3323: Yes), the second special chart reservation information update process (step S3324) and the second special chart reservation image display process (step S3325) are executed as in the second embodiment described above, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S3801) and ends the command judgment process. That is, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, the number of balls entering the second winning port 315 is counted in the electric role opening winning counter without distinguishing between the short opening and the long opening as in the second embodiment described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the second embodiment described above, even if a second special chart hold command is received, the second special chart special performance setting process is not executed, and is executed in step S3802 of Figure 77 described below, provided that an electric role object close command is received (step S3330: Yes).

The electric role opening winning counter is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the second special symbol special effect in step S3901 of the second special symbol special effect setting process in FIG. 78 described below.

<Step S3802>
As shown in Fig. 77, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives an electric role object closing command (step S3330: Yes), it executes the second special chart special effect setting process when the electric role object is closed, without distinguishing between the short opening and the long opening (step S3802). That is, in this embodiment, the second special chart special effect setting process that was executed when the second special chart hold command was received in the above-mentioned second embodiment is set when the electric role object closing command is received.

[Second special effect setting process]
The second special chart special effect setting process of this embodiment differs from the aforementioned second embodiment in that whether or not to execute the second special chart special effect is determined based on the number of balls that enter the second winning port 315 until the electric device 315b is closed, and in that whether or not to execute the second special chart special effect is determined based on whether the opening is short or long.

Here, Figure 78 is a flowchart to explain the differences between the second special chart special effect setting process of this embodiment and the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S3901 to S3903>
As shown in FIG. 78, when the electric role device 315b is closed, if both the second special chart special effect setting flag and the second special chart special effect execution flag are set to off (No in both steps S3501 and S3502), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the electric role opening winning counter, which indicates the number of game balls 99 that have entered the second winning port 315, is 3 or greater (step S3901).

If the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 3 or more (step S3901: Yes), the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to ON to start the second special chart special effect (step S3902), and the second special chart special effect setting process is terminated.

If the value of the electric role opening winning counter is not 3 or more (step S3901: No), i.e., if the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 2 or less, the second special chart special performance non-setting flag indicating that the second special chart special performance will not be started is set to on (step S3903), and the second special chart special performance setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the second special effect is executed when the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 3 or more, but the second special effect may also be executed when the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 4 or more, when the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 2 or more, etc.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
The variable type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment differs from the aforementioned second embodiment in that, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the electric device 315b, when the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315 is three or more, a second special chart special presentation is set for the second special chart game as the special chart game in question, in that, when the electric device 315b is fully opened, regardless of the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315, a second special chart special presentation is set for the second special chart game as the special chart.

Here, Figures 79 to 81 are flowcharts to explain the differences between the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment and the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S4001 to S4003>
As shown in Fig. 79, when the second special effect is set for the second special game as the special game, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game as the special game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S4001). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game as the special game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S4002), and determines whether the value of the electric role opening winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003).

In other words, in this embodiment, instead of the short opening winning counter and long opening winning counter of the second embodiment described above, an electric role opening winning counter common to short opening and long opening is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long opening winning counter in the second embodiment described above, the processing of steps S4001 to S4003 related to the electric role opening winning counter is executed.

<Step S4004>
When it is determined in step S3641 that the second special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4004 in Fig. 80 and determines whether or not the second special effect non-setting flag indicating that the second special effect will not be started is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special effect game as the special effect game is the first to be executed when the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315 is two or less.

Then, if the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), i.e., if the second special chart game as the special chart game is the first second special chart game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315, the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to OFF (step S4005) and transitions to step S3654.

On the other hand, if the second special chart special effect setting flag is set to off (step S4004: No), that is, if the second special chart game as the special chart game in question is not the first second special chart game to be executed when two or fewer game balls 99 enter the second winning port 315, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3658 in FIG. 81, and thereafter executes the same processing as in the second embodiment described above.

<Steps S4005 to S4008>
If the second special chart special effect non-setting flag, indicating that the second special chart special effect will not be started, is set on (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second special chart special effect setting flag to off (step S4005) and transitions to step S3654, thereby executing the same processing as in the second embodiment described above.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, instead of the short opening winning counter and long opening winning counter of the second embodiment, an electric role opening winning counter common to the short opening and long opening is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long opening winning counter in the second embodiment, the processing of step S4006 related to the electric role opening winning counter and the processing of steps S4007 and S4008 in FIG. 81 are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0 (for example, 1 or 2), the reserved continuous presentation is continuously executed in the second special chart game, similar to the short opening of the second winning opening 315 in the second embodiment described above. On the other hand, when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more), the second special chart special presentation is executed in the second special chart game, similar to the long opening of the second winning opening 315 in the second embodiment described above. Therefore, even in gaming machines other than those in which the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric device 315b is set to a short opening in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning opening 315 and a long opening in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second winning opening 315, that is, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the second winning opening 315, a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserve continuous performance not being executed in the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game is prevented, and a decrease in the interest in the game due to the reserve continuous performance being executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance being resumed after the end of the second special symbol special performance is prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a continuous reserved effect is being executed in the first special game as the special game, if the second winning opening 315 is opened and game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315, the effect executed in the second special game is different between when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 is equal to or less than a predetermined number exceeding 0 and when the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 exceeds the predetermined number, so that it is possible to also deal with the case where the number of game balls entering the second winning opening 315 is small when the second winning opening 315 is opened in an opening/closing mode that makes it easy for game balls to enter.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

In addition, various modifications are possible in the second and third embodiments described above. For example, in the second and third embodiments described above, a reduced image of the image of the reserved continuous effect executed in the first special symbol game was displayed in the lower left area of the symbol display section 341 as the capture image 78, but the capture image 78 may be displayed by other methods as long as the method allows the display of the changing decorative symbols to be visible. For example, the capture image 78 may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols as a background effect on the entire symbol display section 341, or the decorative symbols may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols with a density (transparency) that allows the decorative symbols to be visible, or only the outline may be displayed on the front or back side of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the explicit indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance, is not limited to the display of the capture image 78, and may be any other method as long as the display of the change in the decorative pattern is visible. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed as a specific image different from the capture image 78, such as an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these, to indicate that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

The capture image 78 may be displayed during the entire period during which the second special symbol game is being played, or may be displayed during a portion of the period during which the second special symbol game is being played, for example, only for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game, only for a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, or both for a certain period from the start of the second special symbol game and a certain period before the end of the second special symbol game, and there is no particular limit to the display period of the capture image 78. In addition, the capture image 78 does not need to be displayed during all second special symbol games when the second special symbol game is played multiple times in succession, and may be displayed, for example, only for the first second special symbol game, only for the last second special symbol game, or for the first and last second special symbol games among the second special symbol games played multiple times, and the number of second special symbol games in which the capture image 78 is displayed may be different from the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special performance is played.

In addition, the explicit indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol performance such as a capture image, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance may be displayed on a display means other than the pattern display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably. For example, the explicit indication or suggestion may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 that displays non-set values that are game setting values other than the set values that are game setting values set in the gaming machine 10, and when a display means is provided for executing image performance such as a sub-LCD display unit other than the pattern display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably or image performance is executed, the indication may be displayed on the display means such as the sub-LCD display unit. In this way, the indication or suggestion that the reserved continuous performance was being performed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special performance, and that the reserved continuous performance will be performed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance, are displayed on another display means, such as a sub-LCD display unit, separate from the pattern display unit 341 where the image performance is performed, so that the indication or suggestion can be displayed on the other display means without interfering with the display of the decorative symbol fluctuations and image performances on the pattern display unit 341. This allows both the fluctuation display and image performance and the indication or suggestion to be displayed reliably and appropriately without interfering with each other's visibility.

The second special effect is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 61(B) and 61(C) and may take other forms. For example, the second special effect may display other images, such as character images, instead of or in addition to text images, and may execute a specified audio effect through the speaker 26 instead of or in addition to the effect on the pattern display unit 341.

The second special effect may be any effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a special privilege will be awarded to the player when a certain condition is met, and does not necessarily require that the decorative pattern be stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern (e.g., a repeat number) and that the jackpot type when the condition is met be a jackpot with a certain probability. Examples of the specified condition include the decorative pattern being a reach and a specific effect being executed. In other words, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than those in which the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is a jackpot is always a jackpot with a certain probability. For example, the present invention can be applied to ST machines such as V-ST machines and type 1/2 mixed machines in which the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 includes a win other than a jackpot with a certain probability, in addition to loop jackpot machines such as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above.

In addition, in the second and third embodiments described above, the hold continuous effects and the second special effect are executed in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and the hold continuous effects and the second special effect are not executed in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in both or one of the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-frequency support mode, in ...

In addition, in the second and third embodiments described above, when the consecutive reserved effects are executed in a given number of first special pattern games, except for the exception of avoiding the occurrence of inconsistencies caused by the Chance Eye effect being executed in four or more consecutive special pattern games, a single type of consecutive reserved effect is executed in each first special pattern game, but different consecutive reserved effects may be executed in each first special pattern game, and multiple types of consecutive reserved effects (for example, a mini character effect and a zone effect) may be executed simultaneously in one first special pattern game as long as the combination is executable as an effect.

In the second and third embodiments described above, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be any timing at which no inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance. For example, it may be any timing between the special game played next to the special game played at the stage when it is determined that there may be an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance, and the special game in which there is an inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance (for example, the special game played for the fourth time from the start of the reserved continuous performance). In other words, the timing for changing the type of the reserved continuous performance may be either the first special game or the second special game, as long as there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the reserved continuous performance.

Of course, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if the number of special game plays in which the continuous reserved performance is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four times) when a continuous reserved performance other than a chance eye performance is being executed. In other words, the type of the continuous reserved performance may be changed even if no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times. In this way, by changing the type of the continuous reserved performance when no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession more than a predetermined number of times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored when a single type of continuous reserved performance is executed in succession in many special game plays, and therefore to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by a single type of continuous reserved performance being executed in succession in many special game plays.

In addition, when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, not only to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the reserved continuous performance, but also when changing the type of the reserved continuous performance, if the variable display time for the reserved first special game that triggered the start of the reserved continuous performance is long, that is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the reserved is a jackpot or a reach performance with a high jackpot expectation is executed, the type of the reserved continuous performance may be changed so that the specific reserved continuous performance type after the change has a higher jackpot expectation than the type of the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change. For example, if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a mini character performance with the lowest jackpot expectation, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a chance eye performance, same color pattern performance, or zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character performance, and if the predetermined reserved continuous performance before the change is a chance eye performance or same color pattern performance, the specific reserved continuous performance after the change may be set to a zone performance (mode performance) with a higher jackpot expectation than the chance eye performance and same color pattern performance. In this case, the difference in the probability of winning between the specific consecutive reserved performance after the change and the specific consecutive reserved performance before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, and preferably 25% or more.

In addition, the change in the continuous hold effect is not limited to one time, but may be made multiple times.

In addition, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent that they are applicable.

[Other Modifications]
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 of the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12, but the gaming machine 10 may lock the inner frame 12 to be unopenable relative to the front frame 11 and lock the back pack unit 13 to be unopenable relative to the inner frame 12 by a locking means such as a cylinder lock, or a locking means for making the inner frame 12 unopenable relative to the front frame 11 and a locking means for making the back pack unit 13 unopenable relative to the inner frame 12 may be separately provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, a configuration in which the left end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11, may be adopted, but a configuration in which the right end of the inner frame 12 in a front view is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the left end of the back pack unit 13 in front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. However, the right end of the back pack unit 13 in front view can be rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the game board 31 provided in the gaming machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., or may be made of metal such as steel (carbon steel), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, and alloy steel. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the gaming machine 10 is configured to include an upper tray 23 and a lower tray 24, but the lower tray 24 may be omitted and only the upper tray 23 may be provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on the right side as viewed from the front is adopted, but a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on another part, such as the left side as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of launch handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which the launch handle 22 is provided on both the right and left sides as viewed from the front, may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the launch handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the launch handle 22) is adopted, but a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted as the launch handle 22 may be adopted. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be adopted as the launching means capable of launching the game ball, and for example, a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the elastic force of a spring or the like, or a configuration in which the game ball is launched using the wind pressure when compressed gas is ejected, may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, when the launch handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, one game ball is launched, for example, every 0.6 sec (100 game balls per minute), but the configuration may be such that less than 100 game balls (for example, 60 balls) are launched per minute, or the configuration may be such that 100 or more game balls (for example, 200 balls) are launched per minute. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched when the launch handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. Also, the configuration may be such that the game balls are launched one by one by flicking the lever. Also, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, a configuration including a speaker 26 is adopted as a means capable of outputting sound, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to or instead of the speaker 26 may be adopted. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphones or headphones that the player brings with him/her to the earphone jack, the player can fully enjoy the sound of the gaming machine 10 that the player is playing without being disturbed by the sound of the surrounding gaming machines 10. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, a configuration including a 7-segment display device is adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts to be displayed variably based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. However, other configurations can be adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, etc. may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, the predetermined suggestive information was the capture image 78 displayed on the symbol display unit 341 where the decorative symbols are displayed variably, but the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed on a display means other than the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is possible to set a dedicated display means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information as the display means, but it is also possible to use a display means already provided in the gaming machine 10. That is, the predetermined suggestive information may be displayed, for example, on the 7-segment display unit 39 that displays non-set values that are game setting values other than the set values that are game setting values set in the gaming machine 10, or on the main display unit 36 (the normal symbol display unit 361, the first special symbol display unit 362, the second special symbol display unit 363, the first reserved special symbol number display unit 364, and the second reserved special symbol number display unit 365). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, a configuration including two LED lamps is adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal symbol that starts to change based on the game ball passing through the through gates 317L and 317R, but other configurations may be adopted as a means capable of displaying a normal symbol, and for example, a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display device, or a configuration including a halogen lamp may be adopted. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, various configurations can be adopted as display means such as the pattern display unit 341 capable of displaying decorative patterns, and for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, an LED display device, a plasma display device, a drum rotating display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a configuration combining two or more of these may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed by continuing to display the capture image 78 displayed on the pattern display unit 341, but the displayed suggestive information is not limited to the capture image 78 and may be other information. For example, it may be information displayed in the first special pattern game in which the chance eye performance was continuously displayed or in the first special pattern game immediately before the second special pattern game is executed, and may be the entire screen of the first special pattern game or an image displayed on that screen explained in text. In that case, regardless of the performance that was continuously displayed, it may be the type of performance that was continuously displayed at that time, the number of jackpots, the number of changes since the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls, the number of shot balls, etc., or a combination of multiple of them, or one of them. In the second and third embodiments described above, a combination of stop patterns such as a chance eye effect was used as the reserved continuous effect, but it is not limited to this and may be anything that allows the player to visually recognize the continuity of the effect. For example, the display object displayed on the back side of the changing pattern may be something that is displayed continuously in multiple first special pattern games, for example, a specific character, a character that suggests that it is displayed continuously, an indicator displayed in a part of the background image, or the background itself. The same applies to the changed effect, and it is only necessary for the player to visually recognize that the continuous effect has been changed, and it may be changed to an effect in which a specific character is displayed, for example. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the decorative pattern is not limited to numbers, and various characters, figures, symbols, pictures, combinations of two or more of these, etc. may be adopted. For example, the decorative pattern may be the alphabet, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, combinations of two or more of these, etc. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the number of pattern rows through which the decorative pattern scrolls is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In addition, when a configuration in which there is one decorative pattern row is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops may be adopted. In addition, when a configuration in which there are two or four or more decorative pattern rows is adopted, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot is won when the same decorative pattern stops on a specific line (valid line) may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned second and third embodiments, a zone performance (mode performance) with a high jackpot expectation is set as the reserved continuous performance, but the reserved continuous performance may include a background performance other than the zone performance (mode performance). That is, multiple background performances may be set as the reserved continuous performance, and in this case, it is considered that the jackpot expectation of the multiple background performances is set to different values. In addition, when multiple background performances with different jackpot expectation are set as the reserved continuous performance, when a low expectation background performance with a low jackpot expectation is executed as the reserved continuous performance, it is also considered to change from the low expectation background performance to a high expectation background performance with a higher jackpot expectation. Of course, multiple background effects with the same degree of expectation of a big win, for example, multiple low expectation background effects with a low expectation of a big win, may be set, and the background effects may be changed between the low expectation background effects. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, various configurations may be adopted for the special electric role such as the opening and closing door 319 for opening and closing the large winning opening such as the variable winning opening 316. For example, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided below the plate-like member, and the plate-like member rotates forward around the rotating shaft to open the large winning opening, a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-like member that can slide in the front and rear directions of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the large winning opening is opened and closed by a vane member rotating in the left and right directions (clockwise and counterclockwise directions) may be adopted. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, so-called loop probability variable machines have been described, but in a gaming machine such as a V-ST machine that transitions to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a probability variable gaming state, after the end of a jackpot game on the condition of a V winning in the jackpot game, a V winning port is provided in a large winning port such as the variable winning port 316. The V winning port may be one that can always win a prize when the large winning port is opened, but a configuration may be adopted in which it is opened when a specific condition is satisfied. An example of the specific condition is the execution of a specific round game (for example, the first round round game, the final round game). In addition, in the case where the V winning port is configured to be opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a movable member that can open and close the V winning port is provided in the V winning port, and the V winning port is opened and closed by controlling the operation of the movable member. In addition, in the case where the V winning port is opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning port is closed when a game ball enters the V winning port or after a certain time has passed. In addition, the changed performance (reserved continuous performance) may be the type of decorative pattern used in the first special game,









It may be the color tone of the background of the 1st special game, a part of the background of the 1st special game, or the entire background of the 1st special game. The timing of the change may be the start of the fluctuation of the 1st special game, may be during the fluctuation, may be the timing when a specific event (e.g., reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development) occurs in the fluctuation, or may be when the pattern stops. For example, it may be the case that a part or the whole of the performance (specific performance image) of the background before the occurrence of a specific event is changed to a different type of background (predetermined performance image) at the timing when a specific event (e.g., reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development) occurs. In addition, a plurality of large prize winning ports may be provided, and for example, a large prize winning port with a V prize winning port and a large prize winning port without a V prize winning port may be separately provided. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, various configurations can be adopted for ordinary electric devices such as the electric device 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into a starting winning port such as the second winning port 315.For example, a tulip-shaped ordinary electric device (so-called electric chu) in which a pair of movable valves (wing members) can be opened to the left and right, a configuration in which a rotating shaft extending approximately horizontally is provided below a plate-shaped member and the starting winning port can be opened by the plate-shaped member rotating forward around the rotating shaft, a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 31, and a configuration in which the starting winning port is opened and closed by the blade members rotating left and right (clockwise and counterclockwise). In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modified examples, the number of prize balls set for each winning port (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, variable winning port 316, etc.) is an example, and by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set for each winning port, it is possible to realize multiple types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a so-called loop probability machine, which is a type 1 gaming machine, was described. Incidentally, as gaming machines, in addition to the loop probability machine, there are also type 1 and type 2 mixed machines. In type 1 and type 2 mixed machines, two types of jackpot games, type 1 jackpot game and type 2 jackpot game, can be executed. For example, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the type 1 jackpot game is executed after the end of the special game that clearly indicates that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. In addition, after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, the game is shifted to a time-saving game state in which the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole is facilitated as a profit state. On the other hand, the type 2 jackpot game is executed on the condition that, when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole in the time-saving game state is a small win, the game ball enters a predetermined winning hole in the small win game based on the small win.

In addition, in gaming machines of various specifications, it is also conceivable to transition to a time-saving game state on the condition that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. For example, the type of miss when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop state in which the time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state, or the lottery results are misses consecutively in a predetermined number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 2.5 to 3 times the denominator of the jackpot probability) in the low probability mode (so-called ceiling), etc.

In gaming machines, it is important to increase the player's interest and enthusiasm in the game and to improve the player's willingness to play. In other words, when adopting a configuration in which the conditions for time-saving play are met when the time-saving pattern stop is missed and the game transitions to a time-saving play state, it is important to provide new gameplay features that can increase the player's interest and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine has a "game condition being satisfied" as the first or second trigger, a "profit state" as the predetermined state executed by the predetermined state execution means, a "low profit state" as the first state and a "high profit state" as the second state executable by the state execution means, and a "state in which the high profit condition is satisfied" as a specific state.

The first trigger and the second trigger may be triggers that satisfy the game conditions at different times. Examples of the first trigger and the second trigger include a predetermined result in a predetermined lottery, a game ball entering a predetermined area, a game ball entering a predetermined area and being detected by a detector to perform a lottery, a trigger for a predetermined lottery being satisfied, a predetermined game state being satisfied, a specific game state occurring as a result of the satisfaction of a specific game state, the end of a specific game state, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined state may be a profit state that provides a profit within a predetermined period of time, or a profit state that is highly likely to provide a profit. Examples of the predetermined state include a time-saving game state for a predetermined number of times, a certain number of times of a special probability game state, a time-saving game state for a predetermined period, a special probability game state for a predetermined period, a specific big win state for a predetermined period, a small win state for a predetermined period, and any combination of these.

The first state and the second state are controlled to at least two profitable states, one where a predetermined event is controlled in a manner advantageous to the player, and the other where the predetermined event is controlled in a manner more advantageous to the player than the first state, so long as there is a relative difference in profit to the player. Examples of the first state and the second state include making a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action, improving the probability of making a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action, making the probability of making a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action 100%, holding a lottery with a predetermined probability to make a predetermined movable object perform a predetermined action, improving the time it takes for a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action, and any combination thereof.

In addition, in this gaming machine, a specific value is determined when a second trigger occurs in a predetermined state. The specific value may be any numerical value that can determine the execution period. Examples of specific values include the number of times a predetermined gaming state is executed, a reference value that is the basis for executing the state, specific time data, specific random number values, and any combination of these.

The specific state may be a state in which a high profit condition is met, making it possible to determine that a high profit will be awarded when a specified profit is awarded. Examples of high profit conditions include a specified number of times exceeding or falling short of a threshold, a specified time exceeding or falling short of a threshold, a specified judgment result being reached, and specified information being stored. In addition, the method for determining whether or not a high profit condition is met may be any method, such as determination by software or hardware circuitry, or a combination of these, as long as it is feasible.

The execution period may be any period determined based on a specific value. Examples of the execution period include the number of times special games are played, the execution period of the game, the number of times game balls enter various winning ports, the number of times game balls pass through the through gate, the number of times variable winning ports are opened, the time for which various variable patterns change, the display time for the stop results of various variable patterns, the time for which profits are awarded as a result of the stop results of various variable patterns, and any combination thereof.

Here, the gaming machine according to this embodiment includes a big win, a small win, and a miss as a result of a big win lottery triggered by a game ball entering a second winning slot that can be won with the support of an electric device. Also, the gaming machine according to this embodiment includes, as time-saving gaming states, a short-open time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) as a low-profit state in which the opening time of the electric device is short, and a long-open time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state) as a high-profit state in which the opening time of the electric device is long.

The short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) is entered when the conditions for the second time-saving game are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and as a profitable state, the opening time of the second winning port is set to a short time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning port. In this way, in the short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), not only is it difficult to play a small jackpot game because it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning port and it is difficult to receive the second special chart jackpot lottery, but it is also a low-profit state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the V winning port, which provides an opportunity to play a type 2 jackpot game in a small jackpot game. As a result, in the short-open time-saving game state, it is difficult to play a type 2 jackpot game, or it is not actually played.

On the other hand, the long opening time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is entered when a certain condition described below is met in the short opening time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), and the opening time of the second winning port is set to a long time (e.g., 3 seconds) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second winning port. In this way, in the long opening time-saving game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the second winning port, so not only is it easy to play a small winning game to make it easier to receive the second special chart jackpot lottery, but it is also possible for a game ball to enter the V winning port, which provides an opportunity to play a type 2 jackpot game in a small winning game. Therefore, the long opening time-saving game state is a high-profit state that is more advantageous to the player than the short opening time-saving game state, in that it is easy to play a type 2 jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the results of the second special chart big win lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot include a big win, a small win, and a miss, as described above, but as a miss, a time-saving pattern stop miss is set in which a time-saving pattern that can transition to a long-time-saving game state is stopped and displayed after the end of the second special chart game. When this time-saving pattern stop miss is set, the conditions for time-saving game play are met, and there is a possibility of transitioning to the time-saving state.

Here, in this embodiment, the aforementioned predetermined conditions for transitioning from the short-opening time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) as a low-profit state to the long-opening time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) as a high-profit state are, first, the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-opening time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss, and, second, the number of time-saving games (specific value) in the time-saving game state set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games (predetermined unexecuted value) in the short-opening time-saving game state (establishment of the specific condition). In this case, the high-profit condition is established and transition is made to the long-opening time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), which is a high-profit state. For example, if the number of time-saving plays in the time-saving play state set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is 50, if the number of time-saving plays remaining in the short-open time-saving play state is 49 or less, the high-profit condition is met and the game moves to the long-time-saving play state (second state), which is a high-profit state, whereas if the number of time-saving plays remaining in the short-open time-saving play state is 50 or more, the high-profit condition is not met and the game does not move to the long-time-saving play state, but continues to stay in the short-time-saving play state (second time-saving play state) as a low-profit state.

In this way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to transition to a time-shortened game state (in this embodiment, the third time-shortened game state which is a long-opening time-shortened game state) which is a high-profit state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be played via a small jackpot game, the condition for transition to a time-shortened game state as a low-profit state (in this embodiment, the second time-shortened game state which is a short-opening time-shortened game state) which is transitioned to when the conditions for time-shortened game are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game, and further, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-opening time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state) as a low-profit state is a miss for the time-shortened pattern stop and the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened games set for the miss for the time-shortened pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened games in that time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state), the conditions for the high-profit state are met and a transition is made. In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment has stricter conditions for transitioning to a long-open time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be executed, than conventional type 1/2 mixed machines, and furthermore, a new game feature is provided that utilizes the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving pattern stop miss. As a result, in this embodiment, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the time-saving pattern will be stopped and displayed in the short-open time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state to which the time-saving game condition is established and transitioned to after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, and can also enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the game will transition to a long-open time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be executed, when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to increase the attention and interest in the game in a type 1/2 mixed machine, thereby improving the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the condition for transitioning from a short-opening, time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) as a low-profit state to a long-opening, time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) as a high-profit state is that the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-opening, time-saving game state as a low-profit state is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the miss in the time-saving pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the short-opening, time-saving game state, thereby establishing the condition for a high-profit state. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-opening, time-saving game state as a low-profit state is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games as a specific value set for the miss in the time-saving pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the short-opening, time-saving game state, if the conditions for a high-profit state are met and a transition is made from the short-opening, time-saving game state as a low-profit state to a long-opening, time-saving game state as a high-profit state, the fewer the remaining number of time-saving games in the short-opening, time-saving game state as a low-profit state (the more the number of times special game is executed in the short-opening, time-saving game state), the more likely it is to transition to the long-opening, time-saving game state as a high-profit state. As a result, as the number of remaining time-saving plays in the short-open time-saving play state, which is a low-profit state, decreases (as the number of times the special game is played in the second time-saving play increases), expectations for the time-saving symbol to be displayed still and attention to whether or not the game will transition to the long-open time-saving play state, which is a high-profit state, increases further, thereby increasing the attention and interest in the game and further improving the player's motivation to play.

The following describes this embodiment with reference to Figures 82 to 113, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be described again even if they have already been described in the first embodiment described above.

[Configuration of gaming machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 84. Here, Figure 82 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figures 83 and 84 are cross-sectional views showing the main part of a feather role device 83 provided on the gaming board 31 shown in Figure 82.

As shown in FIG. 82, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with two through gates 317L and 317R, as in the first embodiment described above. The through gate 317L is provided in the left area of the gaming board 31, and a gaming ball shot into the left area of the gaming board 31 can pass through it. This left through gate 317L has a ball entry sensor 317La (see FIG. 7), and the ball entry sensor 317La determines whether or not a gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317L. The through gate 317R is provided in the right area of the gaming board 31, and a gaming ball shot into the right area of the gaming board 31 can pass through it. This right through gate 317R has a ball entry sensor 317Ra (see FIG. 7), and the ball entry sensor 317Ra determines whether or not a gaming ball has passed through the through gate 317R.

In this way, by providing the through gates 317L, 317R in the left and right regions of the game board 31, whether the game ball is shot into the left or right region of the game board 31, the game ball passes through the through gates 317L, 317R, and the normal lottery is executed. If the lottery result of the normal lottery is a win, the normal lottery is executed, and the electric device 315b is opened in this normal lottery, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to enter the second winning hole 315 not only in the time-saving game state, which is the high-frequency support mode, but also in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, by shooting the game ball 99 into the left region of the game board 31.

The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that it is configured as a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, not a loop variable type machine, and is equipped with a feather device 83 provided in the right area of the gaming board 31. The feather device 83 is operated in a small jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second special game is a small jackpot, and provides an opportunity to execute a type 2 jackpot game by the entry of a game ball into a V winning hole 833 described later during the small jackpot game.

The feather role device 83 is provided above the variable winning opening 316 and to the right of the pattern display unit 341. As shown in FIG. 83, the feather role device 83 has an inlet 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the inside of the feather role device 83, and a movable wing part 832 that is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (position of a solid line in FIG. 83) for closing the inlet 831 and an open position (position of a dashed line in FIG. 83) for opening the inlet 831. When the movable wing part 832 is in the standby position and the inlet 831 is closed by the movable wing part 832, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the feather role device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 84(A) and FIG. 84(B), when the movable wing part 832 is in the open position and the inlet 831 is open, the game ball 99 can be received by the movable wing part 832. The game ball 99 received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the inside of the feather device 83 through the introduction port 831. When the result of the lottery in the big win lottery triggered by the winning of the second winning port 315 is a small win (see Figures 87 (A) and 87 (B)), the movable wing portion 832 is operated to the open position and opens the introduction port 831 for a predetermined time, for example, the time it takes for one to three game balls 99 to enter the feather device 83 (1.8 seconds or less). Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 during a small win can be set appropriately and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather device 83, there are a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening opening 835. A ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in each of the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834, and these ball entry sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. The V winning opening opening 835 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a closed position (see FIG. 84(A)) in which the V winning opening 833 is closed and an open position (see FIG. 84(B)) in which the V winning opening 833 is opened. The V winning opening opening 835 usually waits in a closed position in which the V winning opening 833 is closed, and when the lottery result in the big prize lottery is a small prize, it is activated at a predetermined timing to open the V winning opening 833.

Here, the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is operated is set according to the game state in which the big win lottery in which the lottery result is a small win is executed as described below. Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery in the short-open time-saving game state (first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state) described below is a small win (see FIG. 87(A)), the predetermined timing is set to the opening (first opening) of the first small win game executed by the small win (see FIG. 91(A) and FIG. 91(C)). The first opening of the first small win game is executed before the execution of the movable wing operation game in which the movable wing 832 is operated to open the introduction port 831. Therefore, when the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is operated in the first small win game is set to the first opening, the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 833. Therefore, in the first small prize game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a small prize, the game ball 99 does not enter the V prize opening 833, and in the short-open time-saving game state (the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state), the type 2 jackpot game described below is not executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a small prize.

On the other hand, if the result of the big win lottery in the long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) described below is a small win (see FIG. 87(B)), the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is operated is set to the movable wing operation game of the second small win game executed by the small win (see FIG. 91(B) and FIG. 91(C)). In the movable wing operation game, the movable wing 832 is operated to open the introduction port 831, and the game ball 99 can enter the inside of the feather role device 83 through the introduction port 831. Therefore, when the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is operated is set to the movable wing operation game, the game ball 99 that has entered the inside of the feather role device 83 can enter the V winning opening 833. Therefore, in the second small prize game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the long-open time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is a small prize, the game ball 99 can enter the V prize opening 833, and in the third time-saving game state, a type 2 jackpot game described below can be executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a small prize.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, various tables and the like used in the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 85 to 87.

[Regular drawing win/loss table, etc.]
Here, FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a normal winning/losing table. In this embodiment, two types of normal winning/losing tables are set as the normal winning/losing table: a normal game state normal winning/losing table shown in FIG. 85(A) and a time-saving game state normal winning/losing table shown in FIG. 85(B). That is, in this embodiment, as described later, the normal winning probability is different between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state is set to have a higher normal winning probability than the normal game state.

The normal game state normal winning/losing table shown in FIG. 85(A) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 85(A), in the normal game state normal winning/losing table, a normal winning is set when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a loss is set when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 1 to 299. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the probability of winning a normal winning lottery is set to 1/300, and it is a low-profit state in which the second winning slot 315 is unlikely to open.

The time-saving play state normal winning/losing table shown in FIG. 85(B) is a table used in the normal winning lottery in the time-saving play state, which is the high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 85(B), the time-saving play state normal winning/losing table is set such that, contrary to the normal play state normal winning/losing table, a loss occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0, and a normal winning occurs when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is 1 to 299. In other words, in the time-saving play state (high-frequency support mode), the probability of a normal winning lottery is set to 299/300, which is higher than the normal play state (low-frequency support mode), and the second winning slot 315 is more likely to open, resulting in a high profit state.

In this way, in a game state that is the low frequency support mode, the second winning port 315 is unlikely to open, and therefore the player is unlikely to gain any particular benefit from the second winning port 315 being opened.

In this embodiment, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state are set as the time-saving game state as described later, but the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to be the same in all of the first to third time-saving game states. Of course, the probability of winning a normal symbol may be set to be different depending on the type of time-saving game state. In addition, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the normal game state (low frequency support mode) and the probability of winning a normal symbol in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 85 (A) and 85 (B), and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the game state in which the short game state normal symbol winning/losing table is referenced may be the special symbol probability variable state or the time-saving game state.

Here, FIG. 85(C) shows an example of the relationship between the type of game state and the opening mode (opening time) of the electric device 315b in a normal winning game that is executed when the result of the normal winning lottery is a normal winning lottery.

As shown in FIG. 85(C), if the result of the lottery for the normal winning combination is a normal winning combination, the electric device 315b is opened in the normal winning combination game as described above, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, but the opening form (opening time) of the electric device 315b in the normal winning combination game is set according to the game state in which the lottery for the normal winning combination game is executed.

Specifically, in the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 96) which is triggered by a time-saving symbol stop failure in the normal game state, and the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 96) which is triggered by a type 1 jackpot, the opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 0.6 seconds (short opening), which is the same as the interval between launching the game balls 99. In this short opening, the expected number of balls that will enter when the game balls 99 are shot out continuously is set to one or less, and for example, about one game ball 99 will enter the second winning hole 315 for three to five hits on the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the third time-saving game state (see FIG. 96) to which the player can transition in the second time-saving game state is a high-profit state in which the opening time of the electric device 315b is set to 3 seconds (long opening), which is 5 times the interval between launches of the game balls 99. In this long opening, the expected number of balls that will enter when the game balls 99 are shot out continuously is set to 1 or more, and for example, about 1 to 3 game balls 99 will enter the second winning hole 315 for one normal play.

Also, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), if the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols starts is one of the various time-saving game states, the variable time and the opening time of the electric device 315b are determined by the conditions of the time-saving game state. Also, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R is one of the various time-saving game states, if the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols starts is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the variable time and the opening time of the electric device 315b are determined by the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, if game ball 99 enters through gates 317L, 317R while normal symbols are changing during the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), causing one ball to be reserved, if the game state when the normal symbol that is already changing stops is still in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the change of the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the normal game state (low frequency support mode) before the changing normal symbol stops, the change of the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will begin after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the normal game state (low frequency support mode).

In addition, when game ball 99 enters through gates 317L, 317R during the change of normal symbols in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), causing one reserved ball, if the game state when the changing normal symbol stops is still the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the change of the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will start with various lotteries being held under the conditions of the normal game state (low frequency support mode), which is a low profit state. However, if the game state has switched to the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) by the time the changing normal symbol stops, which is a high profit condition, the change of the normal symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will start with various lotteries being held under the conditions of the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), which is a high profit state.

The opening time of the electric device 315b during normal winning play in the normal play state, the first time-saving play state, the second time-saving play state, and the third time-saving play state is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 85(C) and can be changed as appropriate.

In the example shown in FIG. 85(C), only one type of opening time of the electric device 315b is set for each game state as a normal winning game, but multiple types of opening times of the electric device 315b for a normal winning game may be set for at least one of the game states of the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state.

[First special chart big win table]
The first special chart big win winning/losing table is used for the first special chart big win lottery that is executed when the game condition of the special chart lottery is established when the game ball 99 enters the first winning port 314. Here, FIG. 86(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart big win winning/losing table.

As shown in FIG. 86(A), the first special chart jackpot winning/losing table includes six jackpot winning/losing tables corresponding to six game setting values 1 to 6. In each jackpot winning/losing table, either a jackpot or a loss is selected as the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery according to the value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, in the first special chart jackpot winning/losing table, the probability of the lottery result in the first special chart jackpot lottery being a jackpot increases in the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 (in descending order of game setting value), which is advantageous for the player.

In the first special chart jackpot win/lose table for game setting value 1, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 206 random numbers from 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to misses, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/lose table for game setting value 2, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 202 random numbers from 0 to 211 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to misses, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/lose table for game setting value 3, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 218 random numbers from 0 to 217 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to misses, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/lose table for game setting value 4, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 224 random numbers from 0 to 223 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to misses, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/lose table for game setting value 5, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 230 random numbers from 0 to 229 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to misses, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536).

In the first special chart jackpot win/lose table for game setting value 6, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 236 random numbers from 0 to 235 correspond to jackpots, and the other random numbers correspond to misses, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536).

Then, when the first special chart jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot win/lose table selected according to the game setting value, the jackpot game is executed if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot.

In the first special chart jackpot win/lose table of this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is a continuous value, but the jackpot random number value may not be a continuous value and may be partially or entirely discrete values.

In addition, six first special game jackpot win/loss tables are provided according to the six game setting values, but at least one first special game jackpot win/loss table is sufficient, and the game setting values are not limited to six levels.

[First special chart, type 1 jackpot allocation table]
The first special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of the first special chart type 1 jackpot when the lottery result in the first special chart type 1 jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, Figure 86 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 86(B), in the first special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) from 0 to 19, 19 random numbers from 0 to 18 are short jackpots when 2R short is opened, and one random number of 19 is short jackpots when 16R short is opened. In other words, in this embodiment, two types of first special chart type 1 jackpots are set: short jackpots when 2R short is opened and short jackpots when 16R short is opened, and the allocation rate of short jackpots when 2R short is opened is set to 95%, and the allocation rate of short jackpots when 16R short is opened is set to 5%.

Here, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a 2R short-opening short-time jackpot, the conditions for the jackpot game are established, and an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated twice as a profit state for the jackpot win, and if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a 16R short-opening short-time jackpot, the conditions for the jackpot game are established, and an open/close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated 16 times as a profit state for the jackpot win is executed. Then, in both the 2R short-opening short-time jackpot and the 16R short-opening short-time jackpot, after the jackpot game based on these jackpots ends, the profit state is shifted to the second time-shortened game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. Also, during any jackpot, the execution period of the variable display time of the normal pattern, the fixed display time, or the opening time of the electric role 315b is controlled in the low-frequency support mode. In this second time-saving game state, the electric device 315b opens frequently because the probability of a normal winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, being a normal winning lottery, is high (see FIG. 85(B)). However, because the time during which the electric device 315b is open is short (0.6 seconds), this is a short-open time-saving game state in which it is not possible to expect many game balls 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (see FIG. 85(C)).

In addition, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state to which the state transitions after the end of the jackpot game based on the first special chart type 1 jackpot is set to the number of times that can be executed with the game balls (expected ball output value or expected ball difference value) that the player can acquire by the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game, for example. This allows the player to execute the prescribed number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state with the game balls acquired by the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game without significantly reducing the number of balls he or she has, and therefore prevents the player from being greatly disadvantaged by the transition to the second time-saving game state, while giving the player a chance to transition to the third time-saving game state described below, which allows the player to transition to the type 2 jackpot game state via the small jackpot game state.

When the upper limit of the number of winning balls entering the variable winning opening 316 in each round of play is set to 10, and the number of winning balls resulting from the entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316 is set to 10, the expected number of balls dispensed in a 2R short open time short big win game is 200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is set to 100 times, which is the number of times that can be executed by shooting out about 150 to 200 game balls.

In this way, if the result of the first special jackpot lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the first winning slot 314, is a jackpot, a type 1 jackpot game is executed in which a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed as a benefit state granted in response to the jackpot win, and a second time-saving game state occurs after the type 1 jackpot game ends.

[First special chart change table]
The first special chart fluctuation table is used to set the first special chart fluctuation pattern (variable display time) in the first special chart game executed for the first special chart big win lottery when the lottery result in the first special chart big win lottery is a big win. Here, Figure 86 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 86(C), in the first special chart variation table, a special chart variation pattern is associated in advance with the value of the special chart variation type counter CS1. In this first special chart variation table, one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart variation table, of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 10 random number values from 0 to 9 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "01" with a variation display time of 30 seconds, 110 random number values from 10 to 119 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "02" with a variation display time of 60 seconds, and 80 random number values from 120 to 199 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "03" with a variation display time of 90 seconds.

Here, when the special chart change pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach performance pattern with a special chart change display time of 30 s as the change type (performance pattern type), and the normal reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display unit 341, etc. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special chart game performance is a normal reach performance. Also, when the special chart change pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach performance pattern with a special chart change display time of 60 s as the change type (performance pattern type), and the super reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display unit 341, etc. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special chart game performance is a super reach performance. Furthermore, when the special chart change pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach performance pattern with the longest special chart change display time of 90 s as the change type (performance pattern), and the special reach performance pattern is executed in the pattern display unit 341, etc. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special chart game performance is a special reach performance.

[First special chart miss type allocation table]
The first special chart loss type allocation table is used to allocate the type of loss when the lottery result in the first special chart big win lottery is a loss. Here, Figure 86 (D) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart loss type allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 86(D), in the first special symbol miss type allocation table, the miss type is defined according to the value (random number value) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special symbol miss type allocation table, of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238, 9 random number values from 0 to 8 are reach for misses before and after, 30 random number values from 9 to 38 are reach for other than misses before and after, 199 random number values from 39 to 237 are complete misses, and one random number value of 238 is a miss for a time-saving symbol stop.

Here, the term "reach" refers to a state in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating a big win is likely to occur between the start of the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the display of the decorative symbols. In one example, the same decorative symbols are displayed in two of the three stop positions on the pay line in the symbol display section 341, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the remaining stop position changes. In addition, during the reach change state in the symbol display section 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to indicate the degree of expectation, and a player-participation type operation presentation process is executed in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the presentation. Note that, during the execution of these presentation processes, the display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

A front-back miss is a miss in which the final stop pattern stops just one space before or after the reach pattern after a reach due to a decorative pattern occurs, and a non-front-back miss is a miss in which the final stop pattern stops other than before or after the reach pattern after a reach due to a decorative pattern occurs. A complete miss and a time-saving pattern stop miss are misses in which a reach due to a decorative pattern does not occur (non-reach misses). A time-saving pattern stop miss is a miss in which a specific pattern combination (time-saving pattern combination) (see Figure 112) out of the non-reach pattern combinations is stopped and displayed, and after the specific pattern combination (time-saving pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, the game moves to the first time-saving game state described below. This first time-saving game state is one of the high-frequency support modes, but is a short-open time-saving game state in which the opening time of the electric role 315b is short (see Figures 85 (B) and 85 (C)). A complete miss is one in which a symbol combination other than a specific symbol combination (a time-saving symbol combination) among non-reach symbol combinations is displayed.

[First special chart deviation table]
The first special chart out of play variation table is used to set the first special chart variation pattern (variation display time) in the first special chart game executed for the first special chart big win lottery when the lottery result in the first special chart big win lottery is out of play. Here, Figure 86 (E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special chart out of play variation table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (E), in the first special chart miss variation table, the special chart variation pattern (variation display time) of the first special chart is specified according to the miss type and the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. This first special chart miss variation table includes a miss first special chart miss variation table for miss reach (front and rear miss reach and reach other than front and rear miss), a first special chart miss variation table for complete miss, and a first special chart miss variation table for time-saving pattern stop miss.

In the first special chart out-of-range variation table for out-of-range reaches (front-back out-range reaches and reaches other than front-back out-ranges), one of the special chart variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart out-of-range variation table for out-of-range reaches (front-back out-range reaches and reaches other than front-back out-ranges), of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 100 random numbers from 0 to 99 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "01" with a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, 50 random numbers from 100 to 149 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "02" with a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds, and 50 random numbers from 150 to 199 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "03" with a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds.

In the first special chart miss variation table for complete misses, either the special chart variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special chart miss variation table for complete misses, of the 200 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 150 random number values from 0 to 149 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "04" with a special chart variation display time of 7 seconds, and 50 random number values from 150 to 199 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "05" with a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds.

In the first special pattern miss variation table for time-saving pattern stop miss, one of the special pattern change patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random number value) of the special pattern change type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special pattern miss variation table for time-saving pattern stop miss, of the 200 special pattern change type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 100 random numbers from 0 to 99 correspond to the special pattern change pattern "04" with a special pattern change display time of 7 seconds, 50 random numbers from 100 to 149 correspond to the special pattern change pattern "05" with a special pattern change display time of 10 seconds, 30 random numbers from 150 to 179 correspond to the special pattern change pattern "06" with a special pattern change display time of 15 seconds, and 20 random numbers from 180 to 199 correspond to the special pattern change pattern "05" with a special pattern change display time of 20 seconds. In other words, when the time-saving pattern stops, the special pattern change pattern with the shorter special pattern change display time is more likely to be selected.

Here, after the first special pattern game ends in which the result of the first special pattern big win lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss, the game transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 96). In the first special pattern stop miss variation table for time-saving pattern stop miss, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, which is a short-open time-saving game state, is prescribed in response to the special pattern change pattern (special pattern change display time) set according to the value (random number value) of the special pattern change type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special pattern stop miss variation table for time-saving pattern stop miss, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state corresponds to 5 times for the special pattern change pattern "04", 10 times for the special pattern change pattern "05", 20 times for the special pattern change pattern "06", and 30 times for the special pattern change pattern "07". As described above, when the time-saving pattern stops and misses, the shorter the special pattern display time, the more likely it is to be selected, so that the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state is the more likely it is to be selected as the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state. In addition, by including a time-saving pattern stop miss as a miss as a lottery result in the first special pattern jackpot lottery, it is possible to transition from the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, to the first time-saving game state (short-open time-saving game state), which is a high-frequency support mode. In this way, by being able to transition from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (short-open time-saving game state), which is a high-frequency support mode, it is possible to reduce the monotony in the normal game state, where the game progress tends to be monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game is prevented.

In this way, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning slot 314, is a miss for the time-saving pattern, the first time-saving game state occurs after the end of the first special chart game in which the lottery result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop.

In this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state is prescribed by the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses, but the upper limit (prescribed number of times) may be set by an allocation table provided separately from the first special symbol miss variation table for time-saving symbol stop misses. Also, in this embodiment, the type of special symbol change pattern (special symbol change display time) when the time-saving symbol stop misses corresponds to the prescribed number of time-saving games, but the prescribed number of time-saving games may be set regardless of the special symbol change pattern (special symbol change display time). Also, time-saving symbol stop misses may be excluded as a miss as a lottery result in the first special symbol jackpot lottery.

[Short Open 2nd Special Big Win Table]
The short-opening second special game jackpot winning/losing table is used for the second special game jackpot lottery that is executed when the electric accessory 315b is short-opened and the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315. That is, the short-opening second special game jackpot winning/losing table is used for the second special game jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 based on the lottery result of the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state being a normal game win. Here, FIG. 87(A) is a diagram showing an example of the short-opening second special game jackpot winning/losing table.

As shown in FIG. 87(A), the short-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In the short-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss is selected as the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the short opening, unlike the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314, the lottery result includes a small jackpot that activates the feather role device 83 (see FIG. 83 and FIG. 84). Specifically, in the short-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 corresponds to a jackpot, 206 to 58,980 corresponds to a small jackpot, and 58,981 to 65,535 corresponds to a miss. That is, in the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the short opening of the electric role device 315b and the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315, the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1, the small jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/1.15, and the miss probability is set to approximately 1/10.

[Long Open 2nd Special Big Win Table]
The long-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table is used for the second special chart jackpot lottery that is executed when the electric role 315b is long-opened and the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315. That is, the long-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table is used for the second special chart jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 based on the lottery result in the normal chart winning lottery in the third time-saving game state being a normal chart winning. Here, FIG. 87(B) is a diagram showing an example of the long-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), the long opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In the long opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss is selected as the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery according to the value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the long opening, unlike the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314, the lottery result includes a small jackpot that activates the feather role device 83 (see FIG. 83 and FIG. 84). Specifically, in the long-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 corresponds to a jackpot, 206 to 65,529 corresponds to a small win, and 65,530 to 65,535 corresponds to a miss. That is, in the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the electric role 315b being long-opened and the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315, the jackpot probability is set to about 1/318.1, the small win probability is set to about 1/1.003, and the miss probability is set to about 1/318.1, so that the miss probability is set lower than in the short-opening second special chart game jackpot winning/losing table, and the small win probability is set higher accordingly.

In this embodiment, the short opening second special chart big win hit/miss table and the long opening second special chart big win hit/miss table are set in common for the six game setting values, but one or both of the short opening second special chart big win hit/miss table and the long opening second special chart big win hit/miss table may be set for each game setting value. It is also possible to set one second special chart big win hit/miss table by commonizing the short opening second special chart big win hit/miss table and the long opening second special chart big win hit/miss table.

[2nd Special Chart Percentage Change Table]
The second special chart winning variation table is used to set the special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) of the second special chart in the second special chart game executed for the second special chart winning lottery when the lottery result in the second special chart big win lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is a win (big win or small win). Here, FIG. 87(C) is a diagram showing an example of the second special chart winning variation table.

As shown in FIG. 87(C), the second special chart winning variation table is provided according to the winning type (big win and small win), and includes a second special chart winning variation table for big wins and a second special chart winning variation table for small wins.

In the second special chart change table for big wins, special chart change patterns are associated in advance with the value of the special chart change type counter CS1. In this second special chart change table for big wins, either the special chart change pattern "01" or "06" is selected according to the value (random number value) of the special chart change type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special chart change table for big wins, of the 200 special chart change type counter CS1 values from 0 to 199, 100 random numbers from 0 to 99 correspond to the special chart change pattern "01" with a special chart change display time of 30 seconds, and 100 random numbers from 100 to 199 correspond to the special chart change pattern "06" with a special chart change display time of 15 seconds.

In the second special chart winning variation table for small wins, the special chart variation pattern "05" is selected regardless of the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special chart winning variation table for small wins, all of the 200 values of the special chart variation type counter CS1 from 0 to 199 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "05", which has a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds.

In the second special chart winning variation table of this embodiment, one type of special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) for the second special chart when the lottery result in the second special chart big win lottery is a small win is set, but multiple types of such special chart variation patterns (special chart variation display time) may be set.

[2nd Special Chart Outlier Variation Table]
The second special chart miss variation table is used to set a special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) of the second special chart in the second special chart game executed for the second special chart big win lottery when the lottery result in the second special chart big win lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is a miss. Here, FIG. 87(D) is a diagram showing an example of the second special chart miss variation table.

As shown in Figure 87 (D), in the second special chart out-of-range variation table, a special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) is associated with a value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1, and one of the special chart variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special chart out of variation table, of the 239 special chart variation type counter CS1 values from 0 to 238, 167 random numbers from 0 to 166 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "04" with a special chart variation display time of 7 seconds, 36 random numbers from 167 to 202 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "05" with a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds, 24 random numbers from 203 to 226 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "06" with a special chart variation display time of 15 seconds, and 12 random numbers from 227 to 238 correspond to the special chart variation pattern "07" with a special chart variation display time of 20 seconds.

In the second special chart miss variation table of this embodiment, four types of special chart variation patterns (special chart variation display time) for the second special chart when the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss are set, but the special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) may be set to a type other than four, for example, one type.

[Time-saving game number allocation table]
The time-saving game number allocation table is used to determine whether or not to transition to the third time-saving game state after the end of the second special game executed for the second special jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state as described later, when the lottery result is a miss, and is used to set the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Here, FIG. 87(E) is a diagram showing an example of the time-saving game number allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 87(E), in the time-saving play count allocation table, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving play count is associated with the value (random number) of the special chart change type counter CS1, and one of 10, 30, 50, or 100 times is selected according to the value (random number) of the special chart change type counter CS1. In addition, in the time-saving play count allocation table, the special chart change type counter CS1 that sets the special chart change pattern (special chart change display time) is used to set the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving play count, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving play count is associated with the type of special chart change pattern (special chart change display time).

Specifically, in the time-saving play number allocation table, of the 239 values of the special chart change type counter CS1 from 0 to 238, 167 random number values from 0 to 166 correspond to 10 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving play number for the special chart change pattern "04" in which the special chart change display time is 7 seconds, 36 random number values from 167 to 202 correspond to 30 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving play number for the special chart change pattern "05" in which the special chart change display time is 10 seconds, 24 random number values from 203 to 226 correspond to 50 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving play number for the special chart change pattern "06" in which the special chart change display time is 15 seconds, and 12 random number values from 227 to 238 correspond to 100 times as the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving play number for the special chart change pattern "07" in which the special chart change display time is 20 seconds. In other words, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games is set at 10 times, approximately 70% at 30 times, approximately 10% at 50 times, and approximately 5% at 100 times, so that the higher the prescribed number of times, the less likely it is to be selected.

In the time-saving play frequency allocation table of this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving play frequency is set in accordance with the type of special chart fluctuation pattern (special chart fluctuation display time), but the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving play frequency does not have to correspond to the type of special chart fluctuation pattern (special chart fluctuation display time). Also, in the time-saving play frequency allocation table of this embodiment, when the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss, the time-saving pattern stop is always a miss, but it may be possible to make it so that some of the results of the second special chart jackpot lottery are misses.

In addition, in the time-saving play count allocation table of this embodiment, four types of upper limit values (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving play times are set according to the value (random number value) of the special chart variation type counter CS1, but the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving play times may be set to a number other than four, for example, one type.

In addition, in the time-saving game number allocation table of this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games is associated with the value (random number) of the special chart variable type counter CS1, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games is set using the variable type counter, but it is also possible to set an allocation counter for allocating the number of time-saving games, and use this allocation counter to set the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games.

[Third Time Shortening Game State Jackpot Type Allocation Table]
The third time-saving game state jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of jackpot in the third time-saving game state. The jackpot in the third time-saving game state includes a type 1 jackpot when the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a type 2 jackpot that occurs when the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather role device 83 in the small jackpot game executed when the lottery result in the second special chart jackpot lottery is a small jackpot. In the third time-saving game state, a common third time-saving game state jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type (number of rounds) of the type 1 jackpot and the type 2 jackpot. Here, FIG. 87 (F) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving game state jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 87(F), in the third time-saving game state hit type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random number values) from 0 to 19, 5 random numbers from 0 to 4 are 16R long opening short jackpots, and 15 random numbers from 5 to 19 are 5R long opening short jackpots. In other words, in this embodiment, for both type 1 and type 2 jackpots in the third time-saving game state, two types are set: 16R long opening short jackpot and 5R long opening short jackpot, and the allocation rate for 16R long opening short jackpot is set to 25%, and the allocation rate for 5R long opening short jackpot is set to 75%.

Here, if the jackpot type is a 16R long opening time short jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game, and if the jackpot type is a 5R long opening time short jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated 5 times during the jackpot game. Then, in both the 16R long opening time short jackpot and the 5R long opening time short jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots ends, the game returns to the third time short game state, which is one of the high frequency support modes. In this third time-saving game state, the electric device 315b opens frequently (see FIG. 85(B)) because the probability of a normal winning lottery being drawn when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R is high, and because the time that the electric device 315b is open is long (3 seconds), this is a long-open time-saving game state in which many game balls 99 can be expected to enter the second winning opening 315 (see FIG. 85(C)).

In this way, if the result of the second special jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 during the third time-saving game state, is a jackpot, a type 1 jackpot game is executed in which a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed, and the third time-saving game state occurs after the type 1 jackpot game ends.

In addition, as the jackpot type allocation table in the third time-saving game state, a common allocation table is used for Type 1 jackpots and Type 2 jackpots, but different allocation tables may be used for Type 1 jackpots and Type 2 jackpots.

[Second Special Chart Type 1 Big Winning Type Allocation Table]
The second special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table is used to allocate the type of the second special chart type 1 jackpot when the lottery result in the second special chart type 1 jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a jackpot. Here, FIG. 87(G) is a diagram showing an example of the second special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 87(G), in the second special chart type 1 jackpot type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) from 0 to 19, 19 random numbers from 0 to 18 are short jackpots when 2R short is opened, and one random number of 19 is short jackpots when 16R short is opened. That is, in this embodiment, two types of second special chart type 1 jackpots are set: short jackpots when 2R short is opened and short jackpots when 16R short is opened, and the allocation rate of short jackpots when 2R short is opened is set to 95%, and the allocation rate of short jackpots when 16R short is opened is set to 5%.

Here, if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a 2R short-opening short-time jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated twice in the jackpot game, and if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a 16R short-opening short-time jackpot, an opening and closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game. Then, in both the 2R short-opening short-time jackpot and the 16R short-opening short-time jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots ends, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes. In this second time-saving game state, the electric device 315b opens frequently because the probability of a normal winning lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, being a normal winning lottery, is high (see FIG. 85(B)). However, because the time during which the electric device 315b is open is short (0.6 seconds), this is a short-open time-saving game state in which it is not possible to expect many game balls 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 (see FIG. 85(C)).

In this way, if the result of the second special jackpot lottery, which is executed in response to the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, is a jackpot, a type 1 jackpot game in which a predetermined number of rounds are played is executed as a profit state for winning the jackpot, and the second time-saving game state occurs after the type 1 jackpot game ends.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 103, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the main timer interrupt processing is the same as in the first embodiment, but some processing of the main processing is different from the main processing of the first embodiment (see Figure 21). Here, Figure 88 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing of the main control unit 4 in this embodiment.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
As shown in FIG. 88, the main processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that some of the processing of the normal game control processing (step S1404), the special game control processing (step S1406), and the game state transition processing (step S1408) are different from the first embodiment, and the small win game control processing (step S1407-1) is executed. Below, we will explain the steps (steps) in the normal game control processing (step S1404) and the special game control processing (step S1406) that are different from the first embodiment, and explain the entire procedure of the small win game control processing (step S1407-1) and the game state transition processing (step S1408).

[General game control processing]
In the present embodiment, the normal game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. 88 is different from the first embodiment in the normal game fluctuation start process. Hereinafter, the normal game fluctuation start process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89.

[Regular map change start processing]
In the normal symbol variation start process of this embodiment, variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 is started, and various flags are set based on the results of the normal symbol winning lottery.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal pattern variation start process of this embodiment, first, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state is set to ON (step S3301). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state when starting the variation display of the normal pattern (normal pattern game) is the normal game state. That is, when the variation of the normal pattern starts, it judges whether it is the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode or the time-saving game state which is the high frequency support mode, and judges whether the normal pattern wins based on the support mode at the time of the variation start of the normal pattern.

The normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3629 in FIG. 98, step S3649 in FIG. 99, step S3667 in FIG. 100, or step S3701 in FIG. 102 when a game state is transitioned from another game state to the normal game state in the game state transition process described below, and is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612, or S3616 in FIG. 97 when a game state is transitioned from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3302. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3301: No), i.e., if the game is in one of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3305.

<Steps S3302 to S3304>
If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3301: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the low frequency support mode, the MPU 41 makes a win/lose determination for the normal game state win lottery based on the normal game state win/lose table (see Figure 85 (A)) (step S3302), and determines whether the result of the win/lose determination is a normal win or not (step S3303).

Whether or not the result of the win/loss judgment is a normal win is determined based on the normal win random number counter C4, which is obtained when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R and is stored as a specific value in the normal win reserve storage area 412c (see FIG. 11).

When the result of the win/loss determination based on the normal game state normal win table is a normal win (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the short open normal win flag to ON (step S3304) and proceeds to step S3309. The short open normal win flag is a flag that indicates that the result of the normal win lottery is a short open win, and is referenced when determining whether or not to set the opening counter value to the time corresponding to the short opening as the opening time of the electric role device 315b in step S1806 in the normal win game control processing in FIG. 25 of the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination based on the normal game state normal hit table is not a normal hit (step S3303: No), i.e., if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3309.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3301: No), that is, if the game is in any of the first to third time-saving game states, which are high-frequency support modes, the MPU 41 makes a win/lose judgment for the normal win lottery based on the time-saving game state normal win win/lose table (see Figure 85 (B)) (step S3305), and determines whether the result of the win/lose judgment is a normal win or not (step S3306).

Whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a normal win is determined based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4, which is obtained by the entry of the game ball 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R, as in step S3302 described above, and is stored as a specific value in the normal win reserve storage area 412c (see FIG. 11).

If the result of the hit/miss determination based on the time-saving game state normal hit table is a normal hit (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3307, and if the result of the hit/miss determination is not a normal hit (step S3306: No), i.e., if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3309.

<Steps S3307 and S3308>
If the result of the win/loss judgment based on the time-saving game state normal symbol win/loss table is a normal symbol win (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3307). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state when starting the variable display of the normal symbol (normal symbol game) is the third time-saving game state.

The third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, or step S3723 in FIG. 103 when a game state is transitioned from another game state to the third time-saving game state in the game state transition process described below, and is set to OFF in step S3657, S3661, or S3668 in FIG. 100 when a game state is transitioned from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

When the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the long-opening regular winning flag to ON (step S3308) and proceeds to step S3309. The long-opening regular winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery is a long-opening winning, and is referenced when determining whether or not to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the long opening as the opening time of the electric role device 315b in step S1803 of the regular winning game control processing in FIG. 25 of the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3307: No), i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state or the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 proceeds to the aforementioned step S3304, sets the short-open normal winning flag to ON, and proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the result of the regular winning lottery is a miss (step S3303 or S3306: No), if the short opening regular winning flag is set to on (step S3304) or if the long opening regular winning flag is set to on (step S3308), the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the regular pattern in the regular pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3309). Then, the MPU 41 sets the regular pattern variable display in progress flag, which indicates that the regular pattern is being displayed, i.e., that a regular pattern game is being played, to on (step S3310), and ends the regular pattern variable start process.

When the normal symbol display section 361 starts displaying the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol variation display time, the fixed display time, or the opening time of the electric device 315b is set as described in the first embodiment above, based on the normal symbol hit random number counter C4, the normal symbol variation type counter CS2, and various time-saving game state flags as specific values obtained by the entry of the game ball 99 into each winning slot 314, 315 and stored in the normal symbol reserve storage area 412c (see FIG. 11). Note that the normal symbol variation display time when the normal symbol display section 361 starts displaying the normal symbol variation is determined by referring to the game state when the normal symbol variation display starts, i.e., the various time-saving game state flags.

[Special game control processing]
In the present embodiment, the special chart game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 88 is different from the first embodiment in the special chart change start process. Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special chart change start process. Hereinafter, the special chart change start process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

[Special chart change start processing]
In the special pattern change start processing of this embodiment, the changing display and stopping display of the first special pattern of the first special pattern display section 362 in the first special pattern game, or the second special pattern of the second special pattern display section 363 in the second special pattern game, are controlled.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Fig. 90, in step S3401, the MPU 41 judges whether the special game to be started is the first special game. Whether the special game to be started is the first special game is judged based on the winning/losing information moved to the special game execution area AE (see Fig. 8) of the special game reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 in step S2003 or S2006 in the special game data setting process in Fig. 27 of the first embodiment described above.

If the special game to be started is the first special game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3402. On the other hand, if the special game to be started is not the first special game (step S3401: No), i.e., if the special game to be started is the second special game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403.

<Step S3402>
If the special game to be started is the first special game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the first special game win/loss table (see FIG. 86(A)) and the counter value of the big win random number counter C1 included as the win/loss information (numerical information) stored in the special game execution area AE of the special game reserve storage area 412b (step S3402), and proceeds to step 3406. The result of the win/loss judgment in step S3402 is stored in the RAM 413.

<Steps S3403 to S3405>
If the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3401: No), that is, if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state is on (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game state when the second special symbol game is started is the third time-saving game state.

The third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 in FIG. 99 or step S3694 in FIG. 101 when a game state is transitioned from another game state to the third time-saving game state in the game state transition process described below, and is set to OFF in step S3657, S3661, or S3668 in FIG. 100 when a game state is transitioned from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

When the third time-saving game state flag is on (step S3403: Yes), i.e., when the game state when starting the second special chart game is the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 makes a win/lose judgment based on the long-open second special chart jackpot win/lose table (see FIG. 87(B)) and the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the win/lose information (numerical information) stored in the special chart execution area AE of the special chart reserve storage area 412b (step S3404), and proceeds to step 3406. The result of the win/lose judgment in step S3404 is stored in the RAM 413.

On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is off (step S3403: No), i.e., if the game state when starting the second special chart game is the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 makes a win/loss judgment based on the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see FIG. 87(A)) and the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the win/loss information (numerical information) stored in the special chart execution area AE of the special chart reserve storage area 412b (step S3405), and proceeds to step 3406. The result of the win/loss judgment in step S3405 is stored in the RAM 413.

<Step S3406>
When the MPU 41 judges whether the winning or losing is determined in step S3402, S3404, or S3405, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is on (step S3406). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state when the special game is started is the normal game state or any one of the first to third time-saving game states.

In addition, in the game state transition process described below, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3629 in FIG. 98, step S3650 in FIG. 99, step S3667 in FIG. 100, or step S3701 in FIG. 102 when transitioning from another game state to the normal game state, and is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612, or S3616 in FIG. 97 when transitioning from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is on (step S3406: Yes), i.e., if the game state when the special game starts is the normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3413. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), i.e., if the game state when the special game starts is any of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), that is, if the game state when starting the special game is any of the first to third time-shortened game states, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, or third time-shortened game state) (step S3407), and transitions to step S3408.

The time-saving counter is set in step S3605 in FIG. 97 and in steps S3672, S3679, S3686, and S3693 in FIG. 101 when the normal game state or any of the jackpot game states is transitioned to any of the first to third time-saving game states, and in step S3643 in FIG. 101 when the second time-saving game state is transitioned to the third game state. On the other hand, when a special game is started in any of the first to third time-saving game states, the counter is decremented by one in step S3407 of the special game state change start process.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a second time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in the second time-saving game state is on. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game state when the special game is started is the second time-saving game state.

The second time-saving game state flag is set to ON in steps S3673, S3680, S3687 in FIG. 101 or step S3711 in FIG. 102 when a game state is transitioned from another game state to the second time-saving game state in the game state transition process described below, and is set to OFF in steps S3636, S3640, S3647 or S3651 in FIG. 99 when a game state is transitioned from the second time-saving game state to another game state.

If the second time-saving game state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), i.e., if the game state when the special game is started is the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3409. On the other hand, if the second time-saving game state flag is off (step S3408: No), i.e., if the game state when the special game is started is not the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3413.

<Step S3409>
If the second time-saving game state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), that is, if the game state when starting the special game is the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop based on the result of the win/lose determination in step S3402 or step S3405 (step S3409).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a miss on the time-saving pattern stop (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3410, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a miss on the time-saving pattern stop (step S3409: No), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3413.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special game is a time-saving pattern stop miss (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts the value of the time-saving number counter (the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state) from the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss (see FIG. 86(E) and FIG. 87(E)) (step S3410), and judges whether the subtraction value at this time exceeds 0 (step S3411). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. If the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to S3412, and if the subtraction value is 0 or less (S3411: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to S3413.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving play counter (the remaining number of time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state) from the number of time-saving play times set for the time-saving pattern stop miss (see Figures 86 (E) and 87 (E)) is greater than 0, a transition is made from the second time-saving play state to the third time-saving play state, and if the subtraction value is less than 0, a transition is not made to the third time-saving play state, and the remaining number of time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state is maintained without change.

In this embodiment, when the subtraction value exceeds 0, the game state is shifted from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. However, the game state may be shifted from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state not only when the subtraction value exceeds 0 but also when the subtraction value is 0. In other words, when the subtraction value is 0 or more, the game state may be shifted from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the subtraction value is 0 or less, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained without change, but when the subtraction value is 0 or less, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the sum of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss, or may be changed (replaced) to the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether the special symbol game started in the second time-saving game state is the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the second time-saving game state is transitioned to the third time-saving game state after the special symbol game ends on condition that the subtraction value exceeds 0, but only if the special symbol game started in the second time-saving game state is the second special symbol game, the second time-saving game state may be transitioned to the third time-saving game state after the special symbol game ends. In other words, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, if the jackpot lottery is for the first special symbol game, the second time-saving game state may not be transitioned to the third time-saving game state. In addition, the time-saving pattern stop miss may be omitted from the types of cases where the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a miss, and in that case, if the special symbol game that starts in the second time-saving game state is the first special symbol game, there will be no transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the end of the first special symbol game.

The execution period of the variable display time, fixed display time, or opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning port 316 of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game is acquired by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, as described in the first embodiment above, and is set based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as specific values stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b, and various time-saving game state flags. Note that the variable display time of each special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display unit 363 is started is determined by referring to the game state when the variable display of each special symbol is started, i.e., various time-saving game state flags. Even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters each winning port 314, 315 is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), if the game state when the variable display of each special symbol starts is various time-saving game states, the execution period such as the variable time of the special symbol and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning port 316 is determined by the conditions of the time-saving game state. Also, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters each winning port 314, 315 is various time-saving game states, if the game state when the variable display of each special symbol starts is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the execution period such as the variable time of the special symbol and the opening period (number of rounds) of the variable winning port 316 is determined by the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, if a game ball 99 enters each winning slot 314, 315 while the special symbols are changing during the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), and one corresponding ball is reserved, if the game state when the special symbol that is already changing stops is still in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will start after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the normal game state (low frequency support mode) before the changing special symbol stops, the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will start after various lotteries are held under the conditions of the normal game state (low frequency support mode).

In addition, if a game ball 99 enters each winning slot 314, 315 during the change of the special symbol during the normal game state (low frequency support mode), and one ball is reserved, if the game state when the changing special symbol stops is still the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will start with various lotteries being held under the conditions in the normal game state (low frequency support mode). However, if the game state has switched to the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) before the changing special symbol stops, the high profit condition will be met, and the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved game ball will start with various lotteries being held under the conditions in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss with a time-saving symbol stop, the subtraction value is calculated in relation to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for that miss with a time-saving symbol stop. However, if there are one or more jackpot lottery results with a time-saving symbol stop miss prior to that miss with a time-saving symbol stop in the second time-saving game state in which the subtraction value at that time is 0 or less, it may be determined whether or not to transition to the third time-saving game state based on whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving number counter from the value obtained by adding the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for that miss with a time-saving symbol stop to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for that miss with a time-saving symbol stop exceeds 0. That is, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop miss may be added to the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the previous time-saving symbol stop miss in the second time-saving game state, and the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving number counter from the value may be determined to be greater than 0. In other words, the establishment state of the high-profit condition may be determined not only based on the time-saving symbol stop miss result in the jackpot lottery, but also on the results of the jackpot lottery before that. In this case, the more times the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol miss, the higher the possibility of the subtraction value exceeding 0 and the transition to the third time-saving game state increases, so that the player's attention to the time-saving symbol stop display in the second time-saving game state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Step S3412>
When the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a third time-shortened game state transition flag to ON for transitioning the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3412). This third time-shortened game state transition flag is referred to in step S3641 in the game state transition process in FIG. 99 described later in order to determine whether or not to transition the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern change pattern (special pattern change display time) of the first special pattern display unit 362 or the second special pattern display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 corresponding to the special pattern change pattern of the special pattern game in the special pattern change display time counter based on the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S3402, S3404, or S3405. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern change pattern (special pattern change display time) of the first special pattern display unit 362 in the special pattern change display time counter based on the first special pattern type 1 big win change table (see FIG. 86 (C)) when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S3402 is a big win, and based on the first special pattern miss change table (see FIG. 86 (E)) according to the miss type when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S3402 is a miss. In addition, if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3404 or step S3405 is a big win or a small win, the MPU 41 sets the special pattern change pattern (special pattern change display time) of the second special pattern display unit 363 in the special pattern change display time counter based on the second special pattern win change table (see Figure 87 (C)) corresponding to the type of win, and if the result of the win/loss determination in step S3404 or step S3405 is a miss, based on the second special pattern miss change table (see Figure 87 (D)).

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a special chart variation pattern command including the lottery result in the big win lottery for the special chart game in step S3402, S3404, or S3405 and the special chart variation pattern (special chart variation display time) set in step S3413. As a result, in step S1401 of the external output process in the next main process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 41, the special chart variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special chart game performance in the pattern display unit 341, etc. based on the special chart variation pattern command.

In addition, when the lottery result is "2R short opening short big win", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 as a special chart fluctuation pattern command any one of "A01" to "A03" and "A06" in which "A" indicating that it is a 2R short opening short big win is added to the special chart fluctuation pattern "01" to "03" or "06". In addition, when the lottery result is "16R short opening short big win", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 as a special chart fluctuation pattern command any one of "B01" to "B03" and "B06" in which "B" indicating that it is a 16R short opening short big win is added to the special chart fluctuation pattern "01" to "03" or "06". In addition, when the lottery result is "small win", the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 as a special chart fluctuation pattern command "C05" in which "C" indicating that it is a small win is added to the special chart fluctuation pattern "05". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 one of the special chart fluctuation patterns "01" to "07" with a "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D07," as a special chart fluctuation pattern command. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes in the special chart fluctuation pattern command information indicating whether the result is a front-to-back miss reach, a reach other than a front-to-back miss, a complete miss, or a time-saving pattern stop miss.

<Steps S3415 and S3416>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 starts the changing display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 of the main display section 36 or the second special pattern in the second special pattern display section 363, and further sets the special pattern changing display in progress flag, which indicates that the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is being changed (special pattern game is being executed), to on (step S3416), and terminates the change start processing.

The special symbol change display flag is referenced in step S1902 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26 of the first embodiment described above to determine whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner in the special symbol display areas 362, 363 of the main display unit 36 (whether or not a special symbol game is being played).

[Small win game control process]
In the small win game control process executed in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. 88 of this embodiment, a process is executed to control the operation of the feather role device 83 in a small win game executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the big win lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is a small win. The small win game of this embodiment includes a first small win game executed when the lottery result in the second special big win lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a small win, and a second small win game executed when the lottery result in the second special big win lottery in the third time-saving game state is a small win. Here, FIG. 91 is a time chart showing an example of the progress of a small win game.

As shown in FIG. 91(A) and FIG. 91(B), the small prize game (first small prize game or second small prize game) includes an opening (first opening or second opening) in which the inlet 831 of the feather device 83 is kept closed, and a movable feather part operation game in which the inlet 831 is opened by operating the movable feather part 832 of the feather device 83. The time of the first opening of the first small prize game (e.g., 3 to 10 seconds) is set longer than the time of the second opening of the second small prize game (e.g., 2 to 9 seconds). In addition, the difference between the time of the first opening of the first small prize game and the time of the second opening of the second small prize game (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) is set longer than the operation time of the V winning opening opening part 835 described later (e.g., 0.1 to 1 second).

Also, as shown in FIG. 91(C), in the small prize game, the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V prize opening/closing part 835 are set to be the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special chart big prize lottery is executed. Of course, one or both of the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V prize opening/closing part 835 may be set based on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special chart big prize lottery is executed, and do not necessarily have to be set to be the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state. For example, it is conceivable that one or both of the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V prize opening/closing part 835 in the first small prize game executed based on the second special chart big prize lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are set to be different from the second small prize game executed based on the second special chart big prize lottery in the third time-saving game state.

In addition, in the small prize game, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) is set to the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special chart big prize lottery is executed. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) can be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special chart big prize lottery is executed. For example, it is conceivable to set the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the first small prize game executed based on the second special chart big prize lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state to be shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the second small prize game executed based on the second special chart big prize lottery in the third time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable wing activation game in the small win game is executed for a fixed time (certain time) regardless of whether the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 833, but the movable wing activation game may be ended before the fixed time has elapsed if the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 833.

In addition, in the small win game of this embodiment, an ending is not set, but the ending may be executed after the movable wing operation game ends. In this case, it is also possible to notify on the pattern display unit 341 or the like whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 833 at the ending.

Also, as shown in FIG. 91(A) and FIG. 91(C), in the first small prize game that is executed when the lottery result in the second special jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is a small prize, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather role device 83 is set to the first opening. In the first opening, as described above, the inlet 831 of the feather role device 83 is maintained in a closed state, so that the game ball 99 is not introduced into the inside of the feather role device 83. Therefore, in the first small prize game, the game ball 99 does not enter the V prize opening 833, and the second type jackpot game does not occur. As a result, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, even if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small prize and the first small prize game is executed, the second type jackpot game is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 91(B) and FIG. 91(C), in the second small prize game that is executed when the lottery result in the second special chart big prize lottery in the third time-saving game state is a small prize, the operation timing of the V winning port opening/closing part 835 of the feather role device 83 is set to the movable wing part operation game. In the movable wing part operation game, the movable wing part 832 is operated as described above to open the introduction port 631, so that the game ball 99 can be introduced into the feather role device 83. Therefore, in the second small prize game, the game ball 99 can be entered into the V winning port 833, and a type 2 big prize game can be generated. As a result, in the third time-saving game state, the lottery result in the big prize lottery is a small prize, and the second small prize game is executed, so that a type 2 big prize game can be executed. In other words, in all of the first to third time-saving game states, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery includes a small jackpot, but only the third time-saving game state can generate a type 2 jackpot game. This provides new gameplay, in which the game transitions from the second time-saving game state, which is transitioned to after the end of a type 1 jackpot game, to the third time-saving game state, which can generate a type 2 jackpot game, as will be described in detail later, and thus increases attention and interest in the game, and improves the excitement of the game.

In the first small prize game of this embodiment, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 is set to the first opening to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the V prize opening 833, but part or all of the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to the movable feather operation game. Specifically, in the first small prize game, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 may be set to straddle from the first opening to the movable feather operation game, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Also, in the first small prize game, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather role device 83 may be set to the movable feather operation game, and the operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing part 835 may be set to a short time (for example, 0.02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Here, the effect of making it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game is as described above, but on the other hand, if it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small prize game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is made difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning hole 833 in the first small win game, there is a possibility that the game ball 99 will enter the V winning hole 833 in the first small win game, so the player's attention and interest in the small win game is prevented from declining.

Next, the specific processing steps of the small win game control processing of this embodiment will be described. Here, Figures 92 to 95 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small win game control processing.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Fig. 92, in the small win game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the special chart change stop flag indicating that the first special chart or the second special chart is stopped and displayed is set to ON (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the timing for starting the small win game has come by the first special chart or the second special chart being stopped and displayed. The special chart change stop flag is set to ON when the first special chart or the second special chart is stopped and displayed in step S1908 in the special chart game control process of Fig. 26.

If the special chart change stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start a small win game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3502. On the other hand, if the special chart change stop flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), i.e., if it is not time to start a small win game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3510 in FIG. 93.

<Step S3502>
When the special chart change stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the small win game, the MPU 41 judges whether the lottery result of the big win lottery for the special chart game is a small win or not (step S3502). Whether the lottery result of the big win lottery is a small win or not is judged based on the lottery result of the big win lottery stored in the RAM 413 when the win/loss judgment is performed in step S3401, S3404, or S34015 in the special chart change start processing of FIG.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small win (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3503, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S3502: No), the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special game is a small win (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening/closing unit operation standby flag to ON (step S3503). The V winning opening/closing unit operation standby flag is a flag indicating that the V winning opening/closing unit 835 of the feather role device 83 is not yet activated and is waiting for the V winning opening/closing unit 835 to operate. This V winning opening/closing unit operation standby flag is referenced in step S3510 of FIG. 93 in the small win game control process to determine whether the V winning opening/closing unit 835 is not yet activated. Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening/closing unit operation standby time counter indicating the remaining time until the V winning opening/closing unit 835 starts operating (step S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

The V prize opening opening/closing section operation waiting time counter is decremented by one in step S3511 of FIG. 93 each time the small prize game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3512 of FIG. 93 during the small prize game control process to determine whether it is time to start operating the V prize opening opening/closing section 835.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 41 judges whether the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3505). Here, if the result of the big win lottery is a small win, the first small win game is executed in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 93(A)), and the second small win game is executed in the third time-saving game state (see FIG. 93(B)). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the small win game starts the first small win game or the second small win game for the small win.

The third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, step S3719 or S3723 in FIG. 103 when a game state is transitioned from another game state to the third time-saving game state in the game state transition process described below, and is set to OFF in step S3657, S3661 or S3668 in FIG. 100 when a game state is transitioned from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S3505: Yes), i.e., if the second small win game is to start because the game is in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3506. On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3505: No), i.e., if the first small win game is to start because the game is in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3508.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set on (step S3505: Yes), that is, if the second small win game is to be started because the game is in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the second opening flag, which indicates that the second opening of the second small win game (see Figure 93 (B)) is being executed, to on (step S3506), and sets a second opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the second opening time (the time until the movable wing operation game of the second small win game (see Figure 93 (B)) starts) (step S3507), and terminates the small win game control processing.

The second opening flag is referenced in step S3526 of FIG. 94 to determine whether the second opening of the second small win game is being executed. The second opening time counter is decremented by one in step S3527 of FIG. 94 each time the small win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3528 of FIG. 94 to determine whether it is time to end the second opening (start the movable wing operation game of the second small win game).

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3505: No), that is, if the first small win game is started because the game is in the first time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the first opening flag, which indicates that the first opening of the first small win game (see Figure 93 (A)) is being executed, to on (step S3508), and sets a first opening time counter, which indicates the remaining time of the first opening time (the time until the movable wing operation game of the first small win game (see Figure 93 (A)) starts) (step S3509), and terminates the small win game control processing.

The first opening flag is referenced in step S3522 of FIG. 94 to determine whether the first opening of the first small win game is being executed. The first opening time counter is decremented by one in step S3523 of FIG. 94 each time the small win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3524 of FIG. 94 to determine whether it is time to end the first opening (start the movable wing operation game of the first small win game).

<Step S3510>
When the special chart change stop flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small win game, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag, which indicates that the V prize opening/closing unit 835 of the feather role device 83 has not been operated and is waiting for the operation of the V prize opening/closing unit 835, is set to ON (step S3510). When the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3511, and when the V prize opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3517.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter indicating the remaining time until the operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 starts (step S3511), and judges whether the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to start the operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 to open the V prize opening 833.

If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start the operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 to open the V prize opening 833, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, if the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3512: No), i.e., if it is not time to start the operation of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (to open the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3522 in FIG. 94.

<Steps S3513 to S3516>
If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation waiting time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start operating the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 and open the V prize opening 833, the MPU 41 operates the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3513) and sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag to on, indicating that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 is operating (step S3514).

The V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag is referenced in step S3517 of the small win game control process described below to determine whether the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is operating.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3515), sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation standby flag to off (step S3516), and transitions to step S3522 in FIG. 94.

The V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter is decremented by one each time the small prize game control process is executed in step S3518 of the small prize game control process described below, and is referenced in step S3519 of the small prize game control process described below to determine whether it is time to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (close the V prize opening 833).

<Step S3517>
If the V prize opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the V prize opening opening/closing unit operation flag indicating that the V prize opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather role device 83 is operated is set to ON (step S3517). If the V prize opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2018, and if the V prize opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to OFF (step S3517: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3522 in FIG.

<Steps S3518 and S3519>
If the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (step S3518), and judges whether the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3519). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (close the V prize opening 833).

If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), i.e., if it is time to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3520. On the other hand, if the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3519: No), i.e., if it is not time to return the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3522 in FIG. 94.

<Steps S3520 and S3521>
If the value of the V prize opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), that is, if it is the time to restore the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 (close the V prize opening 833), the MPU 41 restores the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3520), sets the V prize opening opening/closing section operation flag indicating that the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 is operated to off (step S3521), and proceeds to step S3522 of Figure 94.

<Step S3522>
As shown in Fig. 94, in step S3522, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the first opening flag indicating that the first opening of the first small win game (see Fig. 91 (A)) is being executed is set to ON. Note that, when the first opening of the first small win game is started, the first opening flag is set to ON in step S3509 of Fig. 92 in the small win game control process.

If the first opening flag is set to on (step S3522: Yes), i.e., if the first opening of the first small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3523. On the other hand, if the first opening flag is set to off (step S3522: No), i.e., if the first opening of the first small win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3526.

<Steps S3523 to S3525>
When the first opening flag is set to on (step S3522: Yes), that is, when the first opening of the first small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the first opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the first opening time (the time until the start of the movable wing operation game of the first small win game (see FIG. 91(A))) (step S3523), and judges whether the first opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3524). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to end the first opening and start the movable wing operation game (see FIG. 91(A)) in the first small win game.

If the first opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), i.e., in the first small win game, when it is time to end the first opening and start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 sets the first opening flag indicating that the first opening is being executed to OFF (step S3525) and proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, if the first opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3524: No), i.e., in the first small win game, when it is neither time to end the first opening nor time to start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Step S3526>
When the first opening flag of the first small win game is set to OFF (step S3522: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the second opening flag indicating that the second opening (see FIG. 91(B)) of the second small win game is being executed is set to ON. Note that, when the second opening (see FIG. 91(B)) of the second small win game is started, the second opening flag is set to ON in step S3507 of FIG. 92 in the small win game control process.

If the second opening flag is set to on (step S3526: Yes), i.e., if the second opening of the second small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3527. On the other hand, if the second opening flag is set to off (step S3526: No), i.e., if the second opening of the second small win game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3533 in FIG. 95.

<Steps S3527 to S3529>
When the second opening flag is set to on (step S3526: Yes), that is, when the second opening of the second small win game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the second opening time (the time until the start of the movable wing operation game of the second small win game (see FIG. 91(B))) (step S3527), and judges whether the second opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3528). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to end the second opening and start the movable wing operation game (see FIG. 91(B)) in the second small win game.

If the second opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3528: Yes), i.e., in the second small win game, when it is time to end the second opening and start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 sets the second opening flag indicating that the second opening is being executed to OFF (step S3529) and proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, if the second opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3529: No), i.e., in the second small win game, when it is neither time to end the second opening nor time to start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Step S3530>
When the first opening flag of the first small win game or the second opening flag of the second small win game is turned off (step S3525 or S3529), that is, when it is time to end the opening in the first small win game or the second small win game and start the movable wing operation game, the MPU 41 starts the movable wing operation game by activating the movable wing 832 of the feather role device 83 (step S3530), and transitions processing to step S3531.

In addition, in the movable wing operation game, the movable wing 832 of the wing device 83 is operated to open the inlet 832 of the wing device 83, allowing the game ball 99 to enter the inside of the wing device 83.

<Steps S3531 and S3532>
In step S3531, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is being operated (the movable wing operation game is being executed), to ON (step S3531).Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation time counter, which indicates the remaining operation time of the movable wing 832 (the remaining time of the movable wing operation game) (step S3532), and ends the small win game control process.

The movable wing operation flag is referenced in step S3533 of FIG. 95 in the small win game control process to determine whether the movable wing 832 is activated (a movable wing operation game is being executed). The movable wing operation time counter is decremented by one in step S3534 of FIG. 95 in the small win game control process each time the small win game control process is executed, and is referenced in step S3535 of FIG. 95 in the small win game control process to determine whether it is time to return the movable wing 832 (end the movable wing operation game).

<Step S3533>
If the second opening flag is set to off (step S3522: No), that is, if neither the first opening nor the second opening is being executed, as shown in FIG. 95, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is being operated (the movable wing operation game is being executed) is set to on (step S3533). If the movable wing operation flag is set to on (step S3533: Yes), that is, if the movable wing operation game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3534. On the other hand, if the movable wing operation flag is set to off (step S3533: No), that is, if the movable wing operation game is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S3534 and S3535>
When the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), that is, when the movable wing operation game is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the movable wing operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the movable wing 832 (remaining time of the movable wing operation game) (step S3534). Then, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3535). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to end the movable wing operation game (small win game) by returning the movable wing 832 and closing the introduction port 831.

If the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), i.e., if it is time to return the movable wing 832 (the movable wing operation game (small win game)) to its original state, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3536. On the other hand, if the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3533: No), i.e., if it is not time to return the movable wing 832 (the movable wing operation game (small win game)) to its original state, the MPU 41 ends the small win game control process.

<Steps S3536 and S3537>
If the value of the movable wing operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the movable wing 832 (time to end the movable wing operation game (small win game)), the MPU 41 ends the movable wing operation game (small win game) by returning the movable wing 832 (step S3536).Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing operation flag, which indicates that the movable wing 832 is being operated (the movable wing operation game is being executed), to OFF (step S3536), and ends the small win game control process.

[Game state transition process]
In the game state transition process executed in step S1408 in the main process of Fig. 88 of this embodiment, a process for transitioning various game states is executed. Here, Fig. 96 is a diagram showing an example of transition of the game state (game flow) in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, the game states include a normal game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state, a first-type jackpot game state, a second-type jackpot game state, and a small jackpot game state.

The normal game state is a game state in which the electric device 315b is operated for a short time at a low frequency (see Figures 85(A) and 85(C)), the first special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 is executed based on the first special jackpot win/lose table (see Figure 86(A)), and the second special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is executed based on the short-open second special jackpot win/lose table (see Figure 87(A)).

The normal game state is entered when the result of the jackpot lottery for the specified number of times is announced (the special game is executed a specified number of times) without entering the jackpot game state from the first to third time-saving game states. Also, when the game state is entered into the small jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state being a small jackpot, the game state returns to the normal game state when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 in the small jackpot game state (V non-winning).

On the other hand, from the normal game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a jackpot, the game state transitions to a type 1 jackpot game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a small jackpot, the game state transitions to a small jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a time-saving pattern stop (time-saving pattern stop), the game state transitions to a first time-saving game state. Note that the normal game state does not transition to a second time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state, or a type 2 jackpot game state.

The first time-saving game state is a game state in which the second winning port 315 is opened frequently by the short-time operation of the electric device 315b (see Figures 85(B) and 85(C)), the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is executed based on the first special chart jackpot win/lose table (see Figure 86(A)), and the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is executed based on the short-open second special chart jackpot win/lose table (see Figure 87(A)).

The first time-saving game state is entered when the result of the big win lottery in the normal game state indicates that the time-saving symbol stop has not been reached (time-saving symbol stop). Also, the first time-saving game state is entered when the result of the big win lottery in the first time-saving game state indicates that the small win game state has been entered based on a small win, and when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 in the small win game state (V non-winning), and the game state returns from the small win game state.

On the other hand, from the first time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a jackpot, the game state transitions to a type 1 jackpot game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a small jackpot, the game state transitions to a small jackpot game state, and if the lottery results for the specified number of jackpot lotteries are notified (special game play is executed a specified number of times) without transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game state transitions to a normal game state. Note that the first time-saving game state does not transition to the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, or the type 2 jackpot game state.

The first time-saving game state may be omitted, and at least two types of time-saving game states, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, may be set. If the first time-saving game state is omitted, the time-saving pattern stop miss is omitted from the miss types in the first special pattern miss allocation table (see FIG. 86 (D)) used in the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning slot 314.

The second time-saving game state, like the second time-saving game state, is a game state in which the second winning port 315 is opened frequently by frequently operating the electric device 315b for a short time (see Figures 85 (B) and 85 (C)), the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is executed based on the first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86 (A)), and the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is executed based on the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87 (A)).

The second short play state, which is a profitable state, is entered when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal play state or the first short play state is a jackpot and a transition is made to a type 1 jackpot game, and the conditions for time-limited play are met after the end of the type 1 jackpot game. Also, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second short play state is a small jackpot and a transition is made to a small jackpot game state, the second short play state is entered when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 in the small jackpot game state (V non-winning), and the game returns from the small jackpot game state.

On the other hand, from the second time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that the time-saving pattern stop does not meet the specified conditions, as will be described in detail later. Also, from the second time-saving game state, the game state transitions to a type 1 jackpot game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that it is a jackpot, and transitions to a small jackpot game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that it is a small jackpot. Also, from the second time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state when the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries is notified (special pattern games are executed a specified number of times) without transitioning to either the jackpot game state or the third time-saving game state. Note that the second time-saving game state does not transition to the first time-saving game state or the type 2 jackpot game state.

The third time-saving game state differs from the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state in that the second winning port 315 is opened frequently due to the long-term operation of the electric device 315b being executed at a high frequency (see Figures 85 (B) and 85 (C)), the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is executed based on the first special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 86 (A)), and the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is executed based on the short-open second special chart jackpot win/loss table (see Figure 87 (B)). In the third time-saving game state, the electric device 315b is operated for a longer period of time than in the first and second time-saving game states, making it easier for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning slot 315, and therefore the third time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the first and second time-saving game states in which the electric device 315b is operated for a shorter period of time.

The third short play state is entered when the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the second short play state is a time-saving pattern stop miss that satisfies a predetermined condition. In addition, when the small win play state is entered based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the third short play state being a small win, the third short play state is returned from the small win play state when the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning hole 833 of the feather role device 83 in the small win play state (V non-win). Here, the predetermined condition is that the number of time-saving play times (see FIG. 87(E)) set for the time-saving pattern stop miss that is the result of the second special jackpot lottery in the second short play state exceeds the remaining number of time-saving play times in the second short play state (see steps S3409 to S3412 in the special pattern change start process in FIG. 90).

On the other hand, from the third time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a jackpot, the state transitions to a type 1 jackpot game state, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is notified as a small jackpot, the state transitions to a small jackpot game state. Also, from the third time-saving game state, if the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries is notified (special game play is executed a specified number of times) without transitioning to either the type 1 jackpot game state or the type 2 jackpot game state via the small jackpot game state, the state transitions to the normal game state. Note that the third time-saving game state does not transition to the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the type 2 jackpot game state.

Next, we will explain the specific processing steps of the game state transition processing in this embodiment. Here, Figures 97 to 103 are flowcharts showing an example of the game state transition processing steps.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Fig. 97, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3601). In the game state transition process, the normal game state flag is set to ON in step S3629 in Fig. 98, step S3650 in Fig. 99, step S3667 in Fig. 100, or step S3701 in Fig. 102 when the game state is transitioned from another game state to the normal game state, while it is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612, or S3616 in Fig. 97 when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to another game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3601: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3602. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3601: No), i.e., if the game is in a game state other than the normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3617 in FIG. 98.

<Step S3602>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the special symbol change stop display flag indicating that the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended) is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is the timing to transition from the normal game state to another game state (type 1 big win game state, small win game state, or first time-saving game state) due to the special symbol being stopped and displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special pattern change stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special pattern game control process of the first embodiment described above in FIG. 26 when the changing special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is displayed as stopped.

If the special chart variation stop display flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if it is time to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3603. On the other hand, if the special chart variation stop display flag is set to off (step S3602: No), i.e., if it is not time to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3603>
If the special pattern variation stop display flag is set on (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is the time to transition from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stopped display of the special pattern is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop (step S3603).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a time-saving symbol stop that does not occur (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3604, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop that does not occur (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3609.

<Steps S3604 to S3608>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (step S3604). Then, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the special symbol game executed in the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 86 (E)) to the time-saving number counter (step S3605), and sets the first time-saving game state flag indicating the first time-saving game state to ON (step S3606). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3607), and sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to OFF (step S3608), and ends the game state transition process.

The first time-saving game state transition command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioning from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 in the external output processing of the main processing in FIG. 88. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a presentation corresponding to the first time-saving game state in the special chart game based on the first time-saving game state transition command.

<Step S3609>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended due to the stop display of the special symbol is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot or not (step S3609). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended due to the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3610, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3613.

<Steps S3610 to S3612>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the type 1 jackpot game state (step S3610).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the normal game state, to ON (step S3611), and sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is normal, to OFF (step S3612), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3613>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special game that ended due to the stop display of the special symbol is not a type 1 big win (step S3609: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the big win lottery is a small win or not (step S3613). If the result of the big win lottery for the special game that ended due to the stop display of the special symbol is a small win (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3614. On the other hand, if the result of the big win lottery is not a small win (step S3613: No), that is, if the result of the big win lottery is a miss other than a time-saving pattern stop miss (a reach miss or a complete miss), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small win (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the normal game state to the small win game state (step S3614).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal small win game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the normal game state, to ON (step S3615), and sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, to OFF (step S3616), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3617>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3601: No), i.e., if the game state is other than the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 98, the MPU 41 determines whether the first time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the first time-shortened game state is set to on, i.e., whether the game state is the first time-shortened game state (step S3617).

The first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3606 of FIG. 97 when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state during the game state transition process.

If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3617: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3618. On the other hand, if the first time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3617: No), i.e., if the game is not in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3631 in FIG. 99.

<Step S3618>
When the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), that is, when the game is in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a special symbol change stop display flag indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) that is displayed in a changing manner has stopped (the special symbol game has ended) is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is the timing to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state (a type 1 big win game state, a small win game state, or a normal game state) due to the special symbol being stopped and displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special pattern change stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special pattern game control process of the first embodiment described above in FIG. 26 when the changing special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is displayed as stopped.

When the special chart variation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), if it is time to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3619. On the other hand, when the special chart variation stop display flag is set to OFF, i.e., it is not time to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3619>
If the special pattern variation stop display flag is set on (step S3618: Yes), and it is the timing to transition from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stopped display of the special pattern is a type 1 jackpot (step S3619).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3620, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3619: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3623.

<Steps S3620 to S3622>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-saving game state to the type 1 jackpot game state (step S3620).Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the first time-saving game state, to ON (step S3621), and sets the first time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the first time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3622), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3623>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a type 1 big win (step S3619: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the big win lottery is a small win or not (step S3623). If the result of the big win lottery for the special game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small win (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3624, and if the result of the big win lottery is not a small win (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3627.

<Steps S3624 to S3626>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small win (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-saving game state to a small win game state (step S3624).Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving small win game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the first time-saving game state, to ON (step S3625), and sets the first time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the first time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3616), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3627>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is not a small win (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the number of remaining time-saving games in the first time-saving game state is 0 (step S3627). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether to transition from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the time-saving number counter for the first time-saving game state.

The time-saving counter for the first time-saving game state is set in step S3605 of FIG. 97 when the game state transition process transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state, and is decremented each time a special game (first special game or second special game) is started in step S3407 of the special game change start process of FIG. 90.

If the value of the time-saving count counter for the first time-saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), i.e., if a special game with a time-saving count equal to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games has been played in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3628. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S3627: No), i.e., if a special game with a time-saving count equal to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games has not been played in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3628 to S3630>
If the value of the time-saving count counter for the first time-saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, if the special game is executed with the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving game count in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3628).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3629), and sets the first time-saving game state flag indicating the first time-saving game state to OFF (step S3630), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3631>
If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3617: No), i.e., if the game is not in the first time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 99, the MPU 41 determines whether the second time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game is in the second time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S3631).

The second time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3673 in FIG. 101 described below when the game state is transitioned from a type 1 jackpot game state to a second time-saving game state in the game state transition process.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3631: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3632. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3652 in FIG. 100.

<Step S3632>
When the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), that is, when the game is in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the special symbol change stop display flag indicating that the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended) is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is the timing to transition from the second time-saving game state to another game state (a type 1 big win game state, a small win game state, a third time-saving game state, or a normal game state) due to the special symbol being stopped and displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special pattern change stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special pattern game control process of the first embodiment described above in FIG. 26 when the changing special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is displayed as stopped.

If the special chart change stop display flag is set to on (step S3602: Yes), i.e., if it is time to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3633. On the other hand, if the special chart change stop display flag is set to off (step S3602: No), i.e., if it is not time to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3633>
If the special pattern change stop display flag is set on (step S3602: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to transition from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stopped display of the special pattern is a type 1 jackpot (step S3633).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3634. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3637.

<Steps S3634 to S3636>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the type 1 jackpot game state (step S3634).Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the second time-saving game state, to ON (step S3635), and sets the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the second time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3636), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3637>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special pattern is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot (step S3637).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a small win (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3638, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small win (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3641.

<Steps S3638 to S3640>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small win (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to a small win game state (step S3638).Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving small win game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the second time-saving game state, to ON (step S3639), and sets the second time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the second time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3640), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3641>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is not a small win (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a third time-saving game state transition flag that transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3641). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not to transition the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the special symbol stopping is a time-saving symbol stop miss, if the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss (see FIG. 87(E)) is greater than 0 (if the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state), the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3412 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 90.

If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3641: Yes), i.e., if the game state is to be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3642. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3641: No), i.e., if the game state is not to be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3648.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set on (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3642), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the third time-shortened game state to the time-shortened number counter (step S3643), and transitions processing to step S3644.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set as a value corresponding to the number of time-saving games selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87(E), the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "10" when 10 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, to "30" when 30 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, to "50" when 50 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, and to "100" when 100 times is selected as the number of time-saving games. In other words, the number of time-saving games when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is updated to the number of time-saving games selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss.

Here, as described above, the third time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state in which the operation time of the electric device 315b is short, since the electric device 315b is operated for a longer period of time in the third time-saving game state compared to the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, and the game ball 99 is more likely to enter the second winning opening 315. Also, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, in a small winning game that is executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning lottery, the game ball 99 cannot enter the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83, whereas in the third time-saving game state, in a small winning game that is executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning lottery, the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83. Therefore, the third time-saving game state is different from the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state in that a type 2 jackpot game can be executed based on the game ball 99 entering the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 during a small jackpot game, and is therefore a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

In this way, the number of time-saving plays when transitioning from the second time-saving play state to the third time-saving play state is updated to the number of time-saving plays selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving play state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, making it possible to effectively utilize the value of the number of time-saving plays determined due to the time-saving symbol stop miss.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state is a miss for the time-shortened symbol stop, if the number of time-shortened games set for the miss is greater than the number of time-shortened games remaining in the second time-shortened game state, a transition to the third time-shortened game state is made, thereby imparting a game characteristic in which the fewer the number of time-shortened games remaining in the second time-shortened game state, the easier it is to transition to the third time-shortened game state. This can increase attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the excitement of the game.

In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, and the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is not changed. However, for example, the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be increased by adding the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss to the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. This increases the number of jackpot lotteries to determine whether or not to transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, and therefore maintains the possibility of transitioning to the third time-saving game state, which is advantageous to the player, for a longer period of time, thereby increasing attention and interest in the game and improving the excitement of the game.

<Steps S3644 and S3645>
In step S3644, the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened game state flag to on, indicating that the game is in the third time-shortened game state, and further sets a third time-shortened game state A transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game is being transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3645), and then transitions processing to step S3646.

The command to transition to the third time-saving game state A is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 in the main processing of FIG. 88. This enables the voice lamp control device 5 to execute a presentation corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

<Steps S3646 and S3647>
In step S3646, the MPU 41 sets the third time-shortened game state transition flag, which transitions to the third time-shortened game state, to off, and further sets the second time-shortened game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the second time-shortened game state, to off (step S3647), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S3648>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3641: No), i.e., if the game state is not to be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state is 0 (step S3627).

The time-saving counter for the second time-saving game state is set in step S3672, S3679 or S3686 in FIG. 101 when the game state transition process transitions from a type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state, and is decremented each time a special game (first special game or second special game) is started in step S3407 in the special game change start process in FIG. 90.

If the value of the time-saving count counter for the second time-saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), i.e., if a special game with the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games has been played in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3649. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), i.e., if a special game with the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games has not been played in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3649 to S3651>
If the value of the time-saving count counter for the second time-saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, if a special game with the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving game count is executed in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3648).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3650), and sets the second time-saving game state flag indicating the second time-saving game state to OFF (step S3651), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3652>
If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3631: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-shortened game state flag, indicating that the game is in the third time-shortened game state, is set to on (step S3652), as shown in FIG. 100.

The third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, step S3719 or S3723 in FIG. 103 when a transition is made from another game state to the third time-saving game state during the game state transition process.

If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3652: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3653. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3652: No), i.e., if the game is not in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3669 in FIG. 89.

<Step S3653>
When the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), that is, when the game is in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the special symbol change stop display flag indicating that the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has stopped (the special symbol game has ended) is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is the timing to transition from the third time-saving game state to another game state (a type 1 big win game state, a small win game state, or a normal game state) due to the special symbol being stopped and displayed (the special symbol game has ended).

The special pattern change stop display flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special pattern game control process of the first embodiment described above in FIG. 26 when the changing special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is displayed as stopped.

If the special chart change stop display flag is set to on (step S3653: Yes), i.e., if it is time to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3654. On the other hand, if the special chart change stop display flag is set to off (step S3653: No), i.e., if it is not time to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3654>
If the special pattern change stop display flag is set on (step S3653: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to transition from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game that ended with the stopped display of the special pattern is a type 1 jackpot (step S3654).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3655. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3658.

<Steps S3655 to S3657>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3655: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to a type 1 jackpot game state (step S3655).Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the third time-saving game state, to ON (step S3656), and sets the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the third time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3657), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3658>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended due to the stop display of the special symbol is not a type 1 jackpot (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small jackpot (step S3658). If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended due to the stop display of the special symbol is a small jackpot (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3659. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small jackpot (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3662.

<Steps S3659 to S3661>
If the result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small win (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to a small win game state (step S3659). Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving small win game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned from the third time-saving game state, to ON (step S3660), and sets the third time-saving game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the third time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3661), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3662>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special pattern is not a small win (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop (step S3662).

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a time-saving symbol stop that does not occur (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3663. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a time-saving symbol stop that does not occur (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3665.

<Step S3663>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended with the stop display of the special symbol is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of resetting the time-saving number counter for the third time-saving game state (step S3663) and moves the process to step S3664. In this resetting process, for example, if the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) (see FIG. 87(E)) selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 resets the value of the time-saving number counter for the third time-saving game state to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number).

In this way, when the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) selected in response to a missed time-saving symbol stop (see FIG. 87(E)) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the value of the time-saving number counter is reset to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number), which increases the number of jackpot draws (number of special symbol games) executed in the third time-saving game state, making it possible to enjoy a greater benefit from the third time-saving game state, i.e., the benefit of being able to execute a type 2 jackpot game based on the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 833 of the feather device 83 in a small jackpot game.

The processing for the time-saving number counter when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss may be reset regardless of the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss (see FIG. 87(E)) may be changed to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Of course, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) (see FIG. 87(E)) selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss may be maintained without resetting the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state.

<Step S3664>
In step S3664, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving counter reset command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the time-saving counter reset process has been executed (step S3664), and ends the game state transition process. The time-saving counter reset command includes information on the number of time-saving games after the change in the value of the time-saving counter, in addition to the fact that the time-saving counter reset process has been executed. The time-saving counter reset command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 76, and the voice lamp control device 5 resets the value of the time-saving counter when it receives the time-saving counter reset command.

<Step S3665>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game that ended with the stopped display of the special pattern is not a time-saving pattern stop (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the time-saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is 0 (step S3665).

The time-saving count counter for the third time-saving game state is set in step S3643 in FIG. 99, step S3693 in FIG. 101, or step S3724 in FIG. 103 when the game state transition process transitions from the second time-saving game state, the first type jackpot game state, or the second type jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, and is decremented each time a special game (first special game or second special game) is started in step S3407 in the special game change start process in FIG. 90.

If the value of the time-saving count counter for the third time-saving game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), i.e., if a special game with a time-saving count equal to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving game has been played in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3666. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), i.e., if a special game with a time-saving count equal to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving game has not been played in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3666 to S3668>
If the value of the time-saving counter for the third time-saving game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, if a special game is played with the upper limit (prescribed number) of the time-saving game count in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the third time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3666).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3667), and sets the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state to OFF (step S3668), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3669>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3652: No), i.e., if the game is not in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3669), as shown in FIG. 101.

The normal type 1 big win gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the type 1 big win gaming state has been entered from the normal gaming state, and when the gaming state is entered from the normal gaming state to the type 1 big win gaming state, it is set to ON in step S3611 of FIG. 97 of the gaming state entry process.

If the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3670. On the other hand, if the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3669: No), i.e., if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3676.

<Step S3670>
When the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), that is, when the type 1 jackpot game state is entered from the normal game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3670). Whether the type 1 jackpot game has ended is judged based on the jackpot game end flag that is set to ON when the jackpot game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process of FIG. 29 in the first embodiment described above).

If the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3671, and if the type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3670: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3671 and S3672>
When the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state (step S3671), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the second time-saving game state to the time-saving number counter (step S3672), and transitions processing to step S3673.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot. Specifically, when transitioning from a first-type jackpot game state, which is transitioned to based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state, to a second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "100" (see Figures 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3673 to S3675>
In step S3673, the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the second time-shortened game state to ON, and further sets a second time-shortened game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state (step S3674). This second time-shortened game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) in the second time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) based on the second time-shortened game state transition command, and can execute a performance corresponding to the second time-shortened game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned to from the normal game state, to OFF (step S3675), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3676>
If the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3669: No), i.e., if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from a normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3676).

The first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3621 of FIG. 98 of the gaming state transition process when the gaming state transitions from the first time-saving gaming state to a type 1 jackpot gaming state.

If the first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3676: Yes), i.e., if the gaming state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3677. On the other hand, if the first time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3676: No), i.e., if the gaming state is not a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3683.

<Step S3677>
When the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), that is, when the game state is a type 1 jackpot game state transferred from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3677). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is judged based on the jackpot game end flag that is set to ON when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3678, and if the type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3677: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3678 and S3679>
When the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state (step S3678), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the second time-saving game state to the time-saving number counter (step S3679), and transitions processing to step S3680.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving play state is a jackpot. Specifically, when transitioning from a type 1 jackpot play state, which is transitioned to based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving play state, to a second time-saving play state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "100" (see Figures 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3680 to S3682>
In step S3680, the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the second time-shortened game state to ON, and further sets a second time-shortened game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state (step S3681). This second time-shortened game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) in the second time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second time-shortened game state transition command, it can grasp the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) and can execute a performance corresponding to the second time-shortened game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag, which indicates that the game state has been transitioned to from the first time-saving game state, to OFF (step S3682), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3683>
If the first time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3676: No), that is, if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3683).

The second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the second time-saving gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3636 in FIG. 99 when the gaming state transitions from the second time-saving gaming state to a type 1 jackpot gaming state.

If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3683: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3684. On the other hand, if the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3683: No), i.e., if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3690.

<Step S3684>
When the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3684). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is judged based on the jackpot game end flag that is set to ON when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3685, and if the type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3684: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3685 and S3686>
When the first type jackpot game has ended (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the first type jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state (step S3685), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the second time-saving game state to the time-saving number counter (step S3686), and transitions processing to step S3687.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving play state is a jackpot. Specifically, when transitioning from a type 1 jackpot play state, which is transitioned to based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving play state, to the second time-saving play state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "100" (see Figures 86 (B) and 87 (G)).

<Steps S3687 to S3689>
In step S3687, the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game state is the second time-shortened game state to ON, and further sets a second time-shortened game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state (step S3688). This second time-shortened game state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) in the second time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) based on the second time-shortened game state transition command, and can execute a performance corresponding to the second time-shortened game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag, which indicates that the game has entered a type 1 jackpot gaming state from the second time-saving gaming state, to OFF (step S3689), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3690>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3683: No), that is, if the game is not in a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3690).

The third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the third time-saving gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3656 of FIG. 88 when the gaming state transitions from the third time-saving gaming state to a type 1 jackpot gaming state.

If the third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to on (step S3690: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3691. On the other hand, if the second time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag is set to off (step S3690: No), and the game is not in a type 1 jackpot gaming state transitioned from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3697 in FIG. 102.

<Step S3691>
When the third time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3691: Yes), that is, when the type 1 jackpot game state is entered from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3691). Whether the type 1 jackpot game has ended is judged based on the jackpot game end flag that is set to ON when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3692, and if the type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3691: No), i.e., if the game has not entered the type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3692 and S3693>
When the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the type 1 jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3692), sets the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special chart game executed in the third time-saving game state to the time-saving number counter (step S3693), and transitions processing to step S3694.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving play selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving play state is a jackpot. Specifically, when transitioning from a type 1 jackpot play state, which is transitioned to based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving play state, to the third time-saving play state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "50" (see FIG. 87 (F)).

<Steps S3694 to S3696>
In step S3694, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state flag indicating that the game state is the third time-saving game state to ON, and further sets a third time-saving game state B transition command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is transitioned from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3695). This third time-saving game state B transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioned from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) in the third time-saving game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) based on the third time-saving game state B transition command, and can execute a performance corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving type 1 jackpot gaming state flag, which indicates that the game has been transitioned to a type 1 jackpot gaming state from the third time-saving gaming state, to OFF (step S3696), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3697>
If the second time-saving type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3690: No), and if the game state is not a type 1 jackpot game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 102, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal small jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3697).

The normal small win game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state has been transitioned from the normal game state to the small win game state, and is set to ON in step S3615 of FIG. 97 during the game state transition process when the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the small win game state.

If the normal small win game state flag is set to on (step S3697: Yes), i.e., if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3698. On the other hand, if the normal small win game state flag is set to off (step S3697: No), i.e., if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702.

<Step S3698>
When the normal small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3697: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small win game state transferred from the normal game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the small win game has ended (step S3698). Whether the small win game has ended is judged based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing part 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3536 in the small win game control process of FIG.

If the small win game has ended (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3699, and if the small win game has not ended (step S3698: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3699 to S3701>
When the small win game is over (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal small win game state flag to OFF (step S3699), and transitions the game state from the small win game state to the normal game state (step S3700).Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S3701), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3702>
If the normal small win game state flag is set to off (step S3697: No), that is, if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the first time-reduced small win game state flag is set to on (step S3702).

The first time-saving small win game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a small win game state to which it has been transitioned from the first time-saving game state, and is set to ON in step S3625 of FIG. 98 during the game state transition process when the game state is transitioned from the first time-saving game state to a small win game state.

If the first time-saving small win game state flag is set to on (step S3702: Yes), i.e., if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3703. On the other hand, if the first time-saving small win game state flag is set to off (step S3702: No), i.e., if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3707.

<Step S3703>
When the first time-saving small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the small win game has ended (step S3703). Whether the small win game has ended is judged based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing part 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3036 in the small win game control process of FIG.

If the small win game has ended (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3704, and if the small win game has not ended (step S3703: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3704 to S3706>
When the small win game is over (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first time-shortened small win game state flag to OFF (step S3704), and transitions the game state from the small win game state to the first time-shortened game state (step S3705).Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time-shortened game state flag indicating the first time-shortened game state to ON (step S3706), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3707>
If the first time-shortened small win game state flag is set to off (step S3702: No), that is, if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the second time-shortened small win game state flag is set to on (step S3707).

The second time-saving small win game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a small win game state to which it has been transitioned from the second time-saving game state, and is set to ON in step S3639 of FIG. 99 during the game state transition process when the game state is transitioned from the second time-saving game state to a small win game state.

If the second time-shortened small win game state flag is set to on (step S3707: Yes), i.e., if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3708. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened small win game state flag is set to off (step S3707: No), i.e., if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3712 in FIG. 103.

<Step S3708>
When the second time-saving small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3707: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small win game state transferred from the second time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the small win game has ended (step S3708). Whether the small win game has ended is judged based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing part 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3036 in the small win game control process of FIG.

If the small win game has ended (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3709, and if the small win game has not ended (step S3708: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3709 to S3711>
When the small win game is over (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened small win game state flag to OFF (step S3709), and transitions the game state from the small win game state to the second time-shortened game state (step S3710).Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time-shortened game state flag indicating the second time-shortened game state to ON (step S3711), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3712>
If the second time-shortened small win game state flag is set to off (step S3707: No), that is, if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the second time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 103, the MPU 41 determines whether the third time-shortened small win game state flag is set to on (step S3712).

The third time-saving small win game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a small win game state to which it has been transitioned from the third time-saving game state, and is set to ON in step S3660 of FIG. 100 during the game state transition process when the game state is transitioned from the third time-saving game state to a small win game state.

If the third time-saving small win game state flag is set to on (step S3712: Yes), i.e., if the game state is a small win game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3713. On the other hand, if the third time-saving small win game state flag is set to off (step S3712: No), i.e., if the game state is not a small win game state transitioned from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3720.

<Step S3713>
When the third time-saving small win game state flag is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), that is, when the game state is the small win game state transferred from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the small win game has ended (step S3713). Whether the small win game has ended is judged based on the small win game end flag that is set to ON when the movable wing part 832 of the wing device 83 is returned in step S3036 in the small win game control process of FIG.

If the small win game has ended (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3714, and if the small win game has not ended (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
When the small win game is over (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving small win game state flag to OFF (step S3714). Then, the MPU 41 judges whether the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather role device 83 (step S3715). Whether the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather role device 83 is judged based on the V winning flag that is set to ON when the ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 833 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main process of FIG. 88.

If the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3716. If the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning hole 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3718.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
When the game ball 99 enters the V winning port 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from a small win game state to a type 2 jackpot game state (step S3716), sets the type 2 jackpot game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is a type 2 jackpot game state (step S3717), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3718 and S3719>
If the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning port 833 of the feather device 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the small win game state to the third time-shortened game state (step S3718), sets the third time-shortened game state flag to on, indicating that the game state is the third time-shortened game state (step S3719), and terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3720>
When the third time-saving small win gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3712: No), that is, when the gaming state is not a small win gaming state transferred from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the type 2 jackpot gaming state flag indicating a type 2 jackpot gaming state is set to ON (step S3720). The type 2 jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3717 when the gaming state is transferred from the third time-saving gaming state to the type 2 jackpot gaming state.

If the type 2 jackpot game state flag is set to on (step S3720: Yes), i.e., if the game is in a type 2 jackpot game state, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3721. On the other hand, if the type 2 jackpot game state flag is set to off (step S3720: No), i.e., if the game is not in a type 2 jackpot game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Step S3721>
When the type 2 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3720: Yes), that is, when the type 2 jackpot game state is in, the MPU 41 judges whether the type 2 jackpot game has ended (step S3721). Whether the type 2 jackpot game has ended is judged based on the jackpot game end flag that is set to ON when the process of ending the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88 (see step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

If the type 2 jackpot game has ended (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3722, and if the type 2 jackpot game has not ended (step S3721: No), the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S3722 to S3724>
When the second type jackpot game is over (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the second type jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3722), and sets the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state to ON (step S3723).Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving count counter (step S3724), and transitions the process to step S3725.

Here, the value of the time-saving count counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving games selected when a jackpot game is executed in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when transitioning from a type 2 jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 sets the value of the time-saving count counter to "50" (see FIG. 87 (F)).

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
In step S3725, the MPU 41 sets a third time-saving game state B transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state will be transitioned from a jackpot game state to a third time-saving game state, and further sets the type 2 jackpot game state flag to off, indicating that the game state is a type 2 jackpot game state (step S3726), and terminates the game state transition process.

The third time-shortened game state B transition command includes information indicating that the game state is transitioning from a jackpot game state to a third time-shortened game state, as well as information regarding the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) in the third time-shortened game state, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 88. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to grasp the number of time-shortened games (prescribed number of times) based on the third time-shortened game state B transition command, and to execute a presentation corresponding to the third time-shortened game state.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 104 to 113, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, among the processing of the voice lamp control device 5, a part of the command determination processing is different from the first embodiment described above.

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed, but this differs from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above in that a process for setting and managing the number of time-saving games in various time-saving game states is executed. Here, Fig. 104 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub timer interrupt process in the first embodiment described above shown in Fig. 42.

<Step S3801>
104, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, and if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3801: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3802>
When a command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a first time-saving game state transition command (step S3802). The first time-saving game state transition command is a command indicating that the game state transitions from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state being a time-saving symbol stop miss. This first time-saving game state transition command is set in the game state transition process in step S3607 of FIG. 97 when the game state transition is from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state.

If the received command is the first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3803; if the received command is not the first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
If the received command is the first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a first time-shortened game state flag indicating the first time-shortened game state to ON (step S3803).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game number counter based on information regarding the number of time-shortened games included in the first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3804), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3805>
If the received command is not the first time-shortened game state transition command (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805). The second time-shortened game state transition command is a command indicating that the game state transitions from a first-type jackpot game state to a second time-shortened game state. This second time-shortened game state transition command is set when the game state transitions from a first-type jackpot game state to a second time-shortened game state in step S3674, S3681, or S3688 of FIG. 101 in the game state transition process.

If the received command is a second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3806. If the received command is not a second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3808.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
If the received command is the second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a second time-shortened game state flag indicating the second time-shortened game state to ON (step S3806).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game number counter based on information regarding the number of time-shortened games included in the second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3807), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3808>
If the received command is not the second time-shortened game state transition command (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the third time-shortened game state A transition command (step S3808). The third time-shortened game state A transition command is a command indicating that the game state transitions from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state. This third time-shortened game state A transition command is set when the game state transitions from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state in step S3645 of FIG. 99 in the game state transition process.

If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-shortened play state A (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3809; if the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-shortened play state A (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3812.

<Steps S3809 to S3811>
If the received command is the third time-shortened game state A transition command (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a third time-shortened game state flag indicating the third time-shortened game state to ON (step S3809).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game number counter based on information regarding the number of time-shortened games included in the third time-shortened game state A transition command (step S3810).

The MPU 51 then sets the third time-shortened game state transition flag, which indicates that the game state will be transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, to ON (step S3811), and ends the command determination process. The third time-shortened game state transition flag is referenced in step S3904 of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in FIG. 105, described below, to determine whether or not to set a third time-shortened game state transition presentation (see FIG. 106 (B) and FIG. 110 (D)) that clearly indicates a transition to the third time-shortened game state.

<Step S3812>
If the received command is not the third time-shortened game state A transition command (step S3808: No), it is determined whether the received command is the third time-shortened game state B transition command (step S3812). The third time-shortened game state B transition command is a command indicating that the game state transitions from the jackpot game state to the third time-shortened game state. This third time-shortened game state B transition command is set in step S3695 of FIG. 101 in the game state transition process when the game state transitions from the jackpot game state to the third time-shortened game state.

If the received command is a command to transition to the third time-shortened play state B (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3813; if the received command is not a command to transition to the third time-shortened play state B (step S3812: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
If the received command is the third time-shortened game state B transition command (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a third time-shortened game state flag indicating the third time-shortened game state to ON (step S3813).Then, the MPU 51 sets a time-shortened game number counter based on information on the number of time-shortened games included in the third time-shortened game state B transition command (step S3814), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3815>
If the received command is not the third time-saving game state B transition command (step S3812: No), it is determined whether the received command is a time-saving number counter reset command (step S3815). The time-saving number counter reset command is a command that notifies that a decision has been made as to whether or not to reset the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, and includes information on the number of time-saving games after the change when the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is reset. This time-saving number counter reset command is set when the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is reset in step S3664 of FIG. 100 in the game state transition process.

If the received command is a time-saving counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3816. If the received command is not a time-saving counter reset command (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3817.

<Step S3816>
If the received command is a time-saving counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of resetting the time-saving counter (step S3816). In this process of resetting the time-saving counter, if the time-saving counter reset command contains information about the number of time-saving games after the change, the value of the time-saving game counter is changed, and if the time-saving counter reset command does not contain information about the number of time-saving games after the change, the value of the time-saving game counter is not changed.

<Step S3817>
If the received command is not a time-saving counter reset command (step S3815: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a special pattern change command (step S3817). The special pattern change command is a command that notifies the lottery result in the big win lottery for the special pattern game and the special pattern change pattern (change display time). This special pattern change pattern command is set when setting the change display time of the special pattern (special pattern change pattern) in step S3414 of FIG. 90 in the special pattern change start process.

If the received command is a special chart variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3818; if the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S3817: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S3823.

<Steps S3818 to S3820>
If the received command is a special symbol variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a performance type setting process (step S3818) and a stop symbol combination setting process (step S3819), and transitions to step S3820.

Details of the procedure for the effect type setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 105 to 110, but in this effect type setting process, the effects to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc. are set according to the game state, etc. In addition, details of the procedure for the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 111 and 112, but in this stop symbol combination setting process, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is set based on the result of a jackpot lottery, etc.

<Steps S3820 and S3821>
In step S3820, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time of the decorative pattern based on the special pattern variable pattern (variable display time) included in the special pattern variable pattern command (step S3820). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a display variable pattern command for specifying the variation type (presentation pattern) set in step S3818 and the content of the stop pattern combination of the decorative pattern in the pattern display unit 341 set in step S3819 (step S3821), and proceeds to step S3822.

The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (presentation pattern) set in step S3818 and the stopping pattern combination of the decorative patterns in the pattern display unit 341 set in step S3819. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the performance images and the decorative pattern variation images corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the performance display in the pattern display unit 341 according to the stopping pattern combination of the decorative patterns and the variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S3822>
In step S3822, the MPU 51 executes a time-saving count counter process and ends the command determination process. The details of the procedure of the time-saving count counter process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. In this time-saving count counter process, a time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is managed.

<Step S3823>
If the received command is not a special chart variation pattern command (step S3817: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands, including the processing of steps S3107 to S3134 in the command determination processing shown in Figures 47 and 48 in the first embodiment described above (step S3823), and terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
In the command determination process of Fig. 104, when a special pattern change pattern is received, the change type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S3818 sets the presentation to be executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc. according to the game state, etc. Here, Fig. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the change type (presentation pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 105, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not the first time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the first time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S3901). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the game is in the first time-shortened game state. Note that the first time-shortened game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the first time-shortened game state transition command is received in the command judgment process of Fig. 104.

When the first time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S3901: Yes), i.e., when the game is in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the first time-saving game state presentation that is preset for the first time-saving game state based on the information included in the special chart variation pattern command (variation display time, result of the jackpot lottery) (step S3902), and ends the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. On the other hand, when the first time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3901: No), i.e., when the game is not in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 transitions to step S3903.

<Step S3903>
When the first time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second time-shortened game state flag indicating the second time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S3903). The second time-shortened game state flag, that is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the second time-shortened game state is set to ON in step S3806 when the second time-shortened game state transition command is received in the command judgment process of FIG. 104.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3904. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3907.

<Step S3904>
When the second time-shortened game state flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), that is, when the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the third time-shortened game state transition flag indicating that the game state is transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state is set to ON based on the result of the big win lottery being a time-shortened pattern stop failure that satisfies a predetermined condition (step S3904). Note that the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3811 when the third time-shortened game state A transition command indicating that the game state is transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state is received in the command judgment process of FIG. 104.

If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to on (step S3904: Yes), i.e., if the game state is transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S3906. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3904: No), i.e., if the game state is not transitioning from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (if the second time-shortened game state continues), the process proceeds to step S3905.

<Steps S3905 and S3906>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to off (step S3904: No), that is, if the game state does not transition from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state (if the second time-shortened game state continues), the MPU 51 sets, as the second time-shortened game state presentation, a second time-shortened game state continuation presentation that indicates that the second time-shortened game state will continue (step S3905), and terminates the presentation type setting process.

On the other hand, if the third time-shortened play state transition flag is set to on (step S3904: Yes), i.e., if the play state is transitioning from the second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state, the MPU 51 sets, as the second time-shortened play state presentation, a third time-shortened play state transition presentation that clearly indicates that the play state is transitioning from the second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state (step S3906), and ends the presentation type setting process.

Here, FIG. 106(A) is a diagram showing an example of a second time-shortened play state continuation presentation pattern, which is a second time-shortened play state presentation, and FIG. 106(B) is a diagram showing an example of a third time-shortened play state transition presentation pattern, which is a second time-shortened play state presentation.

As shown in Figures 106 (A) and 106 (B), the second time-shortened play state presentation (the second time-shortened play state continuation presentation and the third time-shortened play state transition presentation) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. Of course, the second time-shortened play state presentation (the second time-shortened play state continuation presentation and the third time-shortened play state transition presentation) does not have to be a battle presentation, and may be, for example, a mission presentation (for example, a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the result of a jackpot lottery depending on whether the mission given to the character is successful or not).

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the screen of the symbol display section 341 to explain the second time-saving game state presentation. Specifically, FIG. 107(A) is a diagram showing an example of the screen at the start of a battle, FIG. 107(B) is an enlarged view of the HP display section 75 on the screen at the start of a battle, and FIG. 107(C) to FIG. 107(E) are diagrams showing example images of the gauge display section 75.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), the screen of the pattern display unit 341 at the start of a battle includes a text image of "Battle Begins," indicating that a battle is about to begin, and an HP image showing hit points (HP) that represent the damage that an enemy character can withstand. The HP of an enemy character ranges from 0 to 100, and an HP of 0 for an enemy character means that the enemy character will be defeated, i.e., the friendly character will win. In addition, the screen of the pattern display unit 341 at the start of a battle includes a text image of "Enter RUSH when enemy HP reaches 0," indicating that when the enemy character's HP reaches 0, the game will enter a third time-saving game state (RUSH) from which a transition to a type 2 jackpot game state can occur via a small jackpot game.

The HP image is then displayed in an HP display section 75 located in the upper right corner of the design display section 341. An HP gauge 76 indicating the HP of the enemy character and an HP counter 77 are displayed in the HP display section 75.

As shown in FIG. 107(B), the HP gauge 76 indicates the HP of the enemy character as a gauge, and includes a large gauge 761 and a small gauge 762. The large gauge 761 has 10 HP per gauge. The small gauge 762 has 1 HP per gauge. In the example shown in FIG. 107(B), the large gauge 761 is 9 gauges and the small gauge 762 is 9 gauges, which means that the HP of the enemy character is 99. In the example shown in FIG. 107(C), the large gauge 761 is 3 gauges and the small gauge 762 is 1 gauge, so the HP of the enemy character is 31, and in the example shown in FIG. 107(D), the large gauge 761 is 1 gauge and the small gauge 762 is 0 gauge, so the HP of the enemy character is 1. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 107(E), both the large gauge 761 and the small gauge 762 are at 0, which indicates that the enemy character's HP is 0 and that the friendly character has defeated the enemy character, i.e., the game state is transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

On the other hand, the HP counter 77 indicates the HP of the enemy character as a number. In the example shown in FIG. 107(B), the HP counter 77 shows the number "99", meaning that the enemy character's HP is 99. In the example shown in FIG. 107(C), the HP counter 77 shows the number "31", meaning that the enemy character's HP is 31, and in the example shown in FIG. 107(D), the HP counter 77 shows the number "1", meaning that the enemy character's HP is 1. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 107(E), the HP counter 77 shows the number "0", meaning that the enemy character's HP is 0 and the ally character has defeated the enemy character, i.e., the game state is shifting from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the HP value of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum number of remaining time-shortened play times, including the fluctuation, in the second time-shortened play state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 107(A), this means that the maximum number of remaining time-shortened play times, including the special game, in the second time-shortened play state is 99. In this way, the HP value of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum number of remaining time-shortened play times, including the fluctuation, in the second time-shortened play state, and the player can grasp the maximum number of remaining time-shortened play times, including the fluctuation, in the second time-shortened play state from the HP of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 106(A), the second time-shortened play state continuation presentation is a presentation indicating that the second time-shortened play state will continue. In the example shown in FIG. 106(A), eight presentation patterns, patterns A1 to A8, are set as the second time-shortened play state continuation presentation patterns. Since each of patterns A1 to A8 is a presentation in which the second time-shortened play state continuation presentation indicates that the second time-shortened play state will continue, the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character will be a draw (tied) rather than a victory for the ally character. Furthermore, the enemy character's HP after the battle will not become 0, but will ultimately maintain the value it had at the start of the battle.

In addition, in patterns A1 to A4, the friendly character launches a preemptive attack in the battle (see FIG. 96 (A)). In patterns A1 and A2, the enemy character defends against the friendly character's attack (see FIG. 108 (A)). At this time, the enemy character's HP does not change. On the other hand, in patterns A3 and A4, the friendly character's attack hits the enemy character (see FIG. 108 (C)). At this time, the enemy character's HP is either halved (pattern A3) or remains at 1 (pattern A4).

In addition, in patterns A5 to A8, the enemy character launches a preemptive attack in the battle (see FIG. 109 (A)). In patterns A5 and A6, the ally character defends against the enemy character's attack (see FIG. 109 (B)). On the other hand, in patterns A7 and A9, the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see FIG. 109 (C)). In patterns A5 to A8, the enemy character launches a preemptive attack, so the enemy character's HP does not change.

In patterns A2 to A8, except for pattern A1, a button effect is executed. For example, the button effect may be a long press effect (see FIG. 110(A)) that prompts the player to perform a long press on the operation button 20 and reduces the HP of the enemy character based on the long press on the operation button 20 by the player, or a continuous hit effect (see FIG. 110(B)) that prompts the player to perform a continuous press on the operation button 20 and reduces the HP of the enemy character based on the continuous press on the operation button 20 by the player. Of course, the button effect may be a single press effect (one-hit effect) that prompts the player to perform a single press on the operation button 20 (one-hit operation) and displays a draw as the result of the battle with the enemy character based on the single press on the operation button 20 by the player.

In pattern A1, no button effects are performed, and the enemy character's HP remains the same as when the battle began, along with an image indicating that the final result of the battle is a draw (see Figure 110 (C)).

On the other hand, the third time-shortened play state transition effect shown in FIG. 106(B) is an effect indicating that the play state will transition from the second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state. In the example shown in FIG. 106(B), eight effect patterns, patterns B1 to B8, are set as the third time-shortened play state transition effect patterns. Since each of patterns B1 to B8 is an effect indicating that the third time-shortened play state transition effect can transition from the second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state, the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is a victory for the ally character, and the HP of the enemy character after the battle ends will ultimately be 0 (see FIG. 110(D)).

Patterns B1 to B8 correspond to patterns A1 to A8, but differ from patterns A1 to A8 in that the final result of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is a victory for the ally character, and the enemy character's HP at the end of the battle ultimately becomes 0.

When the special play is the last special play in the second time-saving play state, the final screen in patterns A1 to A8 (or patterns B1 to B8) will display an image of an ally character being defeated by an enemy character along with an image indicating that the second time-saving play state is ending (see FIG. 110 (E)).

<Step S3907>
Returning to the explanation of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in FIG. 105, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No), that is, if the game is not in the second time-saving game state, it is determined whether or not the third time-saving game state flag indicating the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3907). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in the third time-saving game state. Note that the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3809 when a command to transition to the third time-saving game state A is received in the command determination process in FIG. 104.

If the third time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S3907: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3908. On the other hand, if the third time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), i.e., if the game is in the normal game state rather than the third time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
If the third time-shortened play state flag is set on (step S3907: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-shortened play state, the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened play state presentation that is pre-set for the third time-shortened play state based on the information contained in the special chart change pattern command (special chart change pattern (special chart change display time), result of the jackpot lottery) (step S3908), and terminates the presentation type setting process.

<Step S3909>
If the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), i.e., if the game is in the normal game state and not the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the normal game state presentation (see FIG. 50) that is pre-set for the normal game state based on the information contained in the special chart change pattern command (special chart change pattern (special chart change display time), result of the jackpot lottery) (step S3909), and terminates the presentation type setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 when a special symbol variation pattern is received in the command determination process of Fig. 104, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is set based on the result of a big win lottery, etc. Here, Fig. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 111, the MPU 51 first judges whether the lottery result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4001). Whether the lottery result of the big win lottery for the special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss is judged based on the result of the win/loss judgment included in the special symbol variation pattern command, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4003 and sets the time-saving symbol set for the time-saving symbol stop miss as the stop symbol combination (see FIG. 112). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination other than the time-saving symbol based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4002), and ends the stop symbol combination setting process.

Here, FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the relationship between the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to a missed time-saving pattern stop, and the stopping pattern combination (time-saving pattern) in response to a missed time-saving pattern stop. As shown in FIG. 112, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games is set to 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, and 100 (see FIG. 86 (E) and FIG. 87 (E)). The stop pattern combinations (time-saving patterns) for missed time-saving pattern stops are: 5 times, which is the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times the time-saving play can be played, corresponds to "443" and "445", 10 times corresponds to "665" and "667", 20 times corresponds to "998" and "991", 30 times corresponds to "554" and "556", 50 times corresponds to "332" and "334", and 100 times corresponds to "775" and "778".

The stopping pattern combination (time-saving pattern) for a missed time-saving pattern stop is one in which the left and center patterns have the same number, and the right pattern is one pattern shifted from the left and center patterns, making it a characteristic combination with a certain regularity. In this way, the time-saving pattern is a characteristic combination, so that the player can easily know that the time-saving pattern has stopped and been displayed. Also, when the time-saving pattern stops and is displayed, a specific special sound unique to the time-saving pattern may be output. This also makes it possible for the player to easily know that the time-saving pattern has stopped and been displayed.

Of course, the time-saving symbols are not limited to the example in FIG. 112, and may be other characteristic combinations, or do not necessarily have to be characteristic combinations. Also, it is not necessary for two combinations of time-saving symbols to correspond to one upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving play; one combination may be sufficient, or three or more combinations may be sufficient, and it is not necessary for the same number of time-saving symbols to correspond to all upper limits (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving play.

<Steps S4003 and S4004>
Returning to the explanation of the stop symbol combination setting process in Fig. 111, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 5 times or not (step S4003). Whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game number set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 5 times or not is judged based on, for example, the special symbol change pattern (special symbol change display time) included in the special symbol change pattern command and the result of the jackpot lottery.

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving play count set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is 5 times (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "443" or "445" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 5 times of time-saving play count, as the stop pattern combination (step S4004), and ends the stop pattern combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving play count set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not 5 times (step S4003: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4005.

<Steps S4005 and S4006>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the time-saving pattern stopping miss is not 5 times (step S4003: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the time-saving pattern stopping miss is 10 times (step S4005).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 10 times (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "665" or "667" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 10 times of time-saving games, as the stopping symbol combination (step S4006), and ends the stopping symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 10 times (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4007.

<Steps S4007 and S3508>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the missed stop of the time-saving pattern is not 10 times (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the missed stop of the time-saving pattern is 20 times (step S4007).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 20 times (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "998" or "991" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 20 times of time-saving games, as the stopping symbol combination (step S4008), and ends the stopping symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 20 times (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4009.

<Steps S4009 and S4010>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the miss of the time-saving pattern stop is not 20 times (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the miss of the time-saving pattern stop is 30 times (step S4009).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is 30 times (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "554" or "556" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 30 times of time-saving games, as the stopping symbol combination (step S4010), and ends the stopping symbol combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is not 30 times (step S4009: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4011.

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the miss of the time-saving pattern stop is not 30 times (step S4009: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set in response to the miss of the time-saving pattern stop is 50 times (step S4011).

If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is 50 times (step S4011: Yes), the MPU 51 sets "332" or "334" (see FIG. 112), which corresponds to 50 times of time-saving games, as the stopping pattern combination (step S4012), and ends the stopping pattern combination setting process. On the other hand, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not 50 times (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4013.

<Step S4013>
If the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the missed time-saving pattern stop is not 50 times (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games is 100 times, and therefore sets "775" or "778" (see Figure 112), which corresponds to 100 times of time-saving games, as the stopping pattern combination (step S4013), and terminates the stopping pattern combination setting process.

[Time-saving counter processing]
In the time-saving counter process executed in step S3822 when a special pattern variation pattern is received in the command determination process of Fig. 104, a process for managing the time-saving counter is executed. Here, Fig. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the time-saving counter process.

<Step S4101>
In the time-saving count counter process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 113, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not a first time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in the first time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4101). The first time-saving game state flag, that is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the game is in the first time-saving game state. The first time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the first time-saving game state transition command is received in the command judgment process of Fig. 104.

If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4101: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4102. On the other hand, if the first time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4101: No), i.e., if the game is not in the first time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4105.

<Steps S4102 to S4104>
When the first time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, when the game is in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the number of times of remaining special game in the time-saving game state (step S4102), and judges whether the value of the time-saving number counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S4103). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not this is the last special game in the first time-saving game state.

If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4103: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special game in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the first time-saving game state flag to off (step S4104) and ends the time-saving count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4103: No), i.e., if this is not the last special game in the first time-saving game state, the MPU 51 ends the time-saving count counter processing.

<Step S4105>
If the first time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, if the game is not in the first time-shortened game state, it is determined whether or not the second time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the second time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S4105). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in the second time-shortened game state. The second time-shortened game state flag is set to ON in step S3806 when the game receives a second time-shortened game state transition command in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4105: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4106. On the other hand, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4105: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4109.

<Steps S4106 to S4108>
When the second time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), that is, when the game is in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the number of remaining special game plays in the time-saving game state (step S4106), and judges whether the value of the time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4107). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the game is the last special game play in the second time-saving game state.

If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4107: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special game in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the second time-saving game state flag to off (step S4108) and ends the time-saving count counter processing. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4107: No), i.e., if this is not the last special game in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 ends the time-saving count counter processing.

<Step S4109>
If the second time-shortened game state flag is set to OFF (step S4105: No), that is, if the game is not in the second time-shortened game state, it is determined whether or not the third time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the third time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S4109). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in the third time-shortened game state. The third time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3811 when the MPU 51 receives a third time-shortened game state A transition command indicating that the game state is transitioned from the second time-shortened game state to the third time-shortened game state in the command determination process of FIG. 104.

If the third time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4109: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4110. On the other hand, if the third time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4109: No), i.e., if the game is not in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 ends the time-saving count counter process.

<Steps S4110 to S4112>
When the third time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4109: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the number of remaining special game plays in the time-saving game state (step S4110), and judges whether the value of the time-saving number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the last special game in the third time-saving game state.

If the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), i.e., if this is the last special game in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving game state flag to off (step S4112) and ends the time-saving count counter process. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), i.e., if this is not the last special game in the third time-saving game state, the MPU 51 ends the time-saving count counter process.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be played via a small jackpot game, the condition for transition to the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state, which is transitioned to when the condition for time-saving game is established after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is the condition, and further, the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is that the time-saving pattern stop miss is more than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, as the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games. In other words, in this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which a type 2 jackpot game can be played, are stricter than those of conventional type 1/type 2 mixed machines, and further, a new game property is provided that utilizes the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss as a transition condition to the third open time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state. As a result, in this embodiment, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the time-saving symbol will be displayed in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state to which the player is transferred after the end of the first type jackpot game and the conditions for the time-saving game are met, and when the time-saving symbol is displayed in the second time-saving game state, the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to whether the game will be transferred to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which a second type jackpot game can be played. This increases the attention and interest in the game, and improves the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high-profit condition for transitioning from the second time-shortened game state (short-opening time-shortened game state) as a low-profit state to the third time-shortened game state (long-opening time-shortened game state) as a high-profit state is a state in which the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state as a low-profit state is a miss of the time-shortened pattern stop that is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state, as the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened game plays. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is a time-saving pattern stop miss that is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games, when transitioning from the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state to the third time-saving game state as a high-profit state, the gameplay is given such that the fewer the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state (the more the number of special game plays in the second time-saving game state is), the more likely it is to transition to the third time-saving game state as a high-profit state. As a result, as the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state decreases (the more the number of special game plays in the second time-saving game is increased), the expectation that the time-saving pattern will be stopped and the attention on whether or not it will be transitioned to the third time-saving game state as a high-profit state is further increased, so that the attention and interest in the game can be further increased, and the player's motivation to play can be further improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state to which the conditions for time-saving games are established after the end of the jackpot game based on the first special chart type 1 jackpot is set to the number of times that can be played (number of times that the player's balls do not decrease) with the game balls (expected ball output value) that the player can acquire by the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game. This allows the player to play the prescribed number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state without significantly reducing the number of balls he or she has, and prevents the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state from being significantly disadvantaged, while giving the player a chance to transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which the player can transition to the type 2 jackpot game state via the small jackpot game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the aforementioned fourth embodiment, a case was explained in which, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-shortened game state, to which the conditions for time-shortened game are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game, is a miss for the time-shortened pattern stop in the second time-shortened game state, if the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-shortened game plays set for the miss of the time-shortened pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state, the player is transitioned to a third time-shortened game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state in that it is possible to transition to a type 2 jackpot game state via a small win game state.

In addition, in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, there are described cases where the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, and where the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the second to third time-saving game states is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, and where multiple types (four types) of upper limit values (prescribed number of times) are set for the number of time-saving games.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment described above, a case was described in which, as the second time-shortened play state presentation executed in the second time-shortened play state, a second time-shortened play state continuation presentation indicating that the second time-shortened play state will continue, or a third time-shortened play state transition presentation indicating that the play state will transition from the second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state is executed.

In contrast, this embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment described above in that if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state, the game is transitioned to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state.

In addition, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games that is set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop that is not reached is one type, N times (50 times in this embodiment).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the second time-saving play state presentation, a first presentation is executed from the transition to the second time-saving play state until a predetermined number of special symbol plays have been played, and from the transition to the second time-saving play state and the transition to the second time-saving play state and the special symbol plays that exceed the predetermined number of times, a second presentation different from the first presentation is executed, which is different from the fourth embodiment described above.

As mentioned above, the second time-shortened game state is entered when the conditions for time-shortened game are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game, which is executed when the result of a jackpot lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-shortened game state) is a jackpot (see Figure 96), and the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state is set to a fixed number, M times (100 times in this embodiment) (see Figure 86 (B)). Therefore, if the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, and there is only one type (N times), the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss in the second time-saving game state will not be greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state until "M-N" times of special symbol games are played after transition to the second time-saving game state, and the game will not transition to the third time-saving game state. On the other hand, if more than "M-N" times of special symbol games are played after transition to the second time-saving game state, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss in the second time-saving game state may be greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, so the game may transition to the third time-saving game state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the time-saving play state, a new gameplay feature is provided in which it is more important whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss after the special pattern game is played more than "M-N" times after the transition to the second time-saving play state, than whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss before the special pattern game is played "M-N" times after the transition to the second time-saving play state. This increases the player's attention and interest in the special pattern game in the second time-saving play state, and increases the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, even in the second time-saving game performance executed by the symbol display unit 341, etc., it is more important after the special symbol game is executed more than "M-N" times after the transition to the second time-saving game state. In other words, by executing different performances from the transition to the second time-saving game state until the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, "M-N" times) and after the special symbol game is executed more than the predetermined number of times, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player the unimportant period and the important period in the second time-saving game state. For example, while executing a pinch performance as the first performance as to whether the second time-saving game state will be maintained during all or part of the unimportant period in the second time-saving game state, it is also possible to execute a chance performance as the second performance as to whether the transition to the third time-saving game state will be executed during all or part of the important period in the second time-saving game state. This increases the player's attention and interest in the special symbol game in the second time-saving game state, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the "predetermined number of times" that the special symbol game is executed after transitioning to the second time-saving game state in which the first and second effects are switched as the second time-saving game state effect is matched to the "M-N" times that the transition to the third time-saving game state is made possible by the time-saving symbol stop missing. In this way, when the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times match, the player can grasp the special symbol game that can transition to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state based on the second time-saving game state effect being changed from the first effect to the second effect. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the second effect being changed from the first effect to the second effect, and when the second effect is changed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the second effect, which increases the interest in the game.

The "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times do not have to match, but it is preferable that the difference between the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times is small, and the absolute value of the difference is set, for example, to 20% or less of the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, preferably 10% or less, and more preferably 5% or less. In this way, if the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times do not match, the player cannot accurately grasp the special game that allows the second time-saving game state to transition to the third time-saving game state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on at what stage the special game that allows the second time-saving game state to transition to the third time-saving game state is executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Of course, the features of this embodiment can also be applied to the aforementioned fourth embodiment in which the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is set to a plurality of types. In this way, by applying the features of this embodiment to the case in which the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss is set to a plurality of types, it is not possible to accurately grasp the special game that can be transitioned to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, just as in the case where the "predetermined number of times" and the "M-N" times do not match, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on at what stage the special game that allows the second time-saving game state to transition to the third time-saving game state is executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, which is entered when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-saving game state) is a jackpot, is set to a certain number M times (100 times in this embodiment) (see FIG. 86 (B)). However, multiple upper limits (prescribed numbers) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be set. In this way, by setting multiple upper limits (prescribed numbers) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, a gameplay is provided in which the size of the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is important, as well as the number of special games played from the time of entering the second time-saving game state until the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss.

Furthermore, when multiple upper limits (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state are set, it is also possible to set all of the multiple set upper limits (prescribed number of times) M to a number greater than the upper limit (prescribed number of times) N for one type of time-saving game, which is set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of game ball 99 into second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop. This provides gameplay in which the size of the upper limit (prescribed number of times) for the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is important, without compromising gameplay in which the timing of the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbol stop is a miss is important.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 114 to 117.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
As described above, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that there is only one upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss (50 times in this embodiment). Specifically, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that the second special pattern miss variation table in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss. Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the second special pattern miss variation table in the case where the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss.

[2nd Special Chart Outlier Variation Table]
As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, if the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss, all the time-saving symbol stop misses are set. And, if the time-saving symbol stop misses, the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game count is set to 50 times.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
As described above, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that, as the second time-saving game state presentation, the first presentation is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state until the predetermined number of special symbol games, and the second presentation different from the first presentation is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state and the special symbol games exceeding the predetermined number of times. Specifically, this embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of step S3318 executed when the special symbol variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104, and the stop symbol combination setting process of step S3319.

[Variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the first presentation is set as the second time-saving game state presentation when the number of unexecuted time-saving games is 50 or more, and the second presentation different from the first presentation is set when the number of unexecuted time-saving games is less than 50. Here, FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S3318 of the command determination process of FIG. 104.

<Steps S4201 and S4202>
In the process of setting the variation type (presentation pattern) of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not the second time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in the second time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the game is in the second time-saving game state.

When the second time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), i.e., when the game is in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 transitions to step S4202 and sets either the first effect or the second effect as the second time-saving game state effect based on the number of remaining time-saving game plays in the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the second time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4201: No), i.e., if the game is not in the second time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets other effects than the second time-saving game state effect based on the game state, the jackpot lottery result, the special chart change pattern (special chart change display time), etc. (step S4202), and ends the change type (presentation pattern) setting process.

Here, FIG. 116(A) is a diagram showing an example of a first presentation pattern as a second time-saving play state presentation, and FIG. 116(B) is a diagram showing an example of a second presentation pattern as a second time-saving play state presentation.

As shown in Figures 116 (A) and 116 (B), the second time-saving play state presentation (first and second presentations) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. In the second time-saving play state presentation (first and second presentations), one of the friendly and enemy characters attacks, and either the attack of the one character is defended by the other character, or the attack of the one character hits the other character, and finally, the result of the battle is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 116(A), the first effect as the second time-saving game state effect is an effect that is executed when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is 50 or more, as described below. In this first effect, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (when a symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol stop miss is stopped and displayed), it is clearly indicated or suggested that the second time-saving game state will not transition to the third time-saving game state after the special symbol game ends. In the example shown in FIG. 116(A), the first effect includes eight effect patterns, patterns C1 to C8, and in each of patterns C1 to C8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the result of the battle is a draw, so that it is clearly indicated or suggested that the game state will not transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol stop miss is a draw. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle will be a victory for the ally character, which will clearly indicate or suggest that it is a win. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle may be a draw. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated or suggested by the combination of symbols that stop, rather than the result of the battle.

In addition, in patterns C2, C4, and C6 to C8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see Figures 110(A) and 110(B)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed.

In addition, in patterns C7 and C8, after an enemy character's preemptive attack hits an ally character, a display is displayed indicating that the ally character is in a pinch (see FIG. 116 (C)). This pinch display is unique to the first presentation that is executed when the number of remaining time-saving plays in the second time-saving play state is equal to or exceeds the predetermined number of 50 plays, and is not displayed in the second presentation. Of course, the pinch display may also be displayed in the second presentation.

The first presentation patterns C1 to C8 are set, for example, based on the result of a jackpot lottery. Patterns C7 and C8, which display a pinch sign, are likely to be set, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss on the time-saving symbol stop (when it is a big win or a small win), and are unlikely to be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss on the time-saving symbol stop. This allows the player to understand that when a pinch sign is displayed, the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a miss on the time-saving symbol stop is low.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win that does not result in a time-saving symbol stop (a big win or a small win), a presentation other than patterns C1 to C8 may be executed. In other words, patterns C1 to C8 may be set as dedicated presentations when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss.

As shown in FIG. 116(B), the second effect as the second time-saving game state effect is an effect that is executed when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is less than 50, as described later. In this second effect, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss (if a pattern combination corresponding to the time-saving pattern stop miss is stopped and displayed), it is clearly indicated or suggested that the second time-saving game state will transition to the third time-saving game state after the special pattern game ends. In the example shown in FIG. 116(B), the second effect includes eight effect patterns of patterns D1 to D8, and in each of patterns D1 to D8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss, the result of the battle is a victory for the ally character, so that it is clearly indicated or suggested that the game state will transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle is a draw, so that it is clearly indicated or suggested that it is a win. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle may be a victory for the friendly character. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery is indicated or suggested by the combination of symbols that stop, rather than the result of the battle.

In addition, in patterns D2, D4, and D6 to D8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see Figures 110(A) and 110(B)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed.

In addition, in patterns D7 and D8, after an ally character's preemptive attack hits an enemy character, a display is displayed indicating that the ally character has a chance (see FIG. 116 (D)). This chance display is unique to the second presentation that is executed when the number of remaining time-saving plays in the second time-saving play state is less than the predetermined number of 50 plays, and is not displayed in the first presentation. Of course, the chance display may also be displayed in the first presentation.

The second presentation patterns D1 to D8 are set, for example, based on the result of a jackpot lottery. Patterns D7 and D8, which display a chance chance, are likely to be set, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, and are unlikely to be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss for the time-saving symbol stop (when it is a big win or a small win). This allows the player to understand that there is a high expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a miss for the time-saving symbol stop when a chance chance display is displayed.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a win that does not result in a time-saving symbol stop (a big win or a small win), a presentation other than patterns D1 to D8 may be executed. In other words, patterns D1 to D8 may be set as dedicated presentations when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss.

<Steps S4203 to S4205>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure for the variable type (presentation pattern) setting process in Figure 115, if the second time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the second time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 determines the number of unexecuted time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state, excluding the special game, based on the value of the time-shortened game count counter (step S4203), and determines whether the remaining number of time-shortened games in the second time-shortened game state is 50 or more (step S4204).

If the number of remaining time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state is 50 or more (step S4204: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first presentation (see FIG. 116 (A)) from patterns C1 to C8 based on the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4205), and ends the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

On the other hand, if the number of remaining time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state is not 50 or more (step S4204: No), i.e., if the number of remaining time-saving play times in the second time-saving play state is less than 50, the MPU 51 sets the second presentation (see FIG. 116 (B)) from patterns D1 to D8 based on the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4206), and ends the variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, if the result of the big win lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, a time-saving symbol is set as the stop symbol combination, and if the result of the big win lottery is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (if it is a big win or a small win), a symbol other than the time-saving symbol is set. Here, FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 of the command determination process in FIG. 104.

<Step S4301>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, first, the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301). If the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4302. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a time-saving symbol stop miss, a big win, or a small win, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4303.

<Step S4302>
If the result of the big win lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time-saving symbol as the stop symbol combination. Here, in this embodiment, the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game number set when the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss is one type, 50 times. Therefore, the time-saving symbol displayed in the second time-saving game state only needs to be at least one type, and may be one type or multiple types.

<Step S4303>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss with the time-saving pattern stop (step S4301: No), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a miss with the time-saving pattern stop, a big win, or a small win, a combination of patterns other than the time-saving pattern is set as the stop pattern combination according to the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss other than a miss with the time-saving pattern stop, a stop pattern combination according to the miss type is set, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, a double number is set as the stop pattern combination, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, a miss pattern and a combination other than a double number are set as the stop pattern combination.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the time-saving play state, it is more important whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop after the special pattern game is played more than a specific number (50 times) after the transition to the second time-saving play state, which is a low-profit state, than whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop before the special pattern game is played a specific number (50 times) after the transition to the second time-saving play state, which is a low-profit state, is important, which gives the player a new gameplay feature, which increases the player's attention and interest in the special pattern game in the second time-saving play state, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, even in the second time-saving game presentation in which the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, is executed by the pattern display unit 341 or the like, it is more important from the time when the special symbol game is executed more than a specific number of times (50 times) after the transition to the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state. In other words, by executing different presentations from the time when the special symbol game is executed a specific number of times (50 times) after the transition to the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, to the time when the special symbol game is executed more than a specific number of times, it is possible to clearly indicate or suggest to the player the unimportant period and the important period in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state. While executing a pinch presentation as the first presentation in the unimportant period in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, it is also possible to execute a chance presentation as the second presentation in the important period in the second time-saving game state, which is a low-profit state, in which the transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is executed. This will increase the player's attention and interest in the special game in the second time-saving game state, and increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of times the special symbol game is executed after transitioning to the second time-saving game state in which the first and second effects are switched as the second time-saving game state effect matches the number of times transition to the third time-saving game state is possible due to a missed time-saving symbol stop. In this way, the timing of switching the second time-saving game state effect matches the timing of transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a highly profitable state, so that it is possible to grasp that a transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a highly profitable state, is possible based on the change from the first effect to the second effect in the second time-saving game state effect. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the change of the second time-saving game state effect from the first effect to the second effect, and when it is changed to the second effect, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the second effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

Sixth embodiment
In the aforementioned fourth embodiment, a case was explained in which, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state to which the conditions for time-saving game are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the miss in the time-saving pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (when a prescribed condition is met), the player is transitioned to a third time-saving game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in that it can transition to a type 2 jackpot game state via a small win game state.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed after the specified condition is met and the special game ends.

Furthermore, we have explained a case where the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop failure.

In contrast, this embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment described above in that if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state, the game is transitioned to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state.

Here, Figure 118 shows an example of the setting of the third time-saving game state.

As shown in Fig. 118(A), in this embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed after the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the second time-saving game state reaches a specified number. Also, in this embodiment, the upper limit value K of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state (specified number K) is set to a value (J-L) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games L in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit value J of the number of time-saving games (specified number J) set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition. For example, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the upper limit K (prescribed number K) of the number of time-saving plays in the third time-saving play state is set to 30, since the upper limit J (prescribed number J) of the number of time-saving plays set for a time-saving pattern stop miss that satisfies the predetermined condition is 50, and if the remaining number L of time-saving plays in the second time-saving play state is 20, then K = J - L = 50 - 20 = 30.

In this embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed after the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the second time-saving game state reaches a specified number. Here, as described above, the upper limit value (specified number) of the number of times the time-saving game is executed in the second time-saving game state is set to the number of times (the number of times the player's balls do not decrease) that can be executed by the game balls (expected ball output value) that the player can acquire by the 2R short-open time-saving big win game, for example. Therefore, by executing the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the second time-saving game state reaches a specified number, it is possible to secure a large number of times of play from the transition to the second time-saving game state to the first type 2 big win game executed based on a small win in the third time-saving game state, and therefore it is possible to suppress a sudden increase in the number of balls output and balls held after the transition to the second time-saving game state. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling nature of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss when the specified condition is met. Therefore, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state becomes higher the higher the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss when the specified condition is met, and the lower the remaining number of time-saving games at the time of execution of the special pattern game when the specified condition is met, and the situation in the third time-saving game state becomes favorable for the player. In other words, in this embodiment, a gameplay in which the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop miss when the specified condition is met and the timing when the specified condition is met are important are imparted, which can increase attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the fun of the game.

In this embodiment, when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the initial setting value for the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition, but the initial setting value may be set to the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition, or may be set to the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, with reference to FIG. 119.

[Processing of main control device 4]
In this embodiment, the procedure for transitioning to the third time-saving game state in the game state transition process and the procedure for setting the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state are different from those in the fourth embodiment. Here, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of a part of the game state transition process of this embodiment.

[Game state transition process]
In the game state transition processing of this embodiment, when the number of times that the special symbol game is executed in the second time-shortened game state reaches a specified number of times, the game state transitions to a third time-shortened game state, and a process is executed in which the upper limit value of the number of time-shortened games in the third time-shortened game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-shortened games L in the second time-shortened game state from the upper limit value of the number of time-shortened games set for a time-shortened symbol stop miss that satisfies the specified condition.

<Step S4401>
In the game state transition process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 119, when the game state is the second time-saving game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game that ended by the stop display of the special symbol is neither a type 1 jackpot nor a small jackpot (step S3637: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401). The third time-saving game state transition flag is a flag indicating that a predetermined condition for transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state has been established, and is set to ON in step S3412 in the special symbol variation start process of Fig. 90.

If the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to on (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S4402, and if the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to off (step S4401: No), the MPU 51 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
If the third time-shortened game state transition flag is set on (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-shortened game state transition flag to off (step S4402), and determines whether the value of the time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened game plays in the second time-shortened game state is 0 (step S4403).

If the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4404, and if the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0 (step S4403: No), the MPU 51 terminates the game state transition process.

<Steps S4404 to S4406>
If the value of the time-shortening count counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the game state from the second time-shortening game state to the third time-shortening game state (step S4404).Then, the MPU 51 sets a third time-shortening game state flag indicating that the game state is the third time-shortening game state to ON (step S4405), sets a second time-shortening game state flag indicating that the game state is the second time-shortening game state to OFF (step S4406), and transitions the process to step S4407.

<Step S4407>
In step S4407, the MPU 51 sets an upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (the value of the time-saving number counter) from the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss that triggered the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games when transitioning to the third time-saving game state after the end of a type 2 jackpot is set to a fixed number of 50, as in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 87(F)). However, the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games when transitioning to the third time-saving game state after the end of a type 2 jackpot may be the same as the initial setting value set when transitioning from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, or may be set from the number of time-saving games set for multiple types.

As described above, in this embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state to the third time-saving game state as a high-profit state is executed after the number of times the special game is executed in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state reaches a specified number. Here, as described above, the upper limit (specified number) of the number of times the time-saving game is executed in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is set to the number of times that can be executed (the number of times that the player's balls are not reduced) with the game balls (expected ball payout value) that the player can acquire by, for example, a 2R short-open time-saving big win game. Therefore, the transition from the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state to the third time-saving game state as a high-profit state is executed after the number of times the special game is executed in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state reaches a specified number, so that the number of times of play from the transition to the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state to the first type 2 jackpot game executed based on a small jackpot in the third time-saving game state as a high-profit state can be secured many times, and a sudden increase in the number of balls issued or balls held after the transition to the second time-saving game state can be suppressed. This makes it possible to suppress the gambling nature of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the transition condition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is satisfied, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the transition condition. Therefore, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, becomes higher the higher the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the transition condition, and the lower the remaining number of time-saving games at the time of execution of the special symbol game that satisfies the transition condition, and the situation in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, becomes favorable to the player. In other words, in this embodiment, a gameplay is provided in which the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games that is set in response to a time-saving symbol stop miss that satisfies the transition condition and the timing at which the prescribed condition is met is important, which can increase attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the aforementioned fourth embodiment, a case was explained in which, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state to which the conditions for time-saving game are met after the end of a type 1 jackpot game is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop, and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the miss in the time-saving pattern stop is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (when a prescribed condition is met), the player is transitioned to a third time-saving game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in that it can transition to a type 2 jackpot game state via a small win game state.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, a case was described in which the probability of a small win (approximately 1/1) in the big win lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 is set higher than the probability of a loss (see Figures 87 (A) and 87 (B)).

In contrast, this embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment described above in that if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop and the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state, the game is transitioned to a third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, contrary to the fourth embodiment described above, the probability of missing the big win lottery that is executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is set to be higher than the probability of a small win, for example, the probability of missing is set to about 1/1.

In this embodiment, the probability of missing the jackpot lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 in the second time-saving game state, is set higher than the probability of winning a small prize, making it easier to transition to the third time-saving game state than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. On the other hand, the probability of missing the jackpot lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning port 315 in the third time-saving game state, is set higher than the probability of winning a small prize, making it more difficult to execute a two-type jackpot game than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, after transitioning to the third time-saving game state, a game feature is given in which the player must win a small prize in the jackpot lottery. This can increase attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 120 to 123.

[Processing of main control device 4]
In this embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot lottery executed in response to the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is different from that in the fourth embodiment. Here, FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of the second special jackpot winning/losing table of this embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 120(A) is a diagram showing an example of the short opening second special jackpot winning/losing table in a state other than the third time-saving game state (normal game state, first time-saving game state, and second time-saving game state), and FIG. 120(B) is a diagram showing an example of the second special jackpot winning/losing table in the long opening third time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 120(A), the short-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table of this embodiment is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In the short-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss is selected as the lottery result in the jackpot lottery according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the short opening, unlike the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314, the lottery result includes a small jackpot in which the feather role device 83 (see FIG. 82 to FIG. 84) is activated. Specifically, in the short-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 correspond to a jackpot, 206 to 207 correspond to a small win, and the other random numbers correspond to a miss. That is, in the jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 by the short opening of the electric role device 315b, the jackpot probability is set to about 1/318.1, the small win probability is set to about 1/32768, and the miss probability is set to about 1/1.003, and most of the jackpot lottery results are misses.

As shown in FIG. 120(B), the long opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table is set commonly for six game setting values 1 to 6. In the long opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss is selected as the lottery result in the jackpot lottery according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the long opening second special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315, unlike the first special chart jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning opening 314, the lottery result includes a small jackpot that activates the feather role device 83 (see FIG. 82 to FIG. 84). Specifically, in the long-opening second special chart jackpot winning/losing table, of the 65,536 values (random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 65,535, 0 to 205 corresponds to a jackpot, 206 to 65,529 corresponds to a small jackpot, and the other random numbers correspond to a miss. That is, in the second special chart jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the electric role device 315b being long-opened and the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315, the jackpot probability is set to about 1/318.1, the small jackpot probability is set to about 1/30, and the miss probability is set to about 1/1.038, and most of the jackpot lottery results are misses.

In this embodiment, the short opening second special chart big win hit table and the long opening second special chart big win hit table are provided in common for six game setting values, but one or both of the short opening second special chart big win hit table and the long opening second special chart big win hit table may be set for each game setting value. It is also possible to set one second special chart big win hit table by making the short opening second special chart big win hit table and the long opening second special chart big win hit table common.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
The processing of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is similar to that of the previously described fourth embodiment, but the second time-shortened game state presentation and the third time-shortened game state presentation are different from those of the previously described fourth embodiment.

<Second time-saving game state presentation>
The second time-saving game state presentation is executed as a mission presentation in which an ally character acquires a special move, and clearly indicates that the ally character's acquisition of the special move will result in a transition to a third time-saving game state. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in the symbol display unit 341 in the second time-saving game state presentation. Specifically, FIG. 121(A) is an example of a start screen for a special move acquisition mission, FIG. 121(B) is an example of a screen during a mission challenge, FIG. 121(C) is an example of a screen in which the special move acquisition is successful (mission success), and FIG. 121(D) is an example of a screen in which the special move acquisition is unsuccessful (mission failure).

As shown in FIG. 121(A), at the start of the special move acquisition mission, a text image is displayed showing the mission content, "Destroy the large rock to acquire the special move," and a text image is displayed showing the content if the mission is successful, showing "Enter RUSH mode after acquiring the special move."

As shown in FIG. 121(B), during a mission challenge, an image of an ally character punching a large rock and the words "Deadly punch!" are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 121(C), when the special move is successfully acquired (mission successful), a text image of "Special move acquired" is displayed to indicate that the special move has been acquired, a text image of "Entering RUSH" is displayed to indicate that the player is entering RUSH, and an image of an ally character smiling due to the acquisition of the special move.

As shown in FIG. 121(D), in the event of failure to acquire a special move (mission failure), text images of "Failed" and "Special move not acquired" are displayed to indicate the failure to acquire the special move, along with an image of an ally character looking sad due to the failure to acquire the special move.

<Third time-saving game state presentation>
The third time-saving game state presentation is executed as a battle presentation between an ally character and an enemy character, and when the ally character defeats the enemy character, it is clearly indicated that the result of the big win lottery is a small win. Furthermore, in the third time-saving game state presentation, when the ally character attacks with a special move, the result of the big win lottery is determined to be a small win.

Here, FIG. 122(A) is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of the presentation of the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, and FIG. 122(B) is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of the presentation of the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win).

As shown in Figures 122 (A) and 122 (B), the third time-saving play state presentation (miss third time-saving play state presentation and hit third time-saving play state presentation) is executed as a battle presentation between the main character and the enemy character. In the third time-saving play state presentation (miss third time-saving play state presentation and small hit third time-saving play state presentation), one of the friendly character and the enemy character attacks, and either the attack of the one character is defended by the other character, or the attack of the one character hits the other character, and ultimately, the result of the battle is displayed as to whether the third time-saving play state will continue or not.

As shown in FIG. 122(A), the miss third time-saving game state presentation is a presentation that is executed when the result of the big win lottery in the third time-saving game state presentation is a miss, and it clearly or implies that the small win game will not be executed after the special game ends and the third time-saving game state will be maintained. Here, in the third time-saving game state, the majority of the big win lottery results are misses (1/1.038) (see FIG. 120(B)). Therefore, in most of the third time-saving game state, the miss third time-saving game state presentation is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 122(A), the miss third time-saving game state presentation includes eight presentation patterns, patterns E1 to E8, and in each pattern E1 to E8, the result of the battle as to whether the third time-saving game state will continue or not is displayed as "continue," clearly or implies that the third time-saving game state will be maintained without transitioning to the small win game state (see FIG. 123(B)).

In addition, in patterns E2, E4, and E6 to E8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see FIG. 123 (A)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed as "Continue."

As shown in FIG. 122(B), the winning third time-saving game state presentation is a presentation that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state presentation is a win (jackpot or small win), and it clearly indicates or suggests that a jackpot game or a small win game will be executed after the special game ends. In the example shown in FIG. 122(B), the winning third time-saving game state presentation includes eight presentation patterns, patterns F1 to F8, and in each pattern F1 to F8, the result of the battle to determine whether the third time-saving game state will continue or not is displayed as "win", clearly indicating or suggesting that the game state will be transitioned to a jackpot game state or a small win game state (see FIG. 123(C)).

In addition, in patterns F2, F4, and F6 to F8, after an attack and defense between an ally character and an enemy character, a button effect such as a long press effect or a rapid-fire effect (see FIG. 123 (A)) is executed, and then the result of the battle is displayed as "Victory."

As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of missing the jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315 in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is set higher than the probability of winning a small prize, making it easier to transition to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. On the other hand, the probability of missing the jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning slot 315 in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is set higher than the probability of winning a small prize, making it more difficult to execute a two-type jackpot game than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, after transitioning to the third time-saving game state, a game feature is given in which the player must win a small prize in the jackpot lottery. This can increase attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to sixth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the probability of winning a normal jackpot is set to be the same in all of the first to third time-saving game states, but the probability of winning a normal jackpot may be set to be different depending on the type of time-saving game state.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the type of miss in the jackpot lottery results in the normal game state includes a miss in the time-saving symbol stop, but the type of miss in the jackpot lottery results in the normal game state may be omitted. In this case, the first time-saving game state is omitted as the time-saving game state.

In the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the short opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and the long opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table were provided in common for the six game setting values, but one or both of the short opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and the long opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table may be set for each game setting value. It is also possible to set one second special chart jackpot win/loss table by commonizing the short opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table and the long opening second special chart jackpot win/loss table.

In the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times the time-saving game is played is set in accordance with the type of special chart fluctuation pattern (variable display time), but the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of times the time-saving game is played does not have to correspond to the type of special chart fluctuation pattern (variable display time). In addition, in the time-saving pattern stop miss type allocation table of this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the time-saving pattern stop miss is always the result, but it is also possible to make it so that some of the cases when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss are time-saving pattern stop misses.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the subtraction value of the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of time-saving games set for a time-saving symbol stop miss in the second time-saving game state is less than 0, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained without change, but if the subtraction value is less than 0, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the number obtained by adding the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss, or may be changed (replaced) to the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss.

In addition, in the small prize games of the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) is set to the same regardless of the type of time-saving game state in which the second special chart jackpot lottery is executed. Of course, the execution time of the movable wing operation game (operation time of the movable wing 832) can be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state in which the second special chart jackpot lottery is executed. For example, it is conceivable to set the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the small prize game executed based on the second special chart jackpot lottery in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state to be shorter than the execution time of the movable wing operation game of the small prize game executed based on the second special chart jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state.

In the first small prize game in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 is set to the first opening to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the V prize opening 833, but part or all of the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 may be set to the movable feather part operation game. Specifically, in the first small prize game, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather role device 83 may be set to straddle from the first opening to the movable feather part operation game, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Also, in the first small prize game, the operation timing of the V prize opening opening/closing part 835 of the feather role device 83 may be set to the movable feather operation game, and the operation time of the V prize opening opening/closing part 835 may be set to a short time (for example, 0.02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833. Here, the effect of making it impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game is as described above, but on the other hand, if it is impossible for the game ball 99 to enter the V prize opening 833 in the first small prize game, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small prize game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is made difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning hole 833 in the first small win game, there is a possibility that the game ball 99 will enter the V winning hole 833 in the first small win game, so the player's attention and interest in the small win game is prevented from declining.

In the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, and the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop miss is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is not changed. However, for example, the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be increased by adding the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving miss to the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. This increases the number of jackpot lotteries for determining whether or not to transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, and therefore maintains the possibility of transitioning to the third time-saving game state, which is advantageous to the player, for a longer period of time, thereby increasing attention and interest in the game and improving the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, when the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games is reset to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number), but the number of time-saving games when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss may be reset regardless of the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, regardless of whether the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss is greater or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss may be changed to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) selected for the time-saving symbol stop miss. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, the number of time-saving games (prescribed number) selected for the miss for the time-saving symbol stop may be maintained without resetting the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, regardless of whether it is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state.

Eighth embodiment
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine has a "starting ball entry" as a starting condition, "variable play" as a play operation, a "game control unit" as a gaming means, a "display" as a predetermined display means, a "profit gaming state" as a predetermined gaming state, and an "award value for gaming result" as a gaming value.

The start condition may be any trigger for starting a game that is executed by various operations. Examples of start conditions include triggers for executing a variable display to notify the result of a predetermined lottery. Specifically, start conditions include, as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the entry of a game ball into various winning ports, the execution of a predetermined lottery by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning port, the passage (entry) of a game ball through a predetermined area, the execution of a predetermined lottery by the passage (entry) of a game ball through a predetermined area, the entry of a game ball into the first winning port 314, the execution of a jackpot lottery by the entry of a game ball into the first winning port 314, the entry of a game ball into the second winning port 315, the execution of a jackpot lottery by the entry of a game ball into the second winning port 315, the passage of a game ball through the through gate 317, the execution of a regular lottery by the passage of a game ball through the through gate 317, and any combination thereof.

The game operation may be a game that is executed by various operations. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of the game operation include a big win game or a small win game in which a predetermined winning hole such as the variable winning hole 316 is opened, a normal winning game executed by the variable display of a normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 361, a normal winning game in which the electric device 315b provided in the second winning hole 315 is operated, a first special symbol game executed by the variable display of a first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol game executed by the variable display of a second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363, and any combination thereof.

The game means may be any means capable of controlling the operations required for various games. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of the game means include an MPU 41 that controls the display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display unit 361, the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display unit 362, the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display unit 363, the display of the first special pattern reservation number N on the first special pattern reservation number display unit 364, the display of the second special pattern reservation number M on the second special pattern reservation number display unit 365, the operation of the electric role 315b, the operation of the opening and closing door 319 of the variable winning opening 316, the display of the first decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern on the pattern display unit 341 and the second decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, an MPU 51 that controls various effects executed by the pattern display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined display means may be anything capable of performing a predetermined display such as a changing display of patterns in various games. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of the predetermined display means include a main display unit 36 having a normal pattern display unit 361, a first special pattern display unit 362, a second special pattern display unit 363, etc., a pattern display unit 341 that performs a changing display of decorative patterns, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined game state may be any game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state in some respect. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the predetermined game state may be a big win game state or a small win game state in which movable members such as the opening and closing door 319 that are not operated in the normal game state are operated, a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below) that is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b is more easily operated than in the normal game state that is a low-frequency support mode, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, a probability-changing game state in which the probability of a big win is higher than in the normal game state, or any combination thereof.

The game value may be any value that is significant in the progress of the game. Examples of game value include direct or indirect value related to the acquisition of game balls or a predetermined lottery, value related to the performance executed in the pattern display unit 341, or any combination thereof. Specifically, game value, so long as it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, may include, for example, the execution of a jackpot game in which a large number of balls can be expected to be acquired (opening of the variable winning port 316), the execution of a jackpot lottery to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game, the execution of a regular winning game in a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below) (long opening of the second winning port 315), the execution of a regular winning game in a normal game state (short opening of the second winning port 315), and the like. ), execution of a lottery for a regular winning pattern to determine whether or not to execute a regular winning pattern in a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below), execution of a lottery for a regular winning pattern in a normal game state, transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c described below), execution of a performance with a high probability of a jackpot on the pattern display unit 341, a performance that confirms a jackpot, a premium performance, or any combination thereof.

Here, in the first embodiment described above, a gaming machine configured as a loop probability variable machine in which the first special chart game as a variable game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port 314 as a starting ball entry and the second special chart game as a variable game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port 315 as a starting ball entry are not executed in overlapping (parallel) manner, and the second special chart game is executed in priority to the first special chart game.

In addition, since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop variable-rate machine, after the end of the jackpot game, the machine transitions to a time-saving game state (so-called time-saving game state A), which is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state, and a jackpot is guaranteed in the time-saving game state.

The gaming machine may also be configured to transition to a time-saving game state (a so-called c time-saving game state) as a value awarded for the special game result when a specific pattern (a so-called time-saving pattern) displayed in a stopped state on a display such as the main display unit 36 or the pattern display unit 341 fails to stop.

In gaming machines, it is important to increase the attention and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play. In other words, when adopting a configuration in which a transition to the time-saving play state c is made as a value awarded for the special game result when a time-saving pattern stop is missed, it is important to impart new gameplay that can increase the attention and interest in the game and improve the player's willingness to play.

In contrast, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special symbol game as a variable game in which the first special symbol is changed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port 314 as the starting ball entry, and the second special symbol game as a variable game in which the second special symbol is changed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port 315 as the starting ball entry can be executed in parallel (in parallel) on the main display unit 36 as the display device under the control of the MPU 41 as the game control unit. In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment transitions to a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a) as a profitable game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game, but an upper limit (maximum number of time-saving games a) is set for the number of times of special symbol games as variable games in the time-saving game state a, and is configured as an ST machine that transitions to the normal game state when the special symbol game of the maximum number of time-saving games a is executed in the time-saving game state a. In this embodiment, as described below, the probability of a jackpot in the time-saving play state a as a profitable play state is set to 1/150, the maximum number of time-saving play states a is set to 200, and the expected probability of a jackpot in the time-saving play state a is 73.8%.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game can be transitioned to the c time-saving game state as a value awarded for the special symbol game result when the specific symbol (time-saving symbol) stops and is not displayed on the main display unit 36 as a display device. The c time-saving game state has an upper limit (maximum number of c time-saving games) set for the number of special symbol games, just like the a time-saving game state, but the maximum number of c time-saving games is set to a number that substantially guarantees a jackpot in the c time-saving game state. In other words, the c time-saving game state is a profitable game state that is more advantageous than the a time-saving game state in which a jackpot is not guaranteed, in that a jackpot is substantially guaranteed. In this embodiment, as described later, the probability of a jackpot in the c time-saving game state as a profitable game state is set to 1/150, the maximum number of a time-saving games is set to 2000, and the jackpot expectation in the c time-saving game state is 99.9998%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display in the normal game state, the game state is transitioned to the time-saving game state c as the awarded value for the special game result, whereas when a time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display in the time-saving game state a, the time-saving game state a is maintained without transitioning to the time-saving game state c. Note that even when a time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the main display unit 36 as a display in the time-saving game state b or the time-saving game state c described below, the current game state, the time-saving game state b or the time-saving game state c, is maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the first special symbol game (the variable display time of the first special symbol on the main display unit 36 as the display device) when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss includes a second special symbol game as a variable game for a maximum number of a time-saving games. In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment can execute the second special symbol game as a variable game for a maximum number of a time-saving games during the execution of the first special symbol game that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss. Then, during the execution of the first special symbol game, which notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, if the second special symbol game as a variable game with the maximum number of a time-saving games is executed, the game state is transitioned from the a time-saving game state to the normal game state. As a result, the first special symbol game as a variable game started in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state ends in the normal game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the value awarded for the result of the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state can be transitioned to the c time-saving game state in which a jackpot is substantially guaranteed.

In this way, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state that is transitioned to the normal game state by executing the special symbol game as a variable game with the upper limit number of times (the number of time-saving games a), if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the game is transitioned to the time-saving game state c in which a jackpot that is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a is substantially guaranteed, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, you can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable game, will start in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is started in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game is executed the maximum number of times, which is the end condition of the time-saving game state a, before the first special symbol game ends, so that the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game, that is, after the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed, and a new game feature is realized in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole 315 to execute the second special symbol game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special chart game as a variable game started in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed as the value awarded for the special chart game result. That is, in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, it is expected that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special chart game as a variable game started during the execution of the first special chart game as a variable game is a jackpot, so that the jackpot game is executed. In other words, in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state, the interest is maintained similar to that of the a time-saving game state of a conventional gaming machine, in that the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery can be expected to be a jackpot. In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game in the a time-saving game state as a profitable game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the player can continue to expect that the game will move to the c time-saving game state in which a jackpot is practically guaranteed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefit of the jackpot game being executed as the granted value for the second special symbol game result. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game in the a time-saving game state as a profitable game state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a miss, the player can expect the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery to be a jackpot, as in the a time-saving game state of a conventional gaming machine, and can enjoy the benefit according to the lottery result.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment utilizes the time-saving gaming state a, which is a profitable gaming state in which the maximum number of time-saving games can be played after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving gaming state c, in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed and which can be entered by the stop display of a missed time-saving symbol, and the characteristic of a simultaneous variation machine in which the first and second special symbols can vary simultaneously on the main display unit 36 as a display device, to realize the aforementioned new gameplay that increases the interest of the game, while also maintaining the gameplay in the time-saving gaming state a of a conventional gaming machine in which a jackpot game is expected to be played based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 124 to 155.

[Gameability of the gaming machine 10]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a so-called simultaneous variation machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 (see FIG. 126) of the main display section 36 and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 (see FIG. 126) of the main display section 36 can be executed simultaneously. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game can be executed in parallel at the same time. And, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, a new gameplay that utilizes the characteristics of a simultaneous variation machine and enhances the interest of the game is realized.

Here, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the game flow of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. Below, the game flow of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 124.

As shown in FIG. 124, the gaming machine 10 can execute a normal gaming state, a jackpot gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state.

The normal game state is a low-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b provides low support for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. In this low-frequency support mode, the electric device 315b operates less frequently (probability of operation) than in the high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 12(A)), and the operation time when the electric device 315b operates is set to be shorter (see FIG. 12(C)). In other words, the normal game state is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315.

The jackpot game state is a game state that is entered in the normal game state or the time-limited game state after the special symbol game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot has ended (after the special symbol has stopped and been displayed), and in which the jackpot game is executed. In the jackpot game, a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed in which the variable winning port 316 is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319, and a large number of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player compared to the normal game state and the time-limited game state in that a large number of game balls can be acquired.

The time-saving game state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric device 315b provides high support for the game ball to enter the second winning port 315. In this high-frequency support mode, the electric device 315b operates more frequently (probability of operation) than in the low-frequency support mode (see FIG. 12(B)), and the operation time when the electric device 315b operates is set longer (see FIG. 12(D)). In other words, the time-saving game state is a state in which game balls are more likely to enter the second winning port 315. Therefore, the time-saving game state is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state in that it increases the chances of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, an upper limit is set on the number of times (number of time-saving games) that can be played in the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state is set to a time-saving game state a, a time-saving game state b, and a time-saving game state c, which have different transition triggers.

The time-saving play state a is a play state to which the game is transitioned after the end of a jackpot game. In the time-saving play state a, the upper limit of the number of times (time-saving play count) that can be played (special pattern play) is set to 200 times. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see FIG. 128 (A)), so the probability of winning a jackpot in the time-saving play state a is about 73.8%, and it is highly likely that a jackpot will be won in the time-saving play state a. On the other hand, in the time-saving play state a, the probability of not winning a jackpot is about 26.2%, and it is not guaranteed that a jackpot will be won in the time-saving play state a. And, if the upper limit of special pattern play (200 times in this embodiment) is played without winning a jackpot in the time-saving play state a, the game is transitioned to the normal play state, which is a low-frequency support mode.

The b time-saving game state is a game state to which the player is shifted when a specified number of special game plays are executed without winning a jackpot in the normal game state. The specified number of times to shift to the b time-saving game state is selected, for example, from a range of 2.5 to 3.0 times the denominator of the jackpot probability. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is 1/150, the specified number of times to shift to the b time-saving game state is selected from a range of 375 to 450 times, and is set to 400 times in one example.

On the other hand, in the b time-saving play state, the upper limit of the number of times (number of time-saving play) that can be played (special game) is set to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the b time-saving play state. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times (number of time-saving play) that can be played (special game) in the b time-saving play state is set to 2000 times. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see FIG. 128 (A)), the probability of winning a jackpot in the b time-saving play state is approximately 99.9998%, and a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in the b time-saving play state.

If the maximum number of special game plays (2000 in this embodiment) is played in the b time-saving game state without winning a jackpot, the game will transition to the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, just like in the a time-saving game state. However, since a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in the b time-saving game state, transition from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state is essentially impossible.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times (number of time-shortened games) that can be played in the b time-shortened game state (special game) may be set to a number that substantially guarantees winning a jackpot in the b time-shortened game state, and is not limited to 2000 times. Of course, it is also conceivable that the upper limit of the number of times (number of time-shortened games) that can be played in the b time-shortened game state (special game) may be set to a number that substantially guarantees winning a jackpot in the b time-shortened game state.

The time-saving c game state is a game state to which a player enters when a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display section 362 (see FIG. 126) of the main display section 36 during normal game play. In other words, the time-saving c game state is entered when the game state at the end of the first special pattern game, which notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss (see FIG. 128(C) and FIG. 128(D)), which is a type of miss, as described below, is the normal game state, which has the lowest profit, regardless of the game state at the time of the lottery for the jackpot that is notified as the game result of the first special pattern game or the game state at the start of the first special pattern game, which is the game result of the jackpot lottery, is the normal game state, which has the lowest profit. In other words, the transition to the time-saving c game state is a profit that is awarded in the normal game state, which has the lowest profit.

In addition, in the time-saving play state c, the upper limit of the number of times (number of time-saving play) that can be played (special game) is set to a number that essentially guarantees winning a jackpot in the time-saving play state c, similar to the time-saving play state b. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times (number of time-saving play) that can be played (special game) is set to 2000 times, similar to the time-saving play state b, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the time-saving play state c is approximately 99.9998%, similar to the time-saving play state b, so that a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in the time-saving play state c.

If the maximum number of special game plays (2000 in this embodiment) is played in the time-saving game state c without winning a jackpot, the game will transition to the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, just like the time-saving game state a and time-saving game state b. Since a jackpot is essentially guaranteed in the time-saving game state c, transition from the time-saving game state c to the normal game state will not essentially occur.

On the other hand, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display section 362 (see FIG. 126), if the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol is a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, or time-saving game state c) that is more advantageous than the normal game state, the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol is maintained without transitioning to time-saving game state c. For example, if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is maintained, if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in time-saving game state a, the time-saving game state a is maintained, if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in time-saving game state b, the time-saving game state b is maintained, and if the time-saving symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in time-saving game state c, the time-saving game state c is maintained.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 (see FIG. 126) and the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 (see FIG. 126) can be executed simultaneously. Therefore, the game state may differ between when the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 starts to change and when it stops changing.

Here, Fig. 125 (A) and Fig. 125 (B) are timing charts showing an example of the end timing of the first special game started in the a time-saving game state. In Fig. 125 (A) and Fig. 125 (B), the square wave drawn in a pulse shape corresponds to one special game, and the square wave for the second special game executed in the a time-saving game state is drawn without the number. Then, as shown in Fig. 125 (A), when the variable display of the first special game is started in the a time-saving game state in the first special pattern display unit 362 (see Fig. 126), if the variable display time of the first special game in the variable display (the execution time of the first special game) is shorter than the total time for which the second special game is executed for the remaining number of time-saving games, the first special game ends in the a time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the first special symbol game is a game that notifies the player that the time-saving symbol stop has been missed as a result of a jackpot lottery, the a time-saving game state is maintained even after the first special symbol game ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 362 (see FIG. 126) in the a time-saving game state, if the variable display time of the first special symbol in the variable display (the execution time of the first special symbol game) is longer than the total time for which the second special symbol game is executed for the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit, the game state is shifted from the a time-saving game state to the normal game state, so the first special symbol game ends in the normal game state. Therefore, if the first special symbol game is a game that notifies the player that the time-saving symbol stop has been missed as a result of a jackpot lottery, the c time-saving game state is shifted to after the first special symbol game ends.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the time-saving game state a, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state a is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the time-saving game state a is maintained, but in this case, a benefit may be given to the player. As a result, even if the player feels uncomfortable, the time-saving game state a is maintained without transitioning to the time-saving game state c because the first special symbol game for the time-saving symbol stop miss ends in the time-saving game state a, and such discomfort can be alleviated by the provision of a benefit, and interest in the game can be increased, so that a decline in the interest in the game can be prevented.

Here, the benefits that can be given to the player when the time-saving game state a is maintained in the event of a missed time-saving pattern stop can be, for example, the opening of the variable winning opening 316 by the operation of the opening and closing door 319, the opening of the second winning opening 315 by the operation of the electric device 315b, the execution of a small win game, the display of a premium image on the pattern display unit 341, the opening of a premium song as a song that can be output from the speaker 26 in a big win game, and the explicit or suggested game setting value (see Figures 9 (A) and 9 (B)) that determines the probability of a big win.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, which is transitioned to the normal game state by the execution of the special symbol game a maximum number of times, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the game is transitioned to the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot that is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a is essentially guaranteed, on the condition that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, you can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, will start in the time-saving game state a, which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is started in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game is executed the maximum number of times, which is the end condition of the time-saving game state a, before the first special symbol game ends, so that the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game, that is, after the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed, and a new game feature is realized in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole 315 to execute the second special symbol game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving game state a, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game started during the execution of the first special symbol game is a jackpot. In other words, in the time-saving game state a, the same interest as in the time-saving game state a of a conventional gaming machine is maintained, in that it is expected that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the player can continue to expect that the game will move to the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot is practically guaranteed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefits of the jackpot game being executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a, even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a miss, the player can expect the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery to be a jackpot, as in the time-saving game state a of a conventional gaming machine, and can enjoy the benefits according to the lottery result.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment utilizes the a time-saving gaming state, which is entered after the end of a jackpot game and in which the maximum number of time-saving games can be played, the c time-saving gaming state, which is entered when the time-saving symbol stop display is not successful and in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, and the characteristic of a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can change simultaneously, to realize the aforementioned new gameplay that enhances the interest of the game, while also maintaining the gameplay of the a time-saving gaming state of conventional gaming machines in which a jackpot game is expected to be played based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

The upper limit of the number of times (number of times of time-saving play) that can be played in the c time-saving play state (special game) may be set to a number of times that substantially guarantees winning a jackpot in the c time-saving play state, and is not limited to 2000 times, nor does it necessarily have to be set to the same number as in the b time-saving play state. Of course, it is also conceivable that the upper limit of the number of times (number of times of time-saving play) that can be played in the c time-saving play state (special game) may be set to a number of times that substantially guarantees winning a jackpot in the c time-saving play state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving pattern stop miss is set for the first special pattern game but not for the second special pattern game (see Figures 128 (C) to 128 (E)), so the time-saving pattern is not displayed as a result of the second special pattern game in the second special pattern display section 363 (see Figure 126) of the main display section 36. Of course, the time-saving pattern stop miss may be set for the second special pattern game, so that the time-saving pattern can be displayed as a result of the second special pattern game in the second special pattern display section 363 (see Figure 126). Then, when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display section 363 (see FIG. 126) as a result of the second special pattern game, the player may be given some kind of benefit, such as the opening of the variable winning opening 316 by operating the opening/closing door 319, the opening of the second winning opening 315 by operating the electric device 315b, the execution of a small win game, the display of a premium image on the pattern display section 341, the opening of a premium song as a song that can be output from the speaker 26 in a big win game, or the explicit or suggested game setting value (see FIG. 9 (A) and FIG. 9 (B)) that determines the probability of a big win.

In addition, in this embodiment, a normal game state and a time-saving game state are set, and a game state corresponding to the probability-changing game state in the first embodiment described above is not set, but, for example, a probability-changing game state may be set instead of the time-saving game state a. In other words, the gaming machine 10 is considered to set the probability of winning in at least a part of the high-frequency support mode higher than that in the low-frequency support mode without making the probability of winning constant in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. In this case, whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving pattern stop miss can be determined by referring to the game state at the time of execution of the jackpot lottery or at the start of the special pattern game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery (when the special pattern starts to change), but it is preferable to determine it by referring to the game state at the end of the special pattern game (when the special pattern stops and is displayed). Here, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the first special symbol starts to change and the display stops (execution of the first special symbol game) and the second special symbol starts to change and the display stops (execution of the second special symbol game) are executed simultaneously and in parallel independently of each other. Therefore, it is assumed that when one special symbol is displayed stopped (one special game ends), the game state during the display of the other special symbol's change (during the execution of the other special game) will be different from the time when the other special symbol starts to change (the time when the other special game starts). Therefore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is determined by referring to the game state at the end of the special symbol game (when the special symbol is displayed stopped), even if the game state is different at the start and end of the special symbol game, the timing for determining the result of the jackpot lottery is only required once, so the process of determining the result of the jackpot lottery can be easily executed and the reliability of the process is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, three types of time-saving game states are set: time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c. However, it is also possible to omit the time-saving game state b and set two types: time-saving game state a and time-saving game state c.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
Here, Fig. 126 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 126, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, an outlet 318, and a variable display unit 34 (a pattern display section 341) similar to those in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the game board 31 is common to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided with a main display section 36, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, and a through gate 317, but these have differences from the first embodiment described above.

Note that many nails are driven into the game board 31 in FIG. 126, but these are omitted from the drawing. Also, the game board 31 in FIG. 126 omits the sub-movable display unit 38 and the movable role member 39 that were provided on the game board 31 of the first embodiment described above, but one or both of these may be provided on the game board 31.

The main display unit 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 31, and includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first special symbol reserved number display unit 364, and a second special symbol reserved number display unit 365.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs as normal symbols (normal symbols), and each LED is turned on and off during a normal symbol game that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. The normal symbol game is executed to notify the result of a normal symbol winning lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 317. If the result of the normal symbol winning lottery is a normal symbol winning, a normal symbol winning game is executed in which the second winning port 315 is opened by the operation of the electric device 315b.

The turning on and off of the LED pair (normal symbols) in the normal symbol display section 361 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the normal symbol winning lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pair (displays the normal symbols in a variable manner) when the game ball passes through the through gate 317, and after the normal symbol variable display time set at the time of the normal symbol winning lottery has elapsed, turns on or off each LED (displays the normal symbols in a stopped manner) according to the result of the normal symbol winning lottery, thereby executing the normal symbol game.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a seven-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, letters, and other symbols as the first special symbol (first special symbol). The seven-segment display device includes seven segments, and each segment is turned on and off in the first special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port 314. The first special symbol game is executed to notify the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, which is executed by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port 314. If the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning port 316 is opened by the operation of the opening/closing door 319.

The lighting of each segment of the seven-segment display device in the first special symbol display section 362 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (displays the first special symbol in a variable manner) when a game ball enters the first winning slot 314, and after the first special symbol variable display time set at the time of the first special symbol jackpot lottery has elapsed, lights or turns off each segment (displays the first special symbol in a stopped manner) according to the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, thereby executing the first special symbol game.

Here, in this embodiment, the results of the first special chart jackpot lottery include jackpots and misses, as described below (see FIG. 128(A)). Jackpots are 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots (see FIG. 128(A)). Misses as a result of the first special chart jackpot lottery include, as in the first embodiment described above, a miss before and after, a reach other than a miss before and after, and a complete miss, and further include a miss with a time-saving pattern stop (see FIG. 128(C) and FIG. 128(D)). Then, in the first special chart display unit 362, the first special chart game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern (first special pattern) based on the execution of the first special chart jackpot lottery, and after the first special chart variable display time set for the first special chart game has elapsed, the first special pattern corresponding to the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is stopped and displayed. For example, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "1", "5" or "9" are displayed, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "3" or "7" are displayed, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a reach for a front or rear miss, the numbers "2" or "4" are displayed, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a reach for a front or rear miss, the numbers "6" or "8" are displayed, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop, the number "0" is displayed, and if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number other than a number is displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the number "0" corresponds to the time-saving pattern.

The correspondence between the result of the first special jackpot lottery and the type of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 is not limited to the above example. For example, if the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number may be displayed, or the result of the first special jackpot lottery may be displayed in alphabetical order. The number (type) of special patterns corresponding to the type of the result of the first special jackpot lottery is not limited to the above example, and multiple types of time-saving patterns may be set.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a seven-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, letters, and other symbols as the second special symbol (second special symbol). The seven-segment display device includes seven segments, and each segment is turned on and off in the second special symbol game, which is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning opening 315. The second special symbol game is executed to notify the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning opening 315. If the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319.

The lighting of each segment of the 7-segment display device in the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the 7-segment display device (displays the second special symbol in a variable manner) when a game ball enters the second winning slot 315, and after the second special symbol variable display time set at the time of the second special symbol jackpot lottery has elapsed, lights or turns off each segment (displays the second special symbol in a stopped manner) according to the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, thereby executing the second special symbol game.

Here, in this embodiment, the results of the second special chart jackpot lottery include 5R and 16R jackpots (see FIG. 128(A)) as in the results of the first special chart jackpot lottery, but the time-saving pattern stop miss is not set as a miss, and as in the first embodiment described above, includes a front and rear miss reach, a reach other than a front and rear miss, and a complete miss reach (see FIG. 128(E)). Then, in the second special chart display unit 363, the second special chart game is started by starting the variable display of the pattern (second special pattern) based on the execution of the second special chart jackpot lottery, and after the second special chart variable display time set for the second special chart game has elapsed, the second special pattern corresponding to the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is stopped and displayed. For example, if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "1," "5," or "9" are displayed; if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, the numbers "3" or "7" are displayed; if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss before or after, the numbers "2" or "4" are displayed; if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a reach other than a miss before or after, the numbers "6" or "8" are displayed; and if the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a non-number is displayed.

The correspondence between the result of the second special jackpot lottery and the type of second special pattern in the second special pattern display section 363 is not limited to the above example. For example, if the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a complete miss, a number may be displayed, or the result of the second special jackpot lottery may be displayed in alphabetical order, and the number of special patterns corresponding to the type of result of the second special jackpot lottery is not limited to the above example.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 is executed regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 is being executed or not, while the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 is executed regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 is being executed or not. In other words, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game can be executed simultaneously and in parallel independently of each other.

The display of the normal pattern (normal pattern) variation in the normal pattern display section 361 is executed to notify the result of the normal pattern winning lottery, which is different from the big win lottery, and therefore can be executed simultaneously and in parallel independently of the display of the first special pattern variation in the first special pattern display section 362 and the display of the second special pattern variation in the second special pattern display section 363.

The first special chart reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the first special chart reserved number N, which is the reserved number of rights to play the first special chart game that arise from winning at the first winning port 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second special chart reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the second special chart reserved number M, which is the reserved number of rights to play the second special chart game that arise from winning at the second winning port 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

The main display unit 36 of this embodiment may be provided in the upper right-hand portion of the game board 31, similar to the main display unit 36 of the first embodiment described above, or may be provided in another location.

The first winning hole 314 provides an opportunity for the first special jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball. In this embodiment, the first winning holes 314 are a central first winning hole 314C and a right first winning hole 314R.

The first central winning opening 314C is located below the pattern display section 341 (below the center of the game board 31), similar to the first winning opening 314 in the first embodiment described above. A ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in this first central winning opening 314C, and this ball entry sensor detects the entry of a game ball into the first central winning opening 314C.

In this embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawings, a game ball that is shot into the left area of the game board 31 and flows down the left side of the pattern display section 341 can enter the central first winning hole 314C, but a game ball that is shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side of the pattern display section 341 cannot or has difficulty entering the central first winning hole 314C. In other words, in order to trigger a first special chart jackpot lottery to be drawn when a game ball enters the central first winning hole 314C, a so-called left hit is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the left area of the game board 31.

The right first winning hole 314R is located to the right of the pattern display section 341 (the center of the right side of the game board 31). A ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in this right first winning hole 314R, and this ball entry sensor detects the entry of a game ball into the right first winning hole 314R.

In this embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawing, the right first winning hole 314R can receive a game ball that is shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side of the pattern display section 341. However, the frequency (possibility) of a game ball shot into the right area of the game board 31 entering the right first winning hole 314R is made lower than the frequency (possibility) of a game ball shot into the left area of the game board 31 entering the central first winning hole 314C by adjusting the arrangement of the nails driven into the periphery of the right first winning hole 314R. For example, the frequency (possibility) of a game ball shot into the right area of the game board 31 entering the right first winning hole 314R is set to about one or two balls during the period until the second special pattern game is executed a specified number of times (200 times in this embodiment) in the time-saving game state a. This is because if the game ball is easy to enter the right first winning hole 314R, one or more first special symbol reserves will accumulate due to the game ball entering the right first winning hole 314R during the time-saving game state a, preventing the first special symbol game from being executed continuously in the time-saving game state a. This reduces the possibility that the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a will end in the normal game state, and prevents the game from being easily transferred to the time-saving game state c. In addition, in order to prevent the game from being easily transferred to the time-saving game state c, it is also possible to set the time of the first special symbol game (first special symbol variable display time) triggered by the game ball entering the center first winning hole 314C in the time-saving game state a short. This makes it possible to take measures against attacking by using right and left hits in combination during the time-saving game state a. Specifically, by hitting from the left as appropriate in the time-saving game state a, it is possible to continuously play the first special symbol game while maintaining the state in which the first special symbol reserve is accumulated, while hitting from the right allows the second special symbol game to be played, thereby reducing the number of remaining time-saving games in the time-saving game state a. However, by setting the time of the first special symbol game (first special symbol variable display time) triggered by the game ball entering the first central winning hole 314C short, for example, to 1 second or less, such as 0.5 seconds, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol reserve from accumulating, thereby preventing the first special symbol game from being continuously played, and enabling a countermeasure for attacking by using both right and left hits during the time-saving game state a.

On the other hand, it is made impossible or difficult for a gaming ball that is shot into the left area of the gaming board 31 and flows down the left side of the symbol display section 341 to enter the right first winning hole 314R. In other words, in order to trigger a first special jackpot lottery when a gaming ball enters the right first winning hole 314R, a so-called right hit is encouraged, in which the gaming ball is shot into the right area of the gaming board 31.

In this way, to get the game ball to enter the central first winning hole 314C, a so-called left hit is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the left area of the game board 31, while to get the game ball to enter the right first winning hole 314R, a so-called right hit is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the right area of the game board 31.

In this embodiment, the game state is a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning is low (see FIG. 12(A)) and the electric device 315b is unlikely to be activated. The right first winning hole 314R is less likely to receive a game ball than the central first winning hole 314C. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the electric device 315b is less likely to be activated, a so-called left shot is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the left side area of the game board 31 in order to cause the game ball to enter the central first winning hole 314C, which is more likely to receive a game ball than the right first winning hole 314R.

The second winning opening 315 provides an opportunity for the second special jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball. In this embodiment, the second winning opening 315 is located directly above the right first winning opening 314R to the right of the pattern display section 341, and allows game balls that are shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flow down the right side of the pattern display section 341 to enter the second winning opening 315.

The second winning port 315 is also provided with a ball entry sensor (not shown), which detects the entry of a game ball into the right first winning port 314R. Furthermore, the second winning port 315 is provided with an electric device 315b that switches between a state in which the entry of game balls into the second winning port 315 is restricted and a state in which the entry of game balls into the second winning port 315 is permitted. The electric device 315b is activated in a normal winning game that is executed when the result of a normal winning lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 317 is a normal winning game. In other words, the electric device 315b is in a state in which the entry of game balls into the second winning port 315 is restricted except when a normal winning game is being executed, and is in a state in which the entry of game balls into the second winning port 315 is permitted during the execution of a normal winning game.

In this embodiment, the game state is set to a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is high (see FIG. 12(B)) and the electric device 315b is likely to be activated, and the second winning hole 315 is shot into the right area of the game board 31 and can receive a game ball that flows down the right side of the symbol display section 341. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, in order to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode, a so-called right hit is encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the right area of the game board 31.

The variable winning opening 316 is capable of receiving a game ball in a jackpot game that is played when the result of the first special jackpot lottery or the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319, and the opening/closing door 319 is operated in a jackpot game to open the variable winning opening 316, allowing a game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable winning opening 316 is provided on the lower side of the right area of the game board 31. When the variable winning opening 316 is opened in a jackpot game, although this is not clearly shown in the drawing, game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316, but game balls shot into the left area of the game board 31 cannot enter the variable winning opening. Therefore, in a jackpot game, so-called right-hand shots, which shoot game balls into the right area of the game board 31, are encouraged.

The variable winning opening 316 is not limited to being located in the right area of the game board 31, and may be located, for example, in the left area of the game board 31 or below the first central winning opening 314C. In this case, when the variable winning opening 316 is opened during a jackpot game, game balls shot into the left area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316. The variable winning opening 316 may also be located so that both game balls shot into the left area of the game board 31 and game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening.

The through gate 317 provides an opportunity to execute a lottery for determining whether or not to operate the electric device 315b (whether or not to execute a normal winning game) based on the passage of the game ball. In the first embodiment described above, the through gate 317L is provided in the left area of the game board 31, and the through gate 317R is provided in the right area of the game board 31, so that two through gates 317L and 317R are provided. However, in this embodiment, only one through gate 317 is provided directly above the second winning hole 315 to the right of the pattern display section 341, so that a game ball that is shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side of the pattern display section 341 can pass through. In addition, a ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in the second winning hole 315, and the ball entry sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317.

As described above, in the time-saving game state, in order to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode in which the electric role 315b operates frequently, so-called right-hand hits are encouraged, in which the game ball is shot into the right area of the game board 31. The through gate 317 allows the game ball that is shot into the right area of the game board 31 and flows down the right side of the pattern display unit 341 to pass through, and based on the game ball passing through the through gate 317, a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to activate the electric role 315b (open the second winning hole 315). Therefore, in the time-saving game state, by shooting the game ball into the right area of the game board 31, so-called right-hand hits, not only can the game ball pass through the through gate 317, but the game ball can also enter the second winning hole 315, so the benefits of the time-saving game state can be enjoyed to the maximum by continuously hitting from the right side without having to distinguish between right and left hits.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the central first winning opening 314C, in the time-saving game state, right-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to pass through the through gate 317 and enter the second winning opening 315 when the electric device 315b is activated, and in the jackpot game state, right-handed hits are encouraged to cause the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316 when the opening/closing door 319 is activated.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, with reference to Figures 127 to 129, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Special drawing reservation storage area 412b]
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine, but the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special chart and the second special chart can be changed simultaneously. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the special chart reserved storage area 412b. Here, FIG. 127 is a block diagram showing an example of the special chart reserved storage area 412b provided in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 128 and FIG. 129 are diagrams showing an example of a table used in the main control device 4.

Since the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variation machine, unlike the first embodiment described above, a special pattern execution area AEA, AEB is provided for each special pattern reservation storage area REA, REB. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, a first special pattern execution area AEA is provided for the first special pattern reservation storage area REA, and a second special pattern execution area AEB is provided for the second special pattern reservation storage area REB. Then, when the first special pattern display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern, the first special pattern win/loss information stored in the first reservation area REA1 of the first special pattern reservation storage area REA is moved to the first special pattern execution area AEA. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, the second special symbol win/loss information stored in the first reserved area REB1 of the second special symbol reserved storage area REB is moved to the second special symbol execution area AEB.

[Jackpot Win/Loss Table]
In this embodiment, the game state (probability change game state) corresponding to the high probability mode of the first embodiment described above is not set, and the normal game state and the time-saving game state in which the probability (jackpot probability) of the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot are the same are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128(A), in this embodiment, there is one jackpot winning/losing table used in the jackpot lottery, and this jackpot winning/losing table is used in common in the normal game state and the time-saving game state. In the jackpot winning/losing table, of the 65536 jackpot random number counter values (random number values) from 0 to 65535, 437 random number values from 0 to 436 are specified as jackpots, and the remaining random number values are specified as misses. That is, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is unified at about 1/150.

[Jackpot type allocation table]
In this embodiment, the jackpot corresponding to the probability jackpot of the first embodiment is not set, and only the jackpot corresponding to the normal jackpot of the first embodiment is set. That is, in this embodiment, only the jackpot that transitions to the time-saving game state a after the jackpot game is finished is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128(B), in this embodiment, two types of jackpot types are set as jackpot types, 5R jackpot and 16R jackpot. In the jackpot type allocation table, of the 20 jackpot type counter values 0 to 19, 10 values 0 to 9 are defined as 5R jackpots, and 10 values 10 to 19 are defined as 16R jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, the allocation ratio between the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot is 1:1.

If the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, a 5R jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened and closed by the operation of the opening and closing door 319, and a transition to the time-saving game state is made after the 5R jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R jackpot, a 16R jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened and closed by the operation of the opening and closing door 319, and a transition to the time-saving game state is made after the 16R jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the time-saving game state "a," the frequency of support for the entry of game balls into the second winning port 315 by the electric device 315b is high (see FIG. 12(B)), and the operating time of the electric device 315b is set long (see FIG. 12(D)), making it easier for game balls to enter the second winning port 315. Therefore, the time-saving game state "a" is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state in that there are more opportunities for a jackpot draw. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (special game games) that can be played in the time-saving game state "a" (number of time-saving games) is set to 200 times.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common jackpot type table is used when the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a jackpot and when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but different jackpot type tables may be provided when the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a jackpot and when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

[Defect type sorting table]
In this embodiment, three types of miss type allocation tables are set: a normal game state first special chart miss type allocation table (see Figure 128 (C)) used for a miss in the first special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state; a time-saving game state first special chart miss type allocation table (see Figure 128 (D)) used for a miss in the first special chart jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state; and a second special chart miss type allocation table (see Figure 128 (E)) used for a miss in the second special chart jackpot lottery.

As shown in FIG. 128(C) and FIG. 128(D), in this embodiment, as with the first embodiment described above, the types of misses in the first special chart jackpot lottery are set as front and rear miss reach, front and rear non-miss reach, and complete miss, and furthermore, the time-saving pattern stop miss, which is not set in the first embodiment described above, is set. Here, the time-saving pattern stop miss is notified by the stop display of a specific pattern set as the time-saving pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 of the main display section 36, indicating that the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss. And, in this embodiment, as described above, when it is notified in the normal game state that the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss (when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern display section 362 in the normal game state), the game state is transitioned to the c time-saving game state.

In addition, in the normal game state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in FIG. 128(C), the allocation rate of the time-saving symbol stop miss is set to 0.42%, while in the time-saving game state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in FIG. 128(D), the allocation rate of the time-saving symbol stop miss is set to 50.21%. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state, the probability of the time-saving symbol stop miss is low, and in the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state, the probability of the time-saving symbol stop miss is set to high. In other words, if the first special symbol jackpot lottery is drawn in the normal game state, the lottery result is unlikely to be a time-saving symbol stop miss, and if the first special symbol jackpot lottery is drawn in the time-saving game state, the lottery result is likely to be a time-saving symbol stop miss. As a result, it is difficult to transition to the time-saving game state c based on the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the normal game state.

As mentioned above, the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery in the time-saving play state is likely to be a miss on the time-saving symbol stop, but in order to transition to the c time-saving play state, the condition is that the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 in the normal play state. On the other hand, in the b time-saving play state, the number of time-saving plays is set to 2000 (see FIG. 124), and a jackpot is essentially guaranteed, so that the maximum number of special symbol plays will not be played in the b time-saving play state, and as a result, there is essentially no transition from the b time-saving play state to the normal play state. Therefore, even if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery in the b time-saving game state is a time-saving pattern stop miss, the first special chart game that started in the b time-saving game state to notify the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery will not end in the normal game state, that is, the first special chart that has started to change display in response to the first special chart jackpot lottery will not be stopped and displayed in the normal game state. As a result, there is substantially no transition to the c time-saving game state based on the first special chart jackpot lottery in the b time-saving game state.

Of course, the number of time-saving play times that can be performed in the time-saving play state b can be set to a range in which a jackpot is not guaranteed in the time-saving play state b, just like the time-saving play state a, and the game can be transitioned to the time-saving play state c based on the first special jackpot drawing in the time-saving play state b. In other words, even when transitioning to the time-saving play state b, it is also possible to provide the same playability as when transitioning to the time-saving play state a.

In addition, the allocation rate of the time-saving pattern stop miss when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a miss is not limited to the example of the first special chart miss type allocation table shown in FIG. 128 (C) and FIG. 128 (D), and can be changed in various ways. For example, it is possible to set the allocation rate of the time-saving pattern stop miss when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery executed in the normal game state is a miss to the same as the jackpot probability (1/150 = 0.67%). In this case, in the normal game state, a gameplay is given in which the lottery result of the jackpot and the time-saving pattern stop miss, which have the same probability, is obtained first. In addition, it is possible to set the allocation rate of the time-saving pattern stop miss when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery executed in the a time-saving game state is a miss to 100% or to approach 100%. In this case, when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, the probability that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game will be a time-saving symbol stop miss is 100% or nearly 100%, so you can enjoy the progress of the game in the time-saving game state a by focusing only on the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common time-saving game state first special symbol miss type allocation table is set in all time-saving game states (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c), but a first special symbol miss type allocation table may be set for each time-saving game state. Also, a common first special symbol miss type allocation table may be set for two of the three time-saving game states, and a different first special symbol miss type allocation table may be set for the remaining one time-saving game state. For example, a miss type allocation table with a low allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses such as the time-saving game state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in FIG. 128 (D) may be set for the time-saving game state a, and a miss type allocation table with a low allocation rate for time-saving symbol stop misses similar to the normal game state first special symbol miss type allocation table shown in FIG. 128 (C) may be set for the time-saving game state b and time-saving game states c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128(E), the types of misses in the second special chart jackpot lottery are set to front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, and complete miss, as in the first embodiment described above, and time-saving pattern stop miss is not set. In other words, in this embodiment, time-saving pattern stop miss is set as a result of the first special chart jackpot lottery, and is not set as a result of the second special chart jackpot lottery. Therefore, the entry of a game ball into the second winning slot 315 does not trigger a transition to the time-saving c game state.

[Jackpot fluctuation table]
In this embodiment, one type of jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 129(A) is set, which is different from the first embodiment described above in which two types of jackpot fluctuation tables (see FIG. 10(A) and FIG. 10(B)) are provided according to the jackpot type (normal jackpot and special jackpot). That is, in this embodiment, only the jackpot equivalent to the normal jackpot in the first embodiment described above is set, and no jackpot equivalent to the special jackpot in the first embodiment described above is set, so there is only one jackpot fluctuation table. And in this embodiment, the jackpot fluctuation table is shared between the 5R jackpot and the 12R jackpot.

In addition, in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, three types of special chart variation patterns are set as the special chart variation pattern: special chart variation pattern "01" with a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, special chart variation pattern "02" with a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds, and special chart variation pattern "03" with a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds. In addition, in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, the special chart variation pattern with a longer special chart variation display time is more likely to be selected. Specifically, in the jackpot variation table, the allocation rate of each special chart variation pattern is set to 5% for special chart variation pattern "01", 25% for special chart variation pattern "02", and 70% for special chart variation pattern "03". In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the special chart variation pattern with a longer special chart variation display time is more likely to be selected, so the longer the special chart variation display time, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot.

[Outlier fluctuation table]
In this embodiment, the loss variation table used when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss is set in four types shown in Fig. 129 (B) to Fig. 129 (D), which is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in which there is only one type of loss variation table (see Fig. 10 (C)). Specifically, in this embodiment, as the loss variation table, four types are set: a first special chart loss variation table A used when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state shown in Fig. 128 (B), a first special chart loss variation table B used when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery in the a time-saving game state shown in Fig. 128 (C), a normal game state second special chart loss variation table used when the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state shown in Fig. 128 (D), and a time-saving game state second special chart loss variation table used when the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state shown in Fig. 128 (E) is a miss. In the miss variation table of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the special chart variation display time for front and rear miss reaches, reaches other than front and rear misses, and complete misses is set as the special chart variation pattern, and the special chart variation pattern for front and rear miss reaches and reaches other than front and rear misses is the same as in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 10 (C)).

In addition, unlike the first embodiment described above, the first special chart miss variation table A and the first special chart miss variation table B shown in FIG. 129(B) and FIG. 129(C) have the special chart change display time for a time-saving pattern stop miss set as the special chart change pattern. However, in the first special chart miss variation table A and the first special chart miss variation table B, the special chart change pattern for a time-saving pattern stop miss is made common to a complete miss. This makes it impossible to determine from the special chart change pattern (special chart change display time) whether the miss type is a complete miss or a time-saving pattern stop miss.

In addition, in the first special chart miss variation table A shown in FIG. 129(B), the special chart variation pattern is set so that the special chart variation display time for a complete miss and a time-saving pattern stop miss is shorter than the front-back miss reach and the reach other than the front-back miss. Specifically, for a complete miss and a time-saving pattern stop miss, the special chart variation pattern "04" with a special chart variation display time of 7 seconds, the special chart variation pattern "05" with a special chart variation display time of 10 seconds, and the special chart variation pattern "06" with a special chart variation display time of 15 seconds are set, and the special chart variation display time of each of the special chart variation patterns "04" to "06" is set shorter than the special chart variation display time of the front-back miss reach and the reach other than the front-back miss.

On the other hand, in the first special chart miss variation table B shown in FIG. 129(C), the special chart change pattern is set so that the special chart change display time for a complete miss and a time-saving pattern stop miss is longer than that in the first special chart miss variation table A shown in FIG. 129(B). Specifically, for a complete miss and a time-saving pattern stop miss, the special chart change pattern "07" with a special chart change display time of 50 seconds, the special chart change pattern "08" with a special chart change display time of 100 seconds, and the special chart change pattern "09" with a special chart change display time of 150 seconds are set, and the special chart change display time of each of the special chart change patterns "07" to "09" is set longer than the special chart change display time for a complete miss and a time-saving pattern stop miss in the first special chart miss variation table A shown in FIG. 129(B).

Here, as mentioned above, it is difficult to transition to the time-saving c game state based on the first special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state, and there is practically no transition to the time-saving c game state based on the first special chart jackpot lottery in the time-saving b game state. Also, there is no transition to the time-saving c game state based on the first special chart jackpot lottery in the time-saving c game state. And, in the case of a complete miss, it is understood that there is no jackpot early from the execution of the first special chart game. Therefore, in the first special chart miss variation table A used when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state, the time-saving b game state, and the time-saving c game state is a miss as shown in FIG. 129 (B), for a complete miss and a time-saving pattern stop miss in which it is difficult to expect a transition to the time-saving c game state or a jackpot, in order to end the first special chart game early, the special chart variation patterns "04" to "06" with short special chart variation display times are set.

In contrast, in the first special chart jackpot lottery in the a time-saving game state, as described above, compared to the first special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state and the b time-saving game state, there is a high expectation of transitioning to the c time-saving game state based on the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery being a time-saving miss, compared to the first special chart jackpot lottery in the normal game state and the b time-saving game state. Therefore, in the first special chart miss variation table B used in the a time-saving game state shown in FIG. 129 (C), for the time-saving pattern stop miss that can be expected to transition to the c time-saving game state, special chart variation patterns "07" to "09" with long special chart variation display times are set to enhance the sense of expectation during the variation display in the first special chart game. And, in order to make it impossible to determine whether the miss type is a time-saving pattern stop miss or a complete miss when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery in the a time-saving game state is a miss, special chart variation patterns "07" to "09" with long special chart variation display times are also set for complete misses.

Furthermore, in the first special chart out-of-time variation table B, the special chart variation patterns "07" to "09" with long special chart variation display times are set, which increases the possibility that the first special chart game that is started in the time-saving game state a will end in the normal game state to which it is transitioned after the time-saving game state a ends, as described below.

In addition, in the second special chart miss variation table (normal game state second special chart miss variation table and time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table) used for the second special chart jackpot lottery shown in Figures 129 (D) and 129 (E), the time-saving pattern stop miss is not set as the miss type when the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss (see Figure 128 (E)), so the special chart variation pattern for the time-saving pattern stop miss is not set, and the special chart variation display time for the front and rear miss reach, the reach other than front and rear miss, and the complete miss is set as the special chart variation pattern, as in the first embodiment described above.

In the second special chart miss variation table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 129 (D), a special chart variation pattern "06" in which the special chart variation display time is 15 seconds is set for a complete miss, and except that three types of special chart variation pattern "06" for a complete miss are set, it is the same as the miss variation table of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 10 (C)).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the second winning hole 315 is provided in the right area of the game board 31, and the right first winning hole 314R is provided in the right area of the game board 31. However, in the normal game state, the frequency of support by the electric device 315b for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 is low and the operation time of the electric device 315b is short, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315. Also, since it is more difficult to enter the right first winning hole 314R than the central first winning hole 314C, in the normal game state, a left hit is encouraged, which shoots the game ball into the left area of the game board 31 in order to progress the game by having the game ball enter the central first winning hole 314C. In this way, in this embodiment, measures are taken against right-handed hits in the normal game state by increasing the disadvantage of performing a right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the right area of the game board 31 in the normal game state, but it is also possible to take measures against right-handed hits in the normal game state by setting part or all of the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game in the normal game state to be longer, thereby increasing the disadvantage of right-handed hits.

On the other hand, the second special chart miss variation table in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 129(E) has only one special chart variation pattern set for a complete miss, which differs from the second special chart miss variation table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 129(D) in which three special chart variation patterns are set for a complete miss, and the miss variation table of the aforementioned first embodiment (see FIG. 10(C)) in which two special chart variation patterns are set for a complete miss.

In addition, in the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table, as in the first embodiment described above, three types of special chart variation patterns are set for the front and rear miss reach and the reach other than the front and rear miss: special chart variation pattern "01" with a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, special chart variation pattern "02" with a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds, and special chart variation pattern "03" with a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds. In the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table of this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the front and rear miss reach or the reach other than the front and rear miss, the special chart variation pattern with a shorter special chart variation display time is more likely to be selected, and the special chart variation pattern with a longer special chart variation display time is less likely to be selected. Specifically, in the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table, the allocation rate of each special chart variation pattern is set to 50% for the special chart variation pattern "01", 30% for the special chart variation pattern "02", and 20% for the special chart variation pattern "03".

Here, in the jackpot variation table described above with reference to FIG. 129(A), the longer the special chart variation display time, the more likely it is to be selected as the special chart variation pattern. In other words, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the longer the special chart variation display time, the more likely it is to be selected as the special chart variation pattern, so the longer the special chart variation display time, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In contrast, in the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table described above with reference to FIG. 129(E), when the result of the jackpot lottery is a front-back miss reach or a reach other than a front-back miss, the shorter the special chart variation display time, the more likely it is to be selected as the special chart variation pattern, and the longer the special chart variation display time, the less likely it is to be selected as the special chart variation pattern. Therefore, in the second special chart game started in the time-saving game state, the longer the second special chart variation display time, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery will be a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the time-saving game state includes the time-saving game state a to which the game is transitioned after the end of a jackpot game, and if a first special symbol game that is started in the time-saving game state a and in which the time-saving symbol is displayed frozen is displayed frozen in the normal game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of the time-saving game state a by playing the maximum number of special symbol games, the game is transitioned to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a and in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed. And if a first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is displayed frozen is started in the time-saving game state a, if the variable display time of the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the first special symbol game is long, the number of times that the second special symbol game can be executed during the execution of the first special symbol game will be reduced. As a result, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the first special symbol game in the a time-saving game state, the lower the possibility that the second special symbol game can be executed for the remaining number of time-saving times up to the upper limit number in the a time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game and transition to the normal game state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In this way, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the first special symbol game, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. This realizes a new gameplay in which the gameplay in the time-saving game state a is changed from a gameplay in which the player can benefit from transitioning to the time-saving game state c by playing the second special symbol game the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit number of times in the time-saving game state a while the first special symbol game is being executed (a gameplay in which the timing of transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is important when the first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is started in the time-saving game state a) to a gameplay in which the player can benefit from execution of a jackpot game based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot, as in the time-saving game state a of a conventional gaming machine (a gameplay in which the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is important).

In addition, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the first special symbol game in the a time-shortened game state, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous c time-shortened game state, but the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Therefore, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the first special symbol game in the a time-shortened game state, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous c time-shortened game state, which causes a decrease in interest in playing in the c time-shortened game state, and this can be suppressed by increasing the expectation of a jackpot. This suppresses a decrease in interest in playing in the c time-shortened game state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in playing.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table, only the special chart variation pattern "10" is set, in which the special chart variation display time is significantly shorter than the complete miss, 0.5 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, when the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a miss, the distribution rate of complete miss is high as the miss type (see FIG. 128 (E)). Therefore, in the time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c) in which the game ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 315 with the support of the electric role 315b, many second special chart games can be executed in a short time. As a result, for example, in the time-saving game state b and time-saving game state c, in which the upper limit number of time-saving games is as high as 2000 times, it is possible to shorten the time required for the result of the jackpot lottery to become a jackpot after transitioning to these time-saving game states. This allows players to play without feeling too much stress until the jackpot game is executed, even if it takes a long time for the special jackpot lottery result to become a jackpot.

In this embodiment, when a time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the first special pattern display section 362 of the main display section 36 in the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state a by executing a specified number (200 times) of special pattern games in the time-saving game state a, the game transitions to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the time-saving game state a and the normal game state. That is, in this embodiment, when a first special pattern game in which a time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state is started in the time-saving game state a, the timing of transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is important. Therefore, when a variable display of a first special pattern in which a time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state is started in the time-saving game state a, it is important to execute a second special pattern game until the upper limit number in the time-saving game state a is reached during the variable display of the first special pattern, and transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state before the time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the first special pattern display section 362. Specifically, in the a time-saving game state, for the first special symbol game in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the longer the variable display time of the first special symbol, the more times the second special symbol game is executed during the variable display, and the higher the possibility of transitioning to the normal game state when the first special symbol is stopped, so a longer variable display time is preferable. On the other hand, for the second special symbol in which the variable display starts in the a time-saving game state, the shorter the variable display time, the shorter the time until the maximum number of special symbol games in the a time-saving game state are executed, that is, the shorter the time until transitioning to the normal game state, so a shorter variable display time of the second special symbol is preferable.

In this embodiment, in the first special chart miss variation table B used in the time-saving game state a shown in FIG. 129(C), the variable display time of the first special chart when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery is a complete miss or a time-saving pattern stop miss is set long (50 seconds, 100 seconds, or 150 seconds), while in the time-saving game state including the time-saving game state a shown in FIG. 129(E), the variable display time of the second special chart when the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery is a complete miss is set significantly short (0.5 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, a long first special chart variable display time is selected for the first special chart whose variable display starts in the time-saving game state a, while a short variable display time is selected for the second special chart whose variable display starts in the time-saving game state a. As a result, in this embodiment, it is realistic that the variable display of the first special symbol that started in the time-saving game state a will be stopped and displayed in the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state a by playing the special symbol game the specified number of times (200 times) in the time-saving game state a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery notified by the first special chart game started in the a time-saving game state is a complete miss or a time-saving pattern stop miss, the longest first special chart variable display time is 150 seconds for the special chart variable pattern "09", whereas the second special chart variable display time when the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery notified by the second special chart game started in the a time-saving game state is a complete miss is 0.5 seconds (special chart variable pattern "10"). If 0.5 seconds is selected as the second special chart variable display time for all second special chart games in the a time-saving game state and the specified number of second special chart games are played consecutively, that is, the shortest time for the a time-saving game state is 100 seconds (= 0.5 seconds x 200 times), which is shorter than the 150 seconds of the special chart variable pattern "09" that can be set for the first special chart game started in the a time-saving game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, when 150 seconds is selected as the variable display time of the first special symbol game that starts in the time-saving game state a, there is a possibility that the first special symbol game will end in the normal game state at that time. In this way, by setting multiple variable display times for the first special symbol game that starts in the time-saving game state a, including one that is longer than the shortest time in the time-saving game state a, when the first special symbol game starts in the time-saving game state a, you can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the longest special symbol variable display time will be selected, and the interest of the game in the time-saving game state a is improved.

Here, the time attack performance will be described in detail later, but the time attack performance is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving play state is a time-saving symbol stop miss. In this time attack performance, in the symbol display section 341, the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving play state, and the second decorative symbol 79 is displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game started during the execution of the first special symbol game, and further, a remaining time image corresponding to the remaining variable display time (remaining time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game and a remaining number of spins image corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining number of spins) until the maximum number of time-saving games in the a time-saving play state is reached are displayed (see Figures 153 (A) to 153 (F)).

In this way, in this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving play state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, a time attack performance is executed, so that the player can focus on the remaining time image, the remaining spins image, the changing and stopped display of the first decorative symbol 78, and the changing and stopped display of the second decorative symbol 79 in the time attack performance, and enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the time attack performance executed in the a time-saving play state.

Specifically, first, when a time attack performance is executed, by checking the remaining time image for the remaining time, the player can grasp the variable display time of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol 78) in the first special symbol game, and can enjoy estimating the likelihood of the game state being able to transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. For example, if it can be confirmed that the special symbol variable pattern "09", which is the longest variable display time for the first special symbol game, of 150 seconds, has been set based on the remaining time image at the start of the time attack performance, it can be determined that there is a high expectation that the game state will be able to transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends, and therefore, at the start of the time attack performance, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the remaining time image.

After the time attack performance is executed, for example, by focusing on the first decorative pattern 78, it is possible to confirm that the first special pattern game has not ended, and by checking the remaining time image, the time until the first special pattern game ends can be confirmed. On the other hand, by focusing on the second decorative pattern 79, it is possible to confirm that the second special pattern game has started or ended, and by checking the remaining number of rotations image, the number of second special pattern games required to transition the game state from the a time-saving game state to the normal game state can be confirmed. Therefore, while confirming that the first decorative pattern 78 is not displayed stationary, the player can confirm that the second special pattern game has ended during the execution of the first special pattern game (during the variable display of the first special pattern) and that the remaining number of rotations has decreased by the remaining number of rotations image. This allows the player to enjoy the game while hoping that the second decorative pattern 79 will change while the first decorative pattern 78 is changing, and that the second decorative pattern 79 will stop changing and be displayed in a short time.

Furthermore, after the time attack performance has started, the remaining variable display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the number of times the second special symbol game is required before the game is switched to the normal game state can be confirmed based on the remaining spins image. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins image, the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the remaining spins will decrease at a faster rate than the remaining time, and can also enjoy the game while inferring the possibility of switching to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time confirmed based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins confirmed based on the remaining spins image decrease and approach 0, the player can enjoy the game while paying attention to which of the remaining time or the remaining spins will reach 0 first.

In addition, if the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is set to be long after the time attack performance has started, when the player focuses on the second decorative symbol 79, the player feels disgusted that the remaining number of spins is not subtracted because the second decorative symbol 79 is not displayed stationary for a long time, and furthermore, the longer the second decorative symbol 79 is, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the normal game state becomes, so there is a concern that the player's disgust will decrease his interest in the game during the execution of the time attack performance. In contrast, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a becomes, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot. This makes it possible to suppress the player's decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the time attack performance caused by the second decorative symbol 79 not being displayed stationary for a long time.

[Processing of main control device 4]
The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, which is configured as a loop probability variable machine, in that the probability variable game state is not set, and the first special chart and the second special chart can be changed simultaneously. Also, as described above, a part of the configuration of the game board 31 is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in a part of the processing executed by the main control device 4. Specifically, the processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is different in the first special chart reservation command setting processing, the through gate processing, the normal chart game control processing, the normal chart winning game control processing, the special chart game control processing, the big winning game control processing, and the game state transition processing. Hereinafter, these processing will be described with reference to FIG. 130 to FIG. 147.

[First special chart hold command setting process]
Here, Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special chart reservation command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of Fig. 18. The first special chart reservation command includes information indicating that the command is the first special chart reservation command, the result of the big win lottery (big win type or miss), the special chart variable display time, the first special chart reservation number N, and other information. Below, the first special chart reservation command setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 130.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 130, the MPU 41 reads out the first special chart reservation number N from the first special chart reservation number memory area NAA of the first special chart reservation storage area REA, and reads out the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special chart reservation from the RAM 412 (step S3301).

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery for the first special chart reservation is a jackpot based on whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, if the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3303. On the other hand, if the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S3302: No), that is, if it is a miss, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3305.

<Step S3303>
If the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special chart change type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3303). For example, when the first special chart win/loss information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special chart change type counter CS1 included in the first special chart win/loss information stored in the third reserved area REA3 are read. In addition, the reserved area in which the first special chart win/loss information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the first special chart reserved number storage area NAA.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the big win type counter C2, the special pattern variation type counter CS1, and the first special pattern reservation number N in the first special pattern reservation command, and ends the first special pattern reservation command setting process. In this way, since the first special pattern reservation command includes the first special pattern reservation number N read out in step S3301, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 receiving the first special pattern reservation command can recognize which of the first special pattern reservation areas REA1 to REA4 stores the first special pattern hit/miss information that the first special pattern reservation command corresponds to by referring to the reservation number N included in the first special pattern reservation command.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot win (step S3302: No), that is, if it is a miss, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3305). Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss, the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1, and the first special chart reservation number N in the first special chart reservation command (step S3306), and ends the first special chart reservation command setting process.

The first special drawing hold command set in step S3304 or S3306 of the first special drawing hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1401 of the main process in FIG. 21, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the contents of the first special drawing hold command described here are merely an example, and are not limited to those described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp contents similar to the first special drawing hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first special drawing hold command is included in another command.

The second special chart reservation command setting process is similar to the first special chart reservation command setting process, so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the second special chart reservation command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first special chart reservation command" with the "second special chart reservation command" and the "first special chart reservation number N" with the "second special chart reservation number M" in the first special chart reservation command setting process.

[Through gate processing]
In this embodiment, only one through gate 317 is provided, which is different from the first embodiment described above in which two through gates 317L and 317R are provided, and therefore the through gate processing is different from that of the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the through gate processing. In the through gate processing of this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the through gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the regular game reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412. Hereinafter, the through gate processing will be described with reference to FIG. 131.

<Step S3401>
As shown in Fig. 131, in the through gate process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 is judged based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 17. If the MPU 41 judges that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), it shifts the process to step S3402, and if it judges that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: No), it ends the through gate process.

<Step S3402>
When the MPU 41 judges that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), it judges whether the normal map change reservation number X stored in the normal map change reservation number memory area SNA set in the normal map reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment) (step S3402). When the normal map change reservation number X is the maximum reservation number (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate processing, and when the normal map change reservation number X is not the maximum reservation number (step S3402: No), the processing proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If the regular map variation pending number X is not the maximum pending number (step S3402: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the regular map variation pending number X (step S3403), obtains the counter values of the regular hit random number counter C4 and the regular hit type random number counter C5 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. 17, and the value of the regular map variation type counter CS2 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing in FIG. 21 described below, stores the counter values in the first empty pending area among the regular map first pending area SE1 to the regular map fourth pending area SE4 of the regular map pending storage area 412c in RAM 412 (step S3404), and terminates the through gate processing.

[General game control processing]
Here, Fig. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the normal game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the normal game control process, a process for controlling the variable display and stop display of the normal game in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, the normal game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 132.

<Step S1501>
As shown in Fig. 132, in the normal game control process, first, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the normal game change display flag indicating that the normal symbol is being changed (normal game is being executed) is on (step S1501). The normal game change display flag is set to on in step S1711 when the normal symbol change display (normal game) starts in the normal game change start process in Fig. 134 described later, and is set to off in step S1510 in the normal game control process when the normal symbol is stopped (normal game ends).

If the normal map change display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), i.e., if a normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S1507. On the other hand, if the normal map change display flag is off (step S1501: No), i.e., if a normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S1502.

<Step S1502>
When the normal map variation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal map game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the electric role open flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open (the normal map winning game is being played) is on (step S1502). The electric role open flag is set to on in step S1811 when the electric role 315b is opened in the normal map winning game control process of FIG. 135 described later, and is set to off in step S1818 when the electric role 315b is closed.

If the electric role open flag is on (step S1502: Yes), i.e., if a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. On the other hand, if the electric role open flag is off (step S1502: No), i.e., if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1503.

<Step S1503>
When the electric role open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is being played, is on (step S1503). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when the jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1503: Yes), and if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, normal game play is not started while a jackpot game is being played.

Of course, a normal game may be started during the execution of a jackpot game. In this case, a win/loss determination for the normal lottery is performed based on the win/loss information (the values of the normal random number counter C4, the normal random number counter C5, and the normal variable type counter CS2) moved from the normal first reserve area SE1 of the normal reserve storage area 412c to the normal execution area SAE according to the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) before the jackpot game is started, that is, according to the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state. In other words, when the game state before the big win game is executed is a high-frequency support mode, which is a sure-win game state or a time-limited game state, the lottery for the regular win (regular win or miss), the regular win type (long-open regular win or short-open regular win), and the regular win display time are set based on the regular win hit/miss table (see FIG. 12(B)), the regular win type table (see FIG. 12(D)), and the regular win change table (not shown) for the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the game state before the big win game is executed is a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, the lottery for the regular win (regular win or miss), the regular win type (long-open regular win or short-open regular win), and the regular win display time are set based on the regular win hit/miss table (see FIG. 12(A)), the regular win type table (see FIG. 12(C)), and the regular win change table (not shown) for the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1503: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
If the electric role open flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, if a normal winning game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal variable reserve number X stored in the normal variable reserve number memory area SNA set in the normal reserve storage area 412c of the RAM 412 is 0 (step S1504). If the normal variable reserve number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process, and if the normal variable reserve number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the process proceeds to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the number of reserved ordinary map changes X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes the ordinary map data setting process for the ordinary map correctness information stored in the ordinary map reserved storage area 412c (step S1505), and the process proceeds to step S1506. Details of the ordinary map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern change start process to cause the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to execute a change display of the normal pattern based on the information stored in the normal pattern reserve storage area 412c, and ends the normal pattern game control process. Details of the normal pattern change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1507>
When the normal map variation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal map game is being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the jackpot game in progress flag, which indicates that the jackpot game is being played, is on (step S1507). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when the jackpot game starts in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1507: No), i.e., if the jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal pattern variable display time has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern variable display (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is the timing to stop displaying the normal pattern displayed in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 (end the normal pattern game).

If the normal symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol game), the MPU 41 transitions to step S1509. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variable display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (ending normal symbol game), the MPU 41 ends the normal symbol game control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
When the normal pattern variation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game starts during the normal pattern game, or when the normal pattern variation display time of the normal pattern has elapsed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop displaying the normal pattern that is displayed (end the normal pattern game), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal pattern on the pattern corresponding to the result of the normal pattern winning lottery corresponding to the normal pattern game (step S1509), and sets the normal pattern variation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed (the normal pattern game is being executed) to off (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern variation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended, to on (step S1511), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

The normal map fluctuation stop display flag is referenced in step S1801 of the normal map winning game control process in FIG. 135 to determine whether it is time to start the normal map winning game (open the electric role 315b).

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal pattern is not only stopped (normal game is ended) when the normal pattern change display time of the normal pattern has elapsed, but also when a jackpot game is started during normal game, the normal pattern is stopped (normal game is ended). In other words, when a jackpot game is started, the normal game is forcibly ended before the normal pattern change display time of the normal pattern has elapsed. Of course, the normal game may be continued until the normal pattern change display time of the normal pattern has elapsed even when a jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, Fig. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general map data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1505 of Fig. 132. In the general map data setting process, the contents stored in the general map reservation storage area 412c in the memory area of the main control device 4 in Fig. 11 are updated. Hereinafter, the general map data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 133.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 133, in the normal map data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal map change reservation number X stored in the normal map change reservation number storage area SNA (step S1601), and moves the normal map correctness information from the normal map first reservation area SE1 to the normal map execution area SAE (step S1602). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the normal map correctness information stored in the normal map second reservation area SE2 to the normal map fourth reservation area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the normal map correctness information in the normal map second reservation area SE2 is moved to the normal map first reservation area SE1, the normal map correctness information in the normal map third reservation area SE3 is moved to the normal map second reservation area SE2, and the normal map correctness information in the normal map fourth reservation area SE4 is moved to the normal map third reservation area SE3.

[Regular map change start processing]
Here, Fig. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of Fig. 132. In the normal pattern variation start processing, the normal pattern variation display in the normal pattern display unit 361 is started, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result in the normal pattern winning lottery. Below, the normal pattern variation start processing will be described with reference to Fig. 134.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 134, in the normal game variation start process, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, or time-saving game state c) in the high frequency support mode is on (step S1701). Here, the time-saving game state flag includes the time-saving game state flag a indicating the time-saving game state a, the time-saving game state flag b indicating the time-saving game state b, and the time-saving game state c indicating the time-saving game state c. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not any of the time-saving game state flag a, the time-saving game state flag b, and the time-saving game state flag c is set to on. In addition, the a-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the a-time-shortened game state in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, the b-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the b-time-shortened game state in step S4303 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, and the c-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the c-time-shortened game state in step S4308 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144.

If the time-saving game state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), i.e., the game is in a time-saving game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1702, and if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S1701: No), i.e., the game is in a normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
When the time-saving game state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, when the time-saving game state is in, the MPU 41 performs a normal win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the high-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12 (D)), whether the values of the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c correspond to a normal win or not.

On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S1701: No), that is, in the normal game state which is the low-frequency support mode, a normal win/loss judgment is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs a win/loss judgment based on the low-frequency support mode normal win/loss table (see FIG. 12(A)) and the low-frequency support mode normal win type allocation table (see FIG. 12(C)) to determine whether the normal win random number counter C4 and the normal win type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal win/loss information stored in the normal win execution area SAE of the normal win reserve storage area 412c are values corresponding to a normal win.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 judges whether or not the winning/losing decision is a normal winning (step S1702 or S1703), it judges whether or not the result of the winning/losing decision is a long-opening normal winning in which the second winning port 315 is long-opened (step S1704). When the result of the winning/losing decision is a long-opening normal winning (step S1704: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a long-opening normal winning flag indicating that the result of the winning/losing decision is a long-opening normal winning (step S1705) to on, and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, when the result of the winning/losing decision is not a long-opening normal winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1706.

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the winning/losing judgment is not a long opening regular winning (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning in which the second winning port 315 is short opening (step S1706). If the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a short opening regular winning flag indicating that the result of the winning/losing judgment is a short opening regular winning (step S1707) to on, and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is not a short opening regular winning (step S1706: No), that is, if the result of the winning/losing judgment is a miss, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
When the long open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1705), when the short open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1707), or when the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 executes a normal winning pattern setting process to set a normal winning pattern, which is the normal winning pattern display time in the normal winning pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 in a normal winning game, by referring to a normal winning pattern display table (not shown). As described above, the normal winning pattern display table (not shown) includes a high-frequency support mode normal winning pattern table that is referred to when in the high-frequency support mode, and a low-frequency support mode normal winning pattern display table that is referred to when in the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal winning pattern setting process, a normal winning pattern is set based on a normal winning pattern display table according to the support mode type. In addition, since the high-frequency support mode normal pattern change display table is set so that the average time for displaying the normal pattern changes is shorter than that of the low-frequency support mode normal pattern change display table, the time for which normal pattern play is performed is shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a regular map fluctuation pattern command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the win/lose judgment in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the regular map winning lottery) and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode) in addition to the regular map fluctuation pattern set in step S1708 (step S1709), and proceeds to step S1710.

The normal map fluctuation pattern command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. In response to this, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 and the like to execute an effect corresponding to the normal map game, such as an effect indicating that a normal map game is being played or an effect indicating the result of a normal map winning lottery, based on the normal map fluctuation pattern command.

The normal map fluctuation pattern command may be a command that at least notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the result of the normal map winning lottery or the type of support mode does not necessarily have to be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 as a normal map fluctuation pattern command. For example, the result of the normal map winning lottery may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a normal map winning lottery result command when a win/loss determination is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode may be notified to the voice lamp control device 5 by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of support mode after the transition to the high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variable display flag, which indicates that the normal symbol is being variably displayed, that is, that the normal symbol game is being executed, to ON (step S1711), and ends the normal symbol variable start process.

The normal symbol variation display flag is referenced in step S1501 of the normal symbol game control process in FIG. 22 to determine whether a normal symbol game is being played (normal symbol variation display).

[Regular winning game control processing]
Here, FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the normal winning game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. 21. In the normal winning game control process, when the result of the normal winning lottery is a winning, a process is executed to switch between an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 and a restricted state that restricts it by controlling the opening and closing of the electric role 315b. Hereinafter, the normal winning game control process will be described with reference to FIG. 135.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 135, in the normal winning game control process, the MPU 41 first judges whether or not the normal winning game stop display flag, which indicates that the normal winning pattern has been stopped and displayed (the normal winning game has ended), is on (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not it is the timing to start the normal winning game. The normal winning game stop display flag is set to on in step S1511 when the normal winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal winning game control process of FIG.

If the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), i.e., if it is time to start playing on a normal map, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802. On the other hand, if the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), i.e., if it is not time to start playing on a normal map, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1812.

<Step S1802>
When the normal figure variation stop display flag is on (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the normal figure winning game can be started, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on (step S1802). In the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, the jackpot game in progress flag is set to on in step S2206 when the jackpot game starts, and is set to off in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S1802: Yes), i.e., when a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 ends the normal jackpot game control process. In other words, in this embodiment, if the game is forcibly terminated due to the start of a jackpot game, the normal jackpot game will not start even if the result of the normal jackpot lottery for that normal game is a normal jackpot. In other words, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot game will not start while a jackpot game is being played. Of course, a new normal jackpot game may be started while a jackpot game is being played.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 judges whether the long open regular winning flag is set to on (step S1803). The long open regular winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery is a long open regular winning, and when the result of the regular winning lottery is a long open regular winning, it is set to on in step S1705 of the regular winning start processing of FIG. 134. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the regular winning lottery for the finished regular game is a long open regular winning. When the long open regular winning flag is set to on (step S1803: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1804, and when the long open regular winning flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a long open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric role 315b in the long open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315) (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the normal winning game control process in order to determine the return timing of the electric role 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1805) and proceeds to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
When the long open regular winning flag is set to OFF (step S1803: No), that is, when the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is not a long open regular winning, the MPU 41 judges whether the short open regular winning flag is set to ON (step S1806). The short open regular winning flag is a flag indicating that the result of the regular winning lottery is a short open regular winning, and when the result of the regular winning lottery is a short open regular winning, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the regular variation start processing of FIG. 134. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a short open regular winning. If the short-open regular winning flag is set on (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S1807, and if the short-open regular winning flag is set off (step S1806: No), i.e., if the result of the regular winning lottery for the completed regular game is a miss, the MPU 41 transitions processing to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short open normal winning flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal winning lottery for the completed normal game is a short open normal winning, the MPU 41 sets the value of the opening time counter to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric role 315b in the short open normal winning game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315) (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal winning flag to OFF (step S1808), and the process proceeds to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
When the result of the regular winning lottery is a win, if the flag indicating the type of regular winning (long open regular winning flag or short open regular winning flag) is set to OFF (step S1805 or S1808), the MPU 41 activates the electric role 315b (step S1809). This opens the second winning hole 315, and the second winning hole 315 is set to an allowable state that allows the game ball to enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role open command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role 315b is open (step S1810), and sets an electric role open flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open to ON (step S1811), and proceeds to step S1812.

The electric reel opening command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a performance indicating that the electric reel 315b is open to, for example, the pattern display unit 341, based on the electric reel opening command.

<Step S1812>
When the result of the regular winning lottery is a win and a process such as opening the electric device 315b is executed (steps S1803 to S1811), or when the long opening regular winning flag and the short opening regular winning flag are both set to off (when the result of the regular winning lottery is a miss) (both steps S1803 and S1806 are No), the MPU 41 sets to off the regular pattern change stop display flag, which indicates that the regular pattern has been stopped and displayed (the regular pattern game has ended) (step S1812), and terminates the regular pattern winning game control process.

<Step S1813>
When the normal map fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the electric role open flag, which is set to on when the electric role 315b is opened in step S1811 of the normal map winning game control processing, is set to on (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the normal map winning game is being executed. When the electric role open flag is set to on (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the normal map winning game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1814. On the other hand, when the electric role open flag is set to off (step S1813: No), that is, when the normal map winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal map winning game control processing.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric role open flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when a normal winning game is being played, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time counter set in step S1804 or S1807 of the normal winning game control process (step S1814), and judges whether the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether it is time to return the electric role 315b. When the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1816. On the other hand, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 ends the normal winning game control process.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric role 315b, the MPU 41 returns the electric role 315b (step S1816). This closes the second winning hole 315, and limits the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role closing command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role 315b has been closed (step S1817), and sets the electric role open flag indicating that the electric role 315b is open to OFF (step S1818), and ends the game control process for the normal winning.

The electric reel closing command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. This allows the audio lamp control device 5 to end the presentation indicating that the electric reel is open, which is executed, for example, in the pattern display unit 341, based on the electric reel closing command.

[Special game control processing]
In the special symbol game control process of this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is configured as a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously, so the control process for the first special symbol game and the control process for the second special symbol game are executed separately, which is different from the special symbol game control process of the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol game control process of this embodiment.

<Step S3501>
As shown in Fig. 136, in step S3501, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a first special symbol variable display flag indicating that the first special symbol is being variably displayed (first special symbol game is being executed) is on. The first special symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S3706 when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol game start process in Fig. 138 described later, and is set to off in step S3823 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game end process in Fig. 139 described later.

If the first special chart variable display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), i.e., the first special chart is being displayed in a variable manner (first special chart game is being played), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3507. On the other hand, if the first special chart variable display flag is off (step S3501: No), i.e., the first special chart is not being displayed in a variable manner (first special chart game is being played), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
If the first special chart variable display flag is off (step S3501: No), i.e., if the first special chart is not being displayed in a variable manner (first special chart game is not being played), the MPU 41 determines whether the first special chart reserved number N stored in the first special chart reserved number memory area NAA (see FIG. 127) of the special chart reserved storage area 412b is 0 or not (step S3502).

If the number of reserved first special charts N is 0 (step S3502: Yes), i.e., if the right to play the first special chart game is not reserved, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3508. On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special charts N is not 0 (step S3502: No), i.e., if the right to play the first special chart game is reserved, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the first special symbol reserved number N is not 0 (step S3502: No), that is, if the right to play the first special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 executes a first special symbol data setting process for the data of the first special symbol winning/losing information (first special symbol data) stored in the special symbol reserved storage area 412b (see FIG. 127) (step S3503), and the process proceeds to step S3504. Details of the first special symbol data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set to ON. The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON when a jackpot game is started in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF when a jackpot game is ended in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29.

If the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3504: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot game is being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3505. On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3504: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3506.

<Step S3505>
If the jackpot play in progress flag is set on (step S3504: Yes), i.e., if a jackpot play is in progress, the MPU 41 executes a first special chart execution area data rewrite process, and transitions to step S3506 to execute a first special chart start process.

Here, in the first special chart execution area data rewrite process, the first special chart variable display time of the first special chart data stored in the first special chart execution area AEA (see FIG. 127) of the special chart reserved storage area 412b is rewritten to 7 seconds (see FIG. 129), which is the shortest of the variable display times set for the first special chart. Of course, in the first special chart execution area data rewrite process, it is also conceivable to rewrite the first special chart variable display time to a time other than 7 seconds, for example, an extremely short time of less than 1 second.

In addition, when the first special chart execution area data rewrite process is executed, the first special chart start process of step S3506 is executed, so that the first special chart game is executed even if the jackpot game is being executed. As described above, when the game is transitioned to the a time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the reservation for the first special chart game is carried over to the a time-saving game state, and the first special chart game is prevented from being executed continuously in the a time-saving game state. In addition, the first special chart execution area data rewrite process shortens the first special chart variable display time, so that the reservation for the first special chart game is more reliably prevented from being carried over to the a time-saving game state. This prevents a strategy that makes it easier to end the first special chart game in the normal game state that transitions to the end of the a time-saving game state by intentionally reserving the right to execute the first special chart game before or during the start of the jackpot game. As a countermeasure against attacking, as mentioned above, when the first special game starts in the time-saving game state a when a game ball enters the first central winning slot 314C, it is also possible to set the variable display time of the first special game to a short time.

<Step S3506>
When the first special symbol execution area data rewrite process is executed during the execution of the big win game (step S3506), or when the big win game is not being executed (step S3504: No), the MPU 41 executes a first special symbol game start process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (starting the first special symbol game) (step S3506), and the process proceeds to step S3508. Details of the first special symbol game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

<Step S3507>
When the first special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol is being displayed (the first special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 executes a first special symbol game end process for stopping the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (end the first special symbol game) (step S3507), and the process proceeds to step S3508. Details of the first special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

<Step S3508>
When the first special symbol game start process of step S3506 or the first special symbol game end process of step S3507 is executed, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a second special symbol variable display flag indicating that the second special symbol is being variably displayed (the second special symbol game is being executed) is on (step S3508). The second special symbol variable display flag is set to on in step S4005 when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol game start process of FIG. 141 described later, and is set to off in step S4116 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game end process of FIG. 142 described later.

If the second special chart variable display flag is on (step S3508: Yes), i.e., the second special chart is being displayed in a variable manner (second special chart game is being played), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3513. On the other hand, if the second special chart variable display flag is off (step S3508: No), i.e., the second special chart is not being displayed in a variable manner (second special chart game is being played), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3509.

<Step S3509>
If the second special chart variable display in progress flag is off (step S3508: No), i.e., if the second special chart is not being displayed in a variable manner (second special chart game is not being played), the MPU 41 determines whether the second special chart reserved number M stored in the second special chart reserved number memory area NAB (see FIG. 127) of the special chart reserved storage area 412b is 0 or not (step S3509).

If the number of reserved second special charts M is 0 (step S3509: Yes), i.e., if the right to play the second special chart game is not reserved, the MPU 41 ends the special chart game control process. On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special charts M is not 0 (step S3509: No), i.e., if the right to play the second special chart game is reserved, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3510.

<Step S3510>
If the second special symbol reserved number M is not 0 (step S3509: No), that is, if the right to play the second special symbol game is reserved, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being played is set to ON (step S3510). The jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON when a jackpot game is started in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF when a jackpot game is ended in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29.

When the jackpot game in progress flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special symbol game control process. That is, when the jackpot game is being played, the second special symbol game does not start. Therefore, the reservation of the right to play the second special symbol game is carried over to the time-saving game state a, which is transitioned to after the jackpot game ends. This is because even if the reservation of the right to play the second special symbol game is carried over to the time-saving game state a, it does not result in a strategy like the case where the reservation of the right to play the first special symbol game is carried over to the time-saving game state a. Rather, by carrying over the reservation of the right to play the second special symbol game to the time-saving game state a, when the time-saving game state a is transitioned to, the second special symbol game will start before the game ball first enters the second winning hole 315, so that the player can be given the benefit of being able to end the time-saving game state a little earlier.

On the other hand, if the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), i.e., if a jackpot game is not being played, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3511.

<Step S3511>
When the jackpot game in progress flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 executes the second special data setting process for the data of the second special data hit information (second special data) stored in the special data reserve storage area 412b (see FIG. 127) (step S3511), and the process proceeds to step S3512. The details of the second special data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

<Step S3512>
In step S3512, the MPU 41 executes a second special symbol game start process for starting the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (starting the second special symbol game) (step S3512), and ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the second special symbol game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

<Step S3513>
When the second special symbol variable display flag is on (step S3508: Yes), that is, when the second special symbol is being displayed (the second special symbol game is being executed), the MPU 41 executes a second special symbol game end process for stopping the second special symbol of the second special symbol display unit 363 (ending the first special symbol game) (step S3513), and ends the special symbol game control process. Details of the second special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

[First special drawing data setting process]
Here, Fig. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special chart data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3503 in the special chart game control process in Fig. 136. In the first special chart data setting process, the memory contents of the special chart reserved storage area 412b (see Fig. 127) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the first special chart data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 137.

<Steps S3601 to S3604>
As shown in Fig. 137, in step S3601, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special chart reserved number N stored in the first special chart reserved number memory area NAA of the first special chart reserved storage area REA, and further moves the first special chart win/loss information from the first reserved area REA1 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA to the first special chart execution area AEA (step S3602). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the first special chart win/loss information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA one by one (step S3603). Specifically, in step S3603, the first special chart hit/miss information of the second reserved area REA2 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the first special chart hit/miss information of the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the first special chart hit/miss information of the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a first special chart shift command indicating that the first special chart hit/miss information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special chart reserved storage area REA has been shifted in the RAM 412, and ends the first special chart data setting process. This first special chart shift command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of pending displays corresponding to the first special pattern pending displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the first special pattern shift command.

[First special game start process]
Here, Fig. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3506 in the special symbol game control process of Fig. 136. In the first special symbol game start process, a process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 (starting the first special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the first special symbol game start process will be described with reference to Fig. 138.

<Steps S3701 and S3702>
As shown in Fig. 138, in step S3701, the MPU 41 reads out the big win winning/losing table (see Fig. 128 (A)) and executes a winning/losing judgment based on the big win winning/losing table. Furthermore, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the winning/losing judgment is a time-saving pattern stop miss (step S3702).

If the result of the judgment is that the time-saving pattern stop has not occurred (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3703, and if the result of the judgment is that the time-saving pattern stop has not occurred (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3704.

<Step S3703>
If the result of the judgment is that the time-saving symbol stop is a miss (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a time-saving symbol stop miss flag indicating that the result of the judgment is that the time-saving symbol stop is a miss to ON (step S3703), and proceeds to step S3704. The time-saving symbol stop miss flag is referenced to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving game state a in step S3806 of FIG. 139 described later.

<Step S3704>
If the time-saving pattern stop miss flag is set on (step S3703), or if the result of the win/loss judgment is not a time-saving pattern stop miss (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 sets the varying display time of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display section 362 of the main display section 36 in the first special pattern game as the first special pattern varying pattern (step S3704), and transitions processing to step S3705.

The first special chart fluctuation display time (first special chart fluctuation pattern) is set based on the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 129(A)) if the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S3701 is a jackpot, and is set based on the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the first special chart miss fluctuation table A (see FIG. 129(B)) or the first special chart miss fluctuation table B (see FIG. 129(C)) selected according to the game state at the start of the first special chart game.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a first special pattern variation command including the lottery result in the big win lottery for the first special pattern game, which is the result of the win/loss judgment in step S3701, and the first special pattern variation pattern set in step S3704, and proceeds to step S3706. The first special pattern variation command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special pattern game performance in the pattern display unit 341, etc. based on the first special pattern variation command.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 41 starts the first special symbol game by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36, and then transitions to step S3707.

<Step S3707>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol variable display flag indicating that the first special symbol is being displayed (the first special symbol game is being executed) to ON, and proceeds to step S3708. The first special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S3501 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136 to determine whether the first special symbol is being displayed (the first special symbol game is being executed) in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 41 sets the first special pattern change stop flag, which indicates that the change of the first special pattern has been stopped (the first special pattern game has ended), to OFF, and ends the first special pattern change start processing.

[First special game end processing]
Here, Fig. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol game end process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3507 in the special symbol game control process in Fig. 136. In the first special symbol game end process, a process for stopping the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 (ending the first special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the first special symbol game end process will be described with reference to Fig. 138.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 139, in step S3801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special chart variation display time set as the first special chart variation pattern in the first special chart variation pattern setting process of step S3704 in the first special chart game start process of FIG. 138 has elapsed, i.e., whether or not it is the timing to end the first special chart game.

If the first special chart variable display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the first special chart game, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3802. On the other hand, if the first special chart variable display time has not elapsed (step S3801: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the first special chart game, the MPU 41 ends the first special chart game end process.

<Step S3802>
When the first special symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the first special symbol game, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a jackpot or not (step S3802). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a jackpot or not is judged based on the hit/miss judgment information of the first special symbol data stored in the first special symbol execution area AEA (see FIG. 127) of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3803, and if the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol jackpot flag indicating that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game to be started is a jackpot (step S3803). The first special symbol jackpot flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start a jackpot game in step S4201 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 143 described later.

The MPU 41 also clears the ceiling count counter, which indicates the number of times the special symbol game has been played in the normal game state (step S3804), and proceeds to step S3820. The ceiling count counter is referenced in step S3911 of the first special symbol game end process or in step S4109 of the second special symbol game end process of FIG. 143 described below, to determine whether or not to transition to the b time-saving game state based on the specified number of times (450 times in this embodiment) that the special symbol game has been played.

<Step S3805>
If the result of the big win lottery notified by the first special symbol game is not a big win (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON (step S3805). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is a normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3805: Yes), i.e., if the game state at the end of the first special game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3806. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3805: No), i.e., if the game state at the end of the first special game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3813.

<Step S3806>
When the normal game state flag is set to on (step S3805: Yes), that is, when the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the time-saving symbol stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, is set to on (step S3806). That is, when the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss. That is, in this embodiment, it judges whether to transition to the time-saving game state c based on the game state at the end of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol stops changing), not at the start of the first special symbol game (when the first special symbol starts changing).

If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to ON (step S3806: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3807. If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to OFF (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3810.

<Steps S3807 to S3809>
If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c time-saving game state transition flag to ON (step S3807) for transitioning the game state from the normal game state to the c time-saving game state, and sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to OFF (steps S3807 and S3808). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to OFF (step S3809), and ends the first special symbol game end process.

<Steps S3810 to S3812>
If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to OFF (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling number counter (step S3810). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the ceiling number counter after the addition is 450 (step S3811), that is, whether the number of times the special symbol game has been played in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times).

When the value of the ceiling number counter after the increment is 450 (step S3811: Yes), i.e., when the number of times the special game has been played in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times), the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving game state flag, which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state, to ON (step S3812), and transitions the process to step S3820. The b time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4302 in the game state transition process of FIG. 144 to determine whether or not to transition the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after the increment is not 450 (step S3811: No), the MPU 41 transitions to step S3820.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
If the normal game state flag is set to off (step S3805: No), i.e., if the game state at the end of the first special game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving pattern stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss, is set to on (step S3813).

If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to on (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to off (step S3814) and transitions to step S3815. On the other hand, if the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to off (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 skips step S3814 and transitions to step S3815.

<Step S3815>
When the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to OFF (step S3814), or when the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3815). Here, the time-saving game state flag includes the time-saving game state flag a indicating the time-saving game state a, the time-saving game state flag b indicating the time-saving game state b, and the time-saving game state flag c indicating the time-saving game state c. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not any of the time-saving game state flag a, the time-saving game state flag b, and the time-saving game state flag c is set to ON. In addition, the a-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the a-time-shortened game state in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, the b-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the b-time-shortened game state in step S4303 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, and the c-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the c-time-shortened game state in step S4308 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144.

If the time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S3815: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the a time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state, or the c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3816. If the time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S3815: No), i.e., if the game is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S3820.

<Steps S3816 and S3817>
When the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3815: Yes), that is, when the game is in the a time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state, or the c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state (step S3816). Furthermore, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3817). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is to be shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays.

If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), i.e., if the game state is to transition from a time-saving game state to a normal game state based on the execution of a specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3818. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3817: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S3820.

<Steps S3818 and S3819>
If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), that is, if the game state is to be shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state to OFF (step S3818). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state shift flag for shifting the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state to ON (step S3819), and the process proceeds to step S3820.

<Steps S3820 to S3823>
In step S3820, the MPU 41 stops and displays the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 in a manner according to the result of the first special symbol big win lottery corresponding to the first special symbol game (step S3820). Then, the MPU 41 sets a first special symbol variation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed to on (step S3821), sets a first special symbol variation stop command notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed to on (step S3822), and further sets a first special symbol variation display in progress flag indicating that the first special symbol is being displayed to vary (the first special symbol game is being executed) to off (step S3823), and ends the first special symbol game control process.

[Second special drawing data setting process]
Here, Fig. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second special chart data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3511 in the special chart game control process in Fig. 136. In the second special chart data setting process, the memory contents of the special chart reserved storage area 412b (see Fig. 127) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the first special chart data setting process will be described with reference to Fig. 140.

<Steps S3901 to S3904>
As shown in Fig. 140, in step S3901, the MPU41 subtracts 1 from the second special chart reservation number M stored in the second special chart reservation number memory area NAB of the second special chart reservation storage area REB, and further moves the second special chart win/loss information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special chart reservation storage area REB to the second special chart execution area AEB (step S3902). Next, the MPU41 shifts the second special chart win/loss information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special chart reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3903). Specifically, in step S3903, the second special chart winning/losing information of the second reserved area REB2 of the second special chart reserved storage area REB is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the second special chart winning/losing information of the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the second special chart winning/losing information of the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a second special chart shift command indicating that the second special chart winning/losing information of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special chart reserved storage area REB has shifted in the RAM 412, and ends the second special chart data setting process. This second special chart shift command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the number of hold displays corresponding to the second special symbol hold displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the second special symbol shift command.

[Second special game start processing]
Here, Fig. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3512 in the special symbol game control process of Fig. 136. In the second special symbol game start process, a process for starting the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (starting the second special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the second special symbol game start process will be described with reference to Fig. 141.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
As shown in Fig. 141, in step S4001, the MPU 41 reads out a big win winning/losing table (see Fig. 128 (A)) and executes a winning/losing judgment based on the big win winning/losing table. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in the second special symbol game as the second special symbol variable pattern (step S4002), and moves the process to step S4003.

The second special chart fluctuation display time (second special chart fluctuation pattern) is set based on the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 129(A)) if the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S4001 is a jackpot, and is set based on the special chart fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal game state second special chart miss fluctuation table (see FIG. 129(D)) or the time-saving game state second special chart miss fluctuation table (see FIG. 129(E)) selected according to the game state at the start of the second special chart game.

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a second special symbol variation pattern command including the lottery result in the big win lottery for the second special symbol game, which is the result of the win/loss judgment in step S4001, and the second special symbol variation pattern set in step S4002, and proceeds to step S4004. The second special symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute the special symbol game performance on the pattern display unit 341, etc., based on the second special symbol variation pattern command.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 starts the second special symbol game by starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, and then transitions to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol variable display flag indicating that the second special symbol is being displayed (the second special symbol game is being executed) to ON, and proceeds to step S4006. The second special symbol variable display flag is referenced in step S3508 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 136 to determine whether the second special symbol is being displayed (the second special symbol game is being executed) in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 41 sets a second special pattern change stop flag to OFF, which indicates that the change of the second special pattern has been stopped (the second special pattern game has ended), and ends the second special pattern change start process.

[Second special game end processing]
Here, Fig. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second special symbol game end process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3513 in the special symbol game control process of Fig. 136. In the second special symbol game end process, a process for stopping the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363 (ending the second special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the second special symbol game end process will be described with reference to Fig. 142.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 142, in step S4101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special chart change display time set as the second special chart change pattern in the second special chart change pattern setting process in step S4102 in the second special chart game start process in FIG. 141 has elapsed, i.e., whether or not it is the timing to end the second special chart game.

If the second special chart variable display time has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), i.e., if it is time to end the second special chart game, the MPU 41 transitions to step S4102. On the other hand, if the second special chart variable display time has not elapsed (step S4101: No), i.e., if it is not time to end the second special chart game, the MPU 41 ends the second special chart game end process.

<Step S4102>
When the second special symbol variable display time has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the second special symbol game, the MPU 41 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is a jackpot or not (step S4102). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is a jackpot or not is judged based on the hit/miss judgment information of the second special symbol data stored in the second special symbol execution area AEB (see FIG. 127) of the special symbol reserved storage area 412b, for example.

If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4103, and if the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4105.

<Steps S4103 and S4104>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol jackpot flag indicating that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game to be started is a jackpot (step S4103). The second special symbol jackpot flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start a jackpot game in step S4204 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 143 described later.

The MPU 41 also clears the ceiling count counter, which indicates the number of times the special symbol game has been played in the normal game state (step S4104), and moves the process to step S4117. The ceiling count counter is referenced in step S3911 of the first special symbol game end process in FIG. 139 or step S4109 of the second special symbol game end process to determine whether or not to move to the b time-saving game state based on the specified number of times (450 times in this embodiment) that the special symbol game has been played.

<Steps S4105 and S4106>
If the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a time-saving symbol stop miss flag, which indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, is set to on (step S4105).

If the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to on (step S4105: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time-saving symbol stop miss flag to off (step S4106) and transitions to step S4107. On the other hand, if the time-saving symbol stop miss flag is set to off (step S4105: No), the MPU 41 skips step S4106 and transitions to step S4107.

<Step S4107>
If the result of the big win lottery notified by the second special symbol game is not a big win (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON (step S4107). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the game state at the end of the second special symbol game is a normal game state.

If the normal game state flag is set to on (step S4107: Yes), i.e., if the game state at the end of the second special game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4108. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to off (step S4107: No), i.e., if the game state at the end of the second special game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4112.

<Steps S4108 to S4111>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), that is, when the game state at the end of the second special symbol game (when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed) is the normal game state, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling number of times counter (step S4108). Then, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the ceiling number of times counter after the addition is 450 (step S4109), that is, whether the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times).

When the value of the ceiling number counter after the increment is 450 (step S4109: Yes), i.e., when the number of times the special game has been played in the normal game state has reached the specified number (450 times), the MPU 41 sets the b time-saving game state flag to ON (step S4110), which transitions the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state, and further clears the ceiling number counter (step S4111), and transitions the process to step S4117. The b time-saving game state flag is referenced in step S4302 in the game state transition process of FIG. 144 to determine whether or not to transition the game state from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the value of the ceiling count counter after the increment is not 450 (step S4107: No), the MPU 41 transitions to step S4117.

<Step S4112>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), that is, when the game state at the end of the second special game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4112). Here, the time-saving game state flag includes the time-saving game state flag a indicating the time-saving game state a, the time-saving game state flag b indicating the time-saving game state b, and the time-saving game state c indicating the time-saving game state c. That is, the MPU 41 judges whether or not any of the time-saving game state flag a, the time-saving game state flag b, and the time-saving game state flag c is set to ON. In addition, the a-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the a-time-shortened game state in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, the b-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the b-time-shortened game state in step S4303 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144, and the c-time-shortened game state flag is set on when the game state is transitioned to the c-time-shortened game state in step S4308 in the game state transition processing of Figure 144.

If the time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4112: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the a time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state, or the c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S4113. If the time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4112: No), i.e., if the game is not in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions to step S4117.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
When the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), that is, when the game is in the a time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state, or the c time-saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving game state (step S4113). Furthermore, the MPU 41 judges whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S4114). That is, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is to be shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays.

If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), i.e., if the game state is to transition from a time-saving game state to a normal game state based on the execution of a specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4115. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4114: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4117.

<Steps S4115 and S4116>
If the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), that is, if the game state is to be shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the specified number of special game plays, the MPU 41 sets the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state to OFF (step S4115). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state shift flag for shifting the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state to ON (step S4116), and shifts the process to step S4116.

<Steps S4117 to S4120>
In step S4117, the MPU 41 stops and displays the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 in a manner according to the result of the second special symbol big win lottery corresponding to the second special symbol game (step S4117). Then, the MPU 41 sets a second special symbol variation stop flag indicating that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed to on (step S4118), sets a second special symbol variation stop command notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed to on (step S4119), and further sets a second special symbol variation display in progress flag indicating that the second special symbol is being displayed to vary (the second special symbol game is being executed) to off (step S4120), and ends the second special symbol game control process.

[Jackpot Game Control Processing]
Here, Fig. 143 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big win game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of Fig. 21. In the big win game control process, a process for controlling the progress of the big win game, such as the opening and closing control of the opening and closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316, is executed. The big win game control process will be described below with reference to Fig. 143.

<Step S4201>
As shown in Fig. 143, in step S4201, the MPU 41 first judges whether the first special chart jackpot flag is set to ON. The first special chart jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery for the completed first special chart game is a jackpot, and is set to ON when the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery for the completed first special chart game is a jackpot in step S3803 in the first special chart game end processing in Fig. 139.

If the first special chart jackpot flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4202; if the first special chart jackpot flag is set to off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
If the first special chart jackpot flag is set to on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special chart jackpot flag to off (step S4102) and transitions to step S4205.

<Step S4203>
When the first special chart jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 judges whether the second special chart jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4203). The second special chart jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery for the completed second special chart game is a jackpot, and is set to ON when the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery for the completed second special chart game is a jackpot in step S4103 in the second special chart game end processing of FIG.

If the second special chart jackpot flag is set to on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4204. If the second special chart jackpot flag is set to off (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4208.

<Step S4204>
If the second special chart jackpot flag is set to on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second special chart jackpot flag to off (step S4104) and transitions to step S4205.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game in progress flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is on (step S4205). If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4206, and if the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S4205: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2204 in FIG. 29 and executes a process to start a jackpot game.

<Steps S4206 and S4207>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the jackpot game reserve flag for playing the jackpot game based on the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game that ended during the execution of the jackpot game being a jackpot after the end of the currently executed jackpot game is set to on (step S4206), and 1 is added to the value of the jackpot reserve counter indicating the number of reserved jackpot games (step S4207). The jackpot game reserve flag is referred to in step S4209 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 143 described later to determine whether there is an unexecuted jackpot game or not, and the jackpot reserve counter is decremented when the reserved jackpot game is started in step S4210 of the jackpot game control process. Then, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211 of FIG. 29 and executes the process of continuing the jackpot game.

In addition, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery for the first special chart game that is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a jackpot, it is also possible to rewrite the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery to a miss.

<Step S4208>
When the second special chart jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game in progress flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON (step S4208). When the jackpot game in progress flag is ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211 in FIG. 29 and executes the process of continuing the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the jackpot game in progress flag is OFF (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
If the jackpot game in progress flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game pending flag is set on to execute a jackpot game based on the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game or the second special chart game that ended during the execution of the jackpot game being a jackpot after the currently executing jackpot game ends (step S4209).

If the jackpot game pending flag is set to ON (step S4209: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4210, and if the jackpot game pending flag is set to OFF (step S4209: No), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S4210 to S4212>
If the jackpot game reserve flag is set on (step S4209: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot reserve counter, which indicates the number of reserved jackpot games (step S4210), and determines whether the value of the jackpot reserve counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4211).

If the value of the jackpot pending counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot pending flag to OFF (step S4212), proceeds to step S2204 in FIG. 29, and executes processing to start the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot pending counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2204 in FIG. 29, and executes processing to start the jackpot game.

[Game state transition process]
Here, Fig. 144 to Fig. 147 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process in Fig. 21. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and big win game state) is executed. The game state transition process will be described below with reference to Fig. 144 to Fig. 147.

<Step S4301>
144, in step S4301, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON. If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4302, and if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4301: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4317.

<Step S4302>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the b time-saving game state transition flag for transitioning to the b time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4302). When the b time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4303, and when the b time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4307.

<Steps S4303 to S4306>
When the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the b time-shortened game state to ON (step S4303), and sets the b time-shortened game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the b time-shortened game state to ON (step S4304). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b time-shortened game state transition flag to OFF (step S4305), and sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to OFF (step S4306), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4307>
When the b time-shortened game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the c time-shortened game state transition flag for transitioning to the c time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S4307). When the c time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4308, and when the c time-shortened game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4307: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4312.

<Steps S4308 to S4311>
When the c time-shortened game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the c time-shortened game state to ON (step S4308), and sets the c time-shortened game state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the c time-shortened game state to ON (step S4309). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the c time-shortened game state transition flag to OFF (step S4310), and sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to OFF (step S4311), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4312>
When the time-saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4307: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4312). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4313, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4312: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4313 to S4316>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in the jackpot game state ON (step S4313), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4314). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4315), and sets the normal game state flag OFF (step S4316), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4317>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4301: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game state flag indicating the jackpot game state is set to ON (step S4317). When the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4318, and when the jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S4317: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4322 in FIG.

<Step S4318>
When the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is ended is set to ON (step S4318). When the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4319, and when the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S4318: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4319 to S4321>
If the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a-time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the a-time-shortened game state to ON (step S4319), and sets the a-time-shortened game state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been shifted to the a-time-shortened game state (step S4320). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to OFF (step S4321), and ends the game state shift process.

<Step S4322>
When the big win game state flag is set to OFF (step S4317: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the a time-saving game state flag indicating the a time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4322) as shown in Fig. 145. When the a time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4322: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4323, and when the a time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4322: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4333 in Fig. 146.

<Step S4323>
When the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4322: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a normal game state transition flag for transitioning to a normal game state is set to ON (step S4323). When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4324, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4323: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4328.

<Steps S4324 to S4327>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to ON (step S4324), and sets a normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the normal game state (step S4325). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4326), and sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4327), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4328>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4323: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started is set to ON (step S4328). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4329, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4328: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4329 to S4332>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in the jackpot game state ON (step S4329), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4330). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4331), sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4332), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4333>
When the time-shortened game state flag a is set to OFF (step S4322: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the time-shortened game state flag b indicating the time-shortened game state b is set to ON (step S4333), as shown in Fig. 146. When the time-shortened game state flag b is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4334, and when the time-shortened game state flag b is set to OFF (step S4333: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4344 in Fig. 147.

<Step S4334>
When the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a normal game state transition flag for transitioning to a normal game state is set to ON (step S4334). When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4335, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4334: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4339.

<Steps S4335 to S4338>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to ON (step S4335), and sets a normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the normal game state (step S4336). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4337), and sets the b time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4338), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4339>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4334: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started is set to ON (step S4339). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4340, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4339: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4340 to S4343>
If the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in the jackpot game state ON (step S4340), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4341). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4342), and sets the b time-saving game state flag OFF (step S4343), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4344>
When the b time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4333: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the c time-saving game state flag indicating the c time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4344), as shown in Fig. 147. When the c time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4344: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4345, and when the c time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4344: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4345>
When the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4344: Yes), the MPU 41 judges whether or not a normal game state transition flag for transitioning to a normal game state is set to ON (step S4345). When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4346, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4345: No), the MPU 41 transitions the process to step S4350.

<Steps S4346 to S4349>
If the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that the game is in the normal game state to ON (step S4346), and sets a normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the normal game state (step S4347). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4348), and sets the time-saving game state flag to OFF (step S4349), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4350>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4345: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4350). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4351, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4350: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S4351 to S4354>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game is in the jackpot game state ON (step S4351), and sets a jackpot game state transition command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the game has been transitioned to the jackpot game state (step S4352). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag OFF (step S4353), and sets the c time-saving game state flag OFF (step S4354), and ends the game state transition process.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
In this embodiment, the processing of the voice lamp control device 5 differs from that of the first embodiment described above, because the gaming machine 10 is a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special chart and the second special chart can change simultaneously, and some of the steps in the command judgment processing are different.

[Command Judgment Process]
148 and 149 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 42. Hereinafter, the game state transition process will be described with reference to Figs. 148 and 149.

<Step S4401>
In the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a command has been received in step S4401. If a command has been received (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4402, and if a command has not been received (step S4401: No), the MPU 41 ends the command determination process.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
When a command is received (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a normal game state transition command indicating that the game state has been transitioned to the normal game state (step S4402). When the received command is a normal game state transition command (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a normal game state flag indicating that the game state is normal on (step S4403) and ends the command judgment process. The normal game state flag is referred to in step S4901 of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in FIG. 151 in order to judge whether the game state is normal. On the other hand, when the received command is not a normal game state transition command (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4404.

<Steps S4404 and S4405>
If the received command is not a normal game state transition command (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game state transition command indicating a transition to a jackpot game state (step S4404). If the received command is a jackpot game state transition command (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a jackpot game state flag indicating a jackpot game state to ON (step S4405), and ends the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a jackpot game state transition command (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4406.

<Steps S4406 to S4408>
If the received command is not a jackpot game state transition command (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an a-time-shortened game state transition command indicating that the game has transitioned to the a-time-shortened game state (step S4406). If the received command is an a-time-shortened game state transition command (step S4406: Yes), the MPU 51 sets an a-time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the a-time-shortened game state to on (step S4407). The a-time-shortened game state flag is referred to in step S4501 of the time-shortened game count counter process in FIG. 150 or in step S4603 of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in FIG. 151 in order to judge whether the game is in the a-time-shortened game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets an a-time-shortened game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-shortened games in the a-time-shortened game state (step S4408), and ends the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a time-shortened gaming state transition command (step S4406: No), the MPU 51 transfers the processing to step S4409.

<Steps S4409 to S4411>
If the received command is not the a time-saving game state transition command (step S4406: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a b time-saving game state transition command indicating that the game has transitioned to the b time-saving game state (step S4409). If the received command is a b time-saving game state transition command (step S4409: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in the b time-saving game state to on (step S4410). Note that the b time-saving game state flag is referred to in step S4505 of the time-saving game count counter process in FIG. 150 or in step S4605 of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process in FIG. 151 in order to judge whether the game is in the b time-saving game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the b time-saving game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games in the b time-saving game state (step S4411), and ends the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the received command is not the b time-shortened game state transition command (step S4409: No), the MPU 51 transfers the processing to step S4412.

<Steps S4412 to S4414>
If the received command is not a b time-saving game state transition command (step S4409: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a c time-saving game state transition command indicating that the game has transitioned to a c time-saving game state (step S4412). If the received command is a c time-saving game state transition command (step S4412: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a c time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in the c time-saving game state to on (step S4413). The c time-saving game state flag is referred to in step S4509 of the time-saving game count counter process in FIG. 150 in order to judge whether the game is in the c time-saving game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets a c time-saving game count counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games in the c time-saving game state (step S4414), and ends the command judgment process. On the other hand, if the received command is not a c time-shortened gaming state transition command (step S4412: No), the MPU 51 transitions the processing to step S4415 in FIG.

<Step S4415>
If the received command is not the c time-saving game state transition command (step S4412: No), as shown in Fig. 149, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the first special chart variation pattern command (step S4415). If the received command is the first special chart variation pattern command (step S4415: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4416, and if the received command is not the first special chart variation pattern command (step S4415: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4421.

<Step S4416>
If the received command is the first special pattern variation command (step S4415: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a time-saving game counter process for managing the time-saving game counter (step S4416), and proceeds to step S4417. The time-saving game counter process will be described below with reference to FIG.

[Time-saving game count counter processing]
Here, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the time-saving game count counter processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG.

<Step S4501>
In the time-shortened game counter process of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 150, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not the a-time-shortened game state flag indicating that the game is in the a-time-shortened game state is set to ON (step S4501). Note that the a-time-shortened game state flag is set to ON in step S4407 when the a-time-shortened game state transition command is received in the command judgment process of Fig. 148.

If the a-time-shortened game state flag is set to on (step S4501: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the a-time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4502. On the other hand, if the a-time-shortened game state flag is set to off (step S4501: No), i.e., if the game is not in the a-time-shortened game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4505.

<Steps S4502 to S4504>
When the a time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), that is, when the game is in the a time-saving game state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the a time-saving game count counter indicating the remaining number of times of special game in the a time-saving game state (step S4502), and judges whether the value of the a time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S4503). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the game is the last special game in the a time-saving game state.

If the value of the a-time-shortened play counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4503: Yes), i.e., if it is the last special game in the a-time-shortened play state, the MPU 51 sets the a-time-shortened play state flag to OFF (step S4504) and ends the time-shortened play count counter process. On the other hand, if the value of the a-time-shortened play counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4503: No), i.e., if it is not the last special game in the a-time-shortened play state, the MPU 51 ends the time-shortened play count counter process.

<Step S4505>
When the a time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), that is, when the game is not in the a time-saving game state, it is determined whether or not the b time-saving game state flag indicating the b time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4505). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in the b time-saving game state. Note that the b time-saving game state flag is set to ON in step S4410 when the b time-saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 148.

If the b time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4505: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4506. On the other hand, if the b time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4505: No), i.e., if the game is not in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4509.

<Steps S4506 to S4508>
When the b time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), that is, when the game is in the b time-saving game state, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the b time-saving game number counter indicating the number of remaining special game plays in the b time-saving game state (step S4506), and judges whether the value of the b time-saving game number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4507). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the game is the last special game in the b time-saving game state.

If the value of the b time-saving play counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), i.e., if it is the last special game in the b time-saving play state, the MPU 51 sets the b time-saving play state flag to OFF (step S4508) and ends the time-saving play count counter process. On the other hand, if the value of the b time-saving play counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: No), i.e., if it is not the last special game in the b time-saving play state, the MPU 51 ends the time-saving play count counter process.

<Step S4509>
When the b time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4505: No), that is, when the game is not in the b time-saving game state, it is determined whether or not the c time-saving game state flag indicating that the game is in the c time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4509). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game is in the c time-saving game state. Note that the c time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S4413 when the c time-saving game state transition command indicating that the game state is transitioned from the a time-saving game state to the c time-saving game state is received in the command determination process of FIG. 148.

If the c time-saving game state flag is set to on (step S4509: Yes), i.e., if the game is in the c time-saving game state, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4510. On the other hand, if the c time-saving game state flag is set to off (step S4509: No), i.e., if the game is not in the c time-saving game state, the MPU 51 ends the time-saving game count counter process.

<Steps S4510 to S4512>
When the c time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the c time-saving game count counter indicating the remaining number of special game plays in the c time-saving game state (step S4510), and judges whether the value of the c time-saving game count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4511). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the last special game in the c time-saving game state.

If the value of the c time-saving play counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4511: Yes), i.e., if it is the last special game in the c time-saving play state, the MPU 51 sets the c time-saving play state flag to OFF (step S4512) and ends the time-saving play count counter process. On the other hand, if the value of the c time-saving play counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S4511: No), i.e., if it is not the last special game in the c time-saving play state, the MPU 51 ends the time-saving play count counter process.

<Steps S4417 and S4418>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 149, in step S4417, the MPU 51 executes a first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process for setting the presentation to be executed by the pattern display unit 341 or the like for the first special symbol game. Details of the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. Then, the MPU 51 executes a process for setting a stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78 (see FIG. 152) which is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game and is displayed in a stopped manner corresponding to the stopped display of the first special symbol (step S4418). For example, as the stopping pattern combination of the first decorative pattern 78, if the result of the first special chart jackpot lottery announced by the first special chart is a jackpot, a repeat number is set, if the reach is missed, a combination in which the numbers of the left and right patterns are the same and the numbers of the center pattern are different is set, if the time-saving pattern stop is missed, a specific combination of scattered numbers (a distinctive combination such as ascending order such as "123" or descending order such as "321") is set, and if it is a complete miss, a scattered number other than the specific combination is set.

Here, Fig. 152 and Fig. 153 are diagrams showing example screens on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, Fig. 152(A) is a diagram showing an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game state, and Fig. 152(B) is a diagram showing an example screen on the symbol display unit 341 in the time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c).

In the normal game state, a left hit is encouraged to shoot the game ball into the left area of the game board 31, and if a left hit is made, the second special symbol game is not executed, and the first special symbol game is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), in the normal game state, the first decorative symbol 78, which is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game and is displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stopped display of the first special symbol, is displayed large in the center of the symbol display section 341. However, when the second special symbol game is executed in the normal game state, the second decorative symbol 79, which is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game and is displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stopped display of the second special symbol, is displayed smaller than the first decorative symbol 78 in the upper right corner of the symbol display section 341.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game states (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c), right-handed hits that shoot game balls into the right-hand region of the game board 31 are encouraged, and when a right-handed hit is performed in the time-saving game state, the support of the electric device 315b makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, making it easier to play the second special symbol game. On the other hand, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right first winning hole 314R located in the right-hand region of the game board 31, so when a right-handed hit is performed, it is difficult for the first special symbol game to be played. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the second special symbol game is mainly executed by hitting to the right, and the first special symbol game is executed less frequently than the second special symbol game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(B), except during the execution of the time attack performance described below executed in the time-saving game state a, in the time-saving game state including the time-saving game state a, in principle, the change display and stop display of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the second special symbol that is changed and stopped in the mainly executed second special symbol game is prominently displayed in the center of the symbol display section 341, and the change display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 78 corresponding to the first special symbol that is changed and stopped in the first special symbol game that is executed less frequently is displayed in the upper right part of the symbol display section 341 less prominently than the change display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 78.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (time-saving game state a, time-saving game state b, and time-saving game state c), an image is displayed indicating the number of times the time-saving game is remaining until the upper limit of the number of times the time-saving game is played in the time-saving game state. In the example shown in FIG. 152(B), a text image of "120 times remaining" displayed in the upper right corner of the pattern display section 341 indicates the number of times the time-saving game is remaining until the upper limit of the number of times the time-saving game is played in the time-saving game state. The image indicating the number of times the time-saving game is remaining until the upper limit of the number of times the time-saving game is played in the time-saving game state is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 152(B), and may be in other forms. For example, it may be "120 remaining", "LAST 120 times", "ST 120 times", "120 times", "120", etc.

In addition, in the time-saving play states (time-saving play state a, time-saving play state b, and time-saving play state c), the second decorative pattern 79 is displayed larger than the first decorative pattern 78 in a central position on the pattern display section 341 where it is easily visible, but the display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be reversed, or the first decorative pattern 78 may be displayed larger than the second decorative pattern 79 so that the first decorative pattern 78 stands out more. In addition, the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed side by side in the vertical, horizontal, or diagonal directions, and the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed with the same size.

<Steps S4419 and S4420>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 149, in step S4419, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time of the first special pattern in the first special pattern variable display counter based on the first special pattern variable pattern information included in the received first special pattern variable pattern command. The first special pattern variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the first special pattern variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the first special pattern variable display counter becomes 0.

Then, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to specify the effect pattern type set in step S4417 of the command determination process and the content of the stopped pattern combination of the first decorative pattern 78 set in step S4418 (step S4420), and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped pattern combination of the first decorative pattern 78. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and the performance image of the first decorative pattern 78 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the performance display in the pattern display unit 341 according to the stopped pattern combination, variation type, and performance type of the first decorative pattern 78 corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4421>
If the received command is not the first special pattern variation command (step S4415: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the second special pattern variation command (step S4421). If the received command is the second special pattern variation command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4422, and if the received command is not the second special pattern variation command (step S4421: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4427.

<Step S4422>
If the received command is the second special pattern variation command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a time-saving game counter process for managing the time-saving game counter (step S4422), and proceeds to step S4423. The time-saving game counter process in step S4422 is the same as the time-saving game counter process in step S4416 described with reference to FIG. 150, and therefore will not be described in detail.

<Steps S4423 and S4424>
In step S4423, the MPU 51 executes a second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process for setting the presentation to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 for the second special symbol game. Details of the second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. Then, the MPU 51 executes a process for setting a stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79 (see FIG. 152) which is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol and is displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the stopped display of the second special symbol (step S4425). For example, as the stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79, if the result of the second special symbol big win lottery notified by the second special symbol is a big win, a combination in which the numbers of the left and right symbols are the same and the numbers of the center symbol are different is set if the result is a reach miss, and a spread symbol is set if the result is a complete miss.

<Steps S4425 and S4426>
In step S4425, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time of the second special pattern in the second special pattern variable display counter based on the second special pattern variable display pattern information included in the received second special pattern variable display pattern command. The second special pattern variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 42, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the second special pattern variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the second special pattern variable display counter becomes 0.

Then, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to specify the effect pattern type set in step S4423 of the command determination process and the content of the stopped pattern combination of the second decorative pattern 79 set in step S4424 (step S4426), and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stopped pattern combination of the second decorative pattern 79. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and the performance image of the second decorative pattern 79 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the performance display in the pattern display unit 341 according to the stopped pattern combination, variation type, and performance type of the second decorative pattern 79 corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Step S4427>
If the received command is not the second special pattern variation command (step S4421: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the first special pattern variation stop command (step S4427). The first special pattern variation stop command is set when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in step S3822 in the first special pattern variation end process of FIG.

If the received command is a first special chart change stop command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4428. If the received command is not a first special chart change stop command (step S4427: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4430.

<Step S4428>
If the received command is the first special symbol variation stop command (step S4427: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a time attack performance flag indicating that a time attack performance described later is being executed is on (step S4428). The time attack performance flag is set to on in step S4607 of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Fig. 151 when the first special symbol game in which the result of the big win lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss is started in the time-saving game state a, and is set to off in step S4803 of the first time attack performance in Fig. 155 (A) or step S4903 of the second time attack performance in Fig. 155 (B) when the time attack performance is ended.

If the time attack effect flag is on (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4429; if the time attack effect flag is off (step S4428: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S4429>
When the time attack performance flag is on (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a first time attack performance end process for ending the time attack performance based on the stop display of the first special symbol (end of the first special symbol game) (step S4429), and ends the command determination process. Details of the first time attack performance end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155 (A).

<Step S4430>
If the received command is not the first special symbol variation stop command (step S4427: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is the second special symbol variation stop command (step S4430). The second special symbol variation stop command is set when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in step S4119 in the second special symbol variation end process of FIG.

If the received command is a second special chart change stop command (step S4430: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4431. If the received command is not a second special chart change stop command (step S4430: No), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4433.

<Step S4431>
If the received command is the second special chart variation stop command (step S4430: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether or not a time attack performance flag indicating that a time attack performance described later is being executed is on (step S4431). The time attack performance is set to on when the time attack performance is started in step S4607 in the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process of FIG.

If the time attack effect flag is on (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4432; if the time attack effect flag is off (step S4431: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Steps S4432 and S4433>
When the time attack effect flag is on (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the a-time-saving game counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the a-time-saving game state is 0 (step S4432). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the second special symbol game to be ended this time is the last special symbol game in the a-time-saving game state.

When the value of the a time-saving play counter is 0 (step S4432: Yes), that is, when the second special symbol play that is to end this time is the last special symbol play in the a time-saving play state, the MPU 51 executes a second time attack performance end process for ending the time attack performance based on the stop display of the second special symbol (end of the a time-saving play state) (step S4433), and ends the command determination process. Details of the second time attack performance end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155 (B). On the other hand, when the value of the a time-saving play counter is not 0 (step S4432: Yes), that is, when the second special symbol play that is to end this time is not the last special symbol play in the a time-saving play state and the a time-saving play state is to continue, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S4434>
If the received command is not the second special chart variation stop command (step S4430: No), the MPU 51 executes processing for other commands (step S4433) and terminates the command determination process.

[First variation type (performance pattern) setting process]
Here, Figure 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S4417 in the command determination process of Figure 149.

<Step S4601>
As shown in FIG. 151, in the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not a normal game state flag indicating a normal game state is set to ON (step S4601). If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4602, and if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4603.

<Step S4602>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state presentation (step S4602) and ends the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. The normal game state presentation is the same as that of the first embodiment described above.

<Step S4603>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the time-saving game state flag indicating the time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4603). When the time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4603: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4604, and when the time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4603: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4609.

<Step S4604>
When the a time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4603: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the a time-saving game state presentation (step S4604) and moves the process to step S4605. In the a time-saving game state presentation process, for example, the setting of a background presentation specific to the a time-saving game state, the setting of the display of the remaining number of time-saving games, the setting of the display of the remaining time of the first special symbol game, the setting of the variable display position of the first decorative symbol 78, etc. are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set by referring to the value of the a time-saving game number counter that indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the a time-saving game state, which is managed by the time-saving game number counter process of FIG. 150. In addition, the display of the remaining time of the first special symbol game is set by referring to the first special symbol variable display counter that is set for the variable display time in step S4419 in the command judgment process of FIG. 149.

<Step S4605>
In step S4605, the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the big win lottery for the first special symbol game to be started is a time-saving symbol stop miss. Whether the result of the big win lottery for the first special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss is judged based on information on the result of the big win lottery for the first special symbol game included in the first special symbol variation pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions to step S4606, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop (step S4605: No), the MPU 51 ends the first variation type (presentation pattern) setting process.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special chart game that is started is a jackpot, a reach for either front or rear miss, or a reach for other than a reach for either front or rear miss, a reach presentation (see Figure 50) may be executed in the same manner as the normal game state presentation.

<Steps S4606 and S4607>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is a miss in the time-saving pattern stop (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a time attack effect (see FIG. 153) (step S4606), sets a time attack effect flag to on, indicating that a time attack effect has been set (step S4607), and transitions to step S4608.

In this way, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special chart game that is started in the time-saving play state a is a miss, the time attack effect is executed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a miss, the time attack effect is not executed. Therefore, when the time attack effect is started, the player can understand that it is a situation where it is expected that the player will be able to transition to the time-saving play state c, which is more advantageous than the time-saving play state a. As a result, when the time attack effect is started, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the player will be transitioned to the time-saving play state c.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the time-saving game state a is a time-saving miss, a time attack performance is executed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a time-saving miss, the time attack performance is not executed, so that the player can choose to stop shooting game balls until the first special symbol game ends if the time attack performance does not start when the first special symbol game starts in the time-saving game state a. This makes it possible to avoid the end of the time-saving game state a by executing the second special symbol game up to the upper limit number in the time-saving game state a during the execution of the first special symbol game with no possibility of transitioning to the time-saving game state c, and to leave the possibility of transitioning to the time-saving game state c. In addition, if the time attack performance does not start when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a, the player can select to stop shooting the game ball until the first special symbol game ends after adjusting the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit in the time-saving game state a by executing a certain number of second special symbol games before the first special symbol game ends. This allows the player to increase the possibility that, when a new first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a that is maintained even after the end of the first special symbol game, the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit in the time-saving game state a can be executed before the new first special symbol game ends.

Here, FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a screen on the symbol display unit 341 when a time attack performance is executed in the time-saving play state a. Specifically, FIG. 153(A) and FIG. 153(B) are example screens at the start of the time attack performance, FIG. 153(C) is an example screen during the time attack performance, FIG. 153(D) is an example screen when the time attack is successful, and FIG. 153(E) and FIG. 153(F) are example screens when the time attack is unsuccessful.

As shown in Fig. 153(A) to Fig. 153(F), the time attack effect is an effect that is executed in a time attack format to check whether or not the second special symbol game has been executed up to the upper limit number of times in the a time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game that is started in the a time-saving game state. In this time attack effect, if the second special symbol game has been executed up to the upper limit number of times in the a time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game that is started in the a time-saving game state, a success effect is executed (Fig. 153(A) to Fig. 153(D)), and if the second special symbol game has not been executed up to the upper limit number of times in the a time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game that is started in the a time-saving game state, a failure effect is executed (Fig. 153(A) to Fig. 153(C), Fig. 153(E) and Fig. 153(F)).

As shown in Figures 153(A) to 153(F), in the time attack presentation, the pattern display section 341 displays a remaining time image corresponding to the remaining variable display time (remaining time) of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving game state, and a remaining spins image corresponding to the number of time-saving games (remaining spins) that can be played in the a time-saving game state at the time the first special symbol game is started. The remaining time image is displayed from the upper center to the right of the pattern display section 341. The remaining spins image is displayed directly below the remaining time image on the pattern display section 341. This makes it easy to view the remaining time image and the remaining spins image at the same time.

In the remaining time image, the remaining time is displayed by a remaining time seconds counter and a remaining time gauge, and as the remaining time decreases, the number displayed in seconds on the remaining time seconds counter decreases and the length of the remaining time gauge shortens. If the remaining time reaches 0 before the remaining number of rotations, the remaining time image will display the number displayed in seconds on the remaining time seconds counter and the length of the remaining time gauge as 0 (Figures 153 (E) and 153 (F)).

On the other hand, in the remaining RPM image, the remaining RPM is displayed by a remaining RPM display by a remaining RPM counter and a remaining RPM gauge, and as the remaining RPM decreases, the value of the remaining RPM display on the remaining RPM counter decreases and the length of the remaining RPM gauge shortens. If the remaining RPM reaches 0 before the remaining time, the remaining RPM image is displayed with the value of the remaining RPM display on the remaining RPM counter and the length of the remaining RPM gauge set to 0 (see FIG. 153 (D)).

Here, the time attack presentation includes both success and failure presentations, but the display of the progress is the same for both success and failure presentations (see Figures 153(A) to 153(C)) until the results of the time attack are announced (see Figures 153(E) and 153(F)).

As shown in FIG. 153(A), in the time attack performance, an explanatory image for the time attack is displayed in the center of the pattern display section 341 as the start screen, along with an image of the remaining time and the number of remaining spins. In the example shown in FIG. 153(A), the explanatory image for the time attack is displayed as a text image saying "Reduce the number of remaining spins to 0 before the remaining time gauge reaches 0." Note that the explanatory image for the time attack is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 153(A) and may be something else.

As shown in FIG. 153(B), in the time attack performance, an explanatory image for the time attack is displayed as the start screen, followed by a time attack start image indicating that the time attack is about to begin. In the example shown in FIG. 153(B), the time attack start image is displayed as a text image of "TIME ATTACK START." Note that the time attack start image is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 153(B), and may be other, or may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 153(C), in the time attack presentation, an image is displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right and to place the game ball in the second winning hole 315. In the example shown in FIG. 153(C), a text image of "Hit to the right" is displayed directly below the remaining spin count image, and a text image of "Keep putting balls in!" is displayed directly above the second special chart reserved image display area 77. Note that the image encouraging the player to hit to the right and the image encouraging the player to place the game ball in the second winning hole 315 may be displayed in other ways or may be omitted.

In addition, the first decorative pattern 78, which is displayed and stopped in response to the display and stop of the first special pattern, is displayed large in the center of the pattern display section 341, and the second decorative pattern 79, which is displayed and stopped in response to the display and stop of the second special pattern, is displayed smaller than the display of the first decorative pattern 78 in the lower left of the pattern display section 341. As a result, in the time attack performance, the display of the first decorative pattern 78 corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed more prominently than the display of the second decorative pattern 79 corresponding to the second special pattern. Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when the first special pattern game in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed is started in the time-saving game state a, the timing of the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state is important. That is, in this embodiment, when the first special pattern game in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed is started in the time-saving game state a, the timing of the first decorative pattern 78 being stopped and displayed is important. Therefore, in the time attack performance, contrary to the basic display of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 in the time-saving play state described above, the changing display of the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed more prominently than the changing display of the second decorative pattern 79.

As shown in FIG. 153(D), if the remaining number of spins becomes 0 before the remaining time, i.e., if the second special symbol game is played up to the upper limit number of times in the a time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game that is started in the a time-saving game state, a success effect is executed to notify the user that the time attack has been successful. Specifically, in this success effect, the second decorative symbol 79 is displayed as stopped upon the completion of the second special symbol game, the remaining number of spins image is displayed as 0, the remaining number of spins display value of the remaining number of spins counter is displayed as 0, and the length of the remaining number of spins gauge is displayed as 0.

Furthermore, in the success presentation, a success notification image is displayed in the center of the symbol display section 341 to notify the player that the time attack has been successful. In the example shown in FIG. 153(D), the success notification image is displayed as a text image of "Success! Long time reduction obtained!" Here, "long time reduction" refers to the time reduction state c, which has a higher upper limit number of times than the time reduction state a and is essentially guaranteed to result in a jackpot. By displaying "long time reduction obtained", it is notified that a transition to a game state with a higher number of time reductions than the time reduction state a is confirmed. Note that the notification of the transition to the time reduction state c is not limited to the text image of "long time reduction obtained", but may be a text image of another type, or may be another method such as a voice notification.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 153(E) and Fig. 153(F), if the remaining time becomes 0 before the remaining number of spins, that is, if the second special symbol game is not played up to the upper limit number of times in the a time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol game that is started in the a time-saving game state, a failure effect is executed to notify the user that the time attack has failed. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 153(E), in this failure effect, the first decorative symbol 78 is displayed as a stopped time-saving symbol (in the example shown in Fig. 153(E), "123") upon the end of the first special symbol game, and the remaining time image is displayed as 0 as the number of seconds displayed on the remaining time seconds counter, and the length of the remaining time gauge is displayed as 0.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 153(F), in the failure presentation, after the first decorative pattern 78 has stopped and been displayed, a failure notification image is displayed in the center of the pattern display section 341 to notify the player that the time attack has failed. In the example shown in FIG. 153(F), the failure notification image is displayed as a text image of "Failed, time-saving continues!" Here, "time-saving continues" means that the time-saving game state a is maintained. Note that the notification that the time-saving game state a will continue is not limited to the text image of "time-saving continues", but may be a text image of another type, or may be another method such as a sound notification.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery announced by the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving play state is a miss for the time-saving symbol stop, a time attack performance is executed, so that the player can focus on the remaining time image, the remaining number of spins image, the changing and stopped display of the first decorative symbol 78, and the changing and stopped display of the second decorative symbol 79 in the time attack performance, and enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the time attack performance executed in the a time-saving play state.

Specifically, first, when a time attack performance is executed, by checking the remaining time image for the remaining time, the player can grasp the variable display time of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol 78) in the first special symbol game, and can enjoy estimating the likelihood of the game state being able to transition from the a-time shortened game state to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends. For example, if it can be confirmed that the special symbol variable pattern "09", which is the longest variable display time for the first special symbol game, of 150 seconds, has been set based on the remaining time image at the start of the time attack performance, it can be determined that there is a high expectation that the game state will be able to transition from the a-time shortened game state to the normal game state before the first special symbol game ends, and therefore, at the start of the time attack performance, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the remaining time image.

After the time attack performance is executed, for example, by focusing on the first decorative pattern 78, it is possible to confirm that the first special pattern game has not ended, and by checking the remaining time image, the time until the first special pattern game ends can be confirmed. On the other hand, by focusing on the second decorative pattern 79, it is possible to confirm that the second special pattern game has started or ended, and by checking the remaining number of rotations image, the number of second special pattern games required to transition the game state from the a time-saving game state to the normal game state can be confirmed. Therefore, while confirming that the first decorative pattern 78 is not displayed stationary, the player can confirm that the second special pattern game has ended during the execution of the first special pattern game (during the variable display of the first special pattern) and that the remaining number of rotations has decreased by the remaining number of rotations image. This allows the player to enjoy the game while hoping that the second decorative pattern 79 will change while the first decorative pattern 78 is changing, and that the second decorative pattern 79 will stop changing and be displayed in a short time.

Furthermore, after the time attack performance has started, the remaining variable display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the number of times the second special symbol game is required before the game is switched to the normal game state can be confirmed based on the remaining spins image. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins image, the player can enjoy the game while hoping that the remaining spins will decrease at a faster rate than the remaining time, and can also enjoy the game while inferring the possibility of switching to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time confirmed based on the remaining time image and the remaining spins confirmed based on the remaining spins image decrease and approach 0, the player can enjoy the game while paying attention to which of the remaining time or the remaining spins will reach 0 first.

In addition, if the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is set to be long after the time attack performance has started, when the player focuses on the second decorative symbol 79, the player feels disgusted that the remaining number of spins is not subtracted because the second decorative symbol 79 is not displayed stationary for a long time, and furthermore, the longer the second decorative symbol 79 is, the lower the possibility of transitioning to the normal game state becomes, so there is a concern that the player's disgust will decrease his interest in the game during the execution of the time attack performance. In contrast, in this embodiment, the longer the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game in the time-saving game state a becomes, the higher the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special symbol game will be a jackpot. This makes it possible to suppress the player's decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the time attack performance caused by the second decorative symbol 79 not being displayed stationary for a long time.

In this embodiment, in the time attack performance, the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed larger than the second decorative pattern 79 in the central position of the pattern display unit 341 where it is easily visible, but the display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be reversed, or the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed larger than the first decorative pattern 78 so that the second decorative pattern 79 stands out more. The first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed side by side in the vertical, horizontal, or diagonal directions, and the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed with the same size.

In addition, in the time attack presentation, just as the time attack presentation is not executed in a time-saving play state including the a time-saving play state, an image indicating the remaining number of time-saving play times up to the upper limit number of time-saving play times in the time-saving play state (the text image of "120 times remaining" in FIG. 152 (B)) may also be displayed. In this case, in the time attack presentation, it is also possible to display an image indicating the remaining number of times of play of the second special pattern game that should be ended during the execution of the first special pattern game necessary to transition to the c time-saving play state (the remaining number of spins image (remaining number of spins display, remaining number of spins gauge) (see FIG. 153)) in a more emphasized manner than the image indicating the remaining number of time-saving play times (the text image of "120 times remaining" in FIG. 152 (B)). For example, the remaining number of spins image can be displayed in larger letters than the image showing the remaining number of time-saving games (the "120 remaining" text image in FIG. 152(B)), the remaining number of spins image can be displayed in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, or effects can be added to the c remaining number of spins image. In this way, by displaying the remaining number of spins image in a more emphasized manner than the image showing the remaining number of time-saving games (the "120 remaining" text image in FIG. 152(B)), the remaining number of spins image can be more easily recognized, and the player can more easily predict the remaining number of games of the second special game that should be ended during the execution of the first special game necessary to transition to the c time-saving game state based on visually obtained information, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the time attack performance, it is also possible to display the remaining spins image, which indicates the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining spins) until the maximum number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state is reached, in a more emphasized manner than the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge) indicating the remaining time of the first special game. For example, it is possible to display the remaining spins image in larger letters than the remaining time image, display the remaining spins image in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, and add effects to the remaining spins image. In this way, by displaying the remaining spins image in a more emphasized manner than the remaining time image, the remaining spins image becomes easier to see, and the player can easily predict the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining spins) until the maximum number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state is reached based on visually obtained information, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Conversely, in a time attack presentation, the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge) indicating the remaining time of the first special symbol game can be displayed in a more emphasized manner than the remaining number of spins image indicating the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining number of spins) until the maximum number of time-saving games in the a-time-saving game state is reached. For example, the remaining time image can be displayed in larger letters than the remaining number of spins image, the remaining time image can be displayed in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, and effects can be added to the remaining time image. In this way, by displaying the remaining time image in a more emphasized manner than the remaining number of spins image, the remaining time image is easier to see, and the player can easily predict the remaining time of the first special symbol game based on visually obtained information, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a time attack presentation is executed when the first special pattern game is started in the time-saving play state a, which notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss for the time-saving pattern stop, but the time attack presentation may be executed in some or all of the cases when the first special pattern game is started in the time-saving play state a, which notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete miss. In this way, by having the time attack presentation be executed in some or all of the cases where the first special game, which notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete miss in the time-saving game state a, is started, the game ball is intentionally not allowed to enter the second winning hole 315 when the number of remaining time-saving games until the upper limit number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state a is reached is small, and by actively allowing the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 when the first special game is started, it becomes possible to take a strategy to increase the possibility that the first special game will end after transitioning to the normal game state by executing the second special game with the remaining number of time-saving games while the first special game is being executed.

In addition, when a time attack performance is executed in part or all of the cases where a first special symbol game is started to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete miss in the time-saving game state a, the time attack performance may be configured to clearly indicate or suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a miss in the time-saving symbol stop. The degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is a miss in the time-saving symbol stop may be clearly indicated or suggested by the display manner (for example, color, presence or absence of an effect, the size of the effect, the color of the effect) of one or more images among various images displayed in the time attack performance, such as the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge), remaining rotation number image (remaining rotation number display, remaining rotation number gauge), first decorative symbol 78, second decorative symbol 79, the text image of "Right hit", and the text image of "Put the ball in!" In addition, the display mode of various images when the degree of expectation is indicated or suggested may be changed at a predetermined timing, for example, when the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played in the time-saving game state a reaches a specific number. In addition, the degree of expectation may be indicated or suggested by executing a specific effect such as a cut-in effect or a mini-character effect when the remaining number of time-saving games that can be played in the time-saving game state a reaches a specific number, and indicating or suggesting the degree of expectation according to the type of the specific effect. In this way, by indicating or suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special pattern game is a time-saving pattern stop miss, based on the indication or suggestion of the degree of expectation, it becomes possible to enjoy the progress of the time attack effect while hoping that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special pattern game is a time-saving pattern stop miss, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The remaining time display for the first special symbol game may correspond to the actual remaining time, but it is also possible to display the remaining time for the first special symbol game shorter than the actual remaining time. In this case, the first special symbol game continues even when the remaining time display for the first special symbol game reaches zero, and since it is difficult to know when the first special symbol game will end, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the first special symbol game will continue for as long as possible after the remaining time display for the first special symbol game reaches zero.

Furthermore, the remaining time of the first special game does not necessarily have to be displayed on the pattern display unit 341, and it is also conceivable to provide a display device other than the pattern display unit 341 and display the time on this display device.

The time attack effect is not limited to the example described with reference to FIG. 153, and may be in other forms. For example, a subtraction timer such as [○○:○○:○○] may be displayed as the remaining time image. In addition, as a time attack effect, the remaining time of the first special symbol game that starts in the a time-saving game state may be clearly indicated or suggested by something other than numbers or gauges as a battle effect or mission effect. Specifically, for example, in the case of a battle effect, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character may be performed, and the remaining time of the first special symbol game may be displayed as the ally's hit points (HP). Then, it is possible to suggest the variable display time set for the first special symbol game depending on the size of the initial value of the ally's HP, and it is also possible to make it so that when an ally character is damaged by an attack from an enemy character, the ally's HP decreases, and when the ally's HP finally becomes 0, the first special symbol game ends (the first special symbol and the first decorative pattern 78 are stopped).

<Step S4608>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step S4608, the MPU 51 executes a variable display position change setting process to change and set the variable display position of the first decorative pattern 78 set in step S4604 from the upper right area (see FIG. 152(B)) of the pattern display section 341 to the central area (see FIG. 153(C)) of the pattern display section 341, and executes a process to change and set the variable display position of the second decorative pattern 79 from the central area (see FIG. 152(B)) of the pattern display section 341 to the lower left area (see FIG. 153(C)) of the pattern display section 341, and ends the first variable type (presentation pattern) setting process. As a result, the variable display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 are changed from the positions shown in FIG. 152(B) to the display positions in the time attack presentation shown in FIG. 153(C), and the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed in a more prominent manner than the second decorative pattern 79. That is, in the time attack performance, since the timing at which the first decorative pattern 78 stops is important as described above, the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed in a more noticeable manner than the second decorative pattern 79 .

<Step S4609>
If the time-shortened game state flag a is set to OFF (step S4603: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the time-shortened game state flag b indicating the time-shortened game state b is set to ON (step S4609). If the time-shortened game state flag b is set to ON (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4610, and if the time-shortened game state flag b is set to OFF (step S4605: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4611.

<Step S4610>
When the b time-saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4609: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b time-saving game state presentation. In the b time-saving game state presentation process, for example, the setting of a background presentation specific to the b time-saving game state, the setting related to the display of the remaining number of time-saving games, the setting related to the display position of the first decorative pattern 78, etc. are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set by referring to the value of the b time-saving game number counter that indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the b time-saving game state, which is managed by the time-saving game number counter process of FIG. 150.

<Step S4611>
When the b time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4609: No), that is, the game is not in the normal game state, the a time-saving game state, or the b time-saving game state, it can be determined that the game is in the c time-saving game state. Therefore, the MPU 51 sets the c time-saving game state presentation. In the c time-saving game state presentation process, for example, the setting of the background presentation specific to the c time-saving game state, the setting related to the display of the remaining number of time-saving games, the setting related to the display position of the first decorative pattern 78, etc. are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set by referring to the value of the c time-saving game number counter that indicates the remaining number of time-saving games in the c time-saving game state, which is managed by the time-saving game number counter process of FIG. 150.

[Second variable type (performance pattern) setting process]
Here, Figure 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process executed in step S4423 in the command determination process of Figure 149.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 154, in the second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first judges whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S4701). If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4702. On the other hand, if the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), that is, if the time-saving game state is in effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4703.

<Step S4702>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state presentation (step S4702) and ends the second variation type (presentation pattern) setting process. In the normal game state presentation setting process, settings regarding the display position of the second decorative pattern 79 and the like are executed.

<Step S4703>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), that is, when the game is in the time-saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the time-saving game state presentation (step S4703) and proceeds to step S4704. In the time-saving game state presentation process, for example, the setting of the background presentation specific to the time-saving game state, the setting related to the display of the remaining number of time-saving games, the setting related to the display position of the second decorative pattern 79, and the like are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set by referring to the value of the time-saving game counter managed by the time-saving game counter process of FIG. 150, for example.

<Step S4704>
In step S4704, the MPU 51 judges whether or not a time attack performance flag indicating that a time attack performance is being executed is set to ON. The time attack performance flag is set to ON in step S4607 of the first variation type (performance pattern) setting process in Fig. 151 when a first special pattern game is started in which the result of the big win lottery is a time-saving pattern stop miss in the a time-saving game state, and is set to OFF in step S4803 of the first time attack performance in Fig. 155 (A) or step S4903 of the second time attack performance in Fig. 155 (B) when the time attack performance is to be ended.

If the time attack performance flag is set on (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4705; if the time attack performance flag is set off (step S4704: No), the MPU 51 ends the second variation type (performance pattern) setting process.

<Step S4705>
When the time attack performance flag is set to ON (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process to change and set the variable display position of the second decorative pattern 79 in the second special pattern game from the central area (see FIG. 152(B)) of the pattern display section 341 set in step S4703 to the lower left area (see FIG. 153(C)) of the pattern display section 341 (step S4705), and ends the second variable type (performance pattern) setting process. As a result, in the time attack performance, the variable display of the second decorative pattern 79 is set to the lower left area (see FIG. 153(C)) of the pattern display section 341.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game that is started is a jackpot, a reach for a front or rear miss, or a reach other than a front or rear miss, a reach presentation (see Figure 50) may be executed in the same way as the normal game state presentation.

[First Time Attack Production End Processing]
Here, Figure 155 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the first time attack effect ending processing executed in step S4429 in the command determination processing of Figure 149.

The first time attack effect end process is a process for performing a time attack effect, and is executed when the time attack effect flag is set to on when the first special chart change stop command is received (Yes in both steps S4427 and S4428 in the command determination process of FIG. 149). That is, the first time attack effect end process is executed when the first special chart is stopped and displayed in the first special chart game while the time attack effect is being performed in the a time-saving game state. In other words, if the second special chart game has not been performed up to the upper limit number of times in the a time-saving game state by the time the first special chart game (change display of the first special chart) that started in the a time-saving game state ends, the time attack effect ends due to failure of the time attack.

<Step S4801>
As shown in FIG. 155(A), in the first time attack performance end processing, the MPU 51 first displays a time attack failure image (the text image of "Failed! Time reduction continues!" in FIG. 153(F)) on the pattern display unit 341 to indicate that the time attack has failed (step S4801), and then transitions to step S4802.

<Step S4802 and Step S4803>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes a time attack performance setting end process (step S4802), and further sets a time attack performance flag to on indicating that a time attack performance is being executed (step S4803), and ends the first time attack performance end process.

In the time attack performance end setting process, the time until the time attack failure image is erased is set in the pattern display section 341, and the display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 in the pattern display section 341 are changed to the positions when the time attack performance is not being executed (see FIG. 152 (B)).

[Second Time Attack Production End Processing]
Here, Figure 155 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the second time attack effect ending processing executed in step S4432 in the command determination processing of Figure 149.

The second time attack effect end process is a process for performing a time attack effect, and is executed when the time attack effect flag is set to ON and the a time-saving play count counter is 0 when the second special chart change stop command is received (steps S4430 to S4432 are all Yes in the command determination process of FIG. 149). That is, the second time attack effect end process is executed when a time attack effect is being performed in the a time-saving play state, and the second special chart play that is ending this time is the last special chart play in the a time-saving play state. In other words, if the second special chart play has been performed up to the upper limit number of times in the a time-saving play state by the time the second special chart play (the change display of the second special chart) that started in the a time-saving play state ends, the time attack effect ends due to the success of the time attack.

<Step S4901>
As shown in FIG. 155 (B), in the second time attack performance end processing, the MPU 51 first displays a time attack success image (the text image of "Success! Long time reduction obtained!" in FIG. 153 (D)) on the pattern display unit 341 indicating that the time attack has been successful (step S4901), and then transitions to step S4902.

<Step S4902 and Step S4903>
In step S4902, the MPU 51 executes a time attack performance end setting process, and further sets a time attack performance flag to on, indicating that a time attack performance is being executed (step S4903), and ends the second time attack performance end process.

In the time attack performance end setting process, the time until the time attack success image is erased is set in the pattern display section 341 (see Figure 153 (A)).

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variable machine in which the first special symbol game as a variable game in which the first special symbol is changed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port 314 as the starting ball entry, and the second special symbol game as a variable game in which the second special symbol is changed based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second winning port 315 as the starting ball entry can be executed in parallel (in parallel) on the main display unit 36 as the display device under the control of the MPU 41 as the game control unit. In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as an ST machine in which an upper limit (maximum number of a-time shortening games) is set for the number of special symbol games as variable games in the a-time shortening game state as the profit game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game, and which transitions to the normal game state when the maximum number of a-time shortening games is played in the a-time shortening game state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game can be triggered by a time-saving symbol stop miss in which a specific symbol (time-saving symbol) is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 36 as a display device, and can transition to a time-saving symbol c state as an award value for the special symbol game result.

In this way, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol game is started in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state that is transitioned to the normal game state by executing the special symbol game as a variable game with the upper limit number of times (the number of time-saving games a), if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game is a time-saving symbol stop miss, the game is transitioned to the time-saving game state c in which a jackpot that is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a is substantially guaranteed, provided that the first special symbol game ends after transitioning from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, you can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the first special symbol game, in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable game, will start in the time-saving game state a as a profitable game state to which the game is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a first special symbol game in which a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is started in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game is executed the maximum number of times, which is the end condition of the time-saving game state a, before the first special symbol game ends, so that the game state transitions from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game, that is, after the transition from the time-saving game state a to the normal game state, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed, and a new game feature is realized in which a game ball is entered into the second winning hole 315 to execute the second special symbol game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special chart game as a variable game started in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed as the value awarded for the special chart game result. That is, in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, it is expected that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special chart game as a variable game started during the execution of the first special chart game as a variable game is a jackpot, so that the jackpot game is executed. In other words, in the a time-saving game state as the profitable game state, the interest is maintained similar to that of the a time-saving game state of a conventional gaming machine, in that the result of the second special chart jackpot lottery can be expected to be a jackpot. In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game in the a time-saving game state as a profitable game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a miss, the player can continue to expect that the game will move to the c time-saving game state in which a jackpot is practically guaranteed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot, the player can enjoy the benefit of the jackpot game being executed as the granted value for the second special symbol game result. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol game is executed as a variable game during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game in the a time-saving game state as a profitable game state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is a jackpot or a miss, the player can expect the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery to be a jackpot, as in the a time-saving game state of a conventional gaming machine, and can enjoy the benefit according to the lottery result.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment utilizes the time-saving game state a, which is a profitable game state in which the maximum number of time-saving games can be played after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving game state c, in which a jackpot is essentially guaranteed and which can be entered by the stop display of a missed time-saving symbol, and the characteristic of a simultaneous variation machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can vary simultaneously on the main display unit 36 as a display device, to realize the aforementioned new gameplay that enhances the interest of the game, while also maintaining the gameplay in the time-saving game state a of a conventional gaming machine in which a jackpot game is expected to be played based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to seventh embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Ninth embodiment]
In this embodiment, a part of the variation display time set in the jackpot variation table and the time-saving game state second special chart miss variation table is different from that in the previously described eighth embodiment.

[Jackpot fluctuation table]
As shown in FIG. 156(A), in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, in addition to the special chart variation pattern "01" with a special chart variation display time of 30 seconds, the special chart variation pattern "02" with a special chart variation display time of 60 seconds, and the special chart variation pattern "03" with a special chart variation display time of 90 seconds, the special chart variation pattern "11" is set as a variation display time that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery notified in the special chart game is a jackpot. The special chart variation pattern "11" has a special chart variation display time of 200 seconds, which is longer than the maximum variation display time set when notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss by the first special chart game in the a time-saving game state, that is, the special chart variation display time of the special chart variation pattern "09" is 150 seconds (see FIG. 129(C)). That is, it is longer than any of the special chart variation display times set in the first special chart game that notifies a miss in the a time-saving game state. In addition, in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, the allocation rate of the special chart variation pattern "11" is set to 10%.

[Time-saving game state second special chart out-of-game variation table]
As shown in Fig. 156 (B), in the time-saving game state second special chart failure variation table of this embodiment, as the variation display time that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery announced in the special chart game is a failure, the special chart variation pattern "11" in which the special chart variation display time is 200 seconds is set, similar to the jackpot variation table shown in Fig. 156 (A). Also, in the time-saving game state second special chart failure variation table of this embodiment, the allocation rate of the special chart variation pattern "11" is set to an extremely low value of 0.5%.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving game state is one that notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, when the first special symbol game ends after the a time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state, the game has a feature that the game is transitioned to the c time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the a time-saving game state. Also, when the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving game state is one that notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, a time attack performance (see FIG. 153) is executed. Therefore, if the variable display time set for the second special symbol in the second special symbol game started during the execution of the time attack performance is long, it is disadvantageous to end the first special symbol game, in which the result of the jackpot lottery started in the a time-saving game state is a time-saving symbol stop miss, in the normal game state. In particular, if the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game is set to 200 seconds, which is the longest variable display time of the second special symbol in the time-saving game state a, the second special symbol game cannot end during the execution of the first special symbol game, which has a longest variable display time of 150 seconds, and it becomes impossible to end the first special symbol game in the normal game state. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game in the time-saving game state including the time-saving game state a includes a variable display time that makes it impossible to end the second special symbol game that starts during the execution of the first special symbol game during the execution of the first special symbol game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the allocation rate of the special chart fluctuation pattern "11" in the jackpot fluctuation table is set to 10%, while the allocation rate of the special chart fluctuation pattern "11" in the time-saving game state second special chart miss fluctuation table is set to an extremely low value of 0.5%. Therefore, in the time-saving game state a, when the special chart fluctuation pattern "11" of 200 seconds is selected as the special chart fluctuation display time for the second special chart game, the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special chart game will be a jackpot increases. In other words, when the longest fluctuation display time in the time-saving game state a is set as the fluctuation display time of the second special chart in the second special chart game started during the execution of the time attack performance, the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the second special chart game will be a jackpot increases.

In this way, in the a time-saving game state, when the second special symbol game is started during the execution of a time attack performance based on the start of the first special symbol game, which notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving symbol stop miss, if the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is long, it is disadvantageous in that the first special symbol game is ended in the normal game state and the game is transferred to the advantageous c time-saving game state, but the expectation of a jackpot increases when the special symbol variable pattern "11" is selected. Therefore, in a situation during which the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is long and disadvantageous to the player, and interest in the game may decrease, by increasing the expectation of a jackpot for the second special symbol game, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the time attack performance, and rather, the interest in the game is increased because the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping for a jackpot in the unfavorable situation during the execution of the time attack performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to eighth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

[Tenth embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine is equipped with an "illuminant" as a light emitting means, an "information acquisition process" as an information acquisition means, a "judgment process" as a judgment means, a "rotating body" as a rotation means which is either the first rotation means or the second rotation means, and a "visible state" which is either the first state or the second state.

The light emitting means may be any means capable of emitting light visible when viewed from the front of the game board, and may be capable of emitting light toward the front side, or may be capable of emitting light in a direction other than the front side (for example, a direction along the surface of the game board (for example, a horizontal direction such as left and right, a vertical direction such as up and down, or a diagonal direction). As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of light emitting means include liquid crystal displays, dot matrix displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, the pixels (dots) of these displays, various lamps such as LED lamps, and any combination of these.

The information acquisition means may be any process that acquires information in order to execute some process. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of the information acquisition means include a process for acquiring a command sent from the main control device, a process for acquiring a command sent from the audio lamp control device, a process for acquiring detection information from various sensors and various switches, a process for acquiring a regular random number counter, a process for acquiring a regular random number type counter, a process for acquiring a regular random number initial value counter, a process for acquiring a regular variation type counter, a process for acquiring a jackpot random number counter, a process for acquiring a jackpot type counter, a process for acquiring a reach random number counter, a process for acquiring a jackpot random number initial value counter, a process for acquiring a special variation type counter, and any combination thereof.

The judgment means may be a judgment process executed based on various information. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the judgment means may be, for example, a process for determining the type of command sent from the audio lamp control device, a process for determining the detection contents of various sensors and various switches, a process for determining the value of a random number counter for a regular map (a process for determining whether or not a regular map is won), a process for determining the value of a regular map type counter (a process for determining the type of regular map win), a process for determining the value of a random number counter for a regular map (a process for determining the initial value of a random number counter for a regular map), a process for determining the value of a regular map variation type counter (a process for determining the regular map variation display time), a process for determining the value of a jackpot random number counter (a process for determining whether or not a jackpot is won), a process for determining the value of a jackpot type counter (a process for determining the type of jackpot), a process for determining the value of a reach random number counter (a process for determining whether or not a reach is executed, and a process for determining the type of reach if a reach is executed), a process for determining the value of a random number counter for a jackpot (a process for determining the initial value of a random number counter for a jackpot), a process for determining the value of a special map variation type counter (a process for determining the special map variation display time), or any combination thereof.

The rotating means may be any means capable of rotating. As long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, examples of the rotating means include means capable of rotating at one fixed position, means capable of rotating at multiple positions, means with a constant rotation speed, means with a non-constant rotation speed, means capable of rotating in one direction, means capable of rotating in multiple directions, means capable of moving, means capable of moving along one path, means capable of moving along multiple paths, means capable of moving linearly, means capable of moving non-linearly, means capable of rotating while moving, means capable of rotating while moving, means capable of deforming such as expanding and contracting, means capable of changing shape by connecting, combining, separating, etc., means having translucency as a whole, means having translucency in part, means having no translucency, means rotated by control means such as an MPU, means rotated by interference with another object such as a game ball, means rotated by interference with a game ball such as a windmill, and any combination thereof.

The state may be one that can be seen by the player. As long as the state can realize the purpose of the present invention, examples of the state include a state in which the shape of the rotating means is changed, a light emitting state of one or more light emitting means, a rotating state of one or more rotating means, a moving state of one or more rotating means, a light emitting state of a light emitting means seen through a rotating means, a state in which a rotating means blocks light emitted from a light emitting means, a state in which another rotating means is seen through one rotating means, a moving state of one or more rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is close to another rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is separated from another rotating means, and any combination thereof.

In conventional gaming machines, a rotating body is provided on the game board as a decorative accessory, and this rotating body is rotated as necessary during the changing display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) in the special symbol game or during the jackpot game.

However, many rotating bodies have an illuminant integrated into the back side, and when the rotating body is in operation, the illuminant rotates while emitting light. In this state, the back side of the rotating body cannot be seen. For this reason, decorations using conventional rotating bodies are only done on the rotating body, and the decorativeness is not sufficiently improved.

In contrast, the present invention can generate a first visible state in which the light from the light-emitting body is visible through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body, and a second visible state in which the second rotating body is visible through the rotating plate portion as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion, blocking the light. This makes it possible to create a highly decorative effect using two rotating bodies, the first rotating body and the second rotating body.

In this embodiment, there is a first visible state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, and a second visible state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, causing the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body to block the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as the illuminant, thereby making the left second rotating body or the right second rotating body as the second rotating body visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body. In this way, the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can move to the back side of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part, and the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can result in two states, a first visible state and a second visible state, which are visible to the player, and the decorations executed by the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part are diversified.

For example, in this embodiment, in a first viewing state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like as an illuminant, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, a performance can be executed according to the viewing state of the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as viewed through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light in a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as an illuminant visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute decorations that give the player information about the game, such as decorations that notify the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (one-shot announcement effect), decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later, and decorations that notify the player that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery include a jackpot during the reservation of the right to play the special game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game (reserved consecutive win confirmation effect).

In addition, as the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R blocks the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant, and in a second visible state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37, a performance can be executed according to the visible state of the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37. Specifically, depending on the visual appearance of the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute decorations that give the player information about the game, decorations that give the player information about the game, such as decorations that notify the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (one-shot announcement effect), and it is also possible to execute effects that clearly indicate or suggest the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is also possible to execute decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and further, it is possible to execute decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later. It is also possible to execute reserved consecutive win confirmation decorations that notify the player that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery include a jackpot during the reservation of the right to play the special game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game.

As described above, in this embodiment, there is a first visible state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, and a second visible state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, thereby causing the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R to move to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body. and a second visible state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 by blocking the light in a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is configured with a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant. This diversifies the decorations performed by the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The following describes this embodiment, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 157 to 173.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
Fig. 157 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 157, the game board 31 is provided with a plurality of nails (reference numerals omitted), a windmill 310, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning hole 313, a first winning hole 314, a second winning hole 315, a variable winning hole 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a first rotating accessory member 37, a left second rotating accessory member 38L, and a right second rotating accessory member 38R.

The nails are driven into the periphery of the variable display unit 34 on the game board 31, which is molded from a transparent resin, and define the path of the game ball that is shot onto the game board 31 and flows down along the game board 31. The game balls are shot by the launching device at 0.6 second intervals, so that when a player plays a game of continuous ball play, multiple game balls flow down the game board 31. The game ball shot into the left side area of the game board 31 collides with nails and the like driven into the left side area of the game board 31, and flows down while rotating along various paths, such as a path that can pass through the through gate 317L, a path that interferes with the windmill 310, a path that can enter the general winning hole 313, and a path that can enter the first winning hole 314. Here, the game balls shot out to the left area of the game board 31 flow down on the game board 31 without passing through the through gate 317, and are branched into game balls that enter the general winning opening 313 and game balls that flow down toward the windmill 310. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 313, a preset number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device. The game balls that flow down toward the windmill 310 flow down toward the windmill 310 from multiple positions above the windmill 310. The game balls that are sorted by the windmill 310 are branched into game balls that flow down toward the first winning opening 314 and game balls that flow down toward the second winning opening 315. The game balls that flow down toward the first winning opening 314 flow down along a random trajectory due to multiple nails that have been driven in, and win the first winning opening 314 or flow down. The game ball flowing down toward the second winning hole 315 flows down toward the second winning hole 315 along a random trajectory due to the multiple nails that have been driven in, and enters the second winning hole 315 when the electric role 315b is activated, and flows down without entering the second winning hole 315 and enters the out hole 318 when the electric role 315b is not activated. On the other hand, the game ball shot out to the right area of the game board 31 collides with nails and the like driven in the right area of the game board 31, and flows down while rotating along various paths such as a path that can pass through the through gate 317R, a path that can enter the variable winning hole 316 when the opening and closing door 319 is activated, and a path that can enter the second winning hole 315 when the electric role 315b is activated. When the ball enters the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315, a big win lottery is executed according to the game state. That is, in this embodiment, the nails are driven so that left hits that launch the game ball into the left area of the game board 31 are advantageous in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, and right hits that launch the game ball into the right area of the game board 31 are advantageous in the high-frequency support mode, which is the high-variable game state and the time-saving game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, left hits are encouraged in the normal game state, and right hits are encouraged in the high-variable game state and the time-saving game state.

The windmill 310 is provided in the center of the left side area of the game board 31, with a bearing part (not shown), a front rotating plate part that is placed on the front side of the game machine when installed, and multiple abutment plate parts that the game balls abut against, all being integrally molded from transparent resin. Since the windmill 310 is molded from transparent resin, the back side of the front rotating plate part (not shown) is visible when viewed from the front side. The switching of the light of the decorative light-emitting body for decoration provided on the game board and the light-emitting body for lighting the game board (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board is visible through the front rotating plate part of the windmill 310. In other words, when the windmill 310 is viewed from the front side of the game machine, the light-emitting state of the back side of the front rotating plate part is visible when there is nothing on the back side of the front rotating plate part. The front rotating plate part (not shown) is partially painted or decorated with cutouts, and is integrally molded from transparent resin, but is configured to have different light transmittance. The windmill 310 can rotate in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the interference of the game ball. The game balls flowing down from above the windmill 310 toward the windmill 310 follow random trajectories due to nails driven into the game board 31 and abut against any of the abutment plate parts of the windmill 310 from multiple directions. At this time, depending on the timing, multiple game balls may flow down toward the windmill 310 at the same time and abut against the abutment plate parts. When the game ball abuts against the abutment plate parts, the kinetic energy of the game ball is transmitted to the windmill 310, and the transmitted kinetic energy rotates the entire windmill 310 around its axis. The multiple abutment plate parts (not shown) of the windmill 310 distribute the game balls that flow down from the upper left of the game board 31 and abut against any of the abutment plate parts of the windmill 310 to the left or right side of the rotation axis of the windmill 310. At this time, since the windmill 310 is molded from a transparent resin, the game ball flows down from the area outside the front rotating plate portion, flows down to the back side of the front rotating plate portion, and abuts against the abutment plate portion, and the windmill 310 rotates by the kinetic energy of the game ball and distributes the game balls. The game balls distributed to the left side by the windmill 310 move along a path that cannot enter the first winning hole 314. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 310 can move along a path that can enter the first winning hole 314. That is, the windmill 310 distributes the game balls that flow down from the upper left of the game board 31 and interfere with the windmill 310 to the left path that is disadvantageous to the player because the ball cannot enter the first winning hole 314, and the right path that includes a path that is advantageous to the player because the ball can enter the first winning hole 314. When the kinetic energy transmitted from the game ball reaches zero, the windmill 310 stops rotating and enters a stationary state. In this way, because the windmill 310 is molded from transparent resin, it is possible to see multiple viewing states through the front rotating plate section, whose back side is visible, such as a viewing state in which the light emitted from the game board is visible, a viewing state in which the light on the game board is turned off, and a viewing state in which the game ball is moving to the back side of the front rotating plate section.

The arrangement of the multiple nails is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 157 and can be changed as appropriate. The number and arrangement of the windmills 310 are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 157 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple windmills 310 may be provided, and in addition to or instead of being provided in the left area of the game board 31, they may be provided in the right area of the game board 31. The windmills 310 are always rotatable. Therefore, they can rotate at any time if a game ball comes into contact with them, and when a player is playing a pinball game, they may rotate even during a jackpot, during variable play, or when the variable play has stopped.

The variable display unit 34 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332 and includes a pattern display section 341 that displays still images and videos that are visible when viewed from the front. The pattern display section 341 is configured to have, for example, a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like. In other words, the pattern display section 341 may be anything that can display still images and videos by emitting light to the front side.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means of the present invention is configured as a pattern display unit 341 capable of emitting light toward the front side, but the light emitting means of the present invention may be anything capable of emitting light that is visible when viewed from the front of the game board, and may be anything capable of emitting light toward the front side, or anything capable of emitting light in a direction other than the front side (for example, a direction along the surface of the game board (for example, a horizontal direction such as left and right, a vertical direction such as up and down, or a diagonal direction).

Here, Figs. 158 to 161 are drawings to be referred to in order to explain the first rotating accessory member 37. Specifically, Fig. 158 is a front view showing an example of the game board 10 when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in the operating position in a contracted state, Fig. 159 is a front view showing an example of the game board 10 when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in the operating position in an expanded state, Fig. 160 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the first rotating accessory member 37, and Fig. 161 is a side view showing the periphery of the first rotating accessory member 37 with a part cut away.

As shown in Figures 158 to 161, the first rotating part member 37, details of which will be described later, can move up and down, rotate, and expand and contract by a first rotating part member drive mechanism 37a (see Figure 169), and in special game and jackpot games, it operates alone or in cooperation with the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R described below to perform a performance that provides the player with specified information regarding the game. Here, examples of the predetermined information regarding the game include information that clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, information that clearly indicates or suggests the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, information that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, information that clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game that is executed after the end of the special game when the right to play the special game is reserved is a jackpot (reserved pre-reading information), information that clearly indicates or suggests that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game when the right to play the special game is reserved is a jackpot (so-called reserved consecutive win information), etc.

In this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 is used in cooperation with the second rotating accessory member 38L on the left and the second rotating accessory member 38R on the right in the special game to indicate or suggest the type of jackpot (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot) and whether or not there is a reserve consecutive win.

The first rotating part member 37 has a shape resembling a flower when viewed from the front in the contracted state, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The location of the first rotating part member 37 is not limited to the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and can be changed, for example, it may be arranged on the flow path of the game ball. In this case, it is considered to protect the first rotating part member 37 with nails so that the game balls do not collide with it. Of course, protection from the game balls when the first rotating part member 37 is arranged on the flow path of the game balls may be performed not only by nails but also by members made of resin or the like. In addition, when the first rotating part member 37 is arranged on the flow path of the game balls, it may be subjected to the action of the game balls. In other words, the first rotating part member 37 may or may not be subjected to the action of the game balls. The first rotating part member 37 includes a plurality of plate-shaped members 370, 371, a rotating shaft 372, and a plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373.

The multiple plate-like members 370, 371 have a shape resembling a petal, and include a first plate-like member 370 and a second plate-like member 371. Each plate-like member 370, 371 is entirely made of resin, for example.

The first plate-like member 370 has a circular translucent region 370A in front view that has translucency that allows the rear side to be seen. The translucent region 370A is formed to have a higher translucency than other regions in the first plate-like member 370. When the entire first plate-like member 370 is formed from resin, the translucent region 370A is formed from, for example, a transparent resin or a semi-transparent resin. Note that the regions in the first plate-like member 370 other than the translucent region 370A may be formed so that the rear side is visible, or may be formed so that the rear side is not visible or is difficult to see.

Such a light-transmitting region 370A can be formed, for example, by forming a transparent resin molding, which is a pre-processed product of the first plate-like member 370, by resin molding, and then applying paint to the resin molding in areas other than the area that is to become the light-transmitting region 370A. The light-transmitting region 370A can also be formed by insert molding a member that is circular in front view and made of, for example, a transparent or translucent resin.

The translucent region 370A may be either colored transparent or colorless transparent, so long as it has a higher translucency than the other regions of the first plate-like member 370 and has a translucency that allows the rear side to be seen. The shape of the translucent region 370A when viewed from the front is not limited to a circle, and may be another shape. The translucent region 370A may be formed as a through hole. When the translucent region 370A is formed as a through hole in this way, the translucent region 370A can be formed more easily than when the translucent region 370A is formed by insert molding.

The translucent region 370A may also be formed as a magnifying lens. In this way, when the translucent region 370A is formed as a magnifying lens, the display of the predetermined information visible through the translucent region 370A is enlarged, making it easier for the player to grasp the predetermined information. For example, when the information display units 363L, 364L of the left second rotating role member 38L or the information display units 363R, 364R of the right second rotating role member 38R are visible through the translucent region 370A, the information presented by the information display units 363L, 364L, 363R, 364R (e.g., the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reserve consecutive win) is enlarged. Also, when a predetermined region of the pattern display unit 341 is visible through the translucent region 370A, the information presented in the predetermined region (e.g., the result of a jackpot lottery) is enlarged. This makes it possible to execute a so-called one-shot announcement effect in special chart games, clearly indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first plate-like member 370 is provided with a translucent region 370A that has a higher translucency than the surrounding area, but it is not necessary to set the translucent region 370A. For example, the first plate-like member 370 may be formed so that the overall translucency is uniform or approximately uniform.

The second plate-shaped member 371, on the other hand, has an appearance basically similar to that of the first plate-shaped member 370, so a detailed description will be omitted, but it differs from the first plate-shaped member 370 in that it does not have a translucent region 370A. Furthermore, the second plate-shaped member 371 can be modified in the same way as the first plate-shaped member 370, within the applicable range.

The rotating shaft 372 is a part to which a rotational driving force is input from the first rotating part drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169) described below, and extends in the front-to-rear direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display unit 341. The rotating shaft 372 is set to a predetermined rotating state by the input of a rotational force from the first rotating part drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51, and is set to a non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) by stopping the input of the rotational force from the first rotating part drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51.

The rotation speed of the rotating shaft 372 (the multiple plate-like members 370, 371) in a given rotation state, i.e., the rotation speed of the first rotating part member 37, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, and the rotation speed or direction may be variable.

A plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 are fixed radially to the rotating shaft 372 in a front view. Therefore, the plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 can rotate around the rotating shaft 372 by rotating the rotating shaft 372. The rotating shaft 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to the lifting shaft 374, and its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by a restricting ring 376. Here, the lifting shaft 374 moves the rotating shaft 372 in the vertical direction, and moves the rotating shaft 372 in the vertical direction by a driving force input from a first rotating role member driving mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169) described later. As a result, the first rotating role member 37 can move in the vertical direction as a whole by moving the rotating shaft 372 in the vertical direction. That is, the first rotating part member 37 can move closer to the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R by moving downward, and can move away from the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R by moving upward.

Each of the expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 supports one of the plate-shaped members 370 and 371, and can slide the supported plate-shaped members 370 and 371 along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372. Each of the expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 converts the rotational force input from, for example, the first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169) described below into a linear force, thereby sliding the supported plate-shaped members 370 and 371 along the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372. A known mechanism for converting a rotational force into a linear force can be used as each of the expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373. Specifically, each of the expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 can be an actuator including one or more components such as a rack, a screw shaft, a ball screw, an endless belt, a wire, a chain, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, and a roller. Each of the expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 may also utilize a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force.

In this way, in the first rotating role member 37, the rotating shaft 372 is rotatably supported by the lifting shaft 374, and the plate-shaped members 370, 371 are slidably supported by a plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 arranged radially from the rotating shaft 372. Therefore, the first rotating role member 37 can move up and down on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, can rotate around the rotating shaft 372, and can expand and contract around the rotating shaft 372.

Here, Figure 169 is a block diagram showing an example of the main parts of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 169, the first rotating part 37 is controlled for up and down movement, rotation, and expansion and contraction via a first rotating part drive mechanism 37a controlled by an MPU 51. The first rotating part drive mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via an input/output I/F 52. This first rotating part drive mechanism 37a has, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the first rotating part 37 has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 372, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and the lift shaft 374 of the first rotating role member 37 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and a driving force is input to the rotation shaft 372, the multiple expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and the lift shaft 374. The first rotating role member 37 is movable up and down on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 between a predetermined standby position (position shown by virtual lines in FIG. 158) in which the first rotating role member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A, as shown in FIG. 157, and an operating position (shown by solid lines in FIG. 158) in which the first rotating role member 37 is set below the standby position and the entire first rotating role member 37 is exposed, by inputting the driving force of the lift shaft 374. As shown in FIG. 160, the first rotating part member 37 can rotate in a counterclockwise direction on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by inputting a rotational force to the rotation shaft 372. The rotation position of the first rotating part member 37 may be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the first rotating part member 37 is rotated at the operating position. Furthermore, the first rotating part member 37 can be expanded or contracted by inputting a driving force to the expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, and the plate-shaped members 370 and 371 are slid in the radial direction of the rotation shaft 372 on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The first rotating part member 37 can rotate on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 in either the contracted state (see FIG. 160(A)) or the expanded state (see FIG. 160(B)).

The first rotating part drive mechanism 37a has a motor driver connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver can also obtain the detection results from the return detection unit and transmit them to the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

The configuration of the first rotating part member drive mechanism 37a is not particularly limited, and similarly, there are no particular limitations on the configuration of the first rotating part member drive mechanism 37a. In other words, there are no particular limitations on the configuration for moving the first rotating part member 37 up and down, rotating, and expanding and contracting.

In addition, in this embodiment, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating accessory member 37 is not limited to that provided by a motor, but may be obtained by the action of a solenoid or a game ball. Specifically, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating accessory member 37 may be a power obtained by an out ball discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the outlet 318, etc., or a power obtained by a game ball other than the out ball flowing down the game board 31. As an example, a rotating body such as a gear is always rotated by the action of a game ball moving on the front side or back side of the game board 31, and the rotating body and the first rotating accessory member 37 are connected as necessary to transmit the rotational force of the rotating body to the first rotating accessory member 37, thereby rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating accessory member 37. As another example, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotating accessory member 37 may be electricity obtained by the action of a game ball moving on the front or back side of the game board 31. For example, electricity may be generated by the rotation of a rotating body caused by the action of a game ball, or by the deformation of a piezoelectric element caused by a game ball colliding with the piezoelectric element. Furthermore, the electricity obtained by the action of the game ball may be stored or used. Specifically, the electricity obtained by the action of the game ball may be stored in a storage device, and the electricity stored in the storage device may be used to rotate and expand/contract the first rotating accessory member 37.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when the first rotating role member 37 is in an expanded state in the operating position, the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R, which are arranged on the rear side of the first rotating role member 37 and on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, can move behind the multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37 by moving them to the operating position (see Figures 165 to 167). Therefore, when the first rotating role member 37 is in an expanded state in the operating position, the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R move behind the multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37, blocking the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side, and the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R become visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37 (see Figure 167). On the other hand, if the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are not behind the multiple plate-like members 370, 371 of the first rotating part member 37, the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a state in which the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side is visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and a state in which the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side is blocked and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37. As a result, two types of states can be created depending on the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R, and the performances performed by the operation of the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R are diversified. For example, in a state where the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-like member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, it is possible to execute a performance according to the visibility state of the light of the specific area seen through the translucent area 370A. Specifically, it is possible to execute a performance that gives the player, for example, predetermined information about the game (for example, information about the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game or the reserved special game) according to the visibility state of the light of the specific area seen through the translucent area 370A. On the other hand, when the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side is blocked and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37, it becomes possible to execute a performance that gives the player, for example, predetermined information about the game (for example, information about the results of the jackpot lottery for the special game or the reserved special game) according to the visibility of the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as viewed through the translucent area 370A.

In addition, in the two types of states realized by the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R, examples of effects that give the player predetermined information about the game include effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a jackpot, effects that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a jackpot, effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a jackpot, Examples of such effects include effects that clearly indicate or suggest the degree of expectation, effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game to be executed after the end of the special game when the right to play the special game is reserved is a jackpot (pre-reading effect of reservation), effects that clearly indicate or suggest that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game when the right to play the special game is reserved is a jackpot (effects that clearly indicate or suggest a reserved consecutive win). In this way, by having two types of states realized by the first rotating role member 37 and the left second rotating role member 38L or the right second rotating role member 38R, the effects executed by the operation of the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

The first rotating role member 37 can also execute a performance that gives the player predetermined information about the game by itself. For example, an image corresponding to the predetermined information is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, and the image is made visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, thereby executing a performance that gives the player predetermined information about the game. In this case, it is also conceivable to execute a performance that gives the player predetermined information about the game by displaying multiple images corresponding to the predetermined information about the game to the player, and making one of these images visible through the translucent area 370A.

Here, Fig. 162(A) to Fig. 162(C) are diagrams showing visual examples when the first rotating role member 37 alone executes a roulette presentation in which the result of the jackpot lottery in a special symbol game is notified whether or not the result is a jackpot. Specifically, Fig. 162(A) is an image example of the symbol display section 341 in a roulette presentation, Fig. 162(B) is a visual example when the result of the jackpot lottery in the roulette presentation is notified that it is a jackpot, and Fig. 162(C) is a visual example when the result of the jackpot lottery in the roulette presentation is notified that it is a miss.

As shown in FIG. 162(A), when the first rotating role member 37 alone executes a roulette effect in which the player is informed of whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in a special game, multiple notification images 40A-40E (five in the illustrated example) are displayed on the pattern display unit 341. The multiple notification images 40A-40E include two jackpot notification images 40A, 40B that notify the player of a jackpot, and three miss notification images 40C-40E that notify the player of a miss. The jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the miss notification images 40C-40E are displayed in a distinguishable manner. In the example shown in FIG. 162(A), the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B are displayed as black circles, and the miss notification images 40C-40E are displayed as white circles, making them distinguishable.

The jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the miss notification images 40C to 40E may be displayed in a distinguishable manner, and may be displayed in shapes other than circles, and may be displayed in colors other than black and white. Furthermore, the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the miss notification images 40C to 40E may be displayed in a distinguishable manner using characters or symbols. For example, the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B may be displayed as images that clearly indicate or suggest a jackpot, such as "WIN", "WIN", or "○", while the miss notification images 40C to 40E may be displayed as images that clearly indicate or suggest a miss, such as "LOSE", "LOSE", or "X". Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the multiple notification images 40A to 40E, an image that suggests the probability of a jackpot may be displayed. For example, in addition to text images such as "chance", "big chance", "super hot", and "sure thing" (indicating a jackpot), the probability of a jackpot may be displayed as "XX%".

The multiple notification images 40A to 40E are displayed on the rotation trajectory of the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating role member 37 is in a reduced state. In the example shown in FIG. 162(A), the multiple notification images 40A to 40E are displayed at equal intervals on the lower half of the arc of the rotation trajectory. As a result, by stopping the first rotating role member 37 rotating in a reduced state at a position corresponding to one of the multiple notification images 40A to 40E, it is possible to make one of the big win notification images 40A, 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370. In other words, five locations are set as the stopping positions of the first rotating role member 37 in the roulette performance, where one of the multiple notification images 40A to 40E can be visible through the light-transmitting area 370A.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the first rotating part 37 rotating in a reduced state is stopped at a position where the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B are visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 (see FIG. 162(B)). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the first rotating part 37 rotating in a reduced state is stopped at a position where the loss notification images 40C to 40E are visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 (see FIG. 162(C)).

In this embodiment, the multiple notification images 40A to 40E are displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating role member 37 is in a reduced state. However, the multiple notification images 40A to 40E may be displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 when the first rotating role member 37 is in an expanded state. In this case, by controlling the stop position of the first rotating role member 37 rotating in an expanded state, it is possible to make any one of the jackpot notification images 40A, 40B and the miss notification images 40C to 40E visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370.

In addition, in this embodiment, five notification images 40A-40E are arranged at equal intervals in the lower half of the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-like member 370. However, the number of notification images 40A-40E is not particularly limited as long as they include two or more types that can notify different information, such as the big win notification images 40A, 40B and the miss notification images 40C-40E. Furthermore, the multiple notification images 40A-40E do not necessarily have to be arranged at equal intervals. Furthermore, the multiple notification images 40A-40E are not limited to the lower half of the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A, and may be displayed in a range different from the example shown in FIG. 162(A), such as the upper half, left half, right half, or entire circumference of the rotation trajectory.

Here, FIG. 162(D) is a diagram showing an example of the rotation pattern (the viewing order of the notification images 40A-40E visible through the light-transmitting area 370A) of the first rotating part 37 in a roulette presentation in which the first rotating part 37 alone notifies whether the result of the jackpot lottery in a special chart game is a jackpot or not in a special chart game. Note that "40A", "40B", etc. in FIG. 162(D) mean that the first rotating part 37 is temporarily stopped or stopped at a position where the notification images 40A-40E corresponding to the code are visible through the light-transmitting area 370A. Also, FIG. 162(E) is a diagram showing an example of the stop pattern in a roulette presentation.

As shown in FIG. 162(D), in this embodiment, six types of rotation patterns, A to F, are set as the rotation patterns of the first rotating role member 37 in the roulette presentation. The details of the rotation patterns A to F will be described later. Which of the rotation patterns A to F is executed is determined randomly, for example, based on a predetermined lottery. Also, which of the multiple notification images 40A to 40E is ultimately visible through the translucent region 370A, i.e., the final stopping position of the first rotating role member 37, is determined, for example, by a predetermined lottery based on the result of the big win lottery.

As shown in FIG. 162(E), in this embodiment, four types of stop patterns, A to D, are set for the roulette presentation. That is, in the roulette presentation, after any of the rotation patterns A to F is executed, any of the stop patterns A to D is executed, whereby the first rotating part member 37 stops at a predetermined final position, and whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a miss is notified according to the type of notification image 40A to 40E visible through the translucent area 370A.

In the rotation pattern A shown in Figure 162 (D), the initial stopping position of the first rotating part member 37 is a position where the jackpot notification image 40A is visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162 (B)), and then the first rotating part member 37 is intermittently rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g. 45°) so that the jackpot notification image 40B, the miss notification image 40C, the miss notification image 40D and the miss notification image 40E are sequentially visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern A, the first rotating part member 37 is rotated clockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 180°), so that the jackpot notification image 40A is again visible through the translucent region 370A, and then, as necessary, is rotated intermittently clockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 45°), so that one of the notification images 40A-40E is stopped or temporarily stopped in a state where it is visible through the translucent region 370A, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery.

In rotation pattern B, like rotation pattern A, the initial stop position of the first rotating part 37 is a position where the big win notification image 40A is visible through the translucent area 370A (see FIG. 162(B)). After that, the first rotating part 37 is rotated clockwise intermittently by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) so that the big win notification image 40B, the miss notification image 40C, the miss notification image 40D, and the miss notification image 40E are sequentially visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern B, contrary to rotation pattern A, the first rotating part 37 is rotated counterclockwise intermittently by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) as necessary, so that one of the notification images 40A to 40E is stopped or temporarily stopped in a state where it is visible through the translucent area 370A depending on the result of the big win lottery.

In rotation pattern C, the initial stopping position of the first rotating part member 37 is a position where the miss notification image 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A (see Figure 162 (C)), and then the first rotating part member 37 is intermittently rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g. 45°) so that the miss notification image 40D, the miss notification image 40C, the jackpot notification image 40B and the jackpot notification image 40A are sequentially visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern C, the first rotating part member 37 is rotated counterclockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 180°), so that the miss notification image 40E is again visible through the translucent region 370A, and then, as necessary, is rotated intermittently counterclockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 45°), so that one of the notification images 40A-40E is stopped or temporarily stopped in a state where it is visible through the translucent region 370A, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery.

In rotation pattern D, like rotation pattern C, the initial stop position of the first rotating part 37 is a position where the loss notification image 40E is visible through the translucent region 370A (see FIG. 162(C)), and then the first rotating part 37 is rotated intermittently in a counterclockwise direction by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°), so that the loss notification image 40D, the loss notification image 40C, the big win notification image 40B, and the big win notification image 40A are sequentially visible through the translucent region 370A. Furthermore, in rotation pattern D, contrary to rotation pattern C, the rotation is intermittently rotated in a clockwise direction by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) as necessary, so that one of the notification images 40A to 40E is stopped or temporarily stopped in a state where it is visible through the translucent region 370A depending on the result of the big win lottery.

In rotation pattern E, the first rotating part member 37 rotates clockwise at high speed, and then stops or temporarily stops while one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A.

In rotation pattern F, the first rotating part member 37 rotates counterclockwise at high speed, and then stops or temporarily stops while one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A.

Stop pattern A shown in FIG. 162 (E) is a pattern in which the first rotating part 37 stops directly at a predetermined final stop position, and the first rotating part 37 does not rotate again after that.

In stop pattern B, before the final stop, the first rotating part member 37 rotates alternately in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) between a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent region 370A and a position where the miss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent region 370A, and then stops at a predetermined final stop position, which is a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent region 370A, or a position where the miss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent region 370A. This stop pattern B is executed when the final stop position is determined to be a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent region 370A, or a position where the miss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent region 370A.

Stop pattern C and stop pattern D can be executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the final stop position is determined to be a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A. Specifically, in stop pattern C, the first rotating part member 37 is temporarily stopped at a position where the miss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent area 370A, and then the first rotating part member 37 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 45°) to stop the first rotating part member 37 at a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A. On the other hand, in stop pattern D, similar to stop pattern C, the first rotating part 37 is temporarily stopped at a position where the miss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent area 370A, and then the first rotating part 37 is rotated clockwise by a specific angle (e.g., 135°) to stop the first rotating part 37 at a position where the jackpot notification image 40B is visible through the translucent area 370A.

In this way, in the roulette presentation using the first rotating part member 37, the presentation and decorativeness are made more diverse and colorful by combining the rotation patterns A-F and the stop patterns A-D of the first rotating part member 37. In addition, when the roulette presentation is being executed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the notification images 40A-40E that are finally visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating part member 37, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The rotation pattern and stop pattern in the roulette effect using the first rotating part member 37 are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 162 (D) and 162 (E), and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, the roulette effect in which the first rotating role member 37 alone in the special chart game notifies whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a miss has been described, but the roulette effect by the first rotating role member 37 may be executed as an effect in the special chart game to notify whether the jackpot is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot, and may be executed as an upgrade effect in the jackpot game to notify that the jackpot is a special jackpot when a normal jackpot is notified in the special chart game.

In addition, in the roulette presentation of this embodiment, the notification images 40A-40E displayed on the pattern display unit 341 are visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37. However, instead of making the notification images 40A-40E displayed on the pattern display unit 341 visible, a plurality of various lamps such as LEDs may be arranged on the back side of the first rotating role member 37, and the light emission state of the lamps visible through the translucent region 370A, such as color, lighting, turning off, blinking, etc., may be used to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won and the type of jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 is movable in a linear path in the vertical direction, but it may be movable in a direction other than the vertical direction, for example, left and right or diagonally, or it may be movable in a non-linear path such as a meandering path or an arc-shaped path, or it may be movable in multiple different paths. Also, the first rotating accessory member 37 may be immovable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the standby position of the first rotating part member 37 is set to a position where it is partially exposed from the opening 31A, and the operating position of the first rotating part member 37 is set to the center of the pattern display section 341, but the standby position and the operating position are not particularly limited, and may be set, for example, around the pattern display section 341 when viewed from the front, directly above or inside the various winning holes 313 to 316, around the windmill 310 as a rotating body, etc. Also, at least one of the standby positions and operating positions of the first rotating part member 37 may be set multiple times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 can be expanded and contracted by sliding the multiple plate-shaped members 370, 371, but the first rotating accessory member 37 may not be expanded or contracted, and may have only one plate-shaped member.

Here, Figs. 163 to 167 are drawings for explaining the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R. Specifically, Fig. 163 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are in the operating position, Fig. 164 is a front view showing an example of the rotation of the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R, and Fig. 165 is a front view showing an example of the rotation of the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R when the first rotating part member 37 is in the expanded state in the operating position. A front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the rotating part member 38R is in the operating position, FIG. 166 is a side view showing the periphery of the first rotating part member 37 and the left second rotating part member 38L (right second rotating part member 38R) with some parts cut away, and FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board 31 showing an example of the operation of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R.

As shown in Figures 163 to 167, the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are arranged on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and as will be described in detail later, they can be moved up and down and rotated independently on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by the left second rotating part member drive mechanism 38La or the right second rotating part member drive mechanism 38Ra (see Figure 169), and are operated in cooperation with the first rotating part member 37 in special game and jackpot game to execute a performance that gives the player predetermined game information related to the game.

The installation location of the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R is not limited to the front side of the pattern display unit 341 and can be changed, and for example, they may be installed on the flow path of the game ball. In this case, it is possible to protect the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R with nails so that the game balls do not collide with them. Of course, when the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are placed on the flow path of the game ball, protection from the game balls may be performed not only by nails but also by members made of resin or the like. In addition, when the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are placed on the flow path of the game ball, they may be subjected to the action of the game ball. In other words, the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R may or may not be subjected to the action of the game ball.

The second left rotating accessory member 38L cooperates with the first rotating accessory member 37 to present predetermined game information related to the special game and the jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the special game, it is used when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, and is used to clearly indicate the type of 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot). This second left rotating accessory member 38L has a rotating main body 381L and a rotating shaft 382L.

The rotating main body 381L is formed in a plate shape having an oval shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating main body 381L has an information display unit 383L at one end and an information display unit 384L at the other end. At least the information display unit 383L at one end and the information display unit 384L at the other end of the rotating main body 381L are formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see. This makes it possible for the information display units 383L and 384L to block light emitted to the front side of the pattern display unit 341. Note that the rotating main body 381L may be formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see as a whole, or only the information display units 383L and 384L are formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see, and the other parts may have translucency.

In this embodiment, the information display section 383L at one end displays "SMALL" and the information display section 384L at the other end displays "small". Although details will be described later, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R guaranteed jackpot, the letters "SMALL" on the information display section 383L are visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first rotating role member 37 that is stopped in a predetermined state at a predetermined position, and if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, the letters "small" on the information display section 384L are visible through the light-transmitting area 370A of the first rotating role member 37 that is stopped in a predetermined state at a predetermined position (see FIG. 168).

In other words, in this embodiment, a 5R jackpot is announced when the letters visible through the light-transmitting area 370A are the alphabets "SMALL" and "small," and whether the alphabet is uppercase or lowercase makes it possible to distinguish whether it is a special jackpot or a regular jackpot.

In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot being a special jackpot or a normal jackpot can be distinguished depending on whether the letters visible through the translucent region 370A are uppercase or lowercase letters of the alphabet, but the probability of a jackpot being a special jackpot or a normal jackpot can also be distinguished depending on the type of kanji, hiragana, numbers, symbols, etc. Also, the probability of a jackpot being a special jackpot or a normal jackpot can be distinguished depending on the color of the letters and symbols visible through the translucent region 370A. For example, a probability of a jackpot being announced when the color of the letters and symbols visible through the translucent region 370A is rainbow-colored, and a normal jackpot being announced when the color of the letters and symbols visible through the translucent region 370A is a color other than rainbow-colored (e.g., black).

The information display sections 383L, 384L of the main rotating part 381L of the left second rotating role member 38L can be easily formed by painting, etc., but may also be formed by various display devices such as liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, and dot matrix displays. In this case, the display modes of the information display sections 383L, 384L are diversified, so it becomes possible to provide the player with more diverse information about the game using the left second rotating role member 38L. This makes it possible to further diversify the performances executed using the left second rotating role member 38L, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The rotating shaft 382L is a part to which a rotational driving force is input from the left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La (see FIG. 169) described later. This rotating shaft 382L is fixed to the center of the rear side of the rotating main body 381L so as to extend in the front-rear direction toward the pattern display unit 341 on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating shaft 382L is put into a rotating state by inputting a rotational force from the left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La according to the control of the MPU 51, and is put into a non-rotating state by stopping the input of the rotational force from the left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La according to the control of the MPU 51. As a result, the rotating main body 381L is made rotatable around the rotating shaft 382L together with the rotating shaft 382L, and the entire left second rotating role member 38L is made rotatable. That is, the second left rotating part member 38L can move closer to the first rotating part member 37 by moving upward, and can move away from the first rotating part member 37 by moving downward.

The rotation speed of the rotating shaft 382L (rotating main body 381L) in a given rotation state, i.e., the rotation speed of the second left rotating part 38L, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, and the rotation speed or direction may be variable.

The rotating shaft 382L is rotatably supported by a support ring 386L fixed to the lifting shaft 385L, and its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by a restricting ring 387L. Here, the lifting shaft 385L can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382L on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by a driving force input from a left second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La (see FIG. 169) described later. As a result, the left second rotating role member 38L can move up and down between a standby position (see FIG. 157 and FIG. 158) where it can be seen without passing through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and an operating position (see FIG. 163) where a part of it can be seen through the translucent region 370A.

As shown in FIG. 169, the left second rotating part member 38L has its up-down movement and rotation controlled via the left second rotating part member drive mechanism 38La controlled by the MPU 51. The left second rotating part member drive mechanism 38La is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. This left second rotating part member drive mechanism 38La has, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the left second rotating part member 38L has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 382L and the lift shaft 385L of the left second rotating part member 38L via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and a driving force is input to the rotation shaft 382L and the lift shaft 385L. The left second rotating part member 38L is movable in the vertical direction between the standby position (see FIG. 158) and the operating position (see FIG. 163) by inputting a driving force from the motor to the lift shaft 385L. In addition, the left second rotating part member 38L is rotatable in the counterclockwise direction on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by inputting a driving force from the motor to the rotation shaft 382L, which rotates the rotation shaft 382L. The rotation position of the second left rotating part member 38L may be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the second left rotating part member 38L rotates in the operating position.

The motor driver of the second left rotating part drive mechanism 38La is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver is also capable of acquiring the detection results of the return detection unit and transmitting them to the voice lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver may be omitted and each motor and return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

The configuration of the second left rotating part member drive mechanism 38La is not particularly limited. In other words, there is no particular limit to the configuration for moving the second left rotating part member drive mechanism 38La up and down and rotating it.

In addition, the rotating main body 381L is disposed at a position closer to the pattern display unit 341 than the plate-like members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37 on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. Therefore, as described below, in the expanded state when the first rotating role member 37 is lowered to the operating position (see FIG. 159), when the left second rotating role member 38L is raised to the operating position (see FIG. 163), the information display unit 383L at one end and the information display unit 384L at the other end can be positioned on the rear side of the light-transmitting region 370A of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotating role member 37 on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 (see FIGS. 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating part 37 rotates in the expanded state at the operating position, when the rotating main part 381L rotates at the operating position (see FIGS. 165 and 166), the rotation trajectory of the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part 37 and the rotation trajectory of the information display parts 383L, 384L of the rotating main part 381L in the left second rotating part 38L intersect, so that at a predetermined timing of the special game or the big win game, the light-transmitting area At the position where 370A intersects with the information display units 383L, 384L, the first rotating part member 37 and the left second rotating part member 38L are stopped in a predetermined state, so that the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by the left second rotating part member 38L is blocked, and the display of the information display units 383L, 384L of the left second rotating part member 38L located behind the translucent area 370A can be seen through the translucent area 370A (see FIG. 167 (A)).

The right second rotating accessory member 38R cooperates with the first rotating accessory member 37 to present predetermined game information related to the special game and the jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is used in the special game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R jackpot. This right second rotating accessory member 38R has a rotating main body part 381R and a rotating shaft 382R.

The rotating main body 381R is formed in a plate shape having an oval shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating main body 381R has an information display unit 383R at one end and an information display unit 384R at the other end. At least the information display unit 383R at one end and the information display unit 384R at the other end of the rotating main body 381R are formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see. This makes it possible for the information display units 383R and 384R to block light emitted to the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating main body 381R may be formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see as a whole, or only the information display units 383R and 384R are formed so that the back side is invisible or difficult to see, and the other parts may have translucency.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 383R at one end displays "BIG", and the information display unit 384R at the other end displays "big". As will be described in detail later, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R guaranteed jackpot, if the reserved right to play the special game includes a jackpot that is the result of the jackpot lottery, the letters "BIG" on the information display unit 383R are visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating role member 37 that is in a predetermined stopped state at a predetermined position (see FIG. 168). That is, the letters "BIG" on the information display unit 383R are used to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a 16R jackpot and a reserved consecutive win. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R regular jackpot, if the reserved rights to play the special game do not include any jackpots that are the result of the jackpot lottery, the word "big" on the information display unit 384R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating role member 37 that is stopped at a predetermined position (see FIG. 168). That is, the word "big" on the information display unit 384R is used to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a 16R jackpot and no reserved consecutive wins.

That is, in this embodiment, the letters visible through the translucent area 370A are the alphabets "BIG" and "big," which indicates a 16R jackpot, and whether or not there is a pending consecutive win can be distinguished depending on whether the letters are uppercase or lowercase.

In this embodiment, the presence or absence of a reserved consecutive win can be distinguished depending on whether the characters visible through the translucent region 370A are uppercase or lowercase letters of the alphabet, but the presence or absence of a reserved consecutive win may also be distinguished depending on the type of kanji, hiragana, numbers, symbols, etc. Also, the presence or absence of a reserved consecutive win may be distinguished depending on the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent region 370A. For example, if the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent region 370A is rainbow-colored, a reserved consecutive win may be executed, and if the color of the characters or symbols visible through the translucent region 370A is a color other than rainbow (e.g., black), a notification may be issued that a reserved consecutive win will not be executed.

The information display sections 383R, 384R of the main rotating part 381R in the second right rotating part 38R can be easily formed by painting, etc., but may also be formed by various display devices such as liquid crystal displays, organic EL displays, and dot matrix displays. In this case, the display modes of the information display sections 383R, 384R are diversified, making it possible to provide the player with more diverse information about the game using the second right rotating part 38R. This makes it possible to further diversify the presentations executed using the second right rotating part 38R, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The rotating shaft 382R is a part to which a rotational driving force is input from the right second rotating role member drive mechanism 38La (see FIG. 169) described later. This rotating shaft 382R is fixed to the center of the back side of the rotating main body 381R so as to extend in the front-rear direction toward the pattern display unit 341 on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. The rotating shaft 382R is set to a predetermined rotating state by inputting a rotational force from the right second rotating role member drive mechanism 38Ra under the control of the MPU 51, and is set to a non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) by stopping the input of the rotational force from the right second rotating role member drive mechanism 38Ra under the control of the MPU 51. As a result, the rotating main body 381R can rotate around the rotating shaft 382R together with the rotating shaft 382R, and the entire right second rotating role member 38R can rotate.

The rotation speed of the rotating shaft 382R (rotating main body 381R) in a given rotation state, i.e., the rotation speed of the right second rotating part 38R, is not particularly limited and may be constant or variable, and the rotation speed or direction may be variable.

The rotating shaft 382R is rotatably supported by a support ring 386R fixed to the lifting shaft 385R, and its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by a restricting ring 387R. Here, the lifting shaft 385R can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382R on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by a driving force input from a right second rotating role member driving mechanism 38Ra (see FIG. 169) described later. As a result, the right second rotating role member 38R can move up and down between a standby position (see FIG. 157 and FIG. 158) where it is visible without passing through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and an operating position (see FIG. 163) where a part of it is visible through the translucent region 370A. That is, the right second rotating part member 38R can move closer to the first rotating part member 37 by moving upward, and can move away from the first rotating part member 37 by moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 169, the right second rotating part member 38R has its up-down movement and rotation controlled via the right second rotating part member drive mechanism 38Ra, which is controlled by the MPU 51. The right second rotating part member drive mechanism 38Ra is connected to the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. This right second rotating part member drive mechanism 38Ra has, for example, multiple motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the right second rotating part member 38R has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, etc. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 382R and the lift shaft 385R of the right second rotating part member 38R via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and a driving force is input to the rotation shaft 382R and the lift shaft 385R. The right second rotating part member 38R can be moved up and down between the standby position (see FIG. 158) and the operating position (see FIG. 163) by inputting a driving force from the motor to the lift shaft 385R. In addition, the right second rotating part member 38R can be rotated counterclockwise on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by inputting a driving force from the motor to the rotation shaft 382R, which rotates the rotation shaft 382R. The rotation position of the right second rotating part member 38R can be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the right second rotating part member 38R rotates in the operating position.

The right second rotating role member drive mechanism 38Ra has a motor driver connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver controls each motor according to control instructions from the voice lamp control device 5. The motor driver can also obtain the detection results from the return detection unit and transmit them to the voice lamp control device 5. Note that the motor driver may be omitted and each motor and return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

The configuration of the right second rotating part drive mechanism 38Ra is not particularly limited. In other words, there is no particular limit to the configuration for moving the right second rotating part drive mechanism 38Ra up and down and rotating it.

In addition, the rotating main body 381R is disposed at a position closer to the pattern display unit 341 than the plate-like members 370, 371 of the first rotating role member 37 on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. Therefore, as described below, in the expanded state when the first rotating role member 37 is lowered to the operating position (see FIG. 159), when the right second rotating role member 38R is raised to the operating position (see FIG. 163), the information display unit 383R at one end and the information display unit 384R at the other end can be positioned on the rear side of the light-transmitting region 370A of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotating role member 37 on the front side of the pattern display unit 341 (see FIGS. 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating part 37 rotates in the expanded state at the operating position, when the rotating main part 381R rotates at the operating position (see Figs. 165 and 166), the rotation trajectory of the light-transmitting area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part 37 and the rotation trajectory of the information display parts 383R and 384R of the rotating main part 381R in the right second rotating part 38R intersect, so that at a predetermined timing of the special game or the big win game, the light-transmitting area By setting the first rotating part member 37 and the right second rotating part member 38R to a predetermined stopped state at the position where 370A intersects with the information display units 383R and 384R, the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display unit 341 by the right second rotating part member 38R is blocked, and the display of the information display units 383R and 384R of the right second rotating part member 38R located behind the translucent area 370A can be seen through the translucent area 370A (see FIG. 167 (B)).

In this way, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing of a special game or a jackpot game, the first rotating part member 37 rotating in the operating position is stopped in a predetermined state, while the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R rotating in the operating position are stopped in a predetermined state, so that the display of the information display unit 383L, 384L of the left second rotating part member 38L or the information display unit 383R, 384R of the right second rotating part member 38R can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37 (see FIG. 167 (B)). Therefore, in this embodiment, predetermined information about the game (information about the type of jackpot or the presence or absence of a reserved consecutive win) is presented depending on the type of information display unit 383L, 384L, 383R, 384R that is visible through the translucent area 370A, and the player can grasp it. Therefore, when the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are activated in a special game or a big win game, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the types of information display units 383L, 384L, 383R, and 384R that are visible through the translucent area 370A, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are movable in the vertical direction, and are movable along a linear path in the vertical direction, but they may be movable in a direction other than the vertical direction, for example, left and right or diagonally, or may be movable along a non-linear path such as a meandering path or an arc-shaped path, or may be movable along multiple different paths.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R can rotate in one direction, the counterclockwise direction, but the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R may be rotatable in one direction, the clockwise direction, instead of the counterclockwise direction, or the direction of rotation may change midway through the rotation.

Here, FIG. 168 is a table showing the types of notification modes by the first rotating part 37, the left second rotating part 38L, and the right second rotating part 38R.

In this embodiment, as described above, the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R are stopped at a predetermined position, so that the information display units 383L and 384L of the left second rotating part member 38L or the information display units 383R and 384R of the right second rotating part member 38R can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37 (see FIG. 167). And, since two information display units 383L and 384L are provided on the left second rotating part member 38L and two information display units 383R and 384R are provided on the right second rotating part member 38R, there are four modes that can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37. Therefore, in this embodiment, there are four types of notification modes for specific information regarding the game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168, the types of notification modes of the specified information for the game include notification mode A, notification mode B, notification mode C, and notification mode D.

In notification mode A, the information display section 383R of the second right rotating part 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37, and the letters "BIG" are visible through the translucent area 370A. In this notification mode A, by making the player visible the letters "BIG" during the special symbol game, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot, and that the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game include the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot.

In notification mode B, the information display section 384R of the second right rotating part 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37, so that the word "big" can be seen through the translucent area 370A. In this notification mode B, by making the player see the word "big" during the special symbol game, the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot.

In notification mode C, the information display section 383L of the second left rotating part 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37, so that the word "SMALL" can be seen through the translucent area 370A. In this notification mode C, by making the player see the word "SMALL" during the special symbol game, the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R guaranteed jackpot.

In notification mode D, the information display section 384L of the second left rotating part 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37, and the word "small" is visible through the translucent area 370A. In notification mode C, the player is made to see the word "small" during the special symbol game, and is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special symbol game is a 5R regular jackpot.

In this embodiment, the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R are rotatable by the drive mechanisms 37a, 38La, and 38Ra controlled by the MPU 51, but it is also possible to set at least one of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R to a predetermined rotating state when a game ball interferes with them. In this way, by setting at least one of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R to a predetermined rotating state when a game ball interferes with them, the player can grasp the timing at which at least one of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R is set to a predetermined rotating state. This allows the player to focus on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R, and to grasp the timing when the information display unit 383L, 384L of the left second rotating part member 38L or the information display unit 383R, 384R of the right second rotating part member 38R becomes visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R, which increases the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are operated in a special symbol game that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 as a rotating body. Here, in the special symbol game, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is notified by displaying the decorative pattern that is displayed in a temporary stop state (a state in which the decorative pattern is not completely stopped and moves slightly) and then displaying it as a stop state (a state in which the decorative pattern is completely stopped). Below, an example of the operation of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R in a special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 170, which is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R.

As shown in FIG. 170(A), when a special game is started by the entry of a game ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, the display of the varying decorative symbols is started, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a jackpot, the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as a doublet as shown in FIG. 170(B), and then the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as a doublet as shown in FIG. 170(F). In such a special game, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170(C) to FIG. 170(E), the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are operated at a timing between the time when the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 170(B) are temporarily displayed as a doublet and the time when the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 170(F) are temporarily displayed as a doublet. That is, in this embodiment, after the result of the jackpot lottery in the special game is announced as a jackpot, the type of jackpot is announced by operating the rotating parts 37, 38L, and 38R, and then the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, thereby definitively announcing the result of the jackpot lottery.

Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game, which is started by the entry of a game ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 170(B) and FIG. 170(C), after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as a double number, the first rotating part 37 is moved downward from the standby position to the operating position at the timing when the standby time T1 has elapsed since the display of the decorative symbols started to change (see FIG. 158), while the left rotating part 38L and the right rotating part 38R are moved upward from the standby position to the operating position (see FIG. 163). Then, as shown in FIG. 170(C), the first rotating part 37 is expanded at the operating position, and the expanded first rotating part 37, the left rotating part 38L and the right rotating part 38R each rotate at the operating position (see FIG. 165). Also, as shown in FIG. 170(C), after the rotation time T2 has elapsed since the start of operation of each rotating part member 37, 38L, 38R, the rotation of the expanded first rotating part member 37, the left rotating part member 38L, and the right rotating part member 38R is stopped (see FIG. 165(D)). Then, after the return waiting time T3 has elapsed since the rotation of each rotating part member 37, 38L, 38R has stopped, the first rotating part member 37 is reduced and returned to the waiting position, and the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R are returned to their waiting positions (see FIG. 165(E)).

Here, the stop position of the first rotating part member 37 is determined by the type of jackpot notified by the special game. For example, when the type of jackpot notified by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), the stop position of the first rotating part member 37 is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37 intersects with the rotation trajectory of the information display units 383L and 384L of the left second rotating part member 38L, and the translucent area 370A is stopped at a position where the notification mode C or D can be realized (see Figures 167(B) and 168). That is, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R guaranteed jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), the stopping position of the first rotating part member 37 is set to a position where the information display section 383L (the characters "SMALL") or the information display section 384L (the characters "small") of the left second rotating part member 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot notified by the special game is a 16R certain jackpot, the stopping position of the first rotating part member 37 is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37 intersects with the rotation trajectory of the information display sections 383R, 384R of the right second rotating part member 38R, and the position is set to a position where notification mode A or B can be realized (see Figures 167(A) and 168). That is, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot, the stopping position of the first rotating part 37 is set to a position where the information display section 383R (the characters "BIG") or the information display section 384R (the characters "big") of the right second rotating part 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37.

The stop position of the left second rotating part member 38L is determined by the type of jackpot notified by the special game. For example, when the type of jackpot notified by the special game is a 5R variable jackpot, the stop position of the left second rotating part member 38L is set at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display unit 383L of the left second rotating part member 38L intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37, and notification mode C can be realized (see Figures 167(B) and 168). That is, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R variable jackpot, the stopping position of the second left rotating part 38L is set to a position where the information display section 383L (the letters "SMALL") is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type notified by the special game is a 5R normal jackpot, the left second rotating part 38L is stopped at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display unit 384L of the left second rotating part 38L intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37, and the information display unit 384L is set to a position where notification mode D can be realized (see Figures 167 (B) and 168). In other words, when the jackpot type notified by the special game is a 5R normal jackpot, the left second rotating part 38L is stopped at a position where the information display unit 384L (the letter "small") can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37.

When the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R variable jackpot, there is no particular restriction on the stopping position of the second left rotating device member 38L, and it may be determined as appropriate.

The stop position of the right second rotating part 38R is determined by the type of jackpot notified by the special game and the presence or absence of a reserved consecutive win. For example, when the type of jackpot notified by the special game is a 16R variable jackpot and a reserved consecutive win is executed, the stop position of the right second rotating part 38R is set to a position where the information display part 383L is stopped at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display part 383R of the right second rotating part 38R intersects with the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part 37, and the notification mode A can be realized (see Figures 167(A) and 168). That is, when the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot and a reserved consecutive win is executed, the stopping position of the right second rotating device member 38R is set to a position where the information display section 383R (the letters "BIG") is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating device member 37.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type notified by the special game is a 16R probability jackpot and the reserved consecutive win is not executed, the stop position of the right second rotating part 38R is set to a position where the information display part 383R stops at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display part 384R of the right second rotating part 38R and the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37 intersect, and the notification mode B can be realized (see Fig. 167 (A) and Fig. 168). In other words, when the jackpot type notified by the special game is a 16R probability jackpot and the reserved consecutive win is not executed, the stop position of the right second rotating part 38R is set to a position where the information display part 384R (the letter "big") can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37.

In addition, if the type of jackpot announced by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R special jackpot or 5R regular jackpot), there is no particular restriction on the stopping position of the second right rotating device member 38R, and it may be determined appropriately.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotating parts 37, 38L, and 38R are operated to notify the type of jackpot and the presence or absence of a reserve streak, but they may also be operated to notify (explicitly or suggestively) other information as predetermined information for the game, such as an effect to be executed later (the execution of a super reach effect or special reach effect, the type of super reach effect or special reach effect), or the likelihood of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R are operated between the provisional stop display and the stop display of the decorative pattern in the special pattern game, but they may be operated at other times in the special pattern game. For example, the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R may be operated at the start of the special pattern game, during the execution of the high-speed variable performance (basic performance, non-reach performance) until the reach performance starts, and at the start and during the execution of various reach performances. In other words, the notification of the type of jackpot by the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R is not limited to after the provisional stop display of the decorative pattern notifies the player that there is a jackpot, but may be performed before the jackpot is notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R are described as being operated in a special game, but the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R may be operated in a jackpot game. In this case, the information display section 383L, 384L of the left second rotating role member 38L or the information display section 383R, 384R of the right second rotating role member 38R becomes visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and as predetermined information for the game, for example, after the end of the jackpot game, a so-called reserved consecutive win will be executed, and the jackpot type indicated to the player in the special game is more advantageous to the player, etc. are listed. In other words, the rotating role members 37, 38L, 38R make it possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation performance or a jackpot type promotion performance from a normal jackpot to a special jackpot. In addition, there are no particular limitations on the timing at which the rotating parts 37, 38L, and 38R are activated during a jackpot game, and the timing may be at the opening, round, or ending of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating part member 37 and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R cooperate to execute effects based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168). However, as described above, the first rotating part member 37 can execute effects such as a roulette effect by itself (see FIG. 162). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be configured with only the first rotating part member 37, omitting the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R.

In this embodiment, the first rotating part member 37 and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R can both move from the standby position to the operating position to perform a performance based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168). However, it is also possible to perform a performance based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168) by moving either the first rotating part member 37 or the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R from the standby position to the operating position. In other words, the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R may be located anywhere as long as it can move relatively to the back side of the first rotating part member 37 to block the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to Figures 171 to 174, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described.

This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it includes a first rotating part member 37, a left second rotating part member 38L, and a right second rotating part member 38R as the performance parts. Therefore, the processing related to the operation control of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R as the performance parts is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, a part of the command determination processing and the special game performance control processing in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42 executed by the sound lamp control device 5 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. Below, the command determination processing and the special game performance control processing of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Command Judgment Process]
First, there will be described an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 42. Here, Fig. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when a special chart variation pattern command is received, steps S3101 to S3106 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and further, a rotating role member operation performance setting process is executed (step S3301) to set the rotating role member operation performance executed by operating the first rotating role member 37, the left second rotating role member 38L, and the right second rotating role member 38R.

[Rotating role member operation performance setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the rotating role member operation performance setting process executed in step S3301 of the command determination process in Fig. 171 will be described. Here, Fig. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the rotating role member operation performance setting process.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 172, in the rotating role member operation performance setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special pattern game is a 16R probability variable jackpot or not (step S3401). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot or not is judged based on the winning/losing information for the jackpot lottery included in the special pattern change pattern command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R guaranteed jackpot (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3402, and if the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is not a 16R guaranteed jackpot (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3405.

<Step S3402>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R jackpot (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot among the reserved rights to play the special game at the start of the special game, that is, whether a so-called reserved consecutive win is executed (step S3402). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot among the reserved rights to play the special game at the start of the special game is judged based on the data of the special game win/loss information (special game data) stored in the above-mentioned special game reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5.

If the reserved rights to play the special game at the start of the special game include a jackpot that results from a jackpot lottery (step S3402: Yes), i.e., if a so-called reserved consecutive win is to be played, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3403. On the other hand, if the reserved rights to play the special game at the start of the special game do not include a jackpot that results from a jackpot lottery (step S3402: No), i.e., if a so-called reserved consecutive win is not to be played, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3404.

<Step S3403>
If the reserved rights to play the special game at the start of the special game include one that results in a jackpot lottery (step S3402: Yes), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a 16R certain jackpot and a so-called reserved consecutive jackpot is executed, the MPU 51 sets the announcement mode A as the rotating role component operation presentation (step S3403) and transitions to step S3409. As described above, notification mode A is a mode in which the information display section 383R (the letters "BIG") of the right-side second rotating part member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part member 37, and it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special symbol game is a 16R certain jackpot, and that the reserved rights to play the special symbol game at the start of the special symbol game include those for which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (see Figure 168).

<Step S3404>
If the reserved right to play the special game at the start of the special game does not include a jackpot lottery result that is a jackpot (step S3402: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R jackpot and a so-called reserved consecutive win is not executed, the MPU 51 sets the notification mode B as the rotating role member operation performance (step S3404) and moves the process to step S3409. As described above, the notification mode B is a mode in which the information display section 384R (the character "big") of the right second rotating role member 38R is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special pattern game is not a 16R probability jackpot (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special pattern game is a 5R probability jackpot or not (step S3405). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability jackpot or not is judged based on the winning/losing information for the jackpot lottery included in the special pattern variation command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R guaranteed jackpot (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3406, and if the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is not a 5R guaranteed jackpot (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 transitions the process to step S3407.

<Step S3406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R jackpot (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the notification mode C as the rotating role member operation performance (step S3406) and moves the process to step S3409. As described above, the notification mode C is a mode in which the information display section 383L (the characters "SMALL") of the left second rotating role member 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is notified that it is a 5R jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3407>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special pattern game is not a 5R variable jackpot (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special pattern game is a 5R normal jackpot or not (step S3407). Whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot or not is judged based on the winning/losing information for the jackpot lottery included in the special pattern variation command.

If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3407: No), i.e., if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the MPU 51 ends the rotating role member operation effect setting process without setting the rotating role member operation effect.

<Step S3408>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the notification mode D as the rotating role member operation performance (step S3408) and moves the process to step S3409. As described above, the notification mode D is a mode in which the information display section 384L (the character "small") of the left second rotating role member 38L is visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37, and the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R normal jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3409>
When any of the notification modes A to D is set as the rotating role member operation performance (steps S3403, S3404, S3406, or S3408), the MPU 51 sets the rotating role member operation performance setting flag indicating that the rotating role member operation performance is set to ON (step S3409), and proceeds to step S3410. The rotating role member operation performance setting flag is referenced in step S3501 in the special game performance control process in FIG. 173 described later in order to determine whether or not the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are in a standby state for operation.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 identifies the change type (presentation pattern) set for the special symbol game in the change type (presentation pattern) setting process of step S3103 executed when the special symbol change pattern command is received in the command determination process of Fig. 171, and further sets an operation standby counter according to the identified change type (presentation pattern) (step S3410), and ends the rotating role member operation presentation setting process. The operation standby counter indicates the remaining time until the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R starts, and is set to a value corresponding to the standby time T1 (see Fig. 170) from the start of the change of the decorative pattern according to the change type (presentation pattern) set for the special symbol game.

[Special game play performance control processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the special game presentation control process executed in step S2704 of the sub timer interrupt process in Fig. 42 will be described. Here, Fig. 173 and Fig. 174 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special game presentation control process.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 173, in the special game presentation control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first judges whether the rotating role member operation presentation setting flag indicating that the rotating role member operation presentation is set is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R is in a standby state for operation.

If the rotating role operation setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), i.e., if each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R is waiting to operate, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, if the rotating role operation setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), i.e., if each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R is not waiting to operate, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3509 in FIG. 174.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
When the rotating role member operation performance setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R is in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the standby counter set in step S3411 in the rotating role member operation performance setting process of Fig. 172 (step S3502), and judges whether the value of the standby counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3503). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the timing to start the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R.

If the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), i.e., if it is time for each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to start operating, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3505. On the other hand, if the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3503: No), i.e., if it is not time for each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to start operating, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special game presentation other than control related to the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504), and ends the special game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3505 to S3508>
If the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to start the operation of each rotating part member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 starts the operation of each rotating part member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3505). Specifically, the MPU 51 moves the first rotating part member 37 from the standby position to the operating position and expands the first rotating part member 37 (see Figs. 158 and 159), and further rotates the first rotating part member 37 in a counterclockwise direction (see Figs. 160 and 165). In addition, the MPU 51 moves the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R from the standby position to the operating position and rotates the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R in a counterclockwise direction.

The first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R may start operating at the same time, or they may start operating with a time lag. For example, after the first rotating part member 37 is expanded in the operating position, the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R may start moving upward. In addition, the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R may start rotating at the same time, or there may be a time lag.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the reel rotation operation flag indicating that each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating to ON (step S3506), and sets the reel rotation operation counter indicating the remaining rotation time T2 (see FIG. 170) until the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped (step S3507). Note that the reel rotation operation flag is referenced in step S3509 of FIG. 174 described later to determine whether each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating.

The MPU 51 also sets the rotating role member operation performance setting flag to OFF (step S3508), executes other processing for the special game performance other than control of the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504), and ends the special game performance control processing.

<Step S3509>
When the rotating role member operation performance setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, when the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are not in a standby state for operation, the MPU 51 judges whether the role rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509), as shown in Fig. 174. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the rotating role members 37, 38L, and 38R are rotating.

If the reel rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), i.e., if each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3510. On the other hand, if the reel rotation operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), i.e., if each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is not rotating, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3516.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
When the reel rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), that is, when each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is rotating, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the reel rotation operation counter set in step S3507 of Fig. 173 (step S3510), and judges whether the value of the reel rotation operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the timing to stop the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R.

If the value of the reel rotation operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), i.e., if it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3512. On the other hand, if the value of the reel rotation operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3511: No), i.e., if it is not time to stop the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special game presentation other than the control related to the operation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and ends the special game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3512 to S3514>
If the value of the reel rotation operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 stops the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3512). That is, the MPU 51 stops the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R at a position according to the notification mode A to D (see FIG. 168) set in steps S3403, S3404, S3406, or S3408 in the rotating reel member operation performance setting process of FIG. 172 described above.

The timing of stopping the rotation of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R may be simultaneous or there may be a time lag, but it is preferable to stop the rotation simultaneously. This is because when the rotation is stopped with a time lag, the information visible through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating part member 37 can be easily inferred from the stopping position of the rotating part members 37, 38L, 38R that were stopped first.

In addition, when the rotation of the first rotating part member 37 and the second rotating part member 38L and the second rotating part member 38R are stopped at different times, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the second rotating part member 38L and the second rotating part member 38R first. This is because when the rotation of the first rotating part member 37 is stopped first, it is easy to know whether the second rotating part member 38L or the second rotating part member 38R is the one that is visually recognized through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating part member 37.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the reel rotation stop flag, which indicates that the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped in the operating position, to ON (step S3513), sets the rotating reel return counter, which indicates the remaining return waiting time T3 (see FIG. 170) until each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is returned to the waiting position (step S3514), and proceeds to step S3515.

The reel rotation stop flag is referenced in step S3516 described below to determine whether the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position. Each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is positioned in a state where its rotation is stopped at the operating position until the return waiting time T3 (see FIG. 170) has elapsed, that is, until the value of the rotating reel return counter becomes 0. As a result, the notification modes A to D (see FIG. 168) realized at the stop position of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R are maintained until the return waiting time T3 (see FIG. 170) has elapsed, that is, until the value of the rotating reel return counter becomes 0. Therefore, during the time from when each rotating part 37, 38L, 38R is stopped until the return waiting time T3 (see FIG. 170) has elapsed, any of the information display section 383L (characters "SMALL"), information display section 384L (characters "small"), information display section 383R (characters "BIG"), and information display section 384R (characters "big") of the second rotating part 38R on the left side can be seen through the light-transmitting area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating part 37. As a result, the player can grasp the type of jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery for the special game by stopping the rotation of each rotating part 37, 38L, 38R that has started to rotate, and in the case of a 16R probability jackpot, can determine whether or not a reserved consecutive win will be executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the position at which each rotating part 37, 38L, 38R stops when the rotation of each rotating part 37, 38L, 38R starts, and what characters are visible through the translucent area 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part 37.

<Step S3515>
In step S3515, the MPU 51 sets the reel rotation operation flag to OFF. Then, the MPU 51 executes other processes for the special game presentation other than the control related to the operation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and ends the special game presentation control process.

<Step S3516>
If the reel rotation operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), that is, if each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is not rotating, the MPU 51 judges whether the reel rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position.

If the reel rotation stop flag is set to on (step S3516: Yes), i.e., if the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3517. On the other hand, if the reel rotation stop flag is set to off (step S3516: No), i.e., if the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is not stopped at the operating position, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special game presentation other than the control related to the operation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and ends the special game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When the reel rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516: Yes), that is, when the rotation of each of the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the rotating reel return counter set in step S3514 (step S3517), and judges whether the value of the rotating reel return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether it is the timing to return each of the rotating reel members 37, 38L, 38R to the standby position.

If the value of the rotating role return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), i.e., it is time to return each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to the standby position, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3519. On the other hand, if the value of the rotating role return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3518: No), i.e., it is not time to return each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to the standby position, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special game presentation other than the control related to the operation of each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and ends the special game presentation control processing.

<Steps S3519 and S3520>
If the value of the rotating role return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), that is, if it is time to return each rotating role member 37, 38L, 38R to their standby positions, the MPU 51 shrinks the first rotating role member 37 and then returns it to its standby position, and returns the left second rotating role member 38L and the right second rotating role member 38R to their standby positions (step S3519).

The first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R may start returning at the same time, or may start returning with a time lag.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the reel rotation stop flag, which indicates that the rotation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped in the operating position, to OFF (step S3520), and further executes other processes for the special game presentation other than the control related to the operation of each rotating reel member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and ends the special game presentation control process.

Thus, in this embodiment, there is a first visible state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, and a second visible state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, causing the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body to block the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as the illuminant, thereby making the left second rotating body or the right second rotating body as the second rotating body visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body. In this way, the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can move to the back side of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part, and the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part can result in two states, a first visible state and a second visible state, which are visible to the player, and the decorations executed by the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating part and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating part are diversified.

For example, in this embodiment, in a first viewing state in which the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341, which is constituted by an LCD display or the like as an illuminant, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, a performance can be executed according to the viewing state of the light of the specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as viewed through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light in a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 as an illuminant visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating role member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute decorations that give the player information about the game, such as decorations that notify the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (one-shot announcement effect), decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, decorations that clearly indicate or suggest the type of decoration to be executed later, and decorations that notify the player that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery include a jackpot during the reservation of the right to play the special game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game (reserved consecutive win confirmation effect).

In addition, as the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R blocks the light of a specific area of the pattern display unit 341 constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant, and in a second visible state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37, a performance can be executed according to the visible state of the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37. Specifically, depending on the viewing mode of the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R, which is viewed through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, it is possible to execute a performance that gives the player information about the game, such as a performance that notifies the player that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (one-shot notification performance), and it is also possible to execute a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is also possible to execute a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and further, it is possible to execute a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the type of performance to be executed later. It is also possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation performance that notifies the player that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery include a jackpot during the reservation of the right to play the special game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are two types of visual state: a first visual state in which the light of the pattern display unit 341, which is configured by a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant, is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body; and a second visual state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body, whereby the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R moves to the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body. and a second visible state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R is visible through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating part member 37, blocking the light of the pattern display unit 341, which is configured with a liquid crystal display or the like as an illuminant. This diversifies the decorations performed by the operation of the first rotating part member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R as the second rotating body, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The first rotating body and the second rotating body are movable toward and away from each other, but the first rotating body may be immovable while the second rotating body is movable, allowing them to move toward and away from each other, or conversely, the second rotating body may be immovable while the first rotating body is movable, allowing them to move toward and away from each other. In other words, as long as the first rotating body and the second rotating body are movable toward and away from each other, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be immovable.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R can be moved toward and away from each other, but the first rotating part member 37 may be immobile while the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R may be movable toward and away from each other, or conversely, the left second rotating part member 38L and the right second rotating part member 38R may be immobile while the first rotating part member 37 may be movable toward and away from each other. In other words, if the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R can be moved toward and away from each other, one of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R may be immobile.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special chart game, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are operated to block the light of a specific area emitted from the light emitter to the front side, thereby realizing a visible state in which the second rotating body behind the first rotating body can be seen. However, in a state in which a game ball other than the special chart game, such as a jackpot game, is shot onto the game board 31, the light of a specific area emitted from the light emitter to the front side may be blocked to realize a visible state in which the second rotating body behind the first rotating body can be seen. And, for example, by making the second rotating body behind the first rotating body visible in the jackpot game, it is possible to execute a promotion effect that notifies the player that the actual jackpot lottery result is more favorable than the jackpot lottery result notified in the special chart game that triggered the execution of the jackpot game, and it is also possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the reserved right to execute the special chart game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game includes the result of the jackpot lottery.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in a special symbol game, the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R are operated to block the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side, thereby realizing a state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R behind the first rotating part member 37 can be seen. However, in a state in which a game ball other than a special symbol game, such as a jackpot game, is shot onto the game board 31, the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side can be blocked, thereby realizing a state in which the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R behind the first rotating part member 37 can be seen. For example, by making the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R behind the first rotating accessory member 37 visible during a jackpot game, it is possible to execute a promotion effect that notifies the player that the actual jackpot lottery result is more favorable than the jackpot lottery result notified in the special game that triggered the jackpot game, and it is also possible to execute a reserved consecutive win confirmation effect that notifies the player that the reserved right to play the special game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game includes a jackpot lottery result.

In addition, in this embodiment, in special chart games and jackpot games, by making the light of a specific area emitted from the light-emitting body to the front side through the rotating plate part of the first rotating body visible, it is possible to execute promotion effects and pending consecutive win confirmation effects depending on the display content in the specific area.In addition, in special chart games, by making the light of a specific area emitted from the light-emitting body to the front side through the rotating plate part of the first rotating body visible, it is possible to execute a one-shot announcement effect that notifies the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, an effect preview effect that notifies the player of an effect that will be executed later, and an effect stock effect depending on the display content in the specific area.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in special chart games and jackpot games, the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating role member 37, making it possible to execute promotion effects and pending consecutive win confirmation effects depending on the display content in the specific area. Also, in special chart games, the light of a specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side can be seen through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating role member 37, making it possible to execute a one-shot notification effect that notifies the player that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, an effect preview effect that notifies the player of an effect that will be executed later, and an effect stock effect depending on the display content in the specific area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is controlled by the MPU 51, but at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from another person. For example, the first rotating body may be configured to start rotating in response to interference from a second rotating body moving toward the first rotating body, or in response to interference from a game ball moving toward the first rotating body.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R is controlled by the MPU 51, but at least one of the first rotating part member 37, the left second rotating part member 38L, and the right second rotating part member 38R may be configured to start rotating when another person interferes with it. For example, the first rotating part member 37 may be configured to start rotating when the left second rotating part member 38L or the right second rotating part member 38R moving toward the first rotating part member 37 interferes with it, or when a game ball moving toward the first rotating part member 37 interferes with it.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to ninth embodiments described above are possible to the extent that they are applicable.

In addition, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments to the extent that they are applicable.

Summary of the Invention
Below, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be added. Note that, for the sake of convenience, symbols may be added to the description in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each of the additions and each of the embodiments, but the invention related to the additions is not limited to the specific configurations to which the symbols are added. In addition, it is possible to select and combine the respective configurations and processing functions described below in any desired manner.

[Appendix A1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific condition is met in the specific first notification game (first special pattern game), the specific effect image (e.g., an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (e.g., an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, a specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port, which is executed after the end of a specific second notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is established in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image. In this way, a specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port, which is executed after the end of a specific second notification game triggered by a game ball entering the second winning port in the first judgment state, and when a specific condition is established in the specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image, making it possible to select whether to continue displaying the specific effect image or to switch to and display the specific effect image based on whether or not a specific condition is established. For example, if the continued execution of a specific effect image does not cause any inconvenience, the specific effect image can be continued, and if the continued execution of a specific effect image causes any inconvenience, it is possible to switch to and execute a predetermined effect image. As a result, inconvenience caused by the continued execution of a specific effect image can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, it is possible to select whether to continue displaying the specific effect image or to switch to and display a predetermined effect image based on whether a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state. This reduces the possibility that, when a specific effect image ends and a predetermined effect image is displayed, the player will feel uncomfortable when the specific effect image is resumed, or, conversely, will feel uncomfortable with the presentation in the progress of the game when the specific effect image is not resumed, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game caused by the player feeling uncomfortable with the presentation in the progress of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, if a specific condition is not met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific effect image continues to be displayed, so that the specific effect image displayed in the first notification game can also be usefully used in the second notification game.

[Appendix A2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the specific conditions include that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more. In this way, by including that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more even though no special benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special benefit is not given to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be given.

[Appendix A3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number (greater than 0) of gaming balls enters the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A2 to Appendix A4, wherein the bonus is execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix A6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A5, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1 to A6, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A8]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A7, characterized in that in the specified second notification game (second special chart game), the specific presentation image can be switched to the specified presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image in a specific second notification game. In this way, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a specific effect image in the specific second notification game, thereby avoiding inconveniences occurring in the specific second notification game due to the specific effect image being continuously executed due to the specific condition being met in the specific first notification game, and even if an inconvenience occurs in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, the occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A8, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special chart game) is the second notification game (second special chart game) that is executed following the specific first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, the predetermined second notification game is a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met. In this way, by the predetermined second notification game being a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met, the occurrence of an inconvenience is immediately avoided after it is recognized that an inconvenience will occur due to the continued execution of the specific presentation image.

[Appendix A10]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The specified second notification game (second special game) is the second notification game (second special game) of the specified number of times in which the specific performance image is executed consecutively.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously to the maximum extent, and therefore reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A11]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A7, characterized in that in a predetermined first notification game (first special chart game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific presentation image can be switched to the predetermined presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A11, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image can be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image can be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game, thereby avoiding inconvenience in the first notification game caused by continuing to execute the specific presentation image due to the fulfillment of the specific condition.

In addition, by switching from the specific effect image to the specific effect image in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, a large number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously are ensured in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience. In this way, by maximizing the number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously, the player can enjoy the specific effect image to the fullest extent, even in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience due to the establishment of a specific condition.

[Appendix A12]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The specific first notification game (first special game) is the specific number of times the first notification game (first special game) is executed in succession, the gaming machine described in Appendix A11.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously to the maximum extent, and thus reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A12, wherein the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are set to have the same or substantially the same expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13, the degree of expectation of transitioning to a special gaming state is set to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation of transitioning to a special gaming state to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, the switching of the predetermined image can maintain the player's expectation of the display of the predetermined image without lowering it, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to appendix A14, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A14 and A15, the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained, so that the player's interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented from decreasing due to the switching of the predetermined image, and a decrease in interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented.

[Appendix A16]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A13 to Appendix A15, characterized in that the probability of the specific effect image being displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special chart game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined effect image being displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, thereby appropriately avoiding the occurrence of inconveniences caused by the continuous display of specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconveniences when continuously played.

[Appendix A17]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A12, wherein the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher expectation level than the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching. In this way, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching, so that when the specific image is switched from the specific effect image to the specific effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player by the switching to the specific effect image is increased. As a result, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image will be switched to the specific effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while having high hopes that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed will cause a transition to a special gaming state, so the interest in the game is increased by the switching of the specific image from the specific effect image to the specific effect image.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A17 is characterized in that the difference between the degree of expectation when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the degree of expectation when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18 is characterized in that the difference between the degree of expectation when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the degree of expectation when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A18 and appendix A19, the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, by setting the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while looking forward to switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with high expectations because the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed is to transition to a special game state, so that the interest in the game is further increased by the switching of the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix A20]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A17 to Appendix A19, characterized in that the probability of the specific effect image being displayed on the display means (341) in the first notification game (first special chart game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined effect image being displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A20, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the frequency with which a specific effect image is displayed increases, and the player has more opportunities to expect that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image, further increasing the interest in the game, and by setting the probability that the predetermined effect image after switching is selected low, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image is displayed decreases, and the player's joy when the predetermined effect image is displayed increases, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A21]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices A1 to A20, characterized in that when the specific effect image (e.g., an image of a chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (e.g., an image of a same-color pattern effect), a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which explicitly or suggest specific information, is displayed on the display means (341) in an announcement game executed between the announcement game before the switching and the announcement game after the switching.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed. In this way, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not displayed consecutively in a plurality of notification games, and the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. This gives the player the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image was executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image ends, rather than being switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and therefore makes it possible to disguise that the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image did not occur. Therefore, the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image can be avoided without the player realizing it.

However, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image to avoid inconvenience caused by the continued execution of a specific effect image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising it as if a switch from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image did not occur, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix B1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the specified second notification game (second special chart game), the specific presentation image can be switched to the specified presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in a specific second notification game. In this way, when a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in the specific second notification game, thereby avoiding inconveniences occurring in the specific second notification game due to the specific effect image being continuously executed due to the specific condition being met in the specific first notification game, and even if an inconvenience occurs in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, the occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first notification game is executed.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special chart game) is the second notification game (second special chart game) that is executed following the specific first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the predetermined second notification game is a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met. In this way, by the predetermined second notification game being a second notification game that is executed following a specific first notification game in which a specific condition is met, the occurrence of an inconvenience is immediately avoided after it is recognized that an inconvenience will occur due to the continued execution of the specific presentation image.

[Appendix B3]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the specified second notification game (second special chart game) is the second notification game (second special chart game) played a specific number of times in which the specific performance image is executed continuously.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the second notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the second notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously to the maximum extent, and thus reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix B4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B3, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices B1 to B4, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix C1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined first notification game (first special chart game) executed in the specific first notification game, the specific presentation image can be switched to the predetermined presentation image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image may be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game. In this way, if a specific condition is met in a specific first notification game in the first judgment state, the specific presentation image may be switched to a predetermined presentation image in the predetermined first notification game, thereby avoiding inconvenience in the first notification game caused by the specific presentation image being continuously executed due to the fulfillment of the specific condition.

In addition, by switching from the specific effect image to the specific effect image in the first notification game that is resumed after the end of the specific second notification game, a large number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously are ensured in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience. In this way, by maximizing the number of notification games in which the specific effect image is displayed continuously, the player can enjoy the specific effect image to the fullest extent, even in cases where continued execution of the specific effect image would cause inconvenience due to the establishment of a specific condition.

[Appendix C2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The specific condition includes that no special benefit is given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game the specific number of times or more;
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that the specific first notification game (first special chart game) is the first notification game (first special chart game) of the specific number of times in which the specific performance image is executed continuously.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game. In this way, when a specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games and there is no bonus given to the player, if the notification game executed a specific number of times is the first notification game, the specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image in the first notification game, so that the specific effect image can be displayed continuously for the maximum period of time. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectations due to the specific effect image being displayed continuously to the maximum extent, and thus reduces the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the specific effect image being switched to the predetermined effect image, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix C3]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1 to C3, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix D1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are set to have the same or substantially the same expectation level.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the degree of expectation that a transition to a special gaming state will occur is set to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, by setting the degree of expectation that a transition to a special gaming state will occur to be the same or approximately the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, even when the predetermined image displayed on the display means is switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, the switching of the predetermined image can maintain the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image without lowering it, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest due to the switching of the predetermined image and preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine described in appendix D1, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to appendix D2 and appendix D3, the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. In this way, by setting the difference in expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the player's expectation for the display of the predetermined image can be more appropriately maintained, so that the player's interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented from decreasing due to the switching of the predetermined image, and a decrease in interest in the game can be more appropriately prevented.

[Appendix D4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D3, characterized in that the probability of the specific effect image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined effect image being displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first determination state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, thereby appropriately avoiding the occurrence of inconveniences caused by the continuous display of specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconveniences when continuously played.

[Appendix D5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D4, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the expected degree of the predetermined effect image is set to be higher than that of the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching. In this way, the degree of expectation that the specified effect image after switching will cause a transition to a special gaming state is set higher than the specific effect image before switching, so that when the specific image is switched from the specific effect image to the specific effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player by the switching to the specific effect image is increased. As a result, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image will be switched to the specific effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game while having high hopes that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed will cause a transition to a special gaming state, so the interest in the game is increased by the switching of the specific image from the specific effect image to the specific effect image.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1 is characterized in that the difference between the degree of expectation when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the degree of expectation when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2 is characterized in that the difference between the degree of expectation when the specified presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game and the degree of expectation when the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341) during the notification game is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to appendix E2 and appendix E3, the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. In this way, by setting the difference in the expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more, when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while looking forward to switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and when the specific effect image is switched to, the player can enjoy the progress of the notification game with high expectations because the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed is to transition to a special game state, so that the interest in the game is further increased by the switching of the predetermined image from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix E4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E3, characterized in that the probability of the specific effect image being displayed on the display means (341) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in the first judgment state (normal game state) is set higher than the probability of the predetermined effect image being displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed. In this way, the probability that a specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first notification game in the first judgment state is set to be higher than the probability that a predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the frequency with which a specific effect image is displayed increases, and the player has more opportunities to expect that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image, further increasing the interest in the game, and by setting the probability that the predetermined effect image after switching is selected low, the frequency with which the predetermined effect image is displayed decreases, and the player's joy when the predetermined effect image is displayed increases, further increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix E5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E4, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
When the specific effect image (e.g., an image of a chance eye effect) is switched to the predetermined effect image (e.g., an image of a same-color pattern effect), a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which explicitly or suggest specific information, is displayed on the display means (341) in an announcement game executed between the announcement game before the switching and the announcement game after the switching.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, a specific information image that clearly indicates or suggests specific information is displayed. In this way, in the notification game executed between the notification game before the predetermined image is switched and the notification game after the predetermined image is switched, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not displayed consecutively in multiple notification games, and the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. This gives the player the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image was executed independently of the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image ended, rather than being switched from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image, and therefore makes it possible to disguise that the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image did not occur. Therefore, the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image can be avoided without the player realizing it.

However, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image to avoid inconvenience caused by the continued execution of a specific effect image, the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is executed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, when a specific effect image is switched to a predetermined effect image, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state. Therefore, by disguising it as if a switch from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image did not occur, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the result of the transition judgment for the notification game in which the switched predetermined effect image is displayed will not result in a transition to a special game state.

[Appendix F2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific presentation image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F2, the specific conditions include that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more. In this way, by including that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed consecutively in a specific number of notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special benefit is not given to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be given.

[Appendix F3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a specific number (greater than 0) of gaming balls being entered into the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 entering the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 entering the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F2 to F4, wherein the bonus is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix F6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix F1 to Appendix F5, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1 to F6, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix G1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix G2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, the specific conditions include that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games or more. In this way, by including that no special benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed in a specific number of consecutive notification games or more, even though no special benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special benefit is not given to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a special benefit will be given.

[Appendix G3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number (exceeding 0) of gaming balls or less enters the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 entering the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 entering the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix G5]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G2 to G4, wherein the bonus is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix G6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1 to G5, characterized in that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G6, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
and a reservation means (41) capable of reserving the right to play the notification game (first special game or second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined winning hole (314, 315),
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The gaming machine is,
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a notification game execution means for executing a first notification game (first special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning opening (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning opening (315),
The notification game execution means includes:
A means for displaying a specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) on the display means (341) in succession to a predetermined number of first notification games (first special game games) in the first determination state (normal game state);
and a means (51) for displaying the specific performance image on the display means (341) in a predetermined number of second notification games (second special game games triggered by a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) in the first determination state (normal game state),
The specific performance image is continuously displayed on the display means (341) in the specific first notification game (the first special game executed for the reservation of the first special game after the end of the second special game) executed after the end of the predetermined second notification game (the second special game);
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first notification game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, an image of a chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) can be switched to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of a same-color pattern effect) different from the specific effect image,
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to the special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image will be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to the special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H2]
A bonus awarding means (41) is provided for awarding a bonus to a player when the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the notification game a specific number of times or more,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, characterized in that the specific condition includes that no bonus will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in the notification game more than the specific number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, the specific conditions include that no benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more. In this way, by including that no benefit will be given to the player when the specific performance image is scheduled to be displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more, when the specific performance image continues to be displayed when the specific conditions are not met, it is possible to avoid the specific performance image being displayed consecutively in notification games a specific number of times or more, even though no benefit will be given to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a benefit is not given to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a benefit will be given.

[Appendix H3]
The permissible state of the second winning port (315) includes a first permissible state (short open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is a first time, and a second permissible state (long open) in which the time during which the second winning port is in the permissible state is longer than the first time,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H2, characterized in that the specific condition includes a game ball entering the second winning port (315) that is in the first permissible state (short open) during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific performance image is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H3, the game ball enters the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by having the game ball enter the second winning port which is in the first permissible state in the first notification game in which the specific effect image is displayed, when the specific effect image is continuously displayed by opening the second winning port in the first permissible state, it is possible to avoid the specific effect image being displayed continuously for a predetermined number of notification games or more, even though there is no bonus to be awarded to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to the player, even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H2, characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific number (greater than 0) of gaming balls enters the second winning port (315) that is in the permissible state during the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specific presentation image is displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the game includes a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means. In this way, by including a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 being entered into the second winning port that is in an allowed state in the first notification game in which a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, when the number of second notification games executed in the allowed state triggered by the entry of game balls into the second winning port is a specific number exceeding 0 or less, causing the specific effect image to be continuously displayed, it is avoided that the specific effect image is not granted to the player even though there is no bonus to be granted to the player. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a bonus is not granted to the player even though it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be granted.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H2 to Appendix H4, wherein the bonus is the execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5, the bonus is the execution of a special game. In this way, by the bonus being the execution of a special game, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the special game is not executed even though it is clearly indicated in the notification game that the special game will be executed.

[Appendix H6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the display means (341);
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix H1 to Appendix H5, wherein the specific performance image is an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, because the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the specific effect image has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the specific effect images are being displayed continuously, so that when a specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix I1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, when a specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, the specific suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when a specific effect image is displayed in the second notification game, the specific suggestive information is continuously displayed, so that the player can understand that the specific suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the specific suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. This prevents the player from forgetting that the specific suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to understand in advance that the display of the specific suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the display of the specific suggestive information being resumed after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the specific suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore, a decrease in interest in the game due to the display of the specific suggestive information being resumed is prevented.
[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information without changing it when the specified suggestion information is to be displayed continuously.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed, so that the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is further prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore the decrease in interest in the game due to the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed is further prevented.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I2 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game) executed following the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the appearance displayed in the first notification game (first special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, in the second notification game executed following the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game, allowing the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game, and thus prevents a further decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special chart game) in the second notification game (second special chart game) executed next to the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game. In this way, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game, so that the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, and the player can be made to understand without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine described in Appendices I1 to I4, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) is characterized in that when the specified suggestion information is to be continuously displayed, the specified suggestion information is continuously displayed without changing the display position of the specified suggestion information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is further prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore the decrease in the interest of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is further prevented.

[Appendix I6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I5, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display (display as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the patterns executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix I8]
a first reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a first upper limit number (e.g., four) of rights to play the first notification game (first special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole (314);
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I7, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special chart game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I8, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game when the right to play the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being played in the specific gaming state. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game a number of times that exceeds the number of consecutive occurrences of the predetermined suggestive information that was set before the transition to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, in cases where a bonus is awarded to a player by the predetermined suggestion information being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more, the predetermined suggestion information is prevented from being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more even when there is no bonus to be awarded to the player, thereby preventing a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to a player even when it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix I9]
an allowable frequency control means for switching between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a first frequency and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a second frequency higher than the first frequency;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices I1 to I8, characterized in that the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I9, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to claim 19 or 11, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to appendix I9 to appendix I11, a specific gaming state is generated in at least one of a first frequency state, which is a first frequency at which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a low frequency, and a second frequency state, which is a second frequency at which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a high frequency. In the first frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a low frequency. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated with a low frequency, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a high frequency. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated with a high frequency, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state differs between the first and second frequency states, and the positioning of the specific game state also differs, so that different gameplay characteristics are provided when the specific game state is generated in the first frequency state, which is the first frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a low frequency, and when the specific game state is generated in the second frequency state, which is the second frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a high frequency. This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

[Appendix I12]
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by the suggestion information continuing display means (51);
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I11, comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I12, the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed is different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed. In this way, by having the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state displayed be different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to display the specified suggestion information on the second display means without interfering with the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. This allows both the specific effect image and the specified suggestion information to be reliably and appropriately displayed without interfering with each other's visibility.

[Appendix I13]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I12, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed on the display means (341) as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I13, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix I14]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I13, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I14, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I15]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I14, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I15, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I16]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices I1 to I15, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I16, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix I17]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I16, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I17, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I18]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I17, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I18, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix I19]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices I1 to I18, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I19, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix J1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance related to the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information without changing it when the specified suggestion information is continuously displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. In this way, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed, so that the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is further prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and therefore the decrease in interest in the game due to the display of the predetermined suggestive information being resumed is further prevented.

[Appendix J2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display (display as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the symbols during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the symbols executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 or Appendix J2, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix J4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestion information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J4, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix J5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix J1 to Appendix J4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix J6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1 to J5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix K1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special game or second special game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win by the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game) executed following the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information was displayed, while maintaining the appearance that was displayed in the first notification game (first special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, in the second notification game executed following the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information was displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in the same manner as it was displayed in the first notification game, allowing the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first notification game before the execution of the second notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game, and thus prevents a further decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix K2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display (display as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the patterns executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix K3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K2, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix K4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix K5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix K6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices K1 to K5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix L1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance related to the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specified suggestive information is to be continuously displayed, the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestive information without changing the display position of the specified suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to the appended note L1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is not changed and the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. This further prevents the player from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and allows the player to know in advance that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the end of the second notification game. As a result, the player is more prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second notification game due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and the player's interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is more prevented.

[Appendix L2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix L3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix L1 or Appendix L2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L3, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix L4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L4, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L5, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L6, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix L7]
The gaming machine described in any one of appendices L1 to L6, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix L8]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices L1 to L7, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix M1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix M1, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the patterns during the second notification game, the player can be made to understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, without obstructing the visibility of the changing display of the patterns executed during the second notification game.

[Appendix M2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1, wherein the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continuously displays (displays as a capture image 78) the specified suggestion information in a position adjacent to the variable display area of the pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying predetermined suggestive information in a position adjacent to the pattern change display area during the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern change during the second notification game to more easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This makes it possible for the player to more easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix M3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix M1 or Appendix M2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M3, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix M4]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M3, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M4, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M5, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M6, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix M7]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix M1 to Appendix M6, characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of patterns displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix M8]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices M1 to M7, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix N1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance related to the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
a first reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a first upper limit number (e.g., four) of rights to play the first notification game (first special game) which is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314);
a second reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to a second upper limit number (e.g., four) of rights to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the second upper limit number based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined permissible state (long opening),
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) continues to display the specified suggestion information when the right to execute the first notification game (first special chart game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N1, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. In this way, when the right to play the first notification game triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning port is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, so that when the right to play the first notification game is reserved while the second notification game is being played in the specific gaming state, the predetermined suggestive information is prevented from being displayed for this first notification game. This prevents the predetermined suggestive information from being displayed for the first notification game a number of times that exceeds the number of consecutive occurrences of the predetermined suggestive information that was set before the transition to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, in cases where a bonus is awarded to a player by the predetermined suggestion information being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more, the predetermined suggestion information is prevented from being displayed consecutively in a specific number of first notification games or more even when there is no bonus to be awarded to the player, thereby preventing a situation in which a bonus is not awarded to a player even when it is clearly indicated by the display in the notification game that a bonus will be awarded.

[Appendix N2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix N3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix N1 or Appendix N2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices N1 to N3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices N1 to N4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix N6]
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix N1 to Appendix N5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix N6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix N7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices N1 to N6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix O1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (first special game or second special game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance related to the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
an allowable frequency control means for switching between a first frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a first frequency and a second frequency state in which the frequency at which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is a second frequency higher than the first frequency;
Equipped with
The specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine described in appendix O1, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix O3]
The gaming machine according to claim 01 or 02, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machines according to appendix O1 to appendix O3, a specific gaming state is generated in at least one of a first frequency state, which is a first frequency at which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a low frequency, and a second frequency state, which is a second frequency at which the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a high frequency. In the first frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a low frequency. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated with a low frequency, and the specific gaming state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the second winning port is placed in an allowable state with a high frequency. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the specific gaming state is generated with a high frequency, and the specific gaming state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state differs between the first and second frequency states, and the positioning of the specific game state also differs, so that different gameplay characteristics are provided when the specific game state is generated in the first frequency state, which is the first frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a low frequency, and when the specific game state is generated in the second frequency state, which is the second frequency at which the second winning port is placed in the permissible state at a high frequency. This can increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

[Appendix O4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O4, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix O5]
The gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O5, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O5, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O6, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O6, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O7, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices O1 to O7, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O8, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix O9]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices O1 to O8, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix O9, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix P1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information on the probability of a big win by the first special chart reserved continuous performance related to the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special chart game in which the first special chart reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39, etc.) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed by the suggestion information continuing display means (51);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P1, the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state is displayed is different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed. In this way, by having the first display means on which a specific effect image corresponding to a second notification game executed based on the occurrence of a specific game state displayed be different from the second display means on which the specified suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to display the specified suggestion information on the second display means without impeding the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. This allows both the specific effect image and the specified suggestion information to be reliably and appropriately displayed without impeding visibility of each other.

[Appendix P2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix P1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix P3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix P1 or Appendix P2, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices P1 to P3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices P1 to P4, characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestive information in the first notification game as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices P1 to P5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix P7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices P1 to P6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix P7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix Q1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win by the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays the specified suggestion information in a manner different from that of the first notification game (first special chart game) in the second notification game (second special chart game) which is executed following the first notification game (first special chart game) in which the specified suggestion information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q1, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game. In this way, in the second notification game executed next to the first notification game in which the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first notification game, so that the player can be made to understand in various ways that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the end of the second notification game, and the player can be made to understand without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game.

[Appendix Q2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix Q3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix Q1 or Appendix Q2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices Q1 to Q4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendix Q1 to Appendix Q5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix Q7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices Q1 to Q6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix R1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive information continuing display means (51) continuously displays the specified suggestive information in front of or behind the varyingly displayed pattern during the second notification game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R1, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed in front of or behind the pattern that is being variably displayed in the second notification game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information in front of or behind the pattern that is being variably displayed in the second notification game, it becomes possible for a player who focuses on the pattern variation in the second notification game to easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is being continuously displayed. This allows the player to easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second notification game, and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification game ends.

[Appendix R2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix R3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1 or Appendix R2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1 to R3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1 to R4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix R6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1 to R5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix R6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix R7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices R1 to R6, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix S1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S1, the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is notified by the static display of the variably displayed symbols, and the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of statically displayed symbols, allowing the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix S2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix S1 is characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

Furthermore, if a reduced image of an image displayed as the specified suggestive information in a first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in a second notification game, not only will it be possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends, but it will also be possible for the player to understand the display mode (type) of the specified suggestive information that will be resumed in the first notification game. This more appropriately prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and more appropriately prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information.

[Appendix S3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix S1 or Appendix S2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices S1 to S3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices S1 to S4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S5, a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, by displaying a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, it becomes possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and it becomes possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix S6]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices S1 to S5, characterized in that the specified suggestion information indicates the expectation that the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state. In this way, the specific performance image and the predetermined performance image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will result in a transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether the result of the transition determination will result in a transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix T1]
a transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A predetermined winning hole (314, 315) that satisfies the judgment condition when a game ball enters the winning hole;
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (first special game or second special game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Equipped with
The transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination in a first determination state (normal game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a first probability, or in a second determination state (variable probability game state) in which a probability of determining that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) include a first winning opening (314) and a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314) that can be switched between an allowable state in which the entry of game balls is allowed and a restricted state in which the entry of game balls is restricted;
The notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) includes a first notification game (first special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) and a second notification game (second special symbol game) that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second winning hole (315),
A suggestion information display means (341) for displaying a predetermined suggestion information (information regarding the probability of a big win due to the reserved continuous performance regarding the probability of a big win) in a predetermined first notification game (a first special game in which a reserved continuous performance is executed);
A reservation means (41) capable of reserving up to an upper limit (for example, four) of the right to play the second notification game (second special game) which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315);
a specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning port (315) is in a predetermined permissible state (long open);
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined permissible state (long open), and the second notification game can be continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number,
A specific effect image display means (51) for displaying a specific effect image (an image displayed by a second special effect) corresponding to the second notification game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41);
A suggestion information continuing display means (51) for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information (for example, displaying it as a capture image 78) when the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second notification game (second special chart game);
Equipped with
The predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will result in a transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will transition to a special gaming state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while paying attention to whether the result of the transition determination will transition to a special gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix T2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix T1, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T2, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a reduced image of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix T1 or Appendix T2, characterized in that the suggestion information continuing display means (51) displays an image with a lowered density (e.g., at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T3, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image with a reduced density of the image displayed as the specified suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the specified suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the specified suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the specified suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the specified suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T4]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices T1 to T3, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix T4, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, an image showing the outline of an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices T1 to T4, characterized in that the suggestion information continuation display means (51) displays a text image corresponding to an image displayed as the specified suggestion information in the first notification game, as the specified suggestion information in the second notification game (second special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T5, a text image corresponding to an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game. In this way, a text image corresponding to an image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first notification game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second notification game, making it possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without impeding the visibility of the effects and the changing display of the patterns executed in the second notification game, and making it possible for the player to understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will resume after the second notification ends. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable about the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping the display of the variably displayed symbols,
The gaming machine described in any one of appendices T1 to T5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means during the notification game, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is being displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the predetermined suggestive information will be displayed continuously, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, the period that can be executed after the end of the specified state among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value is greater than a specified period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in the second time-saving game state in response to the result of the jackpot lottery not matching the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in a predetermined state executed by the establishment of a first trigger, a second state with a higher profit than the first state is executed when a specific state is established, while the first state is executed when the specific state is not established. In this way, when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in a predetermined state executed by the establishment of a first trigger, a second state with a higher profit than the first state is executed when a specific state is established, while the first state is executed when the specific state is not established, so that a new gameplay is provided in which the conditions for the execution of a predetermined state by the establishment of the first trigger, the establishment of a second trigger in the predetermined state, and further the establishment of a specific state when the second trigger is established are met. This allows the player to enjoy the game while hoping that the first trigger will occur, and to enjoy the game while noting whether the second trigger will occur in a predetermined state that is executed after the first trigger occurs, and when the second trigger occurs, to enjoy the game while noting whether a specific condition is met, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, an execution period that can be executed is set based on a predetermined specific value that is determined when the second trigger is realized. In this way, by setting an execution period that can be executed based on a predetermined specific value that is determined when the second trigger is realized, the period of the second state is set as a value that depends on the predetermined specific value. Therefore, when the second trigger is realized, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined specific value, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the specific state is a state in which the period during which the specific state can be executed after the end of the execution period in which it can be executed based on a specific specific value at the stage when the specific second trigger is established is a period of at least a specific value during which it can be executed after the end of the specific state. In this way, by the specific state being a state in which the period during which the specific state can be executed after the end of the execution period in which it can be executed based on a specific specific value at the stage when the specific second trigger is established is a period of at least a specific value, the stage at which the specific state can be established and the criteria for the success or failure of the specific state are clarified, making it easier to grasp the stage at which the specific state can be established and the success or failure of the specific state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the specific specific value at the stage when the specific second trigger is established, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix B1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
a state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of the second trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state being a miss for the time-saving pattern) occurring in the specified state (second time-saving game state) is the same throughout the entire specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the probability that the second trigger will occur in a predetermined state is the same throughout the entire predetermined period. In this way, because the probability that the second trigger will occur in a predetermined period of a predetermined state is the same throughout the entire predetermined period, the timing at which the second trigger will occur during the predetermined period is random, and the second trigger can occur throughout the entire predetermined period of the predetermined state. As a result, it can be expected that the second trigger will occur throughout the entire predetermined period of the predetermined state, and the player will not suffer the disadvantage of the second trigger not occurring during part of the predetermined period of the predetermined state, and can enjoy playing throughout the entire predetermined period of the predetermined state.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (time-saving pattern stop is not achieved) during the specified period of the specified state (second time-saving game state), the shorter the remaining period of the specified state (remaining number of time-saving plays) is, the more likely it is that the specific state will be established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is established. In this way, when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is established. This gives a gameplay that increases the expectation that the second state will be executed more likely as the remaining period of the predetermined state becomes shorter (as the end of the predetermined period approaches). This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, and with the expectation that the second trigger will be established as the end of the predetermined period approaches, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 or Appendix B2 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern stop is not reached) in the specified state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is established, the amount of profit (number of time-saving game plays) in the second state (third time-saving game state) differs depending on the remaining period of the specified state (remaining number of time-saving games).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing when the second trigger is met during the predetermined period of the predetermined state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (time-saving pattern stop is not achieved) in the specified state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is established, the shorter the remaining period of the specified state (remaining number of time-saving games), the greater the profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state, which provides a gameplay that makes it easier to receive a high profit in the second state as the remaining period of the predetermined state gets shorter (as the end of the predetermined period draws near). This allows the player to enjoy the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, but with the hope that the second trigger will be met and a high profit will be received in the second state as the end of the predetermined period draws near, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix C1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
The predetermined period is set to be longer than the execution period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the predetermined period is set longer than the execution period. In this way, by setting the predetermined period longer than the execution period, a situation may arise in which, in a predetermined state, a specific state is established when the second trigger is established, and in which the specific state is not established. Therefore, whether or not a specific state is established in a predetermined state is given a gameplay that depends on the timing at which the second trigger is established within the predetermined period from when the predetermined state begins to when it ends. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the timing at which the second trigger is established, while hoping that the second trigger will be established in the predetermined state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C2]
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
The execution period is set in a plurality of types corresponding to the specific value,
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, wherein the specific value determination means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to appended note C2, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established. In this way, by setting the execution period from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period differs depending on the type of the predetermined specific value, and therefore the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is established, it becomes difficult to determine the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the hope that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second trigger is established, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C2, wherein the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods that have different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different profits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different profits when the second state is executed, and the profits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, by focusing on the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is established, the player can grasp the level of profits when the second state is executed. This makes it possible to further increase attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is established, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C3, characterized in that the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability of realizing the specific state when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended note C4, the probability of a specific state being established increases as the profit for the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the probability of a specific state being established increases as the profit for the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. This allows the player to enjoy the game while hoping that an execution period with a high profit for the second state being executed will be set, and the player can enjoy the game while hoping that a specific state will be established when an execution period with a high profit is set, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that the execution period is of one type.

In the gaming machine according to appended note C5, there is one type of execution period. In this way, because there is one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is realized is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to understand whether a specific state has been achieved or not depending on the timing at which the second trigger is achieved in a predetermined state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the hope that the specific state will be achieved while paying attention to the timing at which the second trigger is achieved in a predetermined state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix D1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
A specific timing determination means (41) for determining whether or not it is a specific timing during the specific period in which the specific state is executed;
A performance execution means (51) for executing a predetermined performance in the predetermined state;
Equipped with
The performance execution means (51)
a means for executing a first performance as the predetermined performance from when execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41) until it is determined by the specific timing determination means (41) that it is the specific timing;
a means for executing a second performance different from the first performance as the predetermined performance during the predetermined period after the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing has arrived;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appended note D1, a first effect is executed from the start of execution of a predetermined state until a specific timing in a predetermined period, and a second effect different from the first effect is executed after the specific timing. In this way, by executing a first effect from the start of execution of a predetermined state until a specific timing in a predetermined period, and executing a second effect different from the first effect after the specific timing, the player is prevented from feeling bored or losing interest in the game during the specified period when the predetermined state is executed, and therefore a loss of interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix D2]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix D1, characterized in that during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the profit state granted to the player differs between up to the specific timing and after the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the profit state granted to the player differs between up to the specific timing and after the specific timing. In addition, during the specified period, a first effect is executed until the specific timing, and after the specific timing, a second effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, the player can know that the specific timing has arrived when the specified effect executed during the specified period is switched from the first effect to the second effect. In other words, the player can know that the profit state granted has changed when the first effect is switched to the second effect. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the change in the profit state while paying attention to the switch from the first effect to the second effect during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D2, characterized in that during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the profit state is higher after the specific timing than up to the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D3, during the specified period in which the specified state is executed, the profit state is higher after the specified timing than before the specified timing. In other words, when switching from the first performance to the second performance during the specified period, the profit state is higher when the second performance is executed than when the first performance is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping for a switch to the second performance, which is executed when the profit state is higher than when the first performance is executed during the specified period, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D3, characterized in that the specific timing is a timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state.

In the gaming machine according to appended note D4, the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the specified state. In this way, because the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established, the player can understand, based on the type of the specified effect, that when the first effect is executed in the specified period, the state is the first state, and when the second effect is executed in the specified period, the state is the second state, which is more profitable than the first state. In other words, the player can understand that the first effect is switched to the second effect in the specified period, and that the state has transitioned from the first state to the second state, which is more profitable. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the first effect will be switched to the second effect in the specified period, which further enhances the interest of the game.

[Appendix E1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is
A state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is greater than the predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined second trigger is not established even if it is established from the time when the execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41) until a predetermined timing.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the specific state is not established from the start of the execution of the specific state until the specified timing, even if the specified second trigger is established. In this way, the specific second trigger is not established from the start of the execution of the specific state until the specified timing, even if it is established, so that a situation may occur in which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the specific state, or the specific state is not established. Therefore, whether or not the specific state is established in the specific state is given a gameplay that depends on the timing at which the second trigger is established in the specified period from the start to the end of the specific state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing at which the second trigger is established while hoping that the second trigger will be established in the specific state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E2]
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
A plurality of types of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, wherein the specific value determination means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established. In this way, by setting the execution period from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period differs depending on the type of the predetermined specific value, and therefore the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is established, it becomes difficult to determine the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the hope that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second trigger is established, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2, wherein the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods that have different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different profits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different profits when the second state is executed, and the profits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, by focusing on the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is established, the player can grasp the level of profits when the second state is executed. This makes it possible to further increase attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second trigger is established, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E3, characterized in that the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability of realizing the specific state when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the probability of a specific state being established increases as the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the probability of a specific state being established increases as the profit when the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that an execution period with a high profit when the second state is executed will be set, and the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that a specific state will be established when an execution period with a high profit is set, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix R1, characterized in that the execution period is of one type.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, there is one type of execution period. In this way, because there is one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is realized is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to understand whether a specific state has been achieved or not depending on the timing at which the second trigger is achieved in a predetermined state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the hope that the specific state will be achieved while paying attention to the timing at which the second trigger is achieved in a predetermined state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Appendix F1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is
A state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined state is greater than the predetermined period (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
A plurality of types of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values,
The specific value determination means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established. In this way, by setting the execution period from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value that is set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period differs depending on the type of the predetermined specific value, and therefore the success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is established, it becomes difficult to grasp the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in the hope that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second trigger is established, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1, wherein the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods that have different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F2, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different profits when the second state is executed. In this way, the multiple types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different profits when the second state is executed, and the profits when the second state is executed are set according to the execution period. Therefore, by focusing on the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is realized, the player can grasp the level of profits when the second state is executed. This makes it possible to further increase attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage where the second trigger is realized, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F2, characterized in that the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability of realizing the specific state when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, the probability of a specific state being established increases as the profit for the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. In this way, the probability of a specific state being established increases as the profit for the second state is executed for two or more types of execution periods. This allows the player to enjoy the game while hoping that an execution period with a high profit for the second state being executed will be set, and the player can enjoy the game while hoping that a specific state will be established when an execution period with a high profit is set, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix G1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second trigger (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state being a miss for the time-saving pattern) can occur during the entire period of the specified state (second time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the second trigger can occur during the entirety of the specified period in the specified state. In this way, because the second trigger can occur during the entirety of the specified period in the specified state, the timing at which the second trigger occurs during the specified period becomes random, and the second trigger can occur during the entirety of the specified period in the specified state. As a result, it can be expected that the second trigger will occur during the entirety of the specified period in the specified state, and the player will not suffer the disadvantage of the second trigger not occurring during part of the specified period in the specified state, and can enjoy playing the game during the entirety of the specified period in the specified state.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (time-saving pattern stop is not achieved) during the specified period of the specified state (second time-saving game state), the shorter the remaining period of the specified state (remaining number of time-saving plays) is, the more likely it is that the specific state will be established.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is established. In this way, when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the more likely the specific condition is established. This gives a gameplay that increases the expectation that the second state will be executed more likely as the remaining period of the predetermined state becomes shorter (as the end of the predetermined period approaches). This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, and with the expectation that the second trigger will be established as the end of the predetermined period approaches, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 or Appendix G2 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (time-saving pattern stop is not achieved) in the specified state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is established, the amount of profit (number of time-saving game plays) in the second state (third time-saving game state) differs depending on the remaining period of the specified state (remaining number of time-saving games).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing when the second trigger is met during the predetermined period of the predetermined state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G3 is characterized in that when the second trigger is established (the time-saving pattern stop is not reached) in the specified state (second time-saving game state) and the specific condition is established, the shorter the remaining period (remaining number of time-saving games) in the specified state is, the greater the profit (number of time-saving games) in the second state (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, if a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state, which provides a gameplay that makes it easier to receive a high profit in the second state as the remaining period of the predetermined state gets shorter (as the end of the predetermined period draws near). This allows the player to enjoy the game while feeling anxious about the approaching end of the predetermined period, but with the hope that the second trigger will be met and a high profit will be received in the second state as the end of the predetermined period draws near, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix H1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
The predetermined state execution means (41) executes the predetermined state until the predetermined period expires, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, the predetermined state is executed until the expiration of the predetermined period, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved during the predetermined period. In this way, the predetermined state is executed until the expiration of the predetermined period, regardless of whether the specific state is achieved during the predetermined period, so that the player can enjoy the benefits of the predetermined state for the entirety of the predetermined period.

In addition, by executing the specified state until the expiration of a preset specified period regardless of whether the specified state is established during the specified period, it is possible to provide a game feature that notifies the player of the establishment of the specified state at the expiration of the specified period, for example. In this case, the player can know whether the specified state is established during the specified period during which the specified state is executed at the expiration of the specified period. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while looking forward to the expiration of the specified period in the hope that the specified state has been established during the specified period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, characterized in that the state execution means (41) executes the second state after the specified period has expired if a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the specified state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, if a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period has expired. In this way, if a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period has expired, so that the benefits of the predetermined state can be enjoyed for the entirety of the predetermined period, while the benefits of the second state can be enjoyed again after the predetermined period has expired.

[Appendix I1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a resetting means capable of resetting the profit in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state) when the second trigger is established in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, if the second trigger is established in the second state, the profit in the second state can be reset. In this way, by resetting the profit in the second state if the second trigger is established in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about not receiving any profit when the second trigger is established in the second state, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix I2]
a profit determining means for determining a predetermined profit for the establishment of the second trigger when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state);
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the resetting means resets the profit in the second state to the predetermined profit if the predetermined profit determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened game state) is greater than the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2, when the second trigger is established in the second state, if the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of the second trigger is greater than the profit in the second state at the time of the establishment of the second trigger, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. In this way, when the second trigger is established in the second state, if the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of the second trigger is greater than the profit in the second state at the time of the establishment of the second trigger, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit, so that the profit in the second state is always increased when the profit in the second state is reset due to the establishment of the second trigger. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the second trigger will be established in the second state, and when the second profit is established, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the profit due to the establishment of the second trigger, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In addition, if the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state is greater than the profit when the second trigger occurs in the second state, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit, thereby preventing a decrease in the profit in the second state when the profit in the second state is reset. This prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the resetting of the profit in the second state, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix I3]
The profit determination means determines the predetermined profit as a profit period of the second state (third time-shortened gaming state),
The gaming machine described in Appendix I2, characterized in that the resetting means resets the remaining period of the second state to the profit period determined by the profit determination means when the profit period determined by the profit determination means is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I3, if the profit period of the second state determined when the second trigger is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time of the establishment of the second trigger, the remaining period of the second state is reset to the profit period. In this way, if the profit period of the second state determined when the second trigger is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time of the establishment of the second trigger, the remaining period of the second state is reset to the profit period, so that the profit period is always longer when the profit period in the second state is reset. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the second trigger will be established even in the second state, and when the second profit is established, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the profit period due to the establishment of the second trigger, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, if the benefit period of the second state determined when the second trigger occurs in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state at the time the second trigger occurs, the remaining period of the second state is reset to the benefit period, thereby preventing the benefit period in the second state from being shortened when the benefit period in the second state is reset. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged by the resetting of the benefit period in the second state, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix I4]
a profit determining means for determining a predetermined profit for the establishment of the second trigger when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state);
The gaming machine described in any one of Appendices I1 to I3, characterized in that the resetting means resets the specified profit determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened game state) as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is reset as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized. In this way, the predetermined profit determined when the second trigger is realized in the second state is reset as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state at the time the second trigger is realized, so that the profit in the second state is high or low when the second trigger is realized in the second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined profit when the second trigger is realized and by paying attention to the level of the profit in the second state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix I5]
The profit determination means determines the predetermined profit as a profit period of the second state (third time-shortened gaming state),
The gaming machine described in Appendix I4, characterized in that the resetting means resets the profit period determined by the profit determination means when the second trigger is established in the second state (third time-shortened gaming state) as the remaining period in the second state, regardless of the remaining period in the second state at the time the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, the profit period determined when the second trigger is established in the second state is reset as the profit period in the second state, regardless of the profit period in the second state at the time the second trigger is established. In this way, the profit period determined when the second trigger is established in the second state is reset as the profit period in the second state, regardless of the profit period in the second state at the time the second trigger is established, so that the profit period in the second state is lengthened or shortened when the second trigger is established in the second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the profit period when the second trigger is established and by paying attention to the length of the profit period in the second state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix J1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the number of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state),
a predetermined ball entry means (315) that allows a game ball to enter the ball by opening in a predetermined opening mode selected from a plurality of opening modes (short opening, long opening);
A gaming machine characterized in that the first state (second time-shortened game state) and the second state (third time-shortened game state) have different predetermined opening patterns of the predetermined ball entry means (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, the opening manner of the predetermined ball entry means is different between the first state and the second state. In this way, by the opening manner of the predetermined ball entry means being different between the first state and the second state, when the second trigger is established, the opening manner of the ball entry means is different depending on whether a specific condition is met, i.e., the ease of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means is different depending on whether the specific condition is met. As a result, the profit in the first state and the second state is linked to the ease of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means, i.e., the direct profit for the player obtained by the game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means (e.g., the number of jackpot draws, prize balls), which increases attention and interest in the game, and improves the excitement of the game.

[Appendix J2]
The plurality of opening modes include a first opening mode (short opening) and a second opening mode (long opening) in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first opening mode,
In the first state (second time-saving game state), the predetermined ball entry means (315) is opened in the first opening mode,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1, characterized in that in the second state (third time-saving gaming state), the specified ball entry means (315) is opened in the second opening manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the second state than in the first state. In this way, since it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the second state than in the first state, it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the second state, which is executed when the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is satisfied, and it is harder for the gaming ball to enter the predetermined entry means in the first state, which is executed when the specific condition is not satisfied when the second trigger is satisfied. As a result, the second state provides a gameplay that makes it easier to enjoy the benefits obtained by the gaming ball entering the predetermined entry means compared to the first state, which increases attention and interest in the game and improves the excitement of the game.

[Appendix K1]
a predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (a second time-saving game state) capable of awarding a predetermined benefit for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state being a type 1 jackpot);
A state execution means (41) capable of executing a first state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (a state in which the second time-saving game state is maintained)) or a second state (a state in which the setting of the number of time-saving games is valid (a third time-saving game state)) which is more profitable than the first state;
Equipped with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determination means for determining a specific value (number of time-saving games) when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in the predetermined state (the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a miss for the time-saving pattern);
means for executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means for executing the first state when the second trigger is established and the specific state is not established;
Equipped with
The specific state is a state in which, at the stage when the second trigger is established, among the execution periods that can be executed based on the specific value, the period that can be executed after the end of the specific state is a predetermined period or more (a state in which the number of time-saving games set in response to the result of the big win lottery in the second time-saving game state not being the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
A predetermined ball entry means (315) is provided which is opened in a predetermined opening manner to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized in that in the first state (second time-saving game state) and the second state (third time-saving game state), a predetermined win/loss determination (jackpot lottery) is executed in response to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (315).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, a predetermined win/lose judgment is executed in response to the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined entry means in the first state and the second state. In this way, the predetermined win/lose judgment is executed in response to the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined entry means in the first state and the second state, and this provides gameplay in which the frequency (probability) of the predetermined win/lose judgment being executed and the probability of winning in the predetermined win/lose judgment differ depending on whether or not a specific condition is met when the second trigger is met, i.e., between the first state and the second state. This increases attention and interest in the game, and improves the excitement of the game.

[Appendix K2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1, characterized in that the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of the predetermined win/loss judgment by the win/loss judgment means (41) is a predetermined result (missing the time-saving pattern stop).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2, the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of a predetermined hit/miss determination executed in response to the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means is a predetermined result. In this way, the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of a predetermined hit/miss determination executed in response to the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined ball entry means is a predetermined result, and therefore the establishment of the second trigger and the benefits in the first and second states are determined by the predetermined ball entry means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, the success or failure of the second trigger can be determined and benefits in the first and second states can be awarded by utilizing an existing ball entry means (e.g., a second winning slot) that executes the hit/miss determination, so that new gameplay can be added to the gaming machine without adding any new means.

[Appendix A1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (entry of a game ball into a second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when a period from the end of the variable display to the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display is counted as one game operation, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state is ended when the second gaming operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
A means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
A means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is ended;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value different from the predetermined game value (a transition to a time-saving game state c) when the predetermined variable display time ends after the predetermined second game operation ends and the game state becomes the normal game state;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, when the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends during a specific game state, the specific game state is maintained, and when the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends after the specific second game operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value different from the specific game value that is awarded when the specific lottery result is obtained is awarded. In this way, when the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends during a specific game state, the specific game state is maintained, and when the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends after the specific second game operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value different from the specific game value that is awarded when the specific lottery result is obtained is awarded, thereby providing a game property in which whether or not a specific game value is awarded is determined by the timing of the end of the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first game operation and the variable display of the second game operation can be executed simultaneously, the player can enjoy each second game operation while hoping that a predetermined number of second game operations will end early, and can enjoy the first game operation while paying attention to the timing at which the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result will end, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix B1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (entry of a game ball into a second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when a period from the end of the variable display to the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display is counted as one game operation, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state is ended when the second gaming operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
A means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
A means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is ended;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value different from the predetermined game value (a transition to a time-saving game state c) when the predetermined variable display time ends after the predetermined second game operation ends and the game state becomes the normal game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of specific variable display times are set for the second gaming operation (second special chart game) started by the second gaming means (41) in the specified gaming state (a time-shortened gaming state), and the longer the specific variable display time is, the higher the expectation (jackpot expectation) of the specified lottery result (jackpot) which will award the specified gaming value (execution of a jackpot game) is set.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, a plurality of specific variable display times are set for the second game operation in a specified game state, and the longer the specific variable display time, the higher the expectation of the specified lottery result in which the specified game value is awarded. Incidentally, the longer the specific variable display time, the more disadvantageous it is for the game to enter a normal game state in which a specific game value can be awarded by the end of a specified number of second game operations. In contrast, the longer the specific variable display time, the higher the expectation of the specified lottery result in which the specified game value is awarded. Therefore, in a situation in which the specific variable display time is long and disadvantageous to the player, and interest in the game may decrease, by increasing the expectation of the specified game value being awarded, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game, and rather, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping for a specified lottery result, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (entry of a game ball into a second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when a period from the end of the variable display to the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display is counted as one game operation, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state is ended when the second gaming operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
A means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
A means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is ended;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value different from the predetermined game value (a transition to a time-saving game state c) when the predetermined variable display time ends after the predetermined second game operation ends and the game state becomes the normal game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that whether or not to award the specific gaming value (transition to a time-shortened gaming state c) as the gaming result for the first gaming operation (first special chart game) is determined by referring to predetermined gaming state information (e.g., high probability mode, low probability mode) at the end of the first gaming operation (first special chart game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, whether or not a specific game value is awarded as a game result for the first game operation is determined by referring to the predetermined game state information at the end of the first game operation. However, when the predetermined game state is ended by the end of a predetermined number of second game operations and the normal game state is executed, the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result may end in a predetermined game state or in a normal game state. That is, the game state in which the first game operation started and the game state in which the first game operation ended may be the same or different. Therefore, whether or not a specific game value is awarded as a game result for the first game operation is determined by referring to the predetermined game state information at the end of the first game operation, so that whether or not a specific game value is awarded is determined at a uniform timing, whether or not the game state in which the first game operation started and the game state in which the first game operation ended are the same or different. This makes it easy to determine whether or not to award a specific gaming value as a gaming result for the first gaming action, and improves the reliability of this simple process.

[Appendix D1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (entry of a game ball into a second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when a period from the end of the variable display to the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display is counted as one game operation, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state is ended when the second gaming operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
A means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
A means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is ended;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value different from the predetermined game value (a transition to a time-saving game state c) when the predetermined variable display time ends after the predetermined second game operation ends and the game state becomes the normal game state;
Equipped with
The predetermined gaming value is higher than the specific gaming value.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value. In this way, because the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value, a predetermined game value higher than the specific game value that may be awarded by the execution of a normal game state due to the end of a predetermined second game operation can be awarded before the end of a predetermined second game operation. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of each second game operation while hoping for a predetermined lottery result until the end of the predetermined second game operation. Furthermore, even if the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result, the possibility of the normal game state in which a specific game value may be awarded by the execution of the second game operation is increased. Therefore, in the second game operation, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping for a predetermined lottery result, and even if the lottery result is not the predetermined one, no game value is obtained. Rather, a certain game value can be obtained by repeating the predetermined number of times, even if the game value is lower than the predetermined game value, and therefore a decrease in interest in the game when the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result is reduced.

[Appendix D2]
The predetermined game value is that a special game (jackpot game) having a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than the normal game state and the predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1, characterized in that the specific gaming value increases the chance of the second starting condition being satisfied (the gaming ball entering the second winning port 315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, the predetermined gaming value is to execute a special game having a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than in the normal gaming state and the predetermined gaming state, and the specific gaming value is to increase the chances of the second start condition being established. In this way, the predetermined gaming value is to execute a special game having a higher expected value for the number of game balls acquired than in the normal gaming state and the predetermined gaming state, and the specific gaming value is to increase the chances of the second start condition being established, so that a special game having a high expected value for the number of game balls acquired can be executed before the end of the predetermined second game operation. As a result, until the end of the predetermined second game operation, the player can enjoy the progress of each second game operation while hoping that a special game will be executed based on the predetermined lottery result. Also, even if the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result, the execution of the second game operation increases the possibility of obtaining a gaming value that increases the chances of the second start condition being established. Therefore, in the second game operation, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping for a predetermined lottery result, and even if the lottery result is not the predetermined lottery result, no game value is obtained. Rather, as the second game operation is repeated a predetermined number of times, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping for the possibility of obtaining game value that will eventually increase the chances of the second starting condition being satisfied, and therefore, a decrease in interest in the game when the second game operation does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result is reduced.

[Appendix E1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (entry of a game ball into a second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when a period from the end of the variable display to the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display is counted as one game operation, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state is ended when the second gaming operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
A means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
A means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is ended;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value different from the predetermined game value (a transition to a time-saving game state c) when the predetermined variable display time ends after the predetermined second game operation ends and the game state becomes the normal game state;
A means (51) for notifying the remaining period (number of time-saving games) of the predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) in a predetermined manner (numbers);
A means (51) for informing the remaining period of the second game operation (second special game) in a more emphasized manner (e.g., color, size, pattern, effect, or combination thereof) than the predetermined manner during the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the remaining time of the predetermined gaming state is notified in a predetermined manner, and during the predetermined gaming state, the remaining time of the second gaming operation is notified in a more emphasized manner than in the predetermined manner. In this way, the remaining time of the predetermined gaming state is notified in a predetermined manner, and during the predetermined gaming state, the remaining time of the second gaming operation is notified in a more emphasized manner than in the predetermined manner, making it easier to grasp the numerical value of the remaining time of the first gaming operation. This makes it easier for the player to predict, based on the information obtained from the numerical value of the remaining time of the first gaming operation, whether the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result will end after the end of the specified number of second gaming operations (whether the specified number of second gaming operations can end during the execution of the first gaming operation corresponding to a specific lottery result). Therefore, by focusing on the remaining period of the second game operation, which is notified more emphatically than in a predetermined manner, the player can predict the end timing of the first game operation or the end timing of a predetermined number of second game operations and enjoy the progress of the game, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix F1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (entry of a game ball into a second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when a period from the end of the variable display to the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display is counted as one game operation, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state is ended when the second gaming operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
A means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
A means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is ended;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value different from the predetermined game value (a transition to a time-saving game state c) when the predetermined variable display time ends after the predetermined second game operation ends and the normal game state is entered;
Equipped with
The variable display time of the second game operation (second special game) started during the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) includes a predetermined variable display time longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game operation (first special game) started during the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state),
The second game operation in which the predetermined variable display time is set is characterized in that the expectation (jackpot expectation) of the predetermined lottery result (jackpot) resulting in the predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) being awarded is set high.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the variable display time of the second game operation started during a specified game state includes a predetermined variable display time longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game operation started during the specified game state, and the second game operation for which the predetermined variable display time is set is set to have a high expectation of being a predetermined lottery result for which a specified game value is awarded. However, the longer the specific variable display time, the more disadvantageous it is for a normal game state to be reached in which a specific game value can be awarded upon completion of a specified number of second game operations. In contrast, the second game operation for which a predetermined variable display time longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game operation started during a specified game state is set to have a high expectation of being a predetermined lottery result for which a specified game value is awarded. Therefore, in a situation where a specific variable display time is long and disadvantageous to the player, and interest in the game may decrease, by increasing the expectation of receiving a specified game value, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game, and instead, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping for a specified lottery result, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G1]
A first game means (41) for performing a first game operation (first special game) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game means (41) for performing a second game operation (a second special game) based on the establishment of a second start condition different from the first start condition (entry of a game ball into a second winning hole 315);
Equipped with
A gaming machine in which a variable display is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when a period from the end of the variable display to the end of a predetermined period of notification of the game result of the variable display is counted as one game operation, the first gaming means and the second gaming means are capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
A setting means is provided for setting a variable display time (long-term variable) for a predetermined period of time when the first start condition is established during a predetermined game state (time-saving game state a) which is more advantageous than a normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving symbol stop miss) is obtained,
The second game operation can be completed a predetermined number of times during the variable display time set by the setting means,
The predetermined gaming state is ended when the second gaming operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state execution means (41) for executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game action corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state;
A means for awarding a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game operation during the predetermined variable display time;
A means (41) for ending the predetermined game state and executing the normal game state when a predetermined second game action (a second special game that ends the time-saving game state) that is executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time is ended;
a means (41) capable of granting a specific game value different from the predetermined game value (a transition to a time-saving game state c) when the predetermined variable display time ends after the predetermined second game operation ends and the normal game state is entered;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified game state execution means (41) awards a predetermined game value (for example, execution of a small win game, opening of the second winning port 315 by operating the electric device 315b, displaying a premium image or executing a premium performance, opening of a specific song, etc.) when continuing to execute the specified game state after the first game round operation corresponding to the specific lottery result has ended during the specified game state.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, when the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends during a specific gaming state and the specific gaming state is subsequently executed, a third game value different from the predetermined gaming value and the specific game value is awarded. In this way, when the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result ends during a specific gaming state and the specific gaming state is subsequently executed, a third game value different from the predetermined gaming value and the specific game value is awarded. Therefore, even if the timing of the end of the first game operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is unfavorable to the player, the awarding of the third game value can reduce the decrease in interest in the game caused by this unfavorable result.

[Appendix A1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
A gaming machine comprising:

The gaming machine according to Appendix A1 has a first state in which the light of the light emitting means is visible through the rotating plate of the rotating first rotating means, and a second state in which the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating plate, blocking the light of the light emitting means and making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate. This allows the first and second rotating means to be in two states, the first state and the second state, depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means, and therefore diversifies the presentations executed by the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. For example, in the first state in which the light of the light emitting means is visible through the rotating plate of the rotating first rotating means, a presentation can be executed according to the visible state of the light of the light emitting means as viewed through the rotating plate. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light of the light emitting means visible through the rotating plate, it is possible to execute a performance that gives the player information about the game, for example, a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, and a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the game value to be given to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and further, a performance that clearly indicates or suggests the type of performance to be executed later. Also, in a second state in which the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate and blocks the light of the light emitting means, making the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate, a performance according to the visibility of the second rotating means visible through the rotating plate can be executed. Specifically, depending on the visibility of the light seen through the rotating plate of the first rotating means, it is possible to execute a presentation that gives the player information about the game, for example, a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, and a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the game value that will be granted to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and further, a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the type of presentation that will be executed later. In this way, by having a first state and a second state, the presentations executed by the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means are diversified, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, wherein at least a portion of the rotating plate portion (370) is translucent.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, at least a portion of the rotating plate portion is translucent. In this way, by having at least a portion of the rotating plate portion be translucent, a first state can be realized in which the light of the light emitting means is visible through the translucent portion, while a second state can be realized in which the first rotating means is visible through the translucent portion.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, wherein the rotating plate portion (370) is entirely translucent.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A3, the entire rotating plate portion is translucent. In this way, the entire rotating plate portion is translucent, which makes it easier to form the rotating plate portion compared to forming only a portion of the rotating plate portion as translucent.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A2, wherein the rotating plate portion (370) has a translucent area having a higher translucency than other areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the rotating plate has a translucent area with higher translucency than other areas. In this way, the rotating plate has a translucent area with higher translucency than other areas, so that the translucent area can be set as an area where the light of the light emitting means is visible in the first state, and an area where the second rotating means is visible in the second state. This makes it clear that the area to which the player should pay attention in the performance executed in the first state and the second state is the translucent area. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by focusing on the translucent area when the performance is executed in the first state and the second state. In addition, when a part of the rotating plate is a translucent area, it is also possible to make the part other than the translucent area a non-translucent area, so that it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the rotating plate.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4, wherein the translucent area is a magnifying lens.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the translucent region is a magnifying lens. In this way, the translucent region is a magnifying lens, so that it is possible to emphasize and display the light of the light emitting means visible through the rotating plate portion and the information about the game provided by the second rotating means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information about the game provided in the first state and the second state, making it easier for the player to enjoy the presentation executed in the first state and the second state.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4, wherein the translucent area is a through hole.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the translucent region is a through hole. In this way, the translucent region is a through hole, which makes it easy to form the translucent region. For example, when the rotating plate portion is formed by resin molding, the translucent region can be formed without complicating the shape of the mold used for molding, and the translucent region can be formed without employing a technique such as insert molding.

[Appendix B1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
having
The first rotating means (37) is rotatable at a predetermined position,
the second rotating means (38L, 38R) is capable of moving toward and away from the first rotating means (37) which rotates at the predetermined position;
The first state can be realized when the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves away from the predetermined position,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the second state can be realized when the second rotation means (38L, 38R) approaches the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the first state can be realized by moving the second rotation means away from the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position, and the second state can be realized by moving the second rotation means close to the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position. In this way, the first state can be realized by moving the second rotation means away from the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position, and the second state can be realized by moving the second rotation means close to the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position, so that the first state and the second state can be realized by simple control of moving the second rotation means close to and away from the first rotation means rotating at a predetermined position.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the first rotation means rotates at a predetermined position, the player can understand the timing when the first state will be reached and the timing when the second state will be reached by focusing on the second rotation means. This allows the player to understand the timing when the presentation is executed in the first state and the timing when the presentation is executed in the second state. In other words, by clarifying the timing to pay attention to in the game, the presentation executed in the first state and the second state can be easily and reliably enjoyed.

[Appendix C1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
having
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of second rotation means (38L, 38R) capable of realizing the second state.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C1 is provided with a plurality of second rotation means capable of realizing the second state. In this way, by providing a plurality of second rotation means capable of realizing the second state, it becomes possible to realize the second state by each of the plurality of second rotation means. This makes it possible to execute a variety of presentations based on the visual appearance of the second state realized by each of the plurality of second rotation means.

[Appendix C2]
The plurality of second rotation means (38L, 38R) include a specific second rotation means (38L) and a predetermined second rotation means (38R) different from the specific second rotation means (38L),
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that a first visual appearance of the specific second rotation means (38L) viewed through the rotating plate portion (370) when the specific second rotation means (38L) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) as it rotates and is brought into the second state is different from a second visual appearance of the specific second rotation means (38R) viewed through the rotating plate portion (370) when the specific second rotation means (38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) as it rotates and is brought into the second state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the first viewing mode of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate unit when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state is different from the second viewing mode of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate unit when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state. In this way, the first viewing mode of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate unit when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state is different from the second viewing mode of the specific second rotation means viewed through the rotating plate unit when the specific second rotation means is brought into the second state. This makes it possible to execute a variety of effects based on the first viewing mode and the second viewing mode in the second state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix C3]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix C1, characterized in that in the first viewing mode, first information regarding a game is provided, and in the second viewing mode, second information regarding a game different from the first information is provided.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C3, first information about the game is provided in the first viewing mode, and second information different from the first information about the game is provided in the second viewing mode. In this way, by providing first information about the game in the first viewing mode and providing second information different from the first information about the game in the second viewing mode, the player can obtain information that is viewed according to the type of the second rotation means in the second state. This allows the player to enjoy the progress of the game based on the information about the game provided from the viewing mode of the second rotation means, while focusing on the type of the second rotation means that is in the second state.

[Appendix D1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
having
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second rotation means (38L, 38R) is capable of moving along a plurality of different paths.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the second rotation means is capable of moving along a number of different paths. In this way, since the second rotation means is capable of moving along a number of different paths, it is possible to execute a presentation according to the type of movement path of the second rotation means, making it possible to diversify the presentation.

[Appendix E1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
having
A means (41) for executing a notification game (special game) for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a first switching means (51) capable of switching the rotating plate portion (370) between the predetermined rotating state and the predetermined stopped state when a predetermined opportunity (a jackpot lottery result) occurs in the notification game;
a second switching means (51) for moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear side of the rotating plate portion (370) when a specific opportunity (a jackpot lottery result is a jackpot) is established in the notification game, and for switching from the first state to the second state;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, in a notification game in which the result of the judgment by the judgment means as to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied is notified, the rotating plate part is switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is established, and the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate part when a specific trigger is established, thereby making it possible to switch from the first state to the second state. In this way, in a notification game in which the result of the judgment by the judgment means as to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied is notified, the rotating plate part is switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined trigger is established, and the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate part when a specific trigger is established, thereby making it possible to switch from the first state to the second state by moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate part. Therefore, the first state and the second state can be two modes depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means, and the performances executed in the notification game are diversified depending on the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. For example, in a notification game, in at least one of the first and second states, it is possible to execute a presentation that gives the player information about the game, for example, a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, and it is also possible to execute a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the game value that will be granted to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and further, it is possible to execute a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the type of presentation that will be executed later. In this way, by realizing the first and second states in a notification game, the presentations executed by the operation of the first rotation means and the second rotation means are diversified, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix F1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
having
a means (41) for executing a special game advantageous to a player when the determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied;
a first switching means (51) capable of switching the rotating plate portion (370) between the predetermined rotating state and the predetermined stopped state when a predetermined opportunity (a jackpot lottery result) occurs in the special game;
a second switching means (51) for moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear side of the rotating plate portion (370) when a specific opportunity (a big win lottery result) is established in the special game, and for switching from the first state to the second state;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, in a special game advantageous to a player that is executed when the judgment means judges that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating plate part is switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined opportunity is established, and the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate part when a specific opportunity is established, thereby making it possible to switch from the first state to the second state. In this way, in a special game advantageous to a player that is executed when the judgment means judges that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating plate part is switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined opportunity is established, and the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate part when a specific opportunity is established, thereby making it possible to switch from the first state to the second state by moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate part, and therefore the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means can result in two modes, the first state and the second state, and therefore the performance executed in the special game is diversified by the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. For example, in a special game, in at least one of the first and second states, it is possible to execute a presentation that gives the player information about the game, for example, a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition, and it is also possible to execute a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the game value that will be granted to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and further, it is possible to execute a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests the type of presentation that will be executed later. In this way, by realizing the first and second states in a special game, the presentations executed by the operation of the first rotation means and the second rotation means are diversified, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix G1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
having
The gaming machine is characterized in that the rotating plate portion (370) begins to rotate when a member (38L, 38R) other than the first rotating means (37) interferes with the first rotating means (37).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, the rotation of the rotating plate section is started when a member other than the first rotating means interferes with the first rotating means. In this way, the rotation of the rotating plate section is started when a member other than the first rotating means interferes with the first rotating means, so that the player can grasp the timing at which the rotation of the rotating plate section will start. This allows the player to grasp the timing at which the second state can be reached, that is, the timing at which the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate section, by focusing on the movement of the first rotating means and the member that can interfere with the first rotating means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the first rotating means and the member that can interfere with the first rotating means, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1, wherein a member capable of interfering with the first rotating means (37) is the second rotating means (38L, 38R).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G2, the member that may interfere with the first rotation means is the second rotation means. In this way, because the member that may interfere with the first rotation means is the second rotation means, the player can focus on the movements of the first rotation means and the second rotation means and grasp the timing when the second state may occur, i.e., the timing when the second rotation means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the first rotation means and the second rotation means, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 or Appendix G2, wherein the member that can interfere with the first rotating means (37) is a gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G3, the member that may interfere with the first rotating means is the gaming ball. In this way, because the member that may interfere with the first rotating means is the gaming ball, the player can grasp the timing when the second state may occur, that is, the timing when the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion, by focusing on the movement of the first rotating means and the gaming ball. Therefore, the interest in the game is increased because the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the first rotating means and the gaming ball.

[Appendix H1]
A light emitting means (341) visible when viewed from the front of the game board (31);
An information acquisition means (41) for acquiring special information (jackpot random number) when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters the winning hole 314, 315);
A determination means (41) for determining whether the acquired special information (jackpot random number) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether the special information is a jackpot random number for executing a jackpot game);
A first rotating means (37);
A second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means (37) includes a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable about a rotation axis (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to be able to visually recognize the light of the light emitting means (341) located on the back side, and is configured to be able to switch between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) is configured to be rotatable, and is displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370) and a second position that is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the game board (31) is viewed from the front,
This gaming machine is
a first state in which light from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position is visible through the rotating plate portion (370) in a predetermined game state;
a second state in which the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) so that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) blocks the light of the light emitting means (341) at the specific position, and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) becomes visible through the rotating plate portion (370); and
having
A gaming machine characterized in that, depending on the positional relationship between the first rotation means (37) and the second rotation means (38L, 38R), an advantageous first mode (e.g., notification mode A) and a second mode (e.g., notification mode D) less advantageous than the first mode can be generated.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, depending on the positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means, it is possible to generate an advantageous first mode and a second mode less favorable than the first mode. In this way, depending on the positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means, it is possible to generate an advantageous first mode and a second mode less favorable than the first mode, so that the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are operated. In other words, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the first rotation means and the second rotation means will be in the positional relationship that is the advantageous first mode when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are operated, which increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, wherein the first aspect and the second aspect can occur in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2, the first mode and the second mode can occur in the second state. In this way, since the first mode and the second mode can occur in the second state, when the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while hoping that the first rotating means and the second rotating means will be in a positional relationship that is the advantageous first mode, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

10: gaming machine 31: gaming board 314: first winning port 315: second winning port 316: variable winning ports 317L, 317R: through gate 341: symbol display unit 4: main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Voice and lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area on a front side;
A predetermined decorative means is visible when the game board is viewed from the front and is provided at a specific position corresponding to the game board ;
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is satisfied based on a predetermined game performed by a player ;
A determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A first rotating means ;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first rotating means includes:
The game machine includes at least a rotation shaft portion provided in a direction intersecting the game board, and a rotation plate portion rotatable around the rotation shaft portion ,
The rotating plate portion is
A visual confirmation section is provided that allows a specific area that is a part of the predetermined decorative means located on the back side to be visually confirmed when the game board is viewed from the front ,
When a predetermined trigger occurs based on the predetermined game by the player, the reel may be switched from a predetermined stopped state to a predetermined rotating state .
This gaming machine is
A second rotating means that is movable in the play area and rotatable in a predetermined manner in a front view of the game board is configured to be displaceable between a first position that is visible without passing through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion and a second position that is visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion;
a first state in which the specific area of the predetermined decorative means is visible through the viewing portion of the rotating plate portion in the execution state of the predetermined game ;
The second rotating means is configured to move to the back side of the rotating plate portion and displace to the second position , so that a predetermined area of the second rotating means becomes visible through the visible portion of the rotating plate portion , and a second state is created in which an area of the specific area of the predetermined decorative means that is blocked by the second rotating means becomes invisible ;
When the second rotating means moves while rotating toward the back side of the rotating plate portion, the rotation direction of the second rotating means can be changed during the movement toward the back side of the rotating plate portion,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable without moving at a predetermined position,
the second rotation means is configured to be capable of approaching or moving away from the first rotation means which rotates at the predetermined position;
the first state is realizable when the second rotating means is away from the predetermined position;
the second state is configured to be attainable when the second rotation means approaches the predetermined position;
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of the second rotation means are each configured to be able to move individually to the back side of the rotating plate portion, and a plurality of the second rotation means that have moved to the back side of the rotating plate portion are each configured to be able to individually realize the second state .